You are on page 1of 562

3900 Series Multimode Base Station

V100R011C10

Mode Transition Guide

Issue

01

Date

2015-12-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2016. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address:

Huawei Industrial Base


Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

support@huawei.com

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Contents

Contents
1 Overview...................................................................................... 1
1.1 About This Document.....................................................................................................................................................1
1.2 Prerequisites...................................................................................................................................................................1

2 Mode Transition............................................................................2
3 Planning Mode Transition..............................................................5
3.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................................................5
3.2 RF Planning....................................................................................................................................................................6
3.2.1 Overall RF Planning Process.......................................................................................................................................6
3.2.2 Adding an RF Module.................................................................................................................................................7
3.2.3 Reusing the Original Multiband Module...................................................................................................................12
3.2.4 Applying SDR to the Original RF Module................................................................................................................15
3.2.5 Adding a Module to the Original SDR Module.........................................................................................................20
3.2.6 Replacing the Original Module with a New SDR Module........................................................................................26
3.3 Antenna and Feeder Networking..................................................................................................................................32
3.3.1 Overall Antenna and Feeder Planning Process..........................................................................................................32
3.3.2 Adding an Independent Antenna (Antenna Port) and an Independent Feeder..........................................................33
3.3.3 Adding an Independent Antenna (Antenna Port) and Sharing the Original Feeder..................................................44
3.3.4 Broadband Antenna (Antenna Port) Being Shared By the Original Mode and New Mode......................................55
3.3.5 SDR RF Module of the New Mode Using the Original Feeder................................................................................58
3.4 Co-MPT or Separate-MPT Planning............................................................................................................................59
3.4.1 Overall Co-MPT or Separate-MPT Planning Process...............................................................................................59
3.4.2 Adding a Main Control Board of the New Mode to the Original BBU....................................................................61
3.4.3 Adding a new BBU and a Main Control Board of the New Mode............................................................................65
3.4.4 Adding a New Mode to the Co-MPT Base Station...................................................................................................67
3.4.5 Co-MPT Reconstruction and Adding a New Mode to the Co-MPT Base Station....................................................69
3.5 BBU Interconnection....................................................................................................................................................87
3.5.1 Overall BBU Interconnection Planning Process.......................................................................................................87
3.5.2 Adding a BBU for BBU Interconnection Through UCIU+UMPT...........................................................................89
3.5.3 Adding a BBU for BBU Interconnection Through UMPT+UMPT..........................................................................93
3.6 Clock Planning.............................................................................................................................................................96
3.6.1 Overall Clock Planning Process................................................................................................................................96
3.6.2 New Mode Using an Independent Reference Clock with Separate-MPT Configuration..........................................98
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Contents

3.6.3 New Mode and Original Mode Sharing Reference Clock with Separate-MPT Configuration.................................99
3.6.4 New Mode Requiring Modification to the Clock Source with Co-MPT Configuration.........................................100
3.7 Baseband Planning.....................................................................................................................................................102
3.7.1 Overall Baseband Planning Process........................................................................................................................103
3.7.2 Adding an Independent Baseband Board to the New Mode with Separate-MPT Configuration............................104
3.7.3 Adding an Independent Baseband Processing Board to the New Mode with Co-MPT Configuration...................106
3.7.4 Adding a New Mode to the Original Baseband Processing Board with Co-MPT Configuration...........................108
3.8 CPRI-based Topology Planning.................................................................................................................................110
3.8.1 Overall CPRI-based Topology Planning.................................................................................................................110
3.8.2 Chain Topology for RF Modules.............................................................................................................................111
3.8.3 Dual-Star Topology (Load Sharing) for SDR RF Modules.....................................................................................114
3.8.4 CPRI MUX for SDR RF Modules...........................................................................................................................118
3.9 Transmission Networking Planning...........................................................................................................................121
3.9.1 Transmission Networking Planning Process...........................................................................................................122
3.9.2 New Mode Using Independent Transmission with Separate-MPT Configuration..................................................124
3.9.3 New Mode Using the Transmission Port Provided by the Original Mode with Separate-MPT Configuration......126
3.9.4 New Mode Providing a Transmission Port Shared by the Original Mode with Separate-MPT Configuration......128
3.9.5 Co-Transmission for New and Original Modes with co-MPT Configuration.........................................................131
3.10 Equipment Auxiliary Planning.................................................................................................................................134
3.11 Summary of Mode Transition Planning....................................................................................................................140
3.11.1 License File Requirement......................................................................................................................................140
3.11.2 NE Software Version Requirement........................................................................................................................154
3.11.3 Board and Cable Installation Requirement............................................................................................................154
3.11.4 Data Configuration Requirement...........................................................................................................................157
3.11.5 Tool Requirements for Co-MPT Reconstruction...................................................................................................163

4 Mode Transition Examples.........................................................164


4.1 Example: Mode Transition from GU to GU+L (UCIU+UMPT)...............................................................................164
4.2 Example: Mode Transition from GO to GL...............................................................................................................177
4.3 Example: Mode Transition from GO to GU...............................................................................................................191
4.4 Example: Mode Transition from UO to UL...............................................................................................................200
4.5 Example: Mode Transition from GU to GU (CPRI MUX)+L (BBU Interconnection, Inter-BBU Triple-Mode SDR)
..........................................................................................................................................................................................207
4.6 Example: Mode Transition from GO to G*L.............................................................................................................221
4.7 Example: Mode Transition from UO to G*U.............................................................................................................229
4.8 Example: Mode Transition from GU to G[U*L]........................................................................................................238
4.9 Example: Mode Transition from GU to GU+L (UMPT+UMPT, BBU Interconnection)..........................................247
4.10 Example: Mode Transition from GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) to GU+LT (UCIU+UMPT)............................................258
4.11 Example: Mode Transition from LO to G*L CPRI Load Sharing4.8, 4.9...............................................................266
4.12 Example: Mode Transition from G*U to G*U*L (Outdoor BBU)..........................................................................273
4.13 Example: Mode Transition from LO (FDD) to LO (FDD+TDD)............................................................................282
4.14 Example: Mode Transition from LO (TDD) to LO (FDD+TDD)............................................................................288

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Contents

5 Mode Transition Implementation................................................292


5.1 Policies.......................................................................................................................................................................292
5.2 Procedure for Implementing Mode Transition...........................................................................................................293

6 Upgrading Base Station Software...............................................294


6.1 Recording Base Station Status Before Mode Transition............................................................................................294
6.2 Upgrading Base Station Software..............................................................................................................................295
6.3 Upgrading Software of Base Stations in the Co-MPT Reconstruction Scenario.......................................................295

7 Preparing Data.......................................................................... 296


7.1 Adding a BBU Interconnection Link on the GSM Side (UCIU)................................................................................296
7.2 Synchronizing Data Configuration.............................................................................................................................297
7.3 Preparing Data for Co-MPT Reconstruction..............................................................................................................301
7.4 Configuring GSM Data..............................................................................................................................................301
7.4.1 Preparing Equipment Data......................................................................................................................................302
7.4.1.1 Adjusting RF Data (GBTS)..................................................................................................................................303
7.4.1.2 Adjusting Equipment Data in Co-MPT Scenarios................................................................................................303
7.4.2 Preparing Transmission Data...................................................................................................................................303
7.4.2.1 Adjusting GBTS Data...........................................................................................................................................303
7.4.2.2 Adjusting Co-MPT Data.......................................................................................................................................304
7.4.3 Preparing Radio Data..............................................................................................................................................304
7.4.3.1 Adjusting GBTS Data...........................................................................................................................................304
7.4.3.2 Adjusting Co-MPT Data.......................................................................................................................................305
7.4.4 Preparing Transmission, Equipment, and Radio Adjustment Data (Co-MPT).......................................................305
7.5 Configuring UMTS Data............................................................................................................................................306
7.5.1 Preparing Equipment Data......................................................................................................................................307
7.5.1.1 Separate-MPT.......................................................................................................................................................307
7.5.1.2 Co-MPT................................................................................................................................................................307
7.5.2 Preparing Transmission Data...................................................................................................................................308
7.5.2.1 Separate-MPT.......................................................................................................................................................308
7.5.2.2 Co-MPT................................................................................................................................................................308
7.5.3 Preparing Radio Data..............................................................................................................................................309
7.5.3.1 Separate-MPT.......................................................................................................................................................309
7.5.3.2 Co-MPT................................................................................................................................................................309
7.5.4 Adjusting Transmission, Device, and Radio Data...................................................................................................309
7.5.4.1 Separate-MPT.......................................................................................................................................................310
7.5.4.2 Co-MPT................................................................................................................................................................310
7.6 Configuring LTE Data................................................................................................................................................311
7.6.1 Preparing Equipment Data......................................................................................................................................312
7.6.1.1 Separate-MPT.......................................................................................................................................................312
7.6.1.2 Co-MPT................................................................................................................................................................312
7.6.2 Preparing Transmission Data...................................................................................................................................313
7.6.2.1 Separate-MPT.......................................................................................................................................................313
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Contents

7.6.2.2 Co-MPT................................................................................................................................................................313
7.6.3 Preparing Radio Data..............................................................................................................................................313
7.6.3.1 Separate-MPT.......................................................................................................................................................313
7.6.3.2 Co-MPT................................................................................................................................................................314
7.6.4 Adjusting Transmission, Equipment, Radio Data (LTE Only)................................................................................314
7.6.4.1 Separate-MPT.......................................................................................................................................................315
7.6.4.2 Co-MPT................................................................................................................................................................315
7.6.5 Adjusting Transmission, Equipment, Radio Data (FDD+TDD).............................................................................315
7.7 Binding Base Station Multimode Relationships.........................................................................................................317
7.8 Checking MBTS Data Consistency............................................................................................................................318
7.9 Checking Data Preparations.......................................................................................................................................318

8 Setting NE Maintenance mode...................................................319


9 Adjusting Hardware...................................................................322
9.1 Adjusting Equipment..................................................................................................................................................322
9.2 Adjusting Feeders.......................................................................................................................................................323
9.3 Adjusting Transmission Cables..................................................................................................................................323

10 Activating Configuration Data and Commissioning.....................324


10.1 Activating Data in Incremental Scripts.....................................................................................................................324
10.2 Base Station Deployment by PnP.............................................................................................................................325
10.3 Base Station Deployment by USB...........................................................................................................................325
10.4 PnP-based Co-MPT Reconstruction.........................................................................................................................325

11 Ending Maintenance Mode for NEs............................................326


12 Appendix for Co-MPT Reconstruction........................................327
12.1 Paths for Saving Converted Data.............................................................................................................................327
12.2 Preparing GSM Licenses..........................................................................................................................................328
12.3 What Should I Do If an Error Prompting "Data Preparation failed" Occurs During the Execution of a PnP Task?333
12.4 How Can I Roll Back Base Stations When Co-MPT Reconstruction Fails?...........................................................333
12.5 Constraints and Limitations......................................................................................................................................335
12.6 Description about Co-MPT Data Conversion..........................................................................................................340
12.6.1 Application Scenarios and Restrictions of the MBSC Reconstruction Module....................................................341
12.6.2 Application Scenarios and Restrictions of the GBTS Reconstruction Module.....................................................342
12.6.3 Application Scenarios and Restrictions of the SRAN Reconstruction Module....................................................343
12.7 Co-MPT Reconstruction Scenarios..........................................................................................................................344
12.7.1 GSM Co-MPT Reconstruction Scenario...............................................................................................................345
12.7.2 UMTS Co-MPT Reconstruction Scenario.............................................................................................................346
12.7.3 LTE Co-MPT Reconstruction Scenario.................................................................................................................346
12.7.4 GSM and UMTS Co-MPT Reconstruction Scenario............................................................................................347
12.7.5 GSM and LTE Co-MPT Reconstruction Scenario................................................................................................349
12.7.6 UMTS and LTE Co-MPT Reconstruction Scenario..............................................................................................352
12.7.7 G&[U*L] or U&[G*L]/L&[G*U] Reconstruction Scenario................................................................................354
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Contents

12.7.8 GU+L Co-MPT Reconstruction Scenario.............................................................................................................356


12.7.9 GL+U Co-MPT Reconstruction Scenario.............................................................................................................359
12.7.10 G&[U*L]+[U*L] Reconstruction Scenario.........................................................................................................364
12.7.11 Two BBUs Combined into One Co-MPT Reconstruction...................................................................................366

13 Examples for Co-MPT Reconstruction and Mode Transition.........371

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

vi

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

1 Overview

Overview

1.1 About This Document


This document provides mode transition guidance for a base station. It mainly describes
operations during the mode transition to guide site engineers to plan and implement mode
transmission. Some operations involved in this document, such as software upgrade, data
configuration by using the Configuration Management Express (CME), and engineering
quality check, are not detailed here because they have been described in the procedures of
new site deployment and routine maintenance. Instead, this document only provides reference
information for these operations.

1.2 Prerequisites
None.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

2 Mode Transition

Mode Transition

Figure 1.1 Mode transition procedure

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

2 Mode Transition

The following table describes procedures in the mode transition process.


Table 1.1 Procedure for mode transition of multimode base stations
Phase

Item

Operation

Preparation

Planning mode transition

1. Make a data plan before


and after transition on
power consumption after
mode transition, type and
number of each board,
cable connections,
transmission scheme,
CPRI topology, and
reference clock.
2. Use the cabling tool on
the CME to analyze the
radio frequency (RF)
modules, slots, and CPRI
connections.
3. Prepare hardware.
4. Prepare software and
license files.
5. Use the CME to make a
data configuration file
required after mode
transition.

Implementation

Upgrading software

Skip this step if the base


station uses the software of
the target version.

Recording related
information

Record the active alarms,


cell status, service KPIs for
comparison before and after
mode transition.

Configuring data for coMPT reconstruction

An optional operation. In the


transition from a singlemode base station to a coMPT multimode base
station, co-MPT
reconstruction must be
firstly performed.
Use the CME to perform
data conversion for co-MPT
reconstruction according to
the data plan.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Configuring data for


capacity expansion or mode
addition

Configure data for capacity


expansion or mode addition
using the CME according to
the data plan.

Adjusting hardware

Perform these two

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Phase

Verification

2 Mode Transition

Item

Operation

Activating configuration
data

operations in parallel to
shorten the service
interruption duration.

Commissioning base
stations

For the mode that has not


been deployed before the
mode transition, you are
advised to commission a
new mode as a newly
deployed base station
because the commissioning
methods are the same.
For the mode that has been
deployed before the mode
transition, commission the
mode in either of the
following ways:

Outputting engineering
reports

Checking engineering
quality and conduct a
dialing test if no major
changes are made to the
main control board and
transmission scheme.

Commissioning the mode


as a newly deployed base
station if major changes
are made to the main
control board or
transmission scheme

Summarize the reparenting


and make engineering
reports.

The NEP-SD tool can be used to analyze mode transition planning and design and prepare
configuration data. For details, see NEP-SD-Based Wireless Base Station Design Guidelines.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Planning Mode Transition

This section describes the mode transition planning in terms of the radio frequency (RF),
antenna and feeder networking, co-MPT or separate-MPT, BBU interconnection, clock,
baseband, CPRI-based topologies, transmission, and equipment auxiliary.

3.1 Introduction
The base station system mainly consists of subsystems and other items shown in the following
figure: antennas, radio frequency (RF), CPRI cables, and others.
The following sections will cover planning operations for all these items and mode transition
requirements for the material, version, and others.

The following figure describes the constraints of these subsystems and other items on each
other.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Solid lines with arrows indicate the dependent objects and dotted lines with arrows point to
further information of specific objects.
Figure 1.1 Constraints of the subsystems and other items on each other

3.2 RF Planning
This section describes RF planning.

3.2.1 Overall RF Planning Process


Figure 1.1 RF planning process

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

The overall process of RF module planning is as follows:

Check whether to add a new frequency band or perform refarming.

This is determined based on the network planning.

Check whether the original multiband module supports the new frequency band.

This is determined based on the module type and specifications.


You can determine whether the module supports the required new frequency band based on
the value of Frequency band in the RF module sheet in SingleRAN Multi-mode BTS Product
Specification.

Check whether the original multiband module supports the specifications after mode
transition.

This is determined based on the following items that have been planned by the customer:
mode, number of TRXs, power, TRX frequency, and numbers of RX and TX channels.
For details, see the RF module and RF Configuration & Output power sheets in
SingleRAN Multi-mode BTS Product Specification.

Check whether the original multiband module supports the specifications after
refarming.

This is determined based on the following items that have been planned by the customer:
mode, number of TRXs, power, TRX frequency, and numbers of RX and TX channels.
For details, see the RF module and RF Configuration & Output power sheets in
SingleRAN Multi-mode BTS Product Specification.
Table 1.1 Scenario analysis
Categor
y

New
Band/Refa
rming

Scenario

RF module

New band

Adding an RF Module
Reusing the Original MultiBand Module

Refarming

Applying SDR to the Original RF Module


Adding a Module to the Original SDR Module
Replacing the Original Module with a New SDR Module

3.2.2 Adding an RF Module


1. Module selection
The following items shall be taken into consideration for selecting an RF module:
Mode, frequency band, number of TRXs, power, TRX frequencies, and numbers of RX and
TX channels that have been planned by the customer.
For details about the selection, see GUL Base Station Overview and Selection Guide.
2. Precautions (hardware)
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Pay attention to the following items:

Mapping relationship between the added module and cabinet

Requirements for power supply or power distribution

3. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement (hardware)

Material Type

Material Name

Quantity

Remarks

RF module

RRU and RFU

See
SRAN&GBSS&RAN
&eRAN BTS3900
Configuration
Manual.

CPRI high-speed
cable
CPRI fiber optic
cable

For the RFU


For the RRU

Optical module

For the RRU

RRU power cable

For the RRU

RF interconnection
cable

Required by the
GSM, multimode,
and UMTS RF
modules

Software version requirement

For the mapping relationship between the RF modules and versions, see 3900 Series Base
Station Software and Hardware Compatibility Description.

License requirement

To support the new mode, the hardware license of this mode must be purchased for the new
RF module, such as the power license and TRX license. The way of purchasing such a license
is the same as that for a single-mode RF module, and therefore details are not described here.
For a multiband RF module (except the RRU3961), one multimode multiband license is
required for each frequency band of each mode (GSM, UMTS, or LTE).
License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevia
tion

Sales
Unit

Mode

First Mode
First Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(UMTS)

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(UMTS)
(Per Band
per RRU)

82205398

LQW9RFB
AND01

Per band

Multi-Mode

Multi-Mode

82205398

LQW9RFB

Per band

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

License
BBOM

Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(UMTS)

Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(UMTS)
(Per Band
per RRU)

First Mode
First Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(LTE FDD)

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(LTE FDD)
(Per Band
per RRU)

82205382

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(LTE FDD)

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(LTE FDD)
(Per Band
per RRU)

82205382

License
Abbrevia
tion

Sales
Unit

Mode

LLT1MML
MBRM01

Per band

LLT1MML
MBRM01

Per band

AND01

For the RRU3961, the RF 800 MHz/900 MHz multiband license must be purchased if the
RRU3961 works on both the 800 MHz and 900 MHz frequency bands.
License Control
Item Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item Name
(BBOM)

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevi
ation

Sale
s
Unit

Mod
e

RF 800M/900M
Multi Band license

RF
800M/900M
Multi Band
license

82204034

LLT1RFM
B01

Per
band
per
RRU

For the RRU3961 and single-band module, the RF multimode license corresponding to each
mode must be purchased if SDR is used on one frequency band.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Sc
en
ari
o

Module
Type

License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

Licen
se
BBO
M

License
Abbrevia
tion

Sale
s
Unit

Mo
de

GU

Non-blade
module

GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license

The
number of
RF Units
with
GSM/UM
TS dual
mode
function
enabled

822011
99

LQW9MBT
SRF02

Per
sector

Blade&A
AU

GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU

The
number of
RF Units
with
GSM/UM
TS dual
mode
function
enabled

822011
99

LQW9MBT
SRF02

Per
sector

Non-blade
module

GSM/LTE
Dual Mode
license

GSM/LTE
Dual
Mode
license(per
Sector)

822014
72

LLT1GLDM
01

Per
sector

Blade&A
AU

GSM/LTE
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU

GSM/LTE
Dual
Mode
license(per
Sector)

822014
72

LLT1GLDM
01

Per
sector

Non-blade
module

UMTS/LTE
Dual Mode
license

UMTS/LT
E Dual
Mode
license(per
Sector)

822014
73

LLT1ULDM
01

Per
sector

Blade&A
AU

UMTS/LTE
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU

UMTS/LT
E Dual
Mode
license(per
Sector)

822014
73

LLT1ULDM
01

Per
sector

Non-blade
module

RF
GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license + RF
GSM/LTE
Dual Mode

N/A

N/A

N/A

Per
sector

U+
L

GL

UL

GU
L

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Sc
en
ari
o

Module
Type

3 Planning Mode Transition

License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

Licen
se
BBO
M

License
Abbrevia
tion

Sale
s
Unit

Mo
de

N/A

N/A

N/A

Per
sector

U+
L

license
or
RF
GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license + RF
UMTS/LTE
Dual Mode
license
Blade&A
AU

GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU
+ GSM/LTE
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU
or
GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU
+
UMTS/LTE
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU

Data configuration requirement (software)

Data configuration for adding an RF module is the same as that in single-mode scenarios.
You can use the GUI, summary data file, or MML commands to configure the data.
Guidelines:
For details, see section "Data Preparation" in "Engineering Guidelines (Multimode Base
Station)" of RF Unit and Topology Management Feature Parameter Description.
Pay attention to the following during data configuration:
- Determine the CPRI-based topology according to topology types supported by an RF
module in multimode scenarios.
- Configure the working mode of an RF unit according to the live network deployment.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Determine the parameters and their values to be configured according to the guide and specify
them in the following table. The following table provides the major eGBTS/UMTS/LTE
parameters and their value examples. The BTSTRXBRD MOC is for the GBTS.
Domain

Configur
ation
Object

MOC

Parame
ter
Name

Paramete
r ID

Value
(Example)

RF module

Adding an
RXU

RRU

Cabinet
No.

CN

Adding an
RXU

RRU

Subrack
No.

SRN

60

Adding an
RXU

RRU

Slot No.

SN

Adding an
RXU

RRU

RRU type

RT

MRRU

Adding an
RXU

RRU

RRU Topo
Position

TP

TRUNK (in the


main chain or
ring)

Adding an
RXU

RRU

RRU
Chain/Rin
g No.

RCN

Adding an
RXU

RRU

RRU
Position

PS

Adding an
RXU

RRU

RF Unit
Working
Mode

RS

GL

Adding an
RXU

RRU

Number of
RX
channels

RXNUM

Adding an
RXU

RRU

Number of
TX
channels

TXNUM

Service impact

Scenario

Impact on Services of the Original


Mode

Adding a new RF mode and adjusting


the antenna and feeder of the original RF
module

Services of the original RF module are affected


during the antenna and feeder adjustment.

Adding a new RF module and adjusting


the data configuration of the original RF
module

Services are affected during the data


configuration and RF module adjustment.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

3.2.3 Reusing the Original Multiband Module


1. Module selection
Reuse the original module.
2. Precautions (hardware)
Check whether the antenna and feeder subsystem supports the new frequency band that is
added to the original module.
3. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement (hardware)

Material Type

Material Name

Quantity

Remarks

RF module

CPRI fiber optic


cable

Same as the number


of RF modules

Determine whether
to add a fiber optic
cable based on the
CPRI-based
topology.

Optical module

Twice the number of


RF modules

Determine whether
to add a fiber optic
cable based on the
CPRI-based
topology.

Version requirement (software)

For the mapping relationship between the baseband processing boards and versions, see GUL
Base Station Overview and Selection Guide.

License requirement (software)

To support the new mode, the hardware license of this mode must be purchased for the new
RF module, such as the power license and TRX license. The way of purchasing such a license
is the same as that for a single-mode RF module, and therefore, details are not described here.
For a multiband RF module (except the RRU3961), one multimode multiband license is
required for each frequency band of each mode (GSM, UMTS, or LTE).
License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevia
tion

Sales
Unit

Mode

First Mode
First Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(UMTS)

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(UMTS)
(Per Band
per RRU)

82205398

LQW9RFB
AND01

Per band

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevia
tion

Sales
Unit

Mode

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(UMTS)

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(UMTS)
(Per Band
per RRU)

82205398

LQW9RFB
AND01

Per band

First Mode
First Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(LTE FDD)

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(LTE FDD)
(Per Band
per RRU)

82205382

LLT1MML
MBRM01

Per band

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(LTE FDD)

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(LTE FDD)
(Per Band
per RRU)

82205382

LLT1MML
MBRM01

Per band

For the RRU3961, the RF 800 MHz/900 MHz multiband license must be purchased if the
RRU3961 works on both the 800 MHz and 900 MHz frequency bands.
License Control
Item Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item Name
(BBOM)

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevi
ation

Sale
s
Unit

Mod
e

RF 800M/900M
Multi Band license

RF
800M/900M
Multi Band
license

82204034

LLT1RFM
B01

Per
band
per
RRU

Data configuration requirement (software)

Data configuration for adding an RF module is the same as that in single-mode scenarios.
You can use the GUI, summary data file, or MML commands to configure the data.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

For details, see section "Data Preparation" in "Engineering Guidelines (Multimode Base
Station)" of RF Unit and Topology Management Feature Parameter Description.
Pay attention to the following during data configuration:
- Configure the working mode of an RF unit according to the live network deployment.
- Configure sector equipment parameters according to the type of a multiband module:
sharing the same DIN connector or using different DIN connectors.
Determine the parameters and their values to be configured according to the guide and specify
them in the following table. The following table provides the major eGBTS/UMTS/LTE
parameters and their value examples. The BTSTRXBRD MOC is for the GBTS.
Domain

Configur
ation
Object

MOC

Parame
ter
Name

Paramete
r ID

Value
(Example)

RF module

Modifying
an RXU

RRU

Cabinet
No.

CN

Modifying
an RXU

RRU

Subrack
No.

SRN

60

Modifying
an RXU

RRU

Slot No.

SN

Modifying
an RXU

RRU

RRU type

RT

MRRU

Modifying
an RXU

RRU

RRU Topo
Position

TP

TRUNK (in the


main chain or
ring)

Modifying
an RXU

RRU

RRU
Chain/Rin
g No.

RCN

Modifying
an RXU

RRU

RRU
Position

PS

Modifying
an RXU

RRU

RF Unit
Working
Mode

RS

GL

Modifying
an RXU

RRU

Number of
RX
channels

RXNUM

Modifying
an RXU

RRU

Number of
TX
channels

TXNUM

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Service impact

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Scenario

Impact on Services of the Original


Mode

Starting a new mode or modifying RRU


configuration affects services of the
original mode.

The startup or modification duration is short (no


CS call drop but 2-3-second interruption of PS
services).

3.2.4 Applying SDR to the Original RF Module


1. Module selection
The original module is reused, and therefore no module selection is required.
2. Precautions
None
3. Engineering guidelines
Material Type

Material Name

Quantity

Remarks

RF module

CPRI fiber optic


cable

Same as the number


of RF modules

Determine whether
to add a fiber optic
cable based on the
CPRI-based
topology.

Optical module

Twice the number of


RF modules

Determine whether
to add a fiber optic
cable based on the
CPRI-based
topology.

Version requirement

For the mapping relationship between the RF modules and versions, see GUL Base Station
Overview and Selection Guide.

License requirement

To support the new mode, the hardware license of this mode must be purchased for the new
RF module, such as the power license and TRX license. The way of purchasing such a license
is the same as that for a single-mode RF module, and therefore, details are not described here.
For a multiband RF module (except the RRU3961), one multimode multiband license is
required for each frequency band of each mode (GSM, UMTS, or LTE).
License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevia
tion

Sales
Unit

Mode

First Mode
First Band

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band

82205398

LQW9RFB

Per band

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

License
BBOM

License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(UMTS)

License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(UMTS)
(Per Band
per RRU)

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(UMTS)

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(UMTS)
(Per Band
per RRU)

82205398

First Mode
First Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(LTE FDD)

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(LTE FDD)
(Per Band
per RRU)

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(LTE FDD)

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(LTE FDD)
(Per Band
per RRU)

License
Abbrevia
tion

Sales
Unit

Mode

LQW9RFB
AND01

Per band

82205382

LLT1MML
MBRM01

Per band

82205382

LLT1MML
MBRM01

Per band

AND01

For the RRU3961, the RF 800 MHz/900 MHz multiband license must be purchased if the
RRU3961 works on both the 800 MHz and 900 MHz frequency bands.
License Control
Item Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item Name
(BBOM)

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevi
ation

Sale
s
Unit

Mod
e

RF 800M/900M
Multi Band license

RF
800M/900M
Multi Band
license

82204034

LLT1RFM
B01

Per
band
per
RRU

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

For the RRU3961 and single-band module, the RF multimode license corresponding to each
mode must be purchased if SDR is used on one frequency band.
Sc
en
ari
o

Module
Type

License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

Licen
se
BBO
M

License
Abbrevia
tion

Sale
s
Unit

Mo
de

GU

Non-blade
module

GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license

The
number of
RF Units
with
GSM/UM
TS dual
mode
function
enabled

822011
99

LQW9MBT
SRF02

Per
sector

Blade&A
AU

GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU

The
number of
RF Units
with
GSM/UM
TS dual
mode
function
enabled

822011
99

LQW9MBT
SRF02

Per
sector

Non-blade
module

GSM/LTE
Dual Mode
license

GSM/LTE
Dual
Mode
license(per
Sector)

822014
72

LLT1GLDM
01

Per
sector

Blade&A
AU

GSM/LTE
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU

GSM/LTE
Dual
Mode
license(per
Sector)

822014
72

LLT1GLDM
01

Per
sector

Non-blade
module

UMTS/LTE
Dual Mode
license

UMTS/LT
E Dual
Mode
license(per
Sector)

822014
73

LLT1ULDM
01

Per
sector

Blade&A
AU

UMTS/LTE
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU

UMTS/LT
E Dual
Mode
license(per
Sector)

822014
73

LLT1ULDM
01

Per
sector

Non-blade
module

RF
GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license + RF

N/A

N/A

N/A

Per
sector

U+
L

GL

UL

GU
L

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Sc
en
ari
o

Module
Type

3 Planning Mode Transition

License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

Licen
se
BBO
M

License
Abbrevia
tion

Sale
s
Unit

Mo
de

N/A

N/A

N/A

Per
sector

U+
L

GSM/LTE
Dual Mode
license
or
RF
GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license + RF
UMTS/LTE
Dual Mode
license
Blade&A
AU

GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU
+ GSM/LTE
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU
or
GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU
+
UMTS/LTE
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU

Data configuration requirement (software)

Original mode:
The original working mode of the RF module must be changed.
New mode:
Data configuration is the same as that for adding an RF module. Note that the working mode
of the RF module must be correctly configured.
You can use the GUI, summary data file, or MML commands to configure the data.
For details, see section "Data Preparation" in "Engineering Guidelines (Multimode Base
Station)" of RF Unit and Topology Management Feature Parameter Description.
Pay attention to the following during data configuration:
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

- Determine the CPRI-based topology according to topology types supported by an RF


module in multimode scenarios.
- Configure the working mode of an RF unit according to the live network deployment.
Determine the parameters and their values to be configured according to the guide and specify
them in the following table. The following table provides the major eGBTS/UMTS/LTE
parameters and their value examples. The BTSTRXBRD MOC is for the GBTS.
Domain

Configur
ation
Object

MOC

Parame
ter
Name

Paramete
r ID

Value
(Example)

RF module

Modifying
an RXU

RRU

Cabinet
No.

CN

Modifying
an RXU

RRU

Subrack
No.

SRN

60

Modifying
an RXU

RRU

Slot No.

SN

Modifying
an RXU

RRU

RRU type

RT

MRRU

Modifying
an RXU

RRU

RRU Topo
Position

TP

TRUNK (in the


main chain or
ring)

Modifying
an RXU

RRU

RRU
Chain/Rin
g No.

RCN

Modifying
an RXU

RRU

RRU
Position

PS

Modifying
an RXU

RRU

RF Unit
Working
Mode

RS

GL

Modifying
an RXU

RRU

Number of
RX
channels

RXNUM

Modifying
an RXU

RRU

Number of
TX
channels

TXNUM

Service impact

Scenario

Impact on Services of the Original


Mode

Starting a new mode or modifying RRU


configuration affects services of the
original mode.

The startup or modification duration is short (no


CS call drop but 2-3-second interruption of PS
services).

The original RF module is a legacy V1

Adjusting the working mode of the original

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Scenario

Impact on Services of the Original


Mode

or V2 RF module.

mode resets RRUs, interrupting services for one


minute.

3.2.5 Adding a Module to the Original SDR Module


1. Module selection
The following items shall be taken into consideration for selecting an RF module:
Mode, frequency band, number of TRXs, power, TRX frequencies, and numbers of RX and
TX channels that have been planned by the customer.
For details about the selection, see GUL Base Station Overview and Selection Guide.
Note:

RF modules of the same type are preferred for capacity expansion in the same cell.

If the original module is end of marketing (EOM) or cannot meet capacity requirements
after mode transition, modules of different types can be configured together. For details,
see GUL RF Module Mixed Configuration Guide.

2. Precautions

Pay attention to the mapping relationship between the added module and cabinet:
The maximum transmit power of an RFU varies by RFU model. Greater RFU's transmit
power indicates higher requirements for power distribution and heat dissipation of the
cabinet. Therefore, RFUs of small power can work with all cabinets while RFUs of large
power can work only with Ver.C cabinets, Ver.D cabinets (or the ones has equivalent
capabilities after upgrade), and the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinets.

Pay attention to requirements for power supply or power distribution.

3. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement

Material Type

Material Name

Quantity

Remarks

Board

RRU/RFU

See
SRAN&GBSS&RAN
&eRAN BTS3900
Configuration
Manual.

CPRI high-speed
cable

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

For the RFU.


Replace the original
CPRI cable if it
cannot be reused.

CPRI fiber optic


cable

For the RRU

Optical module

For the RFU.


Replace the original
optical module if it
cannot be reused.

RRU power cable

For the RFU.


Replace the original

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Material Type

Material Name

Quantity

Remarks
RRU power cable if
it cannot be reused.

RF interconnection
cable

Required by the
GSM, multimode,
and UMTS RF
modules

Version requirement

For the mapping relationship between the RF modules and versions, see GUL Base Station
Overview and Selection Guide.

License requirement

Hardware license of the single-mode RF module working in the original mode:


If the original module is a non-blade or non-AAS module, replace it with a blade or AAS
module. In such a case, the related hardware license of the single-mode RF module must be
purchased. The way of purchasing such a license is the same as that for a single-mode RF
module, and therefore details are not described here.
Hardware license of the single-mode RF module working in the new mode:
To support the new mode, the hardware license of this mode must be purchased for the new
RF module, such as the power license and TRX license. The way of purchasing such a license
is the same as that for a single-mode RF module, and therefore details are not described here.
Multimode RF license
For a multiband RF module (except the RRU3961), one multimode multiband license is
required for each frequency band of each mode (GSM, UMTS, or LTE).
License Control
Item Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item Name
(BBOM)

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevi
ation

Sale
s
Unit

Mod
e

First Mode First Band


License for MultiBand RF Module
(UMTS)

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band RF
Module
(UMTS) (Per
Band per RRU)

82205398

LQW9RFB
AND01

Per
band

Multi-Mode MultiBand License for


Multi-Band RF
Module (UMTS)

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band RF
Module
(UMTS) (Per
Band per RRU)

82205398

LQW9RFB
AND01

Per
band

First Mode First Band

Multi-Mode

82205382

LLT1MML

Per

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

License Control
Item Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item Name
(BBOM)

License for MultiBand RF Module


(LTE FDD)

Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band RF
Module (LTE
FDD) (Per
Band per RRU)

Multi-Mode MultiBand License for


Multi-Band RF
Module (LTE FDD)

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band RF
Module (LTE
FDD) (Per
Band per RRU)

License
BBOM

82205382

License
Abbrevi
ation

Sale
s
Unit

MBRM01

band

LLT1MML
MBRM01

Per
band

Mod
e

For the RRU3961, the RF 800 MHz/900 MHz multiband license must be purchased if the
RRU3961 works on both the 800 MHz and 900 MHz frequency bands.
License Control
Item Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item Name
(BBOM)

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevi
ation

Sale
s
Unit

Mod
e

RF 800M/900M
Multi Band license

RF
800M/900M
Multi Band
license

82204034

LLT1RFM
B01

Per
band
per
RRU

For the RRU3961 and single-band module, the RF multimode license corresponding to each
mode must be purchased if SDR is used on one frequency band.
Sc
en
ari
o

Module
Type

License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

Licen
se
BBO
M

License
Abbreviati
on

Sal
es
Un
it

Mo
de

GU

Non-blade
module

GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license

The
number of
RF Units
with
GSM/UM
TS dual
mode
function
enabled

822011
99

LQW9MBTSR
F02

Per
sect
or

Blade&A

GSM/UMTS

The

822011

LQW9MBTSR

Per

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Sc
en
ari
o

GL

UL

GU
L

3 Planning Mode Transition

Module
Type

License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

Licen
se
BBO
M

License
Abbreviati
on

Sal
es
Un
it

Mo
de

AU

Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU

number of
RF Units
with
GSM/UM
TS dual
mode
function
enabled

99

F02

sect
or

Non-blade
module

GSM/LTE
Dual Mode
license

GSM/LTE
Dual
Mode
license(pe
r Sector)

822014
72

LLT1GLDM01

Per
sect
or

Blade&A
AU

GSM/LTE
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU

GSM/LTE
Dual
Mode
license(pe
r Sector)

822014
72

LLT1GLDM01

Per
sect
or

Non-blade
module

UMTS/LTE
Dual Mode
license

UMTS/LT
E Dual
Mode
license(pe
r Sector)

822014
73

LLT1ULDM01

Per
sect
or

Blade&A
AU

UMTS/LTE
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU

UMTS/LT
E Dual
Mode
license(pe
r Sector)

822014
73

LLT1ULDM01

Per
sect
or

Non-blade
module

RF
GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license + RF
GSM/LTE
Dual Mode
license

N/A

N/A

N/A

Per
sect
or

U+
L

N/A

N/A

N/A

Per

U+

or
RF
GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license + RF
UMTS/LTE
Dual Mode
license
Blade&A
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

GSM/UMTS

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Sc
en
ari
o

3 Planning Mode Transition

Module
Type

License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

AU

Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU
+ GSM/LTE
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

Licen
se
BBO
M

License
Abbreviati
on

Sal
es
Un
it

Mo
de

sect
or

or
GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU
+
UMTS/LTE
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU

Data configuration requirement

Original mode:

The original RF module's working mode must be adjusted.

TRX configuration of the original mode may be changed, such as a decrease in the TRX
number due to refarming and changes in RF channels of TRXs).

New mode:
Data configuration is the same as that for adding an RF module. Note that the working mode
of the RF module must be correctly configured.
You can use the GUI, summary data file, or MML commands to configure the data.
For details, see section "Data Preparation" in "Engineering Guidelines (Multimode Base
Station)" of RF Unit and Topology Management Feature Parameter Description.
Pay attention to the following during data configuration:
- Determine the CPRI-based topology according to topology types supported by an RF
module in multimode scenarios.
- Configure the working mode of an RF unit according to the live network deployment.
Determine the parameters and their values to be configured according to the guide and specify
them in the following table. The following table provides the major eGBTS/UMTS/LTE
parameters and their value examples. The BTSTRXBRD MOC is for the GBTS.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Domain

Configur
ation
Object

MOC

Parame
ter
Name

Paramete
r ID

Value
(Example)

RF module

Adding an
RXU

RRU

Cabinet
No.

CN

Adding an
RXU

RRU

Subrack
No.

SRN

60

Adding an
RXU

RRU

Slot No.

SN

Adding an
RXU

RRU

RRU type

RT

MRRU

Adding an
RXU

RRU

RRU Topo
Position

TP

TRUNK (in the


main chain or
ring)

Adding an
RXU

RRU

RRU
Chain/Rin
g No.

RCN

Adding an
RXU

RRU

RRU
Position

PS

Adding an
RXU

RRU

RF Unit
Working
Mode

RS

GL

Adding an
RXU

RRU

Number of
RX
channels

RXNUM

Adding an
RXU

RRU

Number of
TX
channels

TXNUM

Service impact

Scenario

Impact on Services of the Original


Mode

Starting a new mode or modifying RRU


configuration affects services of the
original mode.

The startup or modification duration is short (no


CS call drop but 2-3-second interruption of PS
services).

3.2.6 Replacing the Original Module with a New SDR


Module
1. Module selection
The following items shall be taken into consideration for selecting an RF module:
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Mode, frequency band, number of TRXs, power, TRX frequencies, and numbers of RX and
TX channels that have been planned by the customer.
For details about the selection, see GUL Base Station Overview and Selection Guide.
2. Precautions
Pay attention to the following items when replacing the original RF module:

Mapping relationship between the added module and cabinet

Requirements for power supply or power distribution

Whether the optical module of the original RF module shall be replaced

Whether the RRU power cable of the original RF module shall be replaced

3. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement

Material Type

Material Name

Quantity

Remarks

Board

RRU/RFU

Determined based
on the plan

CPRI high-speed
cable

For the RFU.


Replace the original
CPRI cable if it
cannot be reused.

CPRI fiber optic


cable

For the RRU

Optical module

For the RFU.


Replace the original
optical module if it
cannot be reused.

RRU power cable

For the RFU.


Replace the original
RRU power cable if
it cannot be reused.

Version requirement

For the mapping relationship between the RF modules and versions, see GUL Base Station
Overview and Selection Guide.

License requirement

Hardware license of the single-mode RF module working in the original mode:


If the original module is a non-blade or non-AAS module, replace it with a blade or AAS
module. In such a case, the related hardware license of the single-mode RF module must be
purchased. The way of purchasing such a license is the same as that for purchasing a license
for a single-mode RF module, and therefore, details are not described here.
Hardware license of the single-mode RF module working in the new mode:

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

To support the new mode, the hardware license of this mode must be purchased for the new
RF module, such as the power license and TRX license. The way of purchasing such a license
is the same as that for a single-mode RF module, and therefore, details are not described here.
Multimode RF license
For a multiband RF module (except the RRU3961), one multimode multiband license is
required for each frequency band of each mode (GSM, UMTS, or LTE).
License Control
Item Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item Name
(BBOM)

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevi
ation

Sale
s
Unit

Mod
e

First Mode First Band


License for MultiBand RF Module
(UMTS)

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band RF
Module
(UMTS) (Per
Band per RRU)

82205398

LQW9RFB
AND01

Per
band

Multi-Mode MultiBand License for


Multi-Band RF
Module (UMTS)

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band RF
Module
(UMTS) (Per
Band per RRU)

82205398

LQW9RFB
AND01

Per
band

First Mode First Band


License for MultiBand RF Module
(LTE FDD)

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band RF
Module (LTE
FDD) (Per
Band per RRU)

82205382

LLT1MML
MBRM01

Per
band

Multi-Mode MultiBand License for


Multi-Band RF
Module (LTE FDD)

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band RF
Module (LTE
FDD) (Per
Band per RRU)

82205382

LLT1MML
MBRM01

Per
band

For the RRU3961, the RF 800 MHz/900 MHz multiband license must be purchased if the
RRU3961 works on both the 800 MHz and 900 MHz frequency bands.
License Control
Item Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item Name
(BBOM)

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevi
ation

Sale
s
Unit

Mod
e

RF 800M/900M

RF

82204034

LLT1RFM

Per

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

License Control
Item Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item Name
(BBOM)

Multi Band license

800M/900M
Multi Band
license

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevi
ation

Sale
s
Unit

B01

band
per
RRU

Mod
e

If SDR is used on a band, the related RF multimode license of the mode shall be purchased.
Sc
en
ari
o

Module
Type

License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

Licen
se
BBO
M

License
Abbreviat
ion

Sal
es
Uni
t

Mo
de

GU

Non-blade
module

GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license

The
number of
RF Units
with
GSM/UM
TS dual
mode
function
enabled

822011
99

LQW9MBTS
RF02

Per
secto
r

Blade and
AAU

GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU

The
number of
RF Units
with
GSM/UM
TS dual
mode
function
enabled

822011
99

LQW9MBTS
RF02

Per
secto
r

Non-blade
module

GSM/LTE
Dual Mode
license

GSM/LTE
Dual
Mode
license(per
Sector)

822014
72

LLT1GLDM0
1

Per
secto
r

Blade and
AAU

GSM/LTE
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU

GSM/LTE
Dual
Mode
license(per
Sector)

822014
72

LLT1GLDM0
1

Per
secto
r

Non-blade
module

UMTS/LTE
Dual Mode
license

UMTS/LT
E Dual
Mode
license(per
Sector)

822014
73

LLT1ULDM0
1

Per
secto
r

GL

UL

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Sc
en
ari
o

GU
L

3 Planning Mode Transition

Module
Type

License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

Licen
se
BBO
M

License
Abbreviat
ion

Sal
es
Uni
t

Mo
de

Blade and
AAU

UMTS/LTE
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU

UMTS/LT
E Dual
Mode
license(per
Sector)

822014
73

LLT1ULDM0
1

Per
secto
r

Non-blade
module

RF
GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license + RF
GSM/LTE
Dual Mode
license

N/A

N/A

N/A

Per
secto
r

U+
L

N/A

N/A

N/A

Per
secto
r

U+
L

or
RF
GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license + RF
UMTS/LTE
Dual Mode
license
Blade and
AAU

GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU
+ GSM/LTE
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU
or
GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU
+ UMTS/LTE
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AAU

Data configuration requirement

Original mode:

The original RF module's working mode must be adjusted.

TRX configuration of the original mode may be changed, such as a decrease in the TRX
number due to refarming and changes in RF channels of TRXs).

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

New mode:
Data configuration is the same as that for adding an RF module. Note that the working mode
of the RF module must be correctly configured.
You can use the GUI, summary data file, or MML commands to configure the data.
For details, see section "Data Preparation" in "Engineering Guidelines (Multimode Base
Station)" of RF Unit and Topology Management Feature Parameter Description.
Pay attention to the following during data configuration:
- Determine the CPRI-based topology according to topology types supported by an RF
module in multimode scenarios.
- Configure the working mode of an RF unit according to the live network deployment.
- Set the RXUSPEC parameter to the name of the new RF module for the GBTS. The
RUSPEC parameter is optional for the eGBTS, NodeB, and eNodeB.
Determine the parameters and their values to be configured according to the guide and specify
them in the following table. The following table provides the major eGBTS/UMTS/LTE
parameters and their value examples. The BTSTRXBRD MOC is for the GBTS.
Domain

Configur
ation
Object

MOC

Parame
ter
Name

Paramete
r ID

Value
(Example)

RF module

Adding an
RXU

RRU

Cabinet
No.

CN

Adding an
RXU

RRU

Subrack
No.

SRN

60

Adding an
RXU

RRU

Slot No.

SN

Adding an
RXU

RRU

RRU type

RT

MRRU

Adding an
RXU

RRU

RRU Topo
Position

TP

TRUNK (in the


main chain or
ring)

Adding an
RXU

RRU

RRU
Chain/Rin
g No.

RCN

Adding an
RXU

RRU

RRU
Position

PS

Adding an
RXU

RRU

RF Unit
Working
Mode

RS

GL

Adding an
RXU

RRU

Number of
RX
channels

RXNUM

Adding an
RXU

RRU

Number of
TX

TXNUM

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

3 Planning Mode Transition

Configur
ation
Object

MOC

Parame
ter
Name

Paramete
r ID

Value
(Example)

channels

Service impact

Scenario

Impact on Services of the Original


Mode

Replacing the RRU

Services carried by the original RFU or RRU


will be affected when it is being replaced. The
interruption period varies by installation period.
If there is an extra slot for installing the new
RRU, you can pre-install the RRU and then
adjust the antenna & feeder and CPRI cables.
This can reduce the service interruption period
to a few minutes.

3.3 Antenna and Feeder Networking


This section describes antenna and feeder planning.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

3.3.1 Overall Antenna and Feeder Planning Process


Figure 1.1 Overall antenna and feeder planning process

Check whether the original antenna supports the new frequency band.

In this step, obtain the antenna model so that you can find the datasheet of the original
antenna.

Check whether to replace the original antenna or add a new antenna.

This is determined based on customer's plan.


If you need to add a new antenna, pay attention to its installation position.
If replacement of the original antenna is required, be aware of the impact when compared
with the original mode. For example, difference between the benefits of the original and
replacement antennas may affect network performance.
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Check whether the new and original frequency bands share the same antenna port.

In this step, obtain the antenna model so that you can find the datasheet of the original
antenna.
The datasheet indicates whether the original antenna port supports the broadband antenna. If
the broadband antenna is supported, the new and original frequency bands can share the same
antenna port.
Note that if the original and new RF modules work on independent frequency bands, an
external inter-band combiner must be added for combing the original and new frequency
bands so that the two RF modules can share the same antenna port.
Generally, broadband antennas share the same port, and therefore two frequency bands on
these antennas do not support independent remote electrical tilt (RET).
Table 1.1 Analysis of antenna and feeder planning scenarios
Catego
ry

RF
modul
e

Scenario

Antenna
and
feeder
networki
ng

New
mode
only

Adding an independent antenna (antenna port) and an independent


feeder
Adding an independent antenna (antenna port) and sharing the
original feeder
Broadband antenna (antenna port) being shared by the original
mode and new mode

SDR RF
module

SDR RF module of the new mode using the original feeder

3.3.2 Adding an Independent Antenna (Antenna


Port) and an Independent Feeder
1. Scenario description and application scope

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Figure 1.1 Scenario without RET

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Figure 1.2 Scenario with RET

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Figure 1.3 Scenario with TMA+RET

In this scenario of mode transition, an RF module working on the new frequency band uses an
independent set of antenna and feeder. In such a case, you can use an independent antenna or
reuse the original multiband multi-port antenna. In addition, customers may replace the
original antenna with a multiband multi-port antenna due to constraints on site conditions.
This scenario has the following characteristics:

Independent antenna (antenna port)

Independent feeder or jumper

If an RET antenna is used, independent RET and electrical tilt configuration are
supported.

If an independent antenna is used, you can independently set the mechanical tilt.

2. Precautions

In scenarios of adding an RET or TMA, check the model, and hardware and software
versions of RET or TMA for compatibility. For details, contact Global Technical
Assistance Center (GTAC) or Technical Management Office (TMO) teams. A list of RET
or TMA models that have passed the interoperability test (IOT) compatibility test is
available. If the RET or TMA to be added is not included in the list, relevant tests by
R&D or field engineers are recommended.

Pay attention to frequency bands supported by the TMA, especially the reused TMA.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

The RRU is directly connected to the RET through an RET port. Only AISG cables
delivered by Huawei can be used and special attention shall be paid to cable and length
constraints.

3. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement (hardware)

Table 3.1 Material requirement


Material Type

Material Name

Quantity

Remarks

Antenna and feeder

Antenna

Same as the number


of sectors in the new
mode

Required when the


original antenna is to
be reconstructed or
replaced

Feeder

Twice the number of


sectors

Not required when


the RRU and
antenna are directly
connected to each
other.
The length of the
feeder needs to be
determined
according to the site
survey.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Jumper

The length of the


feeder needs to be
determined
according to the site
survey.

SBT

Same as the number


of sectors

Required on the
antenna side when
the following
conditions are met:

RET is configured
for the new
mode.

No TMA is
configured.

The RRU and


antenna are not
directly
connected to
each other.

TMA

Same as the number


of sectors

Configured as
required by the
network plan.

RCU

Same as the number


of sectors

Required when RET


is required but no
internal RET is

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Material Type

Material Name

Quantity

Remarks
available.

AISG cable from the


SBT or TMA to the
RCU

Same as the number


of sectors

Required for
connecting to the
SBT or TMA when
RET is required. The
lengths of the AISG
cable vary with
scenarios.

AISG cable from the


RRU to the RCU

Same as the number


of sectors

Required when the


RRU and RET are
directly connected to
each other.

Version requirement

None

License requirement

The GSM and UMTS systems have no requirements for deploying this feature.
The feature license must be purchased when RET is used for LTE. The following table
provides the related license control items.
Table 3.2 License control items for optional features of RET management
Feature Name

License Control
Item

License
Abbreviation

(LTE-FDD) LOFD-001024
Remote Electrical Tilt Control

Remote Electrical Tilt


Control

LLT1RET01

(LTE-TDD) TDLOFD-001024
Remote Electrical Tilt Control

Remote Electrical Tilt


Control

LLT1RET01

Data configuration requirement

Data configuration for a multimode antenna is the same as that for a set of single-mode
antenna.
Key points for the data configuration are listed as follows:
- Based on connections of the RFU/RRU, antenna, and feeder, configure RF transmit and
receive mode for the GBTS, and TxBranch/RxBranch/RFCONNGRP information about the
RF module for the eGBTS, NodeB, eNodeB, and co-MPT base station.
- If RET is required, configure the ALD power supply switch for the RRU or RFU and related
alarm threshold parameters. ALD is short for antenna line device. In addition, configure RET
for the RET antenna, download the RET configuration file, calibrate the RET antenna, and set
tilt angels.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

- If a TMA is required, configure the TMA and TMA attenuation corresponding to the RRU or
RFU's channel.
For details, see section "Data Preparation" in "Engineering Guidelines (ALD Manual
Deployment on Multimode Base Station)" of ALD Management Feature Parameter
Description.
Examples:
The following table describes the key parameters that must be set when RET is controlled by
the RRU or RFU through its RETPORT.
Table 3.3 Key parameters related to the RETPORT
Domai
n

Configu
ration
Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

Param
eter ID

Example
Value

Antenna
and
feeder

Adding an
RXU

RETPORT

Cabinet No.

CN

Adding an
RXU

RETPORT

Subrack No.

SRN

62

Adding an
RXU

RETPORT

Slot No.

SN

Adding an
RXU

RETPORT

Port No.

PN

RET_PORT

Adding an
RXU

RETPORT

ALD Power
Switch

PWRSWI
TCH

ON

Adding an
RXU

RETPORT

Current Alarm
Threshold

THRESH
OLDTYP
E

UER_SELF_DEF
INE

Adding an
RXU

RETPORT

Undercurrent
Alarm Occur
Threshold

UOTHD

40

Adding an
RXU

RETPORT

Undercurrent
Alarm Clear
Threshold

UCTHD

60

Adding an
RXU

RETPORT

Overcurrent
Alarm Occur
Threshold

OOTHD

850

Adding an
RXU

RETPORT

Overcurrent
Alarm Clear
Threshold

OCTHD

750

The following table describes the key parameters that must be set when RET is controlled by
the RRU or RFU through its ANTENNAPORT.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Table 3.4 Key parameters related to the ANTENNAPORT


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parame
ter
Name

Parame
ter ID

Exampl
e Value

Antenna and
feeder

Adding an
RXU

ANTENNAPO
RT

Cabinet
No.

CN

Adding an
RXU

ANTENNAPO
RT

Subrack
No.

SRN

62

Adding an
RXU

ANTENNAPO
RT

Slot No.

SN

Adding an
RXU

ANTENNAPO
RT

Port No.

PN

R0A

Adding an
RXU

ANTENNAPO
RT

ALD
Power
Switch

PWRSWI
TCH

ON

Adding an
RXU

ANTENNAPO
RT

Current
Alarm
Threshold

THRESH
OLDTYP
E

UER_SEL
F_DEFINE

Adding an
RXU

ANTENNAPO
RT

Undercurr
ent Alarm
Occur
Threshold

UOTHD

40

Adding an
RXU

ANTENNAPO
RT

Undercurr
ent Alarm
Clear
Threshold

UCTHD

60

Adding an
RXU

ANTENNAPO
RT

Overcurre
nt Alarm
Occur
Threshold

OOTHD

850

Adding an
RXU

ANTENNAPO
RT

Overcurre
nt Alarm
Clear
Threshold

OCTHD

750

Table 3.5 Key parameters related to the RET antenna


Do
ma
in

Config
uratio
n
Object

MO
C

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Example
Value

Ant
enn
a

Adding
RET

RET

Device No.

DEVICENO

Adding

RET

Control Port Cabinet

CTRLCN

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Do
ma
in

Config
uratio
n
Object

and
feed
er

RET

MO
C

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Example
Value

No.

Adding
RET

RET

Control Port Subrack


No.

CTRLSRN

62

Adding
RET

RET

Control Port Slot No.

CTRLSN

Adding
RET

RET

Antenna Type

RETTYPE

Single antenna

Adding
RET

RET

RET Subunit Number

SUBUNITNUM

Adding
RET

RET

Polar Type

POLARTYPE

Equipment
plan

Adding
RET

RET

Antenna Scenario

SCENARIO

REGULAR

Table 3.6 Key parameters related to the RET subunit


Domain

Configur
ation
Object

MOC

Paramet
er Name

Paramet
er ID

Example
Value

Antenna and
feeder

Adding RET

RETSUBU
NIT

Device No.

DEVICEN
O

Adding RET

RETSUBU
NIT

Subunit No.

SUBUNITN
O

Adding RET

RETSUBU
NIT

Connect Port
1 Cabinet
No.

CONNCN1

Adding RET

RETSUBU
NIT

Connect Port
1 Subrack
No.

CONNSRN
1

62

Adding RET

RETSUBU
NIT

Connect Port
1 Slot No.

CONNSN1

Adding RET

RETSUBU
NIT

Connect Port
1 Port No.

CONNPN1

R0A

Adding RET

RETSUBU
NIT

Connect Port
2 Cabinet
No.

CONNCN2

Adding RET

RETSUBU
NIT

Connect Port
2 Subrack

CONNSRN

62

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

3 Planning Mode Transition

Configur
ation
Object

MOC

Adding RET

RETSUBU
NIT

Paramet
er Name

Paramet
er ID

No.

Tilt

TILT

Example
Value

20

Table 3.7 Key parameters related to the TMA


Do
ma
in

Config
uratio
n
Object

MO
C

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Example
Value

Ant
enn
a
and
feed
er

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Device No.

DEVICENO

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Control Port Cabinet


No.

CTRLCN

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Control Port Subrack


No.

CTRLSRN

62

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Control Port Slot No.

CTRLSN

Adding a
TMA

TMA

TMA Subunit Number

SUBUNITNUM

Table 3.8 Key parameters related to the TMA subunit


Do
mai
n

Configu
ration
Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

Parameter
ID

Exampl
e Value

Ante
nna
and
feed
er

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Device No.

DEVICENO

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Subunit No.

SUBUNITNO

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Connect Port
Cabinet No.

CONNCN

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Connect Port
Subrack No.

CONNSRN

62

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Connect Port Slot


No.

CONNSN

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Connect Port No.

CONNPN

R0A

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Do
mai
n

3 Planning Mode Transition

Configu
ration
Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

Parameter
ID

Exampl
e Value

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Working Mode

MODE

NORMA
L

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Gain

GAIN

48

If both RX channels of the RXU are configured with the TMA, attenuation must be
configured for the RXBRANCH of both RX channels. The following table describes the
parameters that must be set to configure RX channel attenuation.
Table 3.9 Key parameters related to RX channel attenuation
Do
mai
n

Configu
ration
Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

Parameter
ID

Exampl
e Value

Ante
nna
and
feed
er

Adding
RXU RX
channel 0

RXBRANCH

RX Channel No.

RXNO

Adding
RXU RX
channel 0

RXBRANCH

Logical Switch of
RX Channel

RXSW

ON

Adding
RXU RX
channel 0

RXBRANCH

Attenuation

ATTEN

10

Adding
RXU RX
channel 1

RXBRANCH

RX Channel No.

RXNO

Adding
RXU RX
channel 1

RXBRANCH

Logical Switch of
RX Channel

RXSW

ON

Adding
RXU RX
channel 1

RXBRANCH

Attenuation

ATTEN

10

Ante
nna
and
feed
er

Service impact

Table 3.10 Service impact


Scenario

Impact on Services of the Original Mode

Adding an antenna or reusing


the original multiband antenna

Technically, services of the original mode are not


affected. However, the related operations are performed
around antennas, you are advised to evaluate whether
the original RF module shall be blocked based on the

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Scenario

Impact on Services of the Original Mode


actual site conditions to ensure personal safety.

Replacing the original antenna


with a multiband antenna

Services of the original mode are interrupted during


antenna replacement.

3.3.3 Adding an Independent Antenna (Antenna


Port) and Sharing the Original Feeder
1. Scenario description and application scope

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Figure 1.1 Shared feeder, independent antenna port, and no RET

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Figure 1.2 Shared feeder, independent antenna port, and RET

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Figure 1.3 Shared feeder, independent antenna port, and TMA&RET

Note that parts highlighted with blue are new components in the preceding figures.
In this scenario of mode transition, the RF module working on the new frequency band uses
an independent antenna but shares the original feeder due to installation constraints. In such a
case, you can use an independent antenna or reuse the original multiband multi-port antenna.
In addition, customers may replace the original antenna with a multiband multi-port antenna
due to constraints on site conditions.
A combiner must be added because multiple modes (frequency bands) share the feeder. The
combiner brings about insertion loss, which slightly affects the performance of the original
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

mode (frequency band). The insertion loss of an inter-band combiner is 0.X dB. For details,
see the relevant combiner datasheet.
This scenario has the following characteristics:

Independent antenna (antenna port)

No new feeder

If an RET antenna is used, independent RET and electrical tilt configuration are
supported.

If an independent antenna is used, you can independently set the mechanical tilt.

2. Precautions
In scenarios of adding an RET or TMA, check the model, and hardware and software versions
of RET or TMA for compatibility. For details, contact GTAC or TMO teams. A list of RET or
TMA models that have passed the IOT compatibility test is available. If the RET or TMA to
be added is not included in the list, relevant tests by R&D or field engineers are
recommended.
Pay attention to frequency bands supported by the TMA, especially the reused TMA.
When a combiner is used, pay attention to the design of the RET and TMA, and combiner's
capability of supporting DC power and OOK signals.
Determine connections between components in the antenna and feeder subsystem.
3. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement (hardware)

Table 3.1 Material requirement


Material Type

Material Name

Quantity

Remarks

Board

Antenna

Same as the number


of sectors in the new
mode

Required when the


original antenna is to
be reconstructed or
replaced

Jumper

The length of the


feeder needs to be
determined
according to the site
survey.

SBT

Same as the number


of sectors

Required on the
antenna side when
the following
conditions are met:

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

RET is configured
for the new
mode.

No TMA is
configured.

The RRU and


antenna are not
directly
49

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Material Type

Material Name

Quantity

Remarks
connected to
each other.

TMA

Same as the number


of sectors

Configured as
required by the
network plan.

RCU

Same as the number


of sectors

Required when RET


is required but no
internal RET is
available.

AISG cable from the


SBT or TMA to the
RET

Same as the number


of sectors

Required for
connecting to the
SBT or TMA when
RET is required. The
lengths of the AISG
cable vary with
scenarios.

Combiner

Four times the


number of sectors

The combiner model


is determined by
frequency bands
where signals are to
be combined.

Version requirement
None

License requirement
The GSM and UMTS systems have no requirements for deploying this feature.
The feature license must be purchased when RET is used for LTE. The following table
provides the related license control items.

Table 3.2 License control items for optional features of RET management
Feature Name

License Control
Item

License
Abbreviation

(LTE-FDD) LOFD-001024
Remote Electrical Tilt Control

Remote Electrical Tilt


Control

LLT1RET01

(LTE-TDD) TDLOFD-001024
Remote Electrical Tilt Control

Remote Electrical Tilt


Control

LLT1RET01

Data configuration requirement


Data configuration for a multimode antenna is the same as that for a set of single-mode
antenna.
Key points for the data configuration are listed as follows:

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

- Based on connections of the RFU/RRU, antenna, and feeder, configure RF transmit and
receive mode for the GBTS, and TxBranch/RxBranch/RFCONNGRP information about
the RF module for the eGBTS, NodeB, eNodeB, and co-MPT base station.
- If RET is required, configure the ALD power supply switch for the RRU or RFU and
related alarm threshold parameters. In addition, configure RET for the RET antenna,
download the RET configuration file, calibrate the RET antenna, and set tilt angels.
- If a TMA is required, configure the TMA and TMA attenuation corresponding to the
RRU or RFU's channel.
For details, see section "Data Preparation" in "Engineering Guidelines (ALD Manual
Deployment on Multimode Base Station)" of ALD Management Feature Parameter
Description.
Examples:
The following table describes the key parameters that must be set when RET is
controlled by the RRU or RFU through its RETPORT.
Table 3.3 Key parameters related to the RETPORT
Domai
n

Configu
ration
Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

Param
eter ID

Example
Value

Antenna
and
feeder

Adding an
RXU

RETPORT

Cabinet No.

CN

Adding an
RXU

RETPORT

Subrack No.

SRN

62

Adding an
RXU

RETPORT

Slot No.

SN

Adding an
RXU

RETPORT

Port No.

PN

RET_PORT

Adding an
RXU

RETPORT

ALD Power
Switch

PWRSWI
TCH

ON

Adding an
RXU

RETPORT

Current Alarm
Threshold

THRESH
OLDTYP
E

UER_SELF_DEF
INE

Adding an
RXU

RETPORT

Undercurrent
Alarm Occur
Threshold

UOTHD

40

Adding an
RXU

RETPORT

Undercurrent
Alarm Clear
Threshold

UCTHD

60

Adding an
RXU

RETPORT

Overcurrent
Alarm Occur
Threshold

OOTHD

850

Adding an
RXU

RETPORT

Overcurrent
Alarm Clear
Threshold

OCTHD

750

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

The following table describes the key parameters that must be set when RET is
controlled by the RRU or RFU through its ANTENNAPORT.
Table 3.4 Key parameters related to the ANTENNAPORT
Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parame
ter
Name

Parame
ter ID

Exampl
e Value

Antenna and
feeder

Adding an
RXU

ANTENNAPO
RT

Cabinet
No.

CN

Adding an
RXU

ANTENNAPO
RT

Subrack
No.

SRN

62

Adding an
RXU

ANTENNAPO
RT

Slot No.

SN

Adding an
RXU

ANTENNAPO
RT

Port No.

PN

R0A

Adding an
RXU

ANTENNAPO
RT

ALD
Power
Switch

PWRSWI
TCH

ON

Adding an
RXU

ANTENNAPO
RT

Current
Alarm
Threshold

THRESH
OLDTYP
E

UER_SEL
F_DEFINE

Adding an
RXU

ANTENNAPO
RT

Undercurr
ent Alarm
Occur
Threshold

UOTHD

40

Adding an
RXU

ANTENNAPO
RT

Undercurr
ent Alarm
Clear
Threshold

UCTHD

60

Adding an
RXU

ANTENNAPO
RT

Overcurre
nt Alarm
Occur
Threshold

OOTHD

850

Adding an
RXU

ANTENNAPO
RT

Overcurre
nt Alarm
Clear
Threshold

OCTHD

750

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Table 3.5 Key parameters related to the RET antenna


Do
ma
in

Config
uratio
n
Object

MO
C

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Example
Value

Ant
enn
a
and
feed
er

Adding
RET

RET

Device No.

DEVICENO

Adding
RET

RET

Control Port Cabinet


No.

CTRLCN

Adding
RET

RET

Control Port Subrack


No.

CTRLSRN

62

Adding
RET

RET

Control Port Slot No.

CTRLSN

Adding
RET

RET

Antenna Type

RETTYPE

Single antenna

Adding
RET

RET

RET Subunit Number

SUBUNITNUM

Adding
RET

RET

Polar Type

POLARTYPE

Equipment
plan

Adding
RET

RET

Antenna Scenario

SCENARIO

REGULAR

Table 3.6 Key parameters related to the RET subunit


Domain

Configur
ation
Object

MOC

Paramet
er Name

Paramet
er ID

Example
Value

Antenna and
feeder

Adding RET

RETSUBU
NIT

Device No.

DEVICEN
O

Adding RET

RETSUBU
NIT

Subunit No.

SUBUNITN
O

Adding RET

RETSUBU
NIT

Connect Port
1 Cabinet
No.

CONNCN1

Adding RET

RETSUBU
NIT

Connect Port
1 Subrack
No.

CONNSRN
1

62

Adding RET

RETSUBU
NIT

Connect Port
1 Slot No.

CONNSN1

Adding RET

RETSUBU
NIT

Connect Port
1 Port No.

CONNPN1

R0A

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

3 Planning Mode Transition

Configur
ation
Object

MOC

Paramet
er Name

Paramet
er ID

Example
Value

Adding RET

RETSUBU
NIT

Connect Port
2 Cabinet
No.

CONNCN2

Adding RET

RETSUBU
NIT

Connect Port
2 Subrack
No.

CONNSRN
2

62

Adding RET

RETSUBU
NIT

Tilt

TILT

20

Table 3.7 Key parameters related to the TMA


Do
ma
in

Config
uratio
n
Object

MO
C

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Example
Value

Ant
enn
a
and
feed
er

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Device No.

DEVICENO

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Control Port Cabinet


No.

CTRLCN

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Control Port Subrack


No.

CTRLSRN

62

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Control Port Slot No.

CTRLSN

Adding a
TMA

TMA

TMA Subunit Number

SUBUNITNUM

Table 3.8 Key parameters related to the TMA subunit


Do
mai
n

Configu
ration
Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

Parameter
ID

Exampl
e Value

Ante
nna
and
feed
er

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Device No.

DEVICENO

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Subunit No.

SUBUNITNO

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Connect Port
Cabinet No.

CONNCN

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Do
mai
n

3 Planning Mode Transition

Configu
ration
Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

Parameter
ID

Exampl
e Value

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Connect Port
Subrack No.

CONNSRN

62

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Connect Port Slot


No.

CONNSN

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Connect Port No.

CONNPN

R0A

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Working Mode

MODE

NORMA
L

Adding a
TMA

TMA

Gain

GAIN

48

If both RX channels of the RXU are configured with the TMA, attenuation must be
configured for the RXBRANCH of both RX channels. The following table describes the
parameters that must be set to configure RX channel attenuation.
Table 3.9 Key parameters related to RX channel attenuation
Do
mai
n

Configu
ration
Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

Parameter
ID

Exampl
e Value

Ante
nna
and
feed
er

Adding
RXU RX
channel 0

RXBRANCH

RX Channel No.

RXNO

Adding
RXU RX
channel 0

RXBRANCH

Logical Switch of
RX Channel

RXSW

ON

Adding
RXU RX
channel 0

RXBRANCH

Attenuation

ATTEN

10

Adding
RXU RX
channel 1

RXBRANCH

RX Channel No.

RXNO

Adding
RXU RX
channel 1

RXBRANCH

Logical Switch of
RX Channel

RXSW

ON

Adding
RXU RX
channel 1

RXBRANCH

Attenuation

ATTEN

10

Ante
nna
and
feed
er

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Service impact
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Table 3.10 Service impact


Scenario

Impact on Services of the Original Mode

Adding an antenna or reusing


the original multiband antenna

Technically, services of the original mode are not


affected. However, the related operations are performed
around antennas, you are advised to evaluate whether
the original RF module shall be blocked based on the
actual site conditions to ensure personal safety.

Replacing the original antenna


with a multiband antenna

Services of the original mode are interrupted during


antenna replacement.

Installing a combiner

Services on the deployed frequency band are affected.


During the combiner installation, services are
interrupted.

3.3.4 Broadband Antenna (Antenna Port) Being


Shared By the Original Mode and New Mode
1. Scenario description and application scope

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Figure 1.1 Broadband antenna

Note that parts highlighted with blue are new components in the preceding figures.
In this scenario of mode transition, a new frequency band of new mode shares the broadband
antenna with one or more frequency bands of the original mode. In such a case, an external
combiner combines signals transmitted on multiple frequency bands.
This scenario has the following characteristics:

Broadband antenna, multimode and multiband shared antenna port

No new feeder

All modes share the same antenna or antenna port and independent RET is not supported.

2. Precautions
1) The combiner model is determined by frequency bands where signals are to be combined.
2) If the RF module is a broadband module providing the same output port for multiple bands
(for example, RRU3961), no external combiner is required.
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

3. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement (hardware)

Table 1.1 Material requirement


Material Type

Material Name

Quantity

Remarks

Board

Antenna

Same as the number


of sectors in the new
mode

Required when the


original antenna is
replaced.

Jumper

The length of the


feeder needs to be
determined
according to the site
survey.

Combiner

Four times the


number of sectors

The combiner model


is determined by
frequency bands
where signals are to
be combined.

Version requirement
None

License requirement
None. The antenna and feeder license of the original mode is used.

Data configuration requirement


None. The antenna and feeder configuration of the original mode is used.

Service impact

Table 1.2 Service impact


Scenario

Impact on Services of the Original Mode

Adding an antenna or reusing


the original multiband antenna

Technically, services of the original mode are not


affected. However, the related operations are performed
around antennas, you are advised to evaluate whether
the original RF module shall be blocked based on the
actual site conditions to ensure personal safety.

Replacing the original antenna


with a multiband antenna

Services of the original mode are interrupted during


antenna replacement.

Installing a combiner

Services on the deployed frequency band are affected.


During the combiner installation, services are
interrupted.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

3.3.5 SDR RF Module of the New Mode Using the


Original Feeder
1. Scenario description and application scope
Figure 1.1 SDR RF module using the original feeder

In this scenario of mode transition, an original antenna or feeder is available for refarming and
no modification is required.
2. Precautions
None
3. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement (hardware)


None. The original antenna and feeder are used.

Version requirement

None
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

License requirement
None. The antenna and feeder license of the original mode is used.

Data configuration requirement

None. The antenna and feeder configuration of the original mode is used.

Service impact

None

3.4 Co-MPT or Separate-MPT Planning


This section describes co-MPT or separate-MPT planning.

3.4.1 Overall Co-MPT or Separate-MPT Planning


Process
Figure 1.1 Overall co-MPT or separate-MPT planning process

The following table provides the comparison between separate-MPT and co-MPT
configurations.
Table 1.1 Comparison between separate-MPT and co-MPT configurations
Comparison Item

Co-MPT

Separate-MPT

Hardware

Only one main control board


(UMPT or UMDU) is
required.

One main control board


(GTMU/WMPT/LMPT/UM
PT) shall be configured for
each mode. One more BBU
is required for a triple-mode
base station. UMDU boards
do not support separateMPT in SRAN10.0.

Inter-RAT decoupling

Tight coupling: NMS,


transmission, clock, and
CPRI MUX are tightly

Loose coupling: dual-star


SDR and independent NMS,
transmission, and clock

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Comparison Item

Co-MPT

Separate-MPT

coupled.

Tight coupling: cotransmission, common


reference clock, and the
CPRI MUX feature

Shared resources

Natural sharing: NMS,


transmission, clock, CPRI,
and baseband resources can
be shared.

Sharing is implemented
through the following
features: co-transmission,
common reference clock,
and CPRI MUX. Baseband
resources cannot be shared
between modes.

Low-cost smooth mode


transition

New mode is deployed in


the same way as the feature
is enabled.

An OM channel must be
enabled for the new mode
and new baseband resources
must be deployed.

UBBP co-baseband

Co-baseband is supported
by UBBP or UMDU boards.

Co-baseband is not
supported by UBBP boards.

Version upgrade

All-at-once upgrade

All-at-once upgrade. Modeby-mode upgrade must be


customized.

O&M experience

Consistent GUL O&M


experience reduces the
learning cost.

O&M experience varies


according to each mode of
GUL.

Note that the BBU3910A supports only co-MPT mode transition but not separate-MPT mode
transition.

Whether Co-MPT or separate-MPT is used depends on whether the new main control board
works in a new mode independently. If multiple modes are added, you need to perform the
operations in the preceding process for each mode. For example, in mode transition from
GSM to G&[U*L], if UMTS is the first mode to be added, UMTS will be deployed on a new
main control board. In this case, separate-MPT is used for mode transition to UMTS but the
NodeB is a co-MPT base station. In addition, if LTE is the second mode to be added, LTE is
deployed on the UMTS main control board. In this case, co-MPT is used for mode transition.

Whether co-MPT reconstruction is required


If the original base station is not a co-MPT base station, co-MPT reconstruction is
required. The following scenarios are included:
1. If the original base station is a separate-MPT base station, deploy all modes on one
main control board to implement co-MPT reconstruction.
2. If the original base station is a single-mode or separate-MPT base station, add a new
mode to an original mode to implement co-MPT reconstruction.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Table 1.2 Scenario analysis of separate-MPT or co-MPT mode transition


Categor
y

SeparateMPT or CoMPT

Scenario

Co-MPT or
separateMPT
planning

Separate-MPT

Adding a Main Control Board of the New Mode to the


Original BBU
Adding a New BBU and a Main Control Board of the
New Mode

Co-MPT mode
expansion

Adding a New Mode to the Co-MPT Base Station


Co-MPT Reconstruction and Adding a New Mode to the
Co-MPT Base Station

3.4.2 Adding a Main Control Board of the New Mode


to the Original BBU
1. Scenario description and application scope

The BBU3900 or BBU3910 supports a maximum of two main control boards. When separateMPT is used, the BBU3900 and BBU3910 support mode transition from a single mode to
dual-mode, for example, transition from GSM to GU or GL, or from UMTS to UL.
This scenario is applicable to the mode transition from single-mode to dual-mode. The
following two applications are supported:

Independent RF module working in the new mode (separate-MPT and co-cabinet)

SDR RF module working in both the original mode and the new mode (separate-MPT
and common mode)

The BBU3910A does not support mode transition when separate-MPT is used and therefore
does not support this scenario.
For details about how to select main control boards, see GUL Base Station Overview and
Selection Guide.
2. Precautions
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

1) In separate-MPT (excluding the hybrid-MPT) scenarios, a single BBU supports a


maximum of two modes, and the main control boards cannot work in active/standby mode.
2) Constraints on BBU power supply and heat dissipation systems affect configurations after
mode transition. You can use the program comprehension tool (PCT)to obtain the
specifications of power supply and heat dissipation for the BBU after mode transition. If
necessary, you need to replace the BBU or the UPEU, or expand the UPEU's capacity
expansion. All these operations interrupt services of the original mode.
3) Pay attention to the impact of BBU capacity expansion on cabinet power support and heat
dissipation. For details, see section "Equipment Auxiliary Planning" in this document.
4) The BBU3910 supports only new types of main control boards such as the GTMUb,
GTMUc, and UMPT.
3. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement

Material Type

Material Name

Quantity

Remarks

Board

UMPT(L)/LMPT

An LTE main
control board is
added.
NOTE
Use a newly delivered
board because such
boards work in the
maintenance mode by
default. If you do not
use a newly delivered
board, this board may
not work in the
maintenance mode,
and a false alarm may
be generated during
mode transition and
services of the newly
deployed mode may
be interrupted.

UMPT(U)/WMPT

A UMTS main
control board is
added.
NOTE
Use a newly delivered
board because such
boards work in the
maintenance mode by
default. If you do not
use a newly delivered
board, this board may
not work in the
maintenance mode,
and a false alarm may
be generated during
mode transition and

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Material Type

Material Name

Quantity

Remarks
services of the newly
deployed mode may
be interrupted.

GTMU

A GSM main control


board is added.

Version requirement

For the mapping relationship between the baseband processing boards and versions, see 3900
Series Base Station Software and Hardware Compatibility Description.

License requirement

No specific license control item is available for the main control board working in a separateMPT multimode base station.
Therefore, a license related to the new mode can be applied for in the same way as that for the
license of each involved mode.
UMPT multimode licenses must be applied for only when the UMPT or UMDU work in co-MPT and
multimode concurrency is applied. If the UMPT/UMDU works only in one mode, there is no need to
apply for such licenses. The UMPT multimode licenses include UMPT Multi Mode license(GSM),
UMPT Multi Mode license(UMTS), UMPT Multi Mode license(LTE FDD), and UMPT Multi Mode
license(LTE TDD).

Data configuration requirement

There is no special data configuration for the newly added main control board working in a
separate-MPT multimode base station. Note that if a multimode feature is required, refer to
the related feature descriptions, such as descriptions about the RF module and common
reference.
For configuration of common resources in a multimode base station, pay attention to the
following items:
- Configure equipment data (such as the power supply, fan, and environment monitoring
board) only for one mode. It is recommended that the equipment data be configured on the
original mode so that no data migration is involved.
In separate-MPT, you are not advised to configure data of mechanical and electrical parts for multiple
modes together because data consistency issues may occur.

- The number of all common resources at the entire site shall be unique. For example, two
non-SDR RF modules working in two different modes cannot have the same cabinet No.,
subrack No., or slot No. The same cabinet No., subrack No., or slot No. must be configured
for SDR RF modules working in two different modes.
For details about data configurations, see the following:
Configuration mode: MML/GUI/SUMMARY
Guidelines: Creating Base Stations > Creating Separate-MPT Multimode Base Stations in
3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Resources required for each mode are managed by a "brain." Environment alarms and fans are
managed by the mode specified manually. That is, you can configure parameters related to the
environment, alarm, and fan only for one mode.

Service impact

Whether SDR Is
Used or Not

Scenario

Impact on Services
of the Original Mode

No SDR

Installing a new main


control board

None

Upgrading software of a
new main control board

None

Activating data
configuration of a new main
control board

None

Replacing a BBU/UPEU

Services of the entire site are


interrupted during the
replacement. During the
replacement of the BBU, if
the original mode is LTE,
the related license needs to
be updated.

Installing a new main


control board

During the installation of the


main control board, if the
SDR is used, services of the
deployed mode may be
affected for a short period of
time due to timing loop.

Upgrading software of a
new main control board

If the SDR RF module needs


to be upgraded, services of
the original mode carried by
the SDR RF module will be
interrupted for about one
minute.

Activating data
configuration of a new main
control board

When a cell of the new


mode is established on the
SDR RF module, services of
the original mode will be
affected for a short period of
time.

Replacing a BBU/UPEU

Services of the entire site are


interrupted during the
replacement. During the
replacement of the BBU, if
the original mode is LTE,
the related license needs to
be updated.

SDR

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

3.4.3 Adding a new BBU and a Main Control Board of


the New Mode
1. Scenario description and application scope

A maximum of two main control boards can be configured in a BBU3900 or BBU3910.


Therefore, adding a BBU and a mode applies to mode transmission from dual modes to triple
modes. The related typical scenarios are mode transmission from G&U to G&U+L or G&L to
G&L+U.
The BBU3910A does not support mode transition when separate-MPT is used and therefore
does not support this scenario.
For details about how to select BBUs and main control boards, see the following references:
Selection of BBUs: GUL Base Station Overview and Selection Guide
Selection of main control boards: GUL Base Station Overview and Selection Guide
2. Precautions
1) BBUs must be interconnected for mode transition where a new BBU is added and the two
BBUs work in multiple modes. For details, see BBU Interconnection Feature Parameter
Description.
2) The GTMU must be deployed in the primary BBU subrack.
3) A BBU3900/BBU3910 cannot be interconnected with a BBU3910A. Therefore, mode
addition cannot be performed between BBU3900/BBU3910 and BBU3910A.
3. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement

Material Type

Material Name

Quantity

Board

BBU

UMPT

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Remarks

66

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Version requirement

For the mapping relationship between the main control boards and versions, see 3900 Series
Base Station Software and Hardware Compatibility Description.

License requirement

No specific license control item is available for the main control board working in a separateMPT multimode base station.
Therefore, a license related to the new mode can be applied for in the same way as that for the
license of each involved mode.
UMPT multimode licenses must be applied for only when the UMPT or UMDU work in co-MPT and
multimode concurrency is applied. If the UMPT/UMDU works only in one mode, there is no need to
apply for such licenses. The UMPT multimode licenses include UMPT Multi Mode license(GSM),
UMPT Multi Mode license(UMTS), UMPT Multi Mode license(LTE FDD), and UMPT Multi Mode
license(LTE TDD).

Data configuration requirement

There is no special data configuration for the newly added main control board working in a
separate-MPT multimode base station. Note that if a multimode feature is required, refer to
the related feature descriptions, such as descriptions about the RF module and common
reference.
For configuration of common resources in a multimode base station, pay attention to the
following items:
- Configure equipment data (such as the power supply, fan, and environment monitoring
board) only for one mode. It is recommended that the equipment data be configured on the
original mode so that no data migration is involved. When two BBUs are used, all the
equipment is connected to the primary BBU subrack and such equipment data is configured in
one mode of the primary BBU subrack.
- The number of all common resources at the entire site shall be unique. For example, two
non-SDR RF modules working in two different modes cannot have the same cabinet No.,
subrack No., or slot No. The same cabinet No., subrack No., or slot No. must be configured
for SDR RF modules working in two different modes.
- BBU interconnection data must be configured when two BBUs are used. For details, see
section BBU Interconnection Feature Parameter Description in this document.
You can use the GUI, summary data file, or MML commands to configure the data.
For details, see 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide. The related descriptions
can be obtained by choosing Creating Base Stations > Creating Separate-MPT Multimode
Base Stations.
Resources required for each mode are managed by a "brain." Environment alarms and fans are
managed by the mode specified manually. That is, you can configure parameters related to the
environment, alarm, and fan only for one mode.

Service impact

Whether SDR Is
Used or Not

Scenario

Impact on Services
of the Original Mode

No SDR

Installing a new main

None

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Whether SDR Is
Used or Not

Scenario

Impact on Services
of the Original Mode

control board

Inter-BBU SDR

Installing a BBU working in


a new mode

None

Upgrading software of a
new main control board

None

Activating data
configuration of a new main
control board

None

Installing a main control


board in the secondary BBU
subrack

None

Installing a BBU working in


a new mode

None

Upgrading software of a
new main control board

If the SDR RF module needs


to be upgraded, services of
the original mode carried by
the SDR RF module will be
interrupted for about one
minute.

Activating data
configuration of a new main
control board

When a cell of the new mode


is established on the SDR
RF module, services of the
original mode will be
affected for a short period of
time (No CS call drop but a
decrease in the PS service
rate within 3 seconds).

3.4.4 Adding a New Mode to the Co-MPT Base


Station
1. Scenario description and application scope
If the original base station is a co-MPT multimode base station, add a new mode directly, for
example, a multimode co-MPT BTS3900 base station.
All types of BBUs support this scenario.
Main control board selection: None
2. Precautions
- A new mode can be added to the original base station if it is a co-MPT multimode base
station (such as BTS3900) and Deployment Mode of the MPT configuration is set to
CONCURRENT(Concurrent). If the Deployment Mode of the MPT configuration is set to
NON-CONCURRENT(Non-concurrent), a new mode cannot be added. In this case, you
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

need to set Deployment Mode to CONCURRENT(Concurrent) before adding a mode. This


modification resets the base station.
2) A new mode to be added must be of the same version as the existing mode in most cases.
That is, the source mode of an original main control board must be upgraded to the target
version in advance.
3. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement

N/A

Version requirement

Only versions later than SRAN8.0 support this scenario.

License requirement

UMPT multimode license


The following table provides UMPT multimode licenses that need to be purchased.
License
Control Item
Name

License
BBOM

License
Abbreviatio
n

Sales
Unit

Mode

UMPT Multi Mode


License (GSM) (per
UMPT)

82204202

LGB3UMML01

Per BTS

GSM

UMPT Multi Mode


License (UMTS) (per
UMPT)

82203981

LQW9GUDM0
1

Per
NodeB

UMTS

UMPT Multi Mode


License (per UMPT)
(FDD)

82204259

LLT1UMML01

Per
eNodeB

LTE

UMPT Multi Mode


License (per UMPT)
(TDD)

82204285

LLT1TUMML0
1

Per
eNodeB

LTE

All the preceding multimode licenses are required only when co-MPT multimode concurrency is used
for the UMPT/UMDU. No license is required for the first mode of a co-MPT base station. However,
such licenses are required for other modes of the base station.

License related to the new mode


A new license of the new mode must be purchased.

Data configuration requirement

Original mode:
No data modification is involved for the original mode in terms of MPT configuration.
New mode:
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

The configuration data of the new mode must be complete, including RAT data, RF data,
transmission data, and sector data.
For mode transition from FDD only or TDD only to FDD and TDD concurrency, MOs such
as Application, Function, and X2/S1 do not need to be configured during configuration
(unless required by customers), and the operations are similar to adding an inter-frequency
cell in the same mode. For example, if the original base station has only TDD cells working
on the 2.3 GHz frequency band, add TDD cells working on the 2.6 GHz frequency band. For
details, see the related description in 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide >
Cell Data Reconfigurations.
The following table provides the related MO and parameter.
MO

Param
eter
Name

Paramet
er ID

CME
Paramet
er Name

Setting Notes

NODE

Working
Mode

WM

Working
Mode

Set this parameter to


CONCURRENT(Concurrent).

Service impact

Scenario

Impact on Services of the Original Mode

Adding a new mode for mode


expansion with co-MPT
configuration

Services of the original mode are not affected.

3.4.5 Co-MPT Reconstruction and Adding a New


Mode to the Co-MPT Base Station
1. Scenario description and application scope
If the original base station is a separate-MPT or single-mode base station, firstly perform the
co-MPT reconstruction, and add the new mode.
For scenarios where co-MPT reconstruction is supported, see Co-MPT Reconstruction
Scenarios.
Main control board selection
Only the UMPT series boards support the co-MPT mode. If the main control board does not
support co-MPT, replace the main control board. For example, the UMPTa6 does not support
co-MPT. For the specifications of UMPT boards, see BBU Hardware Description >
BBU3900 and BBU3910 Hardware Description > BBU3900 and BBU3910 Boards >
UMPT in 3900 Series Base Station Product Documentation.
2. Precautions
1) If the original base station is a GBTS, reconstruct the GBTS into an eGBTS by abandoning
the GTMU or using GTMU evolution.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

If the GTMU is to be abandoned, CPRI ports on the UBBP or a newly added UBRI can
be used for the GSM mode. The main control and transmission function can be
implemented on the UMPT board (the UMPT does not support TDM transmission).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

In GTMU evolution scenarios, CPRI ports remain on the GTMU. If the transmission
mode is IP over E1, the transmission ports remain on the GTMU. If the transmission
mode is IP over GE/FE, the transmission ports must be provided by the UMPT.

If the GBTS uses TDM transmission before the reconstruction, first change TDM
transmission into IP transmission and then perform a GBTS-to-eGBTS reconstruction.
2) The mode to be added after the co-MPT reconstruction must be of the same version as the
existing mode.
3. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement

Material Type

Material Name

Quantity

Remarks

Board

UMPT

Prepare UMPT boards if the


base station does not use
UMPT boards before coMPT reconstruction.

UBRI

Prepare UBRI boards if


GSM co-MPT
reconstruction is required
and the UBRI board
provides CPRI fiber optical
cables for the GSM mode.

Version requirement

Only versions later than SRAN8.0 support this scenario.


If the GBTS is to be reconstructed into a co-MPT base station, prepare the GTMU evolution
software if you use the evolved GTMU. To obtain the GTMU evolution software (whose
version is V900), visit http://support.huawei.com/carrier/ and choose Support > Product
Support > Wireless Network > Wireless Network Common > SingleRAN >
SingleRAN_MBTS.

License requirement: UMPT multimode license

The following table provides UMPT multimode licenses that need to be purchased.
License
Control Item
Name

License
BBOM

License
Abbreviatio
n

Sales
Unit

Mode

UMPT Multi Mode


License (GSM) (per
UMPT)

82204202

LGB3UMML01

per BTS

GSM

UMPT Multi Mode


License (UMTS)
(per UMPT)

82203981

LQW9GUDM0
1

per
NodeB

UMTS

UMPT Multi Mode


License (per UMPT)
(FDD)

82204259

LLT1UMML01

per
eNodeB

LTE

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

License
Control Item
Name

License
BBOM

License
Abbreviatio
n

Sales
Unit

Mode

UMPT Multi Mode


License (per UMPT)
(TDD)

82204285

LLT1TUMML0
1

per
eNodeB

LTE

All the preceding multimode licenses are required only when co-MPT multimode concurrency is used
for the UMPT/UMDU. No license is required for the first mode of a co-MPT base station. However,
such licenses are required for other modes of the base station.

2. License related to the new mode


A new license of the new mode must be purchased.
3. GSM License
If a GBTS to be reconstructed into an eGBTS through co-MPT reconstruction, the license of
the GBTS must be divided. For details, see 12.2 Preparing GSM Licenses.
In GBSS R15.0, the control mechanism of BTS license is changed. The main change is that
eGBTS controls those features quoted in BTS independently. Before enable or use these
features, GTS should allocate sufficient licenses on U2000 eGBTS License Management
View. Otherwise, these features cannot be enabled and CS/PS transaction may even be
infected. The following table describes how to allocate license of those BTS features for each
eGBTS.
1.

The Features Included by eGBTS License File But Not Supported by the eGBTS
Site

Featu
re ID

License
Descriptio
n

Sale
Unit

GBTS
Suppo
rted

eGBTS
Suppor
ted

License allocating
guidance for newly
built eGBTS

High Power
(per TRX)

Per
TRX

Yes

No

License = 0

TRU which
works as
Multitransceivers
Resource of
the 3rd
generation
BTS (per
TRX)

Per
TRX

Yes

No

License = 0

BBU Carrier
Capacity
License (per
TRX)

per
TRX

Yes

No

License = 0

GBFD115901

PBT(Power
Boost
Technology)

Per
TRX

Yes

No

License = 0

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Featu
re ID

3 Planning Mode Transition

License
Descriptio
n

Sale
Unit

GBTS
Suppo
rted

eGBTS
Suppor
ted

License allocating
guidance for newly
built eGBTS

(per TRX)
GBFD115902

Transmit
Diversity (per
TRX)

Per
TRX

Yes

No

License = 0

BTS3900B
Transceiver
Resource (per
TRX)

Per
TRX

Yes

No

License = 0

2.

The Features Supported by eGBTS Site R15.0

Multi-Carrier
60 W High
Power License
(per TRX)

Per
TRX

Yes

Yes

License = the number of


activated TRXs of GBTS
with GBTS Power Type (w)
set in [60 W, 80 W).
Related BSC MML:
LST GTRXDEV

Multi-Carrier
80 W High
Power License
(per TRX)

Per
TRX

Yes

Yes

License = the number of


TRXs of GBTS with GBTS
Power Type (w) set in (80
W).
Related BSC MML:
LST GTRXDEV

TRU which
works as
Multitransceivers
Resource of
3900 (per
TRX)

Per
TRX

Yes

Yes

Non-SubSite scene:
License = the number of
logical TRXs of eGBTS
the number of include GSM
TRX's Boards.
SubSite scene(Supported
begin eGBTS R16.0):
(1) International and China
Unicom: License = the
number of logical TRXs of
eGBTS * the number of
location groups the
number of RXUs from all
location groups.
(2) China Mobile:
License = the number of
logical TRXs of eGBTS
the number of RXUs from
the most RXUs location

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

group.
Related BSC MML:
LST GTRX;
LST BTSLOCGRPE;
Related eGBTS MML:
LST
GTRXGROUPSECTOREQ
M LST SECTOREQM
MRFD211801

Multi-mode
Dynamic
Power
Sharing(GSM)
(per Site)

Per Site

Yes

Yes

license = 1 if eGBTS's
Power Sharing Type set to
GUPWRSHR (GU Power
Sharing).
Related eGBTS MML:
LST GBTSPWRSHRGRP;

MRFD211703

2.0 MHz
Central
Frequency
point
separation
between GSM
and UMTS
mode(GSM)
(per Site)

Per Site

Yes

Yes

The license of this feature is


not checked in BTS. When
manually allocating the
license to eGBTS, GTS
should contact the Huawei
salesman and allocate 1
license for each eGBTS for
which the customer has
bought this feature.

MRFD211804

GSM Power
Control on
Interference
Frequency for
GU Small
Frequency
gap(GSM)
(per Site)

per
BTS

Yes

Yes

License = 1 if at least one


cell of the eGBTS set
Frequency-based Power
Control to ON.

MRFD211505

Bandwidth
sharing of
MBTS Multimode CoTransmission(
GBTS) (per
Site)

Per Site

Yes

Yes

The license of this feature is


not checked in BTS. When
manually allocating the
license to eGBTS, GTS
should contact the Huawei
salesman and allocate 1
license for each eGBTS for
which the customer has
bought this feature.

MRFD211602

Multi-mode
BS Common
IPSec(GSM)
(per Site)

per
BTS

Yes

Yes

The license of this feature is


not checked in BTS. When
manually allocating the
license to eGBTS, GTS
should contact the Huawei
salesman and allocate 1
license for each eGBTS for

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Related eGBTS MML:


LST GLOCELLALGPARA

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

which the customer has


bought this feature.
MRFD211802

MRFD211803

GSM and
UMTS
Dynamic
Spectrum
Sharing(GSM)
(per Site)

per
BTS

Dynamic MA
for GU
Dynamic
Spectrum
Sharing(GSM)
(per Site)

per
BTS

Yes

Yes

License = 1 if Spectrum
Sharing Allowed of eGBTS
set to YES.
Related BSC MML:
LST GDSSPARA

Yes

Yes

License = 1 if in a eGBTS,
at least one channel's FH
Index Used After Frequency
Spectrum Sharing set to
value in range [0,63].
Related BSC MML:
LST GTRXCHANHOP;

MRFD211806

GSM and LTE


Dynamic
Power
Sharing(GSM)
(per Site)

Per
BTS

Yes

Yes

license = 1 if eGBTS's
Power Sharing Type set to
GLPWRSHR (GL Power
Sharing).
Related eGBTS MML:
LST GBTSPWRSHRGRP;

MRFD211901

Multi-RAT
Carrier Joint
Shutdown(GB
TS) (per Site)

Per
BTS

Yes

Yes

License = 1 if in the eGBTS,


at least one cell's Inter -RAT
Cell Dynamic Shutdown set
to ON.
Related BSC MML:
LST GCELLSOFT

GBFD116602

IPSec Bypass
(per Site)

Per
BTS

No

Yes

License = 1 If eGBTS need


to open this feature by set
IPSec Bypass Switch to
ENABLE.
Related eGBTS MML:
LST IPSECBYPASSCFG

UMPT MultiMode
License(GSM)
(per UMPT)

Per
UMPT

No

Yes

1. license = 0 for each


eGBTS if in GO scenario
building eGBTS.
2. license = 0 for each
eGBTS if building multiRAT (with G) co-MPT
SRAN BTS (GU/GL/GUL).
3. license = 1 for each
eGBTS when expanding GRAT for multi-RAT (without
G) co-MPT SRAN BTS
(such as UL->GUL).

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Antenna
Intermodulatio
n Performance
Detection (per
TRX)

Per
TRX

Yes

Yes

The license check of this


feature is triggered by
related maintaining MML. If
this feature is needed,
license = the number of
activated logical TRXs of
each eGBTS.
Related eGBTS MML:
STR RFTEST;
STR GBTSRFTST

Extended
Spectrum Scan
(per TRX)

Per
TRX

Yes

Yes

The license check of this


feature is triggered by
related eGBTS LMT GUI
maintaining function. If this
feature is needed, license =
the number of activated
logical TRXs of each
eGBTS.
Related eGBTS LMT GUI
maintenance function:
Offline spectrum scan
monitoring

3.

The Features Supported by eGBTS Site R15.1

Feature
ID

License
Descripti
on

Sal
e
Uni
t

GBTS
Supp
orted

eGBTS
Suppor
ted

License allocating
guidance for newly
built eGBTS

GBFD151202

BTS IP
Active
Performance
Measuremen
t (per Site)

Per
BTS

No

Yes

license = 1 if eGBTS's
TWAMPCLIENT or
TWAMPRESPONDER
function is enabled.
Related BTS MML:
LST TWAMPCLIENT
LST TWAMPRESPONDER

4.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

The Features Supported by eGBTS Site R16.0

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Featu
re ID

License
Descriptio
n

Sale
Unit

GB
TS
Su
pp
ort
ed

eG
BT
S
Su
pp
ort
ed

License allocating
guidance for newly built
eGBTS

SubSite
Solution
License (per
Module)

Per
Module

Yes

Yes

License = the number of RXUs


which belong to the eGBTS location
group the number of RXUs which
belong to the location group which
has the most RXUs.
Related BSC MML:
LST BTSLOCGRPE
Related BTS MML:
LST SECTOR
LST RRU

RFU co-cell
Solution
License (per
Module)

Per
Module

Yes

Yes

License = the number of RFUs


which belong to the eGBTS location
group
Related BSC MML:
LST BTSLOCGRPE
Related BTS MML:
LST SECTOR
LST RRU

GBFD115903

4-Way
Receiver
Diversity (per
TRX)

Per
TRX

Yes

Yes

License = the number of TRXs


which is configured 4-Way Receiver
Diversity.
Related BSC MML:
LST GTRX
Related BTS MML:
LST GTRXGROUP

GBFD160209

GBFD160210

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

UBBP MultiMode license


(GSM) (Per
Module)

Per
Module

IPSec
redundancy
among multiSeGWs (per
BTS)

Per
BTS

BTS
supporting
PKI
redundancy

Per
BTS

Yes

Yes

License = the number of


GBTSBBRES
Related BTS MML:
LST GBTSBBRES

No

Yes

license = 1 if eGBTS's IPSec


redundancy function is enabled.
Related BTS MML:
LST IKEPEER

No

Yes

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

license = 1 if eGBTS's PKI


redundancy function is enabled.
Related BTS MML:

77

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Featu
re ID

3 Planning Mode Transition

License
Descriptio
n

Sale
Unit

GB
TS
Su
pp
ort
ed

eG
BT
S
Su
pp
ort
ed

(per BTS)

License allocating
guidance for newly built
eGBTS

LST CA
LST CRLTSK

MRFD261103

AAS RAT
Specific
Tilting (GSM)
(Per RU)

Per RU

No

Yes

The license of this feature is not


checked in BTS. When manually
allocating the license to eGBTS,
GTS should contact the Huawei
salesman and allocate the number of
licenses which equals the number of
AASs which the customer has
bought.

Not
Commer
cial

AAS Virtual
Four Uplink
Channels for
GSM (per
RU)

Per RU

No

Yes

License = the number of AARUs


whose four virtual ports are used as
the receiving channel by
GTRXGROUP.
Related BTS MML:
LST GTRXGROUP
LST GTRXGROUPSECTOREQM
LST AARU

5.

The Features Supported by eGBTS Site R17.0

Featu
re ID

License
Descriptio
n

Sale
Unit

GB
TS
Su
pp
ort
ed

eG
BTS
Sup
por
ted

License allocating
guidance for newly built
eGBTS

GBFD170205

GTMUb
SingleOM
(Per BTS)

per
BTS

No

Yes

license = 1 if the GTMUb functions


as the main control board of the
eGBTS.
Ralated eGBTS MML:
DSP BRDMFRINFO

6.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

The Features Supported by eGBTS Site R17.1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

78

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Featur
e ID

License
Descriptio
n

Sale
Unit

GB
TS
Sup
por
ted

eG
BT
S
Su
pp
ort
ed

License allocating
guidance for newly built
eGBTS

GBFD171205

BTS
Supporting
Multi-Carrier
PKI (per
BTS)

per
BTS

No

Yes

license = 1 if eGBTS's configuration


MPT is GTMU.

GBFD171206

BTS
Supporting
IPSec
Redirection
(per BTS)

per
BTS

No

Yes

The license of this feature is not


checked in BTS. When manually
allocating the license to eGBTS,
GTS should contact the Huawei
salesman and allocate 1 license to
the base station which the customer
has bought.

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(GSM) (Per
Band per
RRU)

per
Band
per
RRU

Yes

Yes

Calculate the number of all the


frequency bands used by multi-band
RRU in all the GSM cells.

Related BTS MML:


DSP BRD

Related BTS MML:


LST GTRX
Related BTS MML:
LST GTRXGROUPSECTOREQM
LST SECTOREQM

7.

The Features Supported by eGBTS Site R18.1

Featur
e ID

License
Descriptio
n

Sale
Unit

GBT
S
Sup
por
ted

eG
BT
S
Su
pp
ort
ed

License allocating
guidance for newly built
eGBTS

GBFD181202

BTS
Supporting
Digital
Certificate
Whitelist
Management
(Per BTS)

per
BTS

No

Yes

license = 1 if eGBTS is opened the


switch of IKECHECKSW.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Related BTS MML:


LST CERTCFG

Data configuration requirement

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Perform co-MPT reconstruction for the original mode and expand the capacity for the new
mode after the co-MPT reconstruction is finished.
The configuration data must be modified when the co-MPT reconstruction is performed.
New mode:
The configuration data of the new mode must be complete, including RAT data, RF data,
transmission data, and sector data.
For mode transition from FDD only or TDD only to FDD and TDD concurrency, MOs such
as Application, Function, and X2/S1 do not need to be configured during configuration
(unless required by customers), and the operations are similar to adding an inter-frequency
cell in the same mode. For example, if the original base station has only TDD cells working
on the 2.3 GHz frequency band, add TDD cells working on the 2.6 GHz frequency band. For
details, see the related description in 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide >
Cell Data Reconfigurations.
The following table provides the related MO and parameter.
MO

Param
eter
Name

Paramet
er ID

CME
Paramet
er Name

Setting Notes

NODE

Working
Mode

WM

Working
Mode

Set this parameter to


CONCURRENT(Concurrent).

1. Filling in the data planning tables for co-MPT reconstruction

For the BSC redundancy scenario, two data planning tables need to be filled out. One is
for the primary BSC and the other for the secondary BSC.

The BBU3910A only supports the co-MPT reconstruction in UMTS only or LTE only
scenario. Therefore, you only need to fill in the ConvertFlag, NodeBName, or
eNodeBName field in the SitePlanning page.

(1) Filling in the GlobalPlanning page


Enter information for all co-MPT scenarios on this page.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Fill in the following fields when GSM mode is involved:


a.

BscSctpIdBase must be configured, making different base stations controlled by


one base station controller use different values.

b.

BtsSctpPortBase and BtsTrxPerSctp use the planned values. In the BSC node
redundancy scenario, BtsSctpPortBase and BtsTrxPerSctp must be set to the same
value in the data planning tables of the primary BSC and secondary BSC.

c.

BtsOMCHPeerIP: Enter the IP address of the U2000. This field is mandatory for
GO reconstruction and batch reconstruction scenarios.

d.

BtsOMCHPeerIPMask: Enter the IP mask of the U2000. This field is mandatory


for GO reconstruction and batch reconstruction scenarios.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

e.

WORKMODE: Enter T1, E1_BA, or E1_UNBA according to the actual


transmission mode used by the GBTS. T1 means T1 transmission; E1_BA means
120 ohm impedance; E1_UNBA means 75 ohm impedance.

f.

ActBTSSoftwareVersion: If the GTMU is evolved into a board providing only


CPRI ports, enter the version of the GTMU evolution software. The GTMU
abandoning scenario is not involved.

g.

BSCNodeRedundancyBSCName: For the BSC redundancy scenario, fill in this


field in two data planning tables. In the table for the primary BSC, enter the primary
BSC's name. In the table for the secondary BSC, enter the secondary BSC's name.
In non-BSC-redundancy scenario, leave this field blank.

h.

ActGTMUSoftwareVersion: This field is used in the GTMU SingleOM


reconstruction scenario. Enter the version of the GTMU SingleOM reconstruction
package. The version of the GTMUb SingleOM reconstruction software is a special
V900 version, for example, BTS3900V900R011C00.

Fill in the following field when an MBTS is involved:


SRANBaselineRAT: Leave this field unspecified for a single mode base station. This
field is optional for an MBTS. If this field is left unspecified for an MBTS, data is
configured based on the more recent mode. Fill this field with SingleRAN in hybridMPT reconstruction scenarios. For example, enter U for the GU co-MPT reconstruction
scenario, L for the GL co-MPT reconstruction scenario, and U or L for the UL co-MPT
reconstruction scenario. For the GU+L/GL+U BBU interconnection co-MPT
reconstruction scenario, enter the non-GSM RAT in the primary BBU. For the con-MPT
reconstruction scenarios where two BBUs are combined into one, enter the mode that the
OMCH channel is used for transmission after the co-MPT construction.

The UMTS only or LTE only reconstruction scenario is not involved in this page.

(2) Filling in the SitePlanning page

If multiple base stations are reconstructed, the planning data of each base station must be
filled. Each row corresponds to a base station. Do not leave any blank row between two filled
rows. Otherwise, the data cannot be converted.
To reduce the GSM service interruption duration, load the GTMUb conversion software
before the GU/GL/GU+L/GL+U co-MPT reconstruction. In this scenario, you are advised to
perform reconstruction for ten sites at a time. The BSC script is executed in serial. If too many
sites are reconstructed in a batch, execution of the script may not be finished within the
required duration (8 to 12 minutes) of service interruption.
If GSM base stations are cascaded using IPoE1, it is recommended that the cascaded BTSs be
reconstructed in a batch. In the GO co-MPT reconstruction scenario, you are advised to
reconstruct all the cascaded base stations at the same time, which will reduce service
interruption duration. For the co-MPT reconstruction for GU, GL, and GUL base stations,
when activating the GTMU conversion software, you are advised to activate the base stations
from the lowest cascading level to the first level. When starting a PnP task, execute the
Download BSC Configuration Data command only on the base stations of the first
cascading level.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

ScenarioId: It is a reserved parameter and used for future expansion. It does not need to
be specified.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

ConvertFlag: "Yes" indicates that the configuration data for the site corresponding to
this row needs to be converted.

BtsName, NodeBName, eNodeBName, or SRANNameBfConvert: name of the base


station to be reconstructed, mandatory. SRANNameBfConvert indicates the name of the
co-MPT base station before reconstruction.

SRANName: name of the co-MPT base station after reconstruction. It must be different
from the base station name before reconstruction. If it is left blank, a name of the base
station with the reference mode will be created automatically. The name that is
automatically created uses the NE name of the reference mode specified by the
SRANBaselineRAT field. If SRANBaselineRAT is left unspecified, the NE name of a
more recent mode is used. SRANBaselineRAT must be set to SingleRAN for a hybridMPT base station. If SRANName is unspecified for the hybrid-MPT base station, the
value of SRANNameBfConvert is used.

OMCHLocalIP and OMCHLocalIPMask: Local IP address and mask of the OM


channel used by the eGBTS after reconstruction. It is used only for GO reconstruction
scenarios. The parameters are optional. If this parameter is not specified, the BTS IP and
mask of the original GBTS are automatically generated.

NextHop: mandatory when the GBTS uses IPoFE. Enter the next-hop IP address of the
Ethernet interface of the GBTS. (When GSM uses Ethernet transmission, this parameter
must be specified to ensure that a correct route is generated on the GSM side. When the
Abis interface uses layer-2 networking mode, the IP address of the BTS gateway is the
interface IP address of board where the BSC IP address is located. When non-cotransmission or co-transmission based on panel interconnection is used, enter the nexthop IP address on the GSM side and the IP address must be on the same network
segment as the IP address of the Ethernet port type of the BTSDEVIP, and the IP address
cannot be the same as BTSDEVIP. When co-transmission through backplane
interconnection is used, enter the next-hop IP address of the board that provides
transmission, and it must be in the same network segment as the DEVIP of the board but
cannot be the same as the DEVIP.)

IPHCSUBOPT: Fill in this field according to the actual situation (When the base station
directly connects to the base station controller using IP over E1 or connects to the upperlevel base station, set it to DISABLE. When the base station connects to a router using IP
over E1, set it to ENABLE).

IPoE1OMIP: Enter the original BTSIP or an IP address in the same network segment as
the IP address of the original PPP/MP port. When GSM mode uses transmission of
IP_OVER_FE/GE_AND_E1(E1 backup), this parameter is mandatory.

ClkSrc: used for base station clock data conversion. The default value NULL indicates
that the clock synchronization is performed in the default order of priority as follows:
GPS > IPCLK > SYNCETH > LINECLK > TOD > BITS > SYNCETH+IPCLK. For a
hybrid clock reference source, you are advised to run the SET CLKMODE command to
manually configure it.

GTMU Abandoned, UMPTSlot, and GTMU CPRI Move TemplateName: For the
GTMU abandoning scenario, the parameters must be filled. They specify the slot that
holds the main control board where the GSM mode is deployed and the CPRI adjustment
mode of the abandoned GTMU. The CPRI adjustment method of the abandoned GTMU
depends on the information that is filled in the MultiCpriChainMoveTemplate sheet.

RetainPeerMPT: Specifies whether a UMPT working in non-baseline mode continues


to be used.
If a UMPT working in non-baseline RAT continues to be used, set it to Yes. In this case,
the RAT of the board will be changed and the board will be degraded to a secondary or
standby board. (In this case, if the main control board working in non-baseline RAT is
not detected or powered on, the reconstruction fails.)

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

If a UMPT working in non-baseline RAT will not be used any longer, set it to No. In this
case, the peer main control processing unit will be degraded to a slave or standby board
using an MML command manually rather than during the reconstruction or the board can
be relocated to be used in other places.
If the peer main control processing unit is a GTMU/WMPT/LMPT, this field does not
affect the reconstruction process.

MultiBBUCombFlag and MultiBBUCombTemplateName


If two BBUs that are combined into one BBU through co-MPT reconstruction, this field
is mandatory. It is used to plan the mode in which two BBUs are combined into one
BBU. The adjustment mode must be entered in the MultiBBUCombTemplate sheet.

MPTType
Main control board type after the co-MPT reconstruction, mandatory The default value is
UMPT if the parameter is not filled out.
In the GTMU SingleOM scenario, the field must be filled with GTMUb or GTMUc. The
fields used in the GTMU abandoning scenario must not be selected. The field and the
fields involved in the GTMU abandoning scenario are mutually exclusive.

UmptBrdspec
Hardware type of the UMPT after the reconstruction, optional The default value is
UMPTa or UMPTb if the parameter is not filled out.
If the main control board for a co-MPT base station is the UMPTe in reconstruction
scenarios, fill this field with UMPTe.

The UMPTa/b and UMPTe with the same specifications have the same model but different
capabilities. The configured specifications after reconstruction may exceed the board
capability. Therefore, the configuration cannot take effect even though succeeds. It is
recommended that the configured specifications be checked to determine whether they have
exceeded the actual board capability. If they have exceeded the actual board capability, the
extra specifications cannot take effect. For details, see the notes for the following MML
commands in the MML reference of 3900 Series Base Station MML reference:
ADD CPBEARER
ADD SCTPLNK
ADD ACL
ADD ACLRULE
ADD IPSECPOLICY
ADD IKEPEER
ADD SECURITYPEER
ADD SCTPPEER

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

UmptBrdspec indicates the type of a UMPT after reconstruction and its default
value is UMPTa or UMPTb. Fill this field according to the actual situation.
Otherwise, the configurations cannot take effect after reconstruction because the
UMPTa/b and UMPTe support different cell specifications.

If the base station before reconstruction uses E1/T1 transmission (including E1/T1
over IP or E1/T1 over ATM), the UMPTe cannot serve as the main control board for
the co-MPT base station after reconstruction because the UMPTe does not support
E1/T1 transmission.

If the UMPTe serves as the main control board for the co-MPT base station after
reconstruction, the main control boards (including WMPT and LMPT) before
reconstruction are abandoned and removed from the subrack, and the main control
board (UMPTa/b) before reconstruction is retained and serves as the signaling
extension board for the UMPTe.

LmptEthPort0Attribute and LmptEthPort1Attribute


The two fields must be set if the main control board is reconstructed from an LMPT to a
UMPTe.
The two fields indicate the optical/electrical attributes of the Ethernet ports 0 and 1 on
the LMPT. If the two fields are not filled out, NULL is used by default. If Ethernet ports
0 and 1 on the LMPT are used and the optical/electrical attributes are not configured or
being set to AUTO, the two fields must be filled out.

The system converts the data configurations according to the following principles and
the actual transmission must also be deployed as follows:
LMPT electrical port 0 is converted to UMPTe electrical port 0.
LMPT electrical port 1 is converted to UMPTe electrical port 2.
LMPT optical port 0 is converted to UMPTe optical port 1.
LMPT optical port 1 is converted to UMPTe optical port 3.

OnlyConvertBaselineTranFlag
From SRAN10.1 onwards, the transport data of only the reference mode is incorporated
into the co-MPT base station during co-MPT data conversion. Fill this field with Yes.
Its default value is No, indicating that transport data of both reference and non-reference
modes is incorporated.
If OnlyConvertBaselineTranFlag on the SitePlanning page is set to Yes, the transport data of only the
reference mode is incorporated into the co-MPT base station and that of the non-reference mode must be
manually entered according to the actual situation. For the method of manual configuration, see 3900
Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide > Configuring Transport Data About the Co-MPT Base
Station in 3900 Series Base Station Product Documentation.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

(3) Filling out the MultiCpriChainMoveTemplate Sheet


This template must be filled out in the reconstruction scenario where the GSM mode is included and the
GTMU is to be abandoned.

The CPRI adjustment method of the abandoned GTMU depends on the information that is
filled in the MultiCpriChainMoveTemplate sheet.
In scenarios where the GTMU is to be abandoned and GSM baseband signals are processed
by RF modules, a UBRI or UBBPd can be added during the reconstruction to carry CPRI
signals of GSM. Alternatively, the UBBPd for UMTS or LTE can also be used to carry the
CPRI signals of GSM. In scenarios where the baseband processing board of UMTS or LTE is
WBBP or LBBP, respectively, the WBBP or LBBP cannot be replaced with the UBBPd during
the reconstruction. Therefore, a UBRI is added to carry the CPRI signals of GSM.
For example, Default_Template is used in GTMU abandoning scenarios where the UMTS
baseband processing board is WBBP and a UBRI is to be added for processing GSM signals.
Move all the CPRI ports on the GTMU to the UBRI in slot 1, as shown in the following
templates.

All CPRI ports on the GTMU to be abandoned must be filled in the following table for the
replacement. The GTMU CPRIPort field indicates a CPRI port on the GTMU. The GTMU
CPRIPort Need CpriMux field indicates whether CPRI-Sharing is used by GSM CPRI ports
after the relocation. The Dest UBRI/UBBP BrdType, Dest UBRI/UBBP Slot, and Dest
UBRI/UBBP CPRIPort fields indicate the positions where the GTMU CPRI ports are
located after being relocated.

In the GTMU abandoning scenario where the baseband processing board of UMTS or LTE is
the UBBPd, if there is no idle CPRI port on the UBBPd, you can set the GTMU CPRIPort
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Need CpriMux field to convert the CPRI dual-star typology before the reconstruction to the
CPRI chain typology. As shown in the following table, move the CPRI cables on the GTMU
into the specified ports on the UBBPd in slot 2 and slot 3. CPRI port 0 on the GTMU does not
connect to any fiber optic cable. Instead, the fiber optic cable inserted in CPRI port 4 on the
UBBPd in slot 2 is converted to use CPRI multiplexing.

(4) Filling out the MultiBBUCombTemplate Sheet


This sheet needs to be filled out for con-MPT reconstruction scenarios where two BBUs are combined
into one.

The adjustment mode must be entered in the MultiBBUCombTemplate sheet.


Fill in this template according to the guide in MultiBBUCombTemplate.

Ensure that the main control board deployed with the reference mode is retained after site
consolidation.

2. Adjusting data for WMPT/LMPT evolution

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

During a co-MPT reconstruction from a UO, LO, UL, or some hybrid-MPT base stations,
convert the replaced WMPT or LMPT.

If the UMPTe serves as the main control board for the co-MPT base station after
reconstruction, the main control boards (including WMPT and LMPT) before reconstruction
are abandoned and removed from the subrack, and the main control board (UMPTa/b) before
reconstruction is retained and serves as the signaling extension board for the UMPTe.
(1) Adjusting data for WMPT evolution
After the co-MPT base station works properly, run the ADD BRD command to add a WMPT
board with Board Type set to WMPT and Slot No. set to 6. You cannot abandon the WMPT
without customer's permission. The WMPT must be in position but not be used.
(2) Adjusting data for LMPT evolution
After the co-MPT base station works properly, run the ADD BRD command to add an LMPT
board with Board Type set to LMPT and Slot No. set to 6.
3. Modifying GSM clock parameters
For the reconstruction of UMTS and LTE, if the original base station is a GSM and UMTS or
GSM and LTE multimode base station, check whether ClkType is set to PEER_CLK and
STANDARD is set to UMTS or LTE. If yes, set STANDARD to COMM.
(1) On the BSC LMT, run the LST BTSCLK command to check whether ClkType is set to
PEER_CLK and STANDARD is set to UMTS or LTE.
(2) If ClkType is set to PEER_CLK and STANDARD is set to UMTS or LTE, run the SET
BTSCLK command to modify STANDARD to COMM.
4. Modifying the OMCH IP of NodeBs on the MBSC
If a UMTS&LTE separate-MPT base station is to be reconstructed into a co-MPT base station
with mode expansion, and the LTE main control board is to be used as the main control board
of the co-MPT base station, adjust the OMCH IP of the corresponding MBSC of NodeB.
(1) Run the LST OMCH command to query the OMCH IP of the eNodeB.
(2) Run the MOD UNODEBIP command to modify the OMCH IP of the NodeB. Make the
OMCH IP of eNodeBs consistent with the NodeB. The following is an example: MOD
UNODEBIP: IDTYPE=BYID, NODEBID=1, NBTRANTP=IPTRANS_IP,
NBIPOAMIP="10.171.35.123", NBIPOAMMASK="255.255.255.0", IPSRN=0, IPSN=18,
IPLOGPORTFLAG=NO;

Service impact

Scenario

Impact on Services of the Original Mode

Adding a new mode for mode


expansion with co-MPT
configuration

Services of the original mode are not affected.

Co-MPT reconstruction

Services of the original mode are interrupted.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

3.5 BBU Interconnection


This section describes BBU interconnection planning.

3.5.1 Overall BBU Interconnection Planning Process


Figure 1.1 Overall BBU interconnection planning process

Table 1.1 Comparison between interconnection through UCIU+UMPT and interconnection


through UMPT+UMPT
Comparis
on Item

Interconnection
Through UCIU+UMPT

Interconnection Through
UMPT+UMPT

BBU
hardware
requirement

Only BBU3900s can be


interconnected through
UCIU+UMPT.

The following BBU combination is


supported:

The BBU3910 does not


support BBU interconnection
through UCIU+UMPT.

BBU3900+BBU3910

The BBU3910A does not


support BBU interconnection

The BBU3910A does not support BBU


interconnection.

The length of cables for BBU

The length of cables for BBU

Requirement
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

BBU3900+BBU3900
BBU3910+BBU3910

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

88

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Comparis
on Item

Interconnection
Through UCIU+UMPT

Interconnection Through
UMPT+UMPT

for distance
between
BBUs

interconnection can be 2
meters or 10 meters.

interconnection can be 2 meters or 5


meters. BBUs cannot be installed over
five meters apart.

Hardware
requirement
for the main
control board

Primary BBU subrack: No


special requirements are
imposed on the main control
board.

Primary BBU subrack: Only the UMPT


can be configured.

Secondary BBU subrack: Only


the UMPT can be configured.

Secondary BBU subrack: Only the


UMPTb or UMTP of a later version can
be configured.

Cost

The UCIU must be purchased.

No additional board is required. Replace


the main control board if its type does
not support BBU interconnection
through UMPT+UMPT.

Feature
Limitations

The root BBU supports UMPT


cold backup.

UMPT cold backup is not supported.

In single-mode or co-MPT and


inter-subrack scenarios, a
transmission port must be
provided by a transmission
board in the primary BBU
subrack.

A transmission port must be provided by


a transmission board in the primary
BBU subrack.

RRUs connected to the


secondary BBU subrack can
be cascaded.

If a GTMU, WMPT, or LMPT is


configured in the primary BBU subrack,
RRUs connected to the secondary BBU
subrack cannot be cascaded.

Slot

A UCIU occupies one slot.

N/A

Installability

N/A

Special cables are used for BBU


interconnection through UMPT+UMPT
and the two ends of the cables are
different. If the cables are incorrectly
connected, mode transition may fail.

Table 1.2 Scenario analysis of BBU interconnection


Category

Scenario

BBU
interconnection

Adding a BBU for BBU interconnection through UCIU+UMPT

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Adding a BBU for BBU interconnection through UMPT+UMPT

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

3.5.2 Adding a BBU for BBU Interconnection Through


UCIU+UMPT
Figure 1.1 BBU interconnection through UCIU+UMPT

1. Scenario description and application scope


BBU interconnection applies to a separate-MPT triple-mode GUL base station or a separateMPT dual-mode base station. Two BBUs must be configured for the triple-mode GUL base
station. In the dual-mode scenarios, some customers prefer two BBUs working in different
modes. The two application scenarios (two BBU in different modes and two BBUs for triple
modes)are similar, and therefore details about BBU interconnection for dual-mode are not
provided.
2. Precautions
None
3. Engineering guidelines

Software version requirement

BBU interconnection through UCIU+UMPT is supported from SRAN7.0 onwards.


For the mapping relationship between the UMPTs and versions, see 3900 Series Base Station
Software and Hardware Compatibility Description.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

License requirement
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

None

Material requirement (hardware)

A UCIU occupies one slot in the primary BBU subrack. The BBU that is configured with the
UCIU is the primary BBU subrack (BBU 0). You can configure the UCIU in slot 4, 5, 0, or 1
(in the descending order of priority) in BBU 0.
The main control board in the leaf BBU (BBU 1) for interconnection must be the UMPT.
An inter-BBU signal cable is used to connect an M port on the UCIU in BBU 0 to a CI port
on the UMPT in BBU 1. You are advised to use the following M ports on the UCIU in
sequence: M0, M1, M2, M3, and M4.
Be aware of the distance limitations for BBU interconnection. The maximum length of an
inter-BBU signal cable for BBU interconnection through UCIU+UMPT can be 10 meters. If
an inter-BBU signal cable of over 10 meters is required, you need to customize it first.
The BBU3910 cannot be configured with a UCIU.
When two BBUs are interconnected, the monitoring device must be connected to BBU 0 and
related software can be configured in and monitored by the mode configured in the primary
BBU subrack.
In separate-MPT scenarios, GSM (GBTS/eGBTS) must be deployed only in BBU 0.

Data configuration requirement

A UCIU must be configured in the primary BBU subrack (BBU 0). If two modes are
configured in the primary BBU subrack, the UCIU can be configured only with one mode and
the mode's priority is GSM, UMTS, and LTE in a descending order.
The cabinet and subrack numbers of the primary BBU subrack and secondary BBU subrack
must be unique and do not conflict with each other.
The CTRLLNK or BTSCTRLLNK MO must be configured for all involved modes.
Ports of each control link and BTS control link must be determined for both sides. Links to
BBU 0 and BBU 1 are of different levels. By default, BBU 1 is the lower-level node and BBU
0 is the upper-level node.
Numbers of control links and BTS control links must be unique and do not conflict with each
other.
Data of control links and BTS control links must be the same for all modes in the root and leaf
BBUs.
Table 1.1 MOC
Domai
n

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Para
mete
r ID

Para
mete
r
Name

Value
(Example
)

CME
Type

BBU
intercon
nection

Mode in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

LN

Local
Link
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

All
modes in
the root

CTRLLNK

CN

Local
Cabinet
No.

Equipment

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domai
n

3 Planning Mode Transition

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Para
mete
r ID

Para
mete
r
Name

Value
(Example
)

CME
Type

BBU
BBU
intercon
nection

All
modes in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

SRN

Local
Subrack
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

All
modes in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

SN

Local
Slot
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

All
modes in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

UPCN

Upper
Cabinet
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

All
modes in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

UPSRN

Upper
Subrack
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

All
modes in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

UPSN

Upper
Slot
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

All
modes in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

UPPT

Upper
Port
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

All
modes in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

LN

Local
Link
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

All
modes in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

CN

Local
Cabinet
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

All
modes in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

SRN

Local
Subrack
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

All
modes in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

SN

Local
Slot
No.

Equipment

BBU

All

CTRLLNK

UPCN

Upper

Equipment

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Domai
n

Config
uratio
n
Object

intercon
nection

modes in
the root
BBU

BBU
intercon
nection

All
modes in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

UPSRN

BBU
intercon
nection

All
modes in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

BBU
intercon
nection

All
modes in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

MOC

Para
mete
r ID

Para
mete
r
Name

Value
(Example
)

CME
Type

Upper
Subrack
No.

Equipment

UPSN

Upper
Slot
No.

Equipment

UPPT

Upper
Port
No.

Equipment

Cabinet
No.

Service impact

Scenario

Impact on Services of the Original Mode

No Inter-BBU SDR

Services carried by the secondary BBU subrack do not


affect those carried by the primary BBU subrack.

Inter-BBU SDR

Install interconnection cables first and then connect


cables for inter-BBU SDR. If the cables are installed in a
reverse order, SDR services will be affected.

Related document

BBU Interconnection Feature Parameter Description

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

3.5.3 Adding a BBU for BBU Interconnection Through


UMPT+UMPT
Figure 1.1 BBU interconnection through UMPT+UMPT

1. Scenario description and application scope


BBU interconnection applies to a separate-MPT triple-mode GUL base station or a separateMPT dual-mode base station. Two BBUs must be configured for the triple-mode GUL base
station. In the dual-mode scenarios, some customers prefer two BBUs working in different
modes. The two application scenarios (two BBU in different modes and two BBUs for triple
modes)are similar, and therefore details about BBU interconnection for dual-mode are not
provided.
In co-MPT scenarios, if the slots of baseband processing boards in one BBU are not
sufficient, one more BBU is required. In this case, the two BBUs must be interconnected.
2. Precautions
None
3. Engineering guidelines

Version requirement

BBU interconnection through UMPT+UMPT is supported from SRAN8.1 onwards.


For the mapping relationship between the UMPTs and versions, see 3900 Series Base Station
Software and Hardware Compatibility Description.

Material requirement (hardware)


The distance between BBU 0 (root BBU) and BBU 1 (leaf BBU) is less than or equal to
five meters. The end with rings in yellow of the BBU interconnection cable must be
connected to BBU0 while the other end with no ring must be connected to BBU1.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

UMPTb boards must be deployed in BBU 1.


When a GTMU, WMPT, or LMPT board is deployed in BBU 0, BBU1 does not support
RRU cascading.
A BBU interconnection cable provided by Huawei must be used and BBU
interconnection using a fiber optic cable is not supported.
A transmission port must be provided by a transmission board in the primary BBU
subrack.
When two BBUs are interconnected, the monitoring device must be connected to BBU 0
and related software can be configured in and monitored by the mode configured in the
primary BBU subrack.
In separate-MPT scenarios, GSM (GBTS/eGBTS) must be deployed only in BBU 0.

License requirement
None

Data configuration requirement

The cabinet and subrack numbers of the primary BBU subrack and secondary BBU subrack
must be unique and do not conflict with each other.
The CTRLLNK or BTSCTRLLNK MO must be configured for all involved modes.
Ports of each control link and BTS control link must be determined for both sides. Links to
BBU 0 and BBU 1 are of different levels. By default, BBU 1 is the lower-level node and BBU
0 is the upper-level node.
Numbers of control links and BTS control links must be unique and do not conflict with each
other.
Data of control links and BTS control links must be the same for all modes in the root and leaf
BBUs.
Table 1.1 MOC
Domai
n

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Para
mete
r ID

Para
mete
r
Name

Value
(Example
)

CME
Type

BBU
intercon
nection

Mode in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

LN

Local
Link
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

Mode in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

CN

Local
Cabinet
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

Mode in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

SRN

Local
Subrack
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

Mode in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

SN

Local
Slot
No.

Equipment

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Domai
n

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Para
mete
r ID

Para
mete
r
Name

Value
(Example
)

CME
Type

BBU
intercon
nection

Mode in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

UPCN

Upper
Cabinet
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

Mode in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

UPSRN

Upper
Subrack
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

Mode in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

UPSN

Upper
Slot
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

Mode in
the root
BBU

CTRLLNK

UPPT

Upper
Port
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

Mode in
the leaf
BBU

CTRLLNK

LN

Local
Link
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

Mode in
the leaf
BBU

CTRLLNK

CN

Local
Cabinet
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

Mode in
the leaf
BBU

CTRLLNK

SRN

Local
Subrack
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

Mode in
the leaf
BBU

CTRLLNK

SN

Local
Slot
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

Mode in
the leaf
BBU

CTRLLNK

UPCN

Upper
Cabinet
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

Mode in
the leaf
BBU

CTRLLNK

UPSRN

Upper
Subrack
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

Mode in
the leaf
BBU

CTRLLNK

UPSN

Upper
Slot
No.

Equipment

BBU
intercon
nection

Mode in
the leaf
BBU

CTRLLNK

UPPT

Upper
Port
No.

Equipment

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Service impact

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Scenario

Impact on Services of the Original Mode

No Inter-BBU SDR

Services carried by the secondary BBU subrack do not


affect those carried by the primary BBU subrack.

Inter-BBU SDR

Install interconnection cables first and then connect


cables for inter-BBU SDR. If the cables are installed in a
reverse order, SDR services will be affected.

Related document

BBU Interconnection Feature Parameter Description

3.6 Clock Planning


This section describes co-MPT or separate-MPT planning.

3.6.1 Overall Clock Planning Process


Figure 1.1 Overall clock planning process

Check whether the original clock can be shared.

Currently, the following reference clocks can be used in a separate-MPT base station:
GPS clock, BITS clock, E1/T1 clock, IEEE1588v2 clock, and synchronous Ethernet clock.
For UMTS, when the WMPT, UTRP2, or UTRP9 uses the IEEE1588v2 reference clock, the
reference clock cannot be shared by any other mode.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Check whether the new mode can reuse the original clock.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

97

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

If the new mode has time synchronization requirements and the original clock source is not of
the time synchronizing type, the original reference clock source cannot be shared.

Comparison between independent clock and common clock

Compa
rison
Item

Independent Clock

Common Clock

Clock
type

GPS clock, BITS clock, E1/T1


clock, IEEE1588v2 clock,
synchronous Ethernet clock, and
1PPS+TOD clock

GPS clock, BITS clock, E1/T1 clock,


IEEE1588v2 clock, and synchronous
Ethernet clock.

Working
mode

The working mode of the clock in a multimode base station cannot be set to
AUTO(Automatic). Only one type of reference clock can be configured for
each mode and the main control board of each mode. Reference clock backup
is not supported.

Inter-RAT
decouplin
g

Loose coupling: The inter-RAT


external clock source works
independently.

Loose coupling: Inter-RAT impact is small


or none. If a base station fails to obtain
clock signals, it works in free-run mode for
a certain period of time. The period can be
as long as three months if frequency
synchronization is used.

Customer
Requirem
ents

An independent clock source is


configured for the new mode
because the customer has
required for sufficient clock
source. For example, for
IEEE1588v2, a customer may
require capacity expansion of the
IP clock server to support the
clock source requirements of the
new mode.

No additional clock source requirement is


posed by the new mode.

Requirements of new modes for the original reference clock source


Time synchronization (or phase synchronization) is available on the basis of frequency
synchronization. When the new mode has time synchronization requirements and SDR is
used for the original mode and new mode, the clock source of the original mode must
use time synchronization if either of the following events is true. Note that the reference
clock of time synchronization can be shared or not.
- GSM (GTMU used) is one of the original modes. If the reference clock source for time
synchronization is provided by the new mode, Clock Type and Peer Mode must be set
to PEER_CLK and the new mode, respectively.
- Inter-BBU SDR is used. If the secondary BBU subrack requires time synchronization,
time synchronization must be used for the reference clock of the primary BBU subrack.
- In mode transition from FDD to FDD+TDD (Adding the USCU clock board or other
ways to obtain GPS clock).
When time synchronization clock source is configured for the GSM main control board, specify the
frame synchronization switch FRAMESYNCSW based on whether inter-site frame number
synchronization must be supported:

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Set FRAMESYNCSW to OFF if GBTS or eGBTS services do not need to support inter-site frame
number synchronization.

Set FRAMESYNCSW to ON if the GBTS must support

Before setting FRAMESYNCSW to ON, you need to perform frame number offset and training
sequence code planning to prevent interference between GSM neighboring cells.
The GTMUa board does not support time synchronization. When time synchronization is required, the
GTMUa board cannot be used and must be replaced.

Table 1.1 Mode transition scenario analysis


Category

Scenario

Clock

New mode using an independent reference clock with separate-MPT


configuration
New mode and original mode sharing clock source with separate-MPT
configuration
New mode requiring modification to the clock source with co-MPT
configuration

3.6.2 New Mode Using an Independent Reference


Clock with Separate-MPT Configuration
1. Scenario description and application scope
In this scenario, a new mode uses an independent reference clock.
2. Precautions
None
3. Engineering guidelines

Version requirement
None

License requirement
None

Data configuration requirement


There is no special requirement. You can configure the data in the same way as that for
configuring a reference clock. For details, see the initial configuration guide of each
mode.

Service impact
None

Related document
Synchronization Feature Parameter Description for GSM
Synchronization Feature Parameter Description for UMTS
Synchronization Feature Parameter Description for LTE FDD
Synchronization Feature Parameter Description for LTE TDD

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

3.6.3 New Mode and Original Mode Sharing


Reference Clock with Separate-MPT Configuration
1. Scenario description and application scope
Based on the preceding analysis, co-transmission is required.
2. Precautions
None
3. Engineering guidelines

Version requirement
The version requirement of clock sharing varies with the reference clock. For details, see
Common Clock Feature Parameter Description.

License requirement

License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevia
tion

Sales
Unit

Mode

Multi-mode
BS Common
Reference
Clock(GBT
S)

None

None

None

per BTS

Multi-mode
BS Common
Reference
Clock(Node
B)

None

None

None

per NodeB

Multi-mode
BS Common
Reference
Clock(eNod
eB)

Multi-mode
BS Common
Reference
Clock(eNod
eB)(Per
eNodeB)

88030QUW

LLT1MCRC
01

Per eNodeB

Data configuration requirement

Set the reference clock of the new mode to PEER so that the new mode and original mode
share the same reference clock. For details, see Common Clock Feature Parameter
Description.
Reference: Common Clock Feature Parameter Description
Configure MOs related to the peer clock.
GBTS:

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

MO

Param
eter
Name

Paramet
er ID

CME
Paramet
er Name

Setting Notes

BTSCLK

Clock
Type

ClkType

Clock Type

PEER_CLK

BTSCLK

Peer
Mode

STANDAR
D

Peer Mode

Set this parameter to the mode of


the reference clock.

eGBTS, NodeB, eNodeB, or co-MPT multimode base station


MO

Param
eter
Name

Paramet
er ID

CME
Paramet
er Name

Setting Notes

CLKMO
DE

Clock
Working
Mode

MODE

Clock
Working
Mode

Set this parameter to


MANUAL(Manual).

CLKMO
DE

Selected
Clock
Source

CLKSRC

Selected
Clock
Source

Set this parameter to


PEERCLK(Peer Clock).

PEERCL
K

Peer
Clock
No.

PN

Peer Clock
No

Set this parameter to 0.

PEERCL
K

Peer
Standard

PS

Peer
Standard

Set this parameter to the mode of


the reference clock.

Service impact

None

Related document

Common Clock Feature Parameter Description

3.6.4 New Mode Requiring Modification to the Clock


Source with Co-MPT Configuration
1. Scenario description and application scope
In co-MPT scenarios, a new mode requires a modification to the clock source of the original
mode. For example, if the new mode LTE TDD requires time synchronization, modify the
clock source type of the main control board of the original mode to support time
synchronization.
2. Precautions
None
3. Engineering guidelines
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Version requirement
The reference clock of the new mode has requirements on the version. For details, see
the following documents:
Synchronization Feature Parameter Description for GSM
Synchronization Feature Parameter Description for UMTS
Synchronization Feature Parameter Description for LTE FDD
Synchronization Feature Parameter Description for LTE TDD

License requirement

Do
ma
in

Feature
Name

License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

Licens
e
Contro
l Item
Name
(BBOM
)

License
Abbrev
iation

Sales
Unit

Mode

Clo
ck

Synchroniza
tion with
GPS

Synchronizati
on with GPS

None

None

Per eNodeB

Clo
ck

IEEE1588
V2 Clock
Synchroniza
tion

IEEE1588 V2
Clock
Synchronizati
on

LT1S00E
NSY00

88030FK
K

Per eNodeB

Data configuration requirement


There is no special requirement. You can configure the data in the same way as that for
configuring a reference clock. For details, see the following documents:
Synchronization Feature Parameter Description for GSM
Synchronization Feature Parameter Description for UMTS
Synchronization Feature Parameter Description for LTE FDD
Synchronization Feature Parameter Description for LTE TDD

Do
mai
n

Configur
ation
Object

MOC

Para
mete
r
Name

Paramet
er ID

Value
(Example
)

CME Type

Cloc
k

New-mode
base station

GPS

GPS
Clock
No.

GN

Equipment

New-mode
base station

GPS

Cable
Length

CABLE_L
EN

30

Equipment

New-mode
base station

GPS

GPS
workin
g mode

MODE

GPS

Equipment

New-mode
base station

GPS

Priority

PRI

Equipment

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Do
mai
n

3 Planning Mode Transition

Configur
ation
Object

MOC

Para
mete
r
Name

Paramet
er ID

Value
(Example
)

CME Type

New-mode
base station

IPCLK
LNK

Link
No.

LN

Equipment

New-mode
base station

IPCLK
LNK

Client
IPv4

CIP

82.0.1.107

Equipment

New-mode
base station

IPCLK
LNK

Server
IPv4

SIP

82.0.1.128

Equipment

New-mode
base station

IPCLK
LNK

Domain

DM

Equipment

New-mode
base station

IPCLK
LNK

Priority

PRI

Equipment

New-mode
base station

TASM

Clock
Workin
g Mode

MODE

MANUAL

Equipment

New-mode
base station

TASM

Selecte
d Clock
Source

CLKSRC

GPS

Equipment

New-mode
base station

TASM

Clock
Source
No.

SRCNO

Equipment

New-mode
base station

TASM

Clock
Synchr
onizatio
n Mode

CLKSYNC
MODE

TIME

Equipment

Service impact
None

Related document
Synchronization Feature Parameter Description for GSM
Synchronization Feature Parameter Description for UMTS
Synchronization Feature Parameter Description for LTE FDD
Synchronization Feature Parameter Description for LTE TDD

3.7 Baseband Planning


This section describes baseband planning.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

3.7.1 Overall Baseband Planning Process


Figure 1.1 Overall baseband planning process

Comparison between co-baseband and independent baseband

Compariso
n Item

Independent Baseband

Co-Baseband

Working
mode

Single mode

Multimode concurrency

Hardware

All baseband processing boards


support independent baseband.

Only the UBBP or UMDU supports


co-baseband.

There are no special requirements


for co-MPT configuration.

Co-MPT must be configured for cobaseband application.


For hybrid-MPT scenarios, co-MPT
must be configured for modes
involved in co-baseband.

Inter-RAT
decoupling

Baseband processing boards of


each mode work independently.
Baseband boards of each mode
are loosely coupled. With CPRI
MUX, IQ signals are exchanged
through the BBU backplane.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Baseband boards of each mode are


tightly coupled. If one baseband
processing board is faulty, the other
processing baseband becomes faulty,
too.

104

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Table 1.1 Mode transition scenario analysis


Categor
y

SeparateMPT or CoMPT

Scenario

Baseband
planning

Separate-MPT

Adding an independent baseband processing board to the


new mode with separate-MPT configuration

Co-MPT mode
expansion

Adding an independent baseband processing board to the


new mode with co-MPT configuration
Adding a new mode to the original baseband processing
board with co-MPT configuration

3.7.2 Adding an Independent Baseband Board to the


New Mode with Separate-MPT Configuration
1. Scenario description and application scope
In a separate-MPT base station, an independent baseband board is added to the new mode for
mode transition.
The BBU3910A does not support mode transition when separate-MPT is used and therefore
does not support this scenario.
For details about selection of baseband processing boards, see GUL Base Station Overview
and Selection Guide.
2. Precautions
1) Slots 2 and 3 in the BBU3900 serve as the switching center. The NodeB can provide CPRI
ports only in slot 2 or 3 to connect RRUs. LTE also requires a baseband processing board in
slot 2 or 3.
2) The preceding constraint does not apply to the BBU3910 because it has a higher backplane
switching capability.
3) Pay attention to the board types supported by the BBU3910 that no longer supports some
old types of baseband processing boards. For details, see Description > Hardware
Description > BBU Hardware Description > BBU3900 and BBU3910 Hardware
Description > Boards and Cabinets or Racks Supported by BBUs in 3900 Series Base
Station Product Documentation.
3. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement

Material Type

Material Name

Quantity

Board

LBBP/UBBP

Determined by the
number of cells and
number of initial
TX/RX channels

WBBP/UBBP

Determined by the
number of cells and

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Remarks

105

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Material Type

Material Name

Quantity

Remarks

number of CEs
UBRIb

The UBRI must be


configured if it
provides CPRI ports
for the GSM mode.

Version requirement

For the mapping relationship between the baseband processing boards and versions, see 3900
Series Base Station Software and Hardware Compatibility Description.

License requirement

No specific license control item is available for the baseband processing board working in a
separate-MPT multimode base station.
Therefore, a license related to the new mode can be applied for in the same way as that for the
license of each involved mode.
Mode licenses related to the UBBP must be purchased and delivered even when co-baseband
is not used.
Mode

License
Control Item
Name (SBOM)

License
Control Item
Name (BBOM)

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevi
ation

GSM

UBBP First-Mode
license (GSM)

UBBP Multi-Mode
license (GSM)

82204551

LGMIUBB
P

UBBP Multi-Mode
license (GSM)

UBBP Multi-Mode
license (GSM)

82204551

LGMIUBB
P

UBBP First-Mode
license (UMTS)

UBBP Multi-Mode
license (UMTS)

82204657

LQW9UBP
DM01

UBBP Multi-Mode
license (UMTS)

UBBP Multi-Mode
license (UMTS)

82204657

LQW9UBP
DM01

UBBP First-Mode
license (LTE FDD)

NA

88032BXR

WDMS0UF
MLF00

UBBP Multi-Mode
license (LTE FDD)

NA

UBBP First-Mode
license (LTE TDD)

NA

UBBP Multi-Mode
license (LTE TDD)

NA

UMTS

LTE

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

(SBOM)
88032BXS
(SBOM)
88032KLF
(SBOM)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

88032GDN
(SBOM)

WDMS0U
MMLF00
LT1SUMM
LFL01
LT1SUMM
LFL00

106

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Note: In independent baseband scenarios, you only need to purchase the first-mode license for
the UBBP based on its working mode in terms of the SBOM. SBOM and BBOM information
about the related licenses is the same.

Data configuration requirement

In separate-MPT or independent baseband scenarios, there is no impact on the data


configuration for the original mode, and the data configuration for the new mode is the same
as that for single-mode scenarios.

Service impact

None

3.7.3 Adding an Independent Baseband Processing


Board to the New Mode with Co-MPT Configuration
1. Scenario description and application scope
In a co-MPT base station, an independent baseband processing board is added to the new
mode for mode transition.
The BBU3910A does not support BBU interconnection because only one baseband processing
board is configured.
For details about selection of baseband processing boards, see GUL Base Station Overview
and Selection Guide.
2. Precautions
1) Slots 2 and 3 in the BBU3900 serve as the switching center. The NodeB can provide CPRI
ports only in slot 2 or 3 to connect RRUs. LTE also requires a baseband processing board in
slot 2 or 3.
2) The preceding constraint does not apply to the BBU3910 because it has a higher backplane
switching capability.
3) Pay attention to the board types supported by the BBU3910 that no longer supports some
old types of baseband processing boards. For details, see Description > Hardware
Description > BBU Hardware Description > BBU3900 and BBU3910 Hardware
Description > Boards and Cabinets or Racks Supported by BBUs in 3900 Series Base
Station Product Documentation.
3. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement

Material Type

Material Name

Quantity

Board

LBBP/UBBP

Determined by the
number of cells and
number of initial
TX/RX channels

WBBP/UBBP

Determined by the
number of cells and
number of CEs

UBRIb

The UBRI must be


configured if it

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Remarks

107

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Material Type

Material Name

Quantity

Remarks

provides CPRI ports


for the GSM mode.

Version requirement

For the mapping relationship between the baseband processing boards and versions, see 3900
Series Base Station Software and Hardware Compatibility Description.

License requirement

No specific license control item is available for the baseband processing board working in a
separate-MPT multimode base station.
Therefore, a license related to the new mode can be applied for in the same way as that for the
license of each involved mode.
Mode licenses related to the UBBP must be purchased and delivered even when co-baseband
is not used.
Mode

License Control
Item Name (SBOM)

License
Control Item
Name (BBOM)

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevi
ation

GSM

UBBP First-Mode license


(GSM)

UBBP Multi-Mode
license (GSM)

82204551

LGMIUBB
P

UBBP Multi-Mode license


(GSM)

UBBP Multi-Mode
license (GSM)

82204551

LGMIUBB
P

UBBP First-Mode license


(UMTS)

UBBP Multi-Mode
license (UMTS)

82204657

LQW9UBP
DM01

UBBP Multi-Mode license


(UMTS)

UBBP Multi-Mode
license (UMTS)

82204657

LQW9UBP
DM01

UBBP First-Mode license


(LTE FDD)

NA

88032BXR

WDMS0UF
MLF00

UBBP Multi-Mode license


(LTE FDD)

NA

UBBP First-Mode license


(LTE TDD)

NA

UBBP Multi-Mode license


(LTE TDD)

NA

UMTS

LTE

(SBOM)
88032BXS
(SBOM)
88032KLF
(SBOM)
88032GDN
(SBOM)

WDMS0U
MMLF00
LT1SUMM
LFL01
LT1SUMM
LFL00

Note: In independent baseband scenarios, you only need to purchase the first-mode license for
the UBBP based on its working mode in terms of the SBOM. SBOM and BBOM information
about the related licenses is the same.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Data configuration requirement


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

In separate-MPT or independent baseband scenarios, there is no impact on the data


configuration for the original mode, and the data configuration for the new mode is the same
as that for single-mode scenarios.
MO

Param
eter
Name

Paramet
er ID

CME
Paramet
er Name

Setting Notes

BBP

Base
Band
Work
Standard

BBWS

Base Band
Work
Standard

Determined by the UBBP


configuration plan

MDU

Base
Band
Work
Standard

BBWS

Base Band
Work
Standard

Determined by the mode planned


for the UMDU

Service impact

None

3.7.4 Adding a New Mode to the Original Baseband


Processing Board with Co-MPT Configuration
1. Scenario description and application scope
In a co-MPT base station, the new mode and original mode share the baseboard band.
Baseband processing board selection
If a baseband processing board needs to be added or replaced, select the baseband processing
board by referring to GUL Base Station Overview and Selection Guide.
2. Precautions
Slot planning: Use the cabling tool on the CME to analyze board slots for base station mode
transition. For scenarios that are not supported by the tool, contact Huawei R&D engineers.
3. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement
If the new mode and original mode share the original baseband processing board, no new
material is required.
If you need to replace the original baseband processing board, or expand the baseband
processing board's capacity, purchase a new UBBP board.

Version requirement
For the mapping relationship between the baseband processing boards and versions, see
3900 Series Base Station Software and Hardware Compatibility Description.

License requirement
A license related to the new mode can be applied for in the same way as that for the
license of each involved mode.
The following table lists licenses that need to be purchased and delivered for the UBBP
board.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

109

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Mode

License Control
Item Name (SBOM)

License
Control Item
Name (BBOM)

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevi
ation

GSM

UBBP First-Mode license


(GSM)

UBBP Multi-Mode
license (GSM)

82204551

LGMIUBB
P

UBBP Multi-Mode license


(GSM)

UBBP Multi-Mode
license (GSM)

82204551

LGMIUBB
P

UBBP First-Mode license


(UMTS)

UBBP Multi-Mode
license (UMTS)

82204657

LQW9UBP
DM01

UBBP Multi-Mode license


(UMTS)

UBBP Multi-Mode
license (UMTS)

82204657

LQW9UBP
DM01

UBBP First-Mode license


(LTE FDD)

NA

88032BXR

WDMS0UF
MLF00

UBBP Multi-Mode license


(LTE FDD)

NA

UBBP First-Mode license


(LTE TDD)

NA

UBBP Multi-Mode license


(LTE TDD)

NA

UMTS

LTE

(SBOM)
88032BXS
(SBOM)
88032KLF
(SBOM)
88032GDN
(SBOM)

WDMS0U
MMLF00
LT1SUMM
LFL01
LT1SUMM
LFL00

Data configuration requirement


Baseband working mode must be configured for the UBBP board.

MO

Param
eter
Name

Paramet
er ID

CME
Paramet
er Name

Setting Notes

BBP

Base
Band
Work
Standard

BBWS

Base Band
Work
Standard

Determined by the UBBP


configuration plan

MDU

Base
Band
Work
Standard

BBWS

Base Band
Work
Standard

Determined by the mode planned


for the UMDU

Service impact

Scenario

Impact on Services of the Original Mode

Modify the baseband working


mode.

Services carried by the baseband processing board are


interrupted for one minute.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

110

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

3.8 CPRI-based Topology Planning


This section describes CPRI-based topologies used by a base station to RF modules with the
BBU system and how to select a CPRI-based topology based on services. CPRI is short for
common public radio interface.

3.8.1 Overall CPRI-based Topology Planning


Figure 1.1 Overall CPRI-based topology planning process

Table 1.1 Mode transition scenario analysis


Categ
ory

Scenario

CPRIbased
topology

Chain topology for RF modules


Dual-star topology (load sharing) for SDR RF modules
CPRI MUX for SDR RF modules

RF modules can use CPRI MUX or the dual-star topology in multimode concurrency
scenarios. The dual-star topology is recommended for separate-MPT scenarios while CPRI
MUX is recommended for co-MPT scenarios. The following table provides the comparison
between CPRI MUX and the dual-star topology.
Compa
rison
Item

Dual-Star Topology

CPRI MUX

Service
impact

If CPRI fiber optical cables are


installed on a tower and antennas
and RRUs are installed for the

Replace the original baseband


processing board because it does not
support convergence, which interrupts

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

111

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Compa
rison
Item

3 Planning Mode Transition

Dual-Star Topology

CPRI MUX

new mode, existing services need


to be interrupted to ensure
personnel safety.

services. Optical modules of a higher


data rate may be required to provide
more bandwidth for supporting services
of two modes. The optical module
replacement interrupts services.

Material
cost

N pairs of CPRI fiber optic cables


and 2N optical modules. N varies
with RF modules required for the
new mode.

(Possible) 2N high-speed optical


modules. The replaced optical modules
can be reused for other purposes.

Labor
Cost

Cost for hoisting (if applicable),


installing N pairs of CPRI fiber
optic cables (high), and installing
optical modules

Cost for hoisting (if applicable) and


replacing optical modules

Reliability

Services between different modes


are not affected.

The converging party affects the


converged party.

Applicatio
n
condition

The dual-star topology is


supported by the following
hardware:
GTMUa/GTMUb/GTMUc,
WBBPb/WBBPd/WBBPf,
LBBPc/LBBPd, UBBPd,
UBRIa/UBRIb, and V1/2/3 RF
modules.

CPRI MUX is supported only by the


WBBPf, LBBPd, UBBPd, and
GTMUb/GTMUc (only being the
converged party). Whether an RF
module supports CPRI MUX depends on
the actual RF module's capabilities as
promoted by Huawei. Inter-BBU CPRI
MUX is not supported.

3.8.2 Chain Topology for RF Modules


1. Scenario description and application scope

A new RF module is added and it works in a single mode.

The following figure is an example.

Limitations on RF modules: none

Other limitations: none

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

112

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

2. Precautions
1) Limitations on the BBU3900 slot assignment (not applicable to the BBU3910): For
NodeBs, only the baseband processing board in slots 2 and 3 of the BBU in a NodeB is
allowed to provide CPRI ports for connection to RRUs. For eNodeBs, at least one baseband
processing board must be installed in slot 2 or slot 3 and CPRI ports can be provided by the
baseband processing board in slots other than slots 2 and 3.
2) One RF module is connected to the BBU through one CPRI cable. Higher reliability
requires two CPRI cables for connecting the BBU in the ring topology.
3) The length of the added CPRI cable is determined according to site survey. Determine
whether the CPRI fiber optic cable or the optical module works in a single mode or multiple
modes.
4) If the optical fiber is to be reused, check whether the optical fiber type matches the optical
fiber connector. If they do not match, the optical fiber must be transferred. For details, see
Reuse Guide and Checklist for CPRI Optical Cables in Distributed Base Stations.
3. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement

Material
Type

Material
Name

Quantity

Remarks

CPRI-based
topology

CPRI
electrical
cable

Same as the number of RRUs or


RFUs. Each RFU requires one CPRI
electrical cable.

Two ends of the


CPRI electrical cable
are connected to the
RFU and BBU,
respectively.

CPRI fiber
optic cable

Same as the number of RRUs. Each


RRU requires one CPRI fiber optic
cable.

Two ends of the


CPRI fiber optic
cable are connected
to the RRU and
BBU, respectively.

CPRI optical
module

Twice the number of RRUs or


RFUs. Each RRU or RFU requires
one CPRI cable and each of the
CPRI cables must be configured
with two optical modules.

Two ends of the


CPRI cable are
connected to the
RRU and BBU,
respectively.

Software version requirement

None

License requirement

None

Data configuration requirement

No special requirements are involved. The following table provides the related MOs.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

MO
Parameter

Meaning

Chain No.

Indicates the ID of the RRU chain. It uniquely identifies a chain within


a base station.

Topo Type

Indicates the type of the topology. In the ring topology, service data is
transferred through fiber optic cables on the HDLC links. In load
sharing, two CPRI fiber optic cables can be used for transferring
service data at the same time, which improves the transmission
capability. The physical states of the ring topology and load sharing
applications are similar.

Backup Mode

Indicates the backup mode of the RRU chain or ring, including cold
backup and hot backup. Cold backup indicates that when the link on
one end of the chain or ring fails, the service is interrupted for a short
period of time, and then continues on the other end of the chain or
ring. In hot backup mode, if the link on one end of the chain or ring
fails, the service switches to the other end of the chain or ring
immediately. In hot backup mode, only one RRU can be configured on
each chain. When the Topo Type parameter is set to RING and the
Backup Mode parameter is set to HOT, the head and the tail of the
ring must be configured on different BBUs.

Head Cabinet No.

Indicates the cabinet number of the board where the head CPRI port is
located.

Head Subrack No.

Indicates the subrack number of the board where the head CPRI port is
located.

Head Slot No.

Indicates the slot number of the board where the head CPRI port is
located.

Head Port No.

Indicates the number of the head CPRI port.

Tail Cabinet No.

Indicates the cabinet number of the board where the tail CPRI port is
located. Value NULL is displayed for the RRU chain which does not
have a tail CPRI port.

Tail Subrack No.

Indicates the subrack number of the board where the tail CPRI port is
located. Value NULL is displayed for the RRU chain which does not
have a tail CPRI port.

Tail Slot No.

Indicates the slot number of the board where the tail CPRI port is
located. Value NULL is displayed for the RRU chain which does not
have a tail CPRI port.

Tail Port No.

Indicates the number of the tail CPRI port. Value NULL is displayed
for the RRU chain which does not have a tail CPRI port.

BreakPoint
Position1

Indicates the breakpoint position 1 on the chain/ring. When this


parameter is set to 255, the breakpoint is disabled.

BreakPoint
Position2

Indicates the breakpoint position 2 on the chain/ring. When this


parameter is set to 255, the breakpoint is disabled.

Access Type

Indicates the access type of the RRU. The local port is used for the
connection of panels. The BBP is directly connected to the RRU/RFU.
The peer port is used for the convergence of backplane. The BBP is

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

114

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

MO
Parameter

Meaning
connected to the IDX2 port to converge on other baseband processing
boards so that the BBP can be connected to the RRU/RFU.

CPRI Line Rate

Indicates the user-defined rate. The values are as follows:


Auto: auto-negotiation mode.
1.25: auto-negotiation mode is not supported and the CPRI rate is 1.25
Gbit/s.
2.5: auto-negotiation mode is not supported and the CPRI rate is 2.5
Gbit/s.
4.9: auto-negotiation mode is not supported and the CPRI rate is 4.9
Gbit/s.
6.1: auto-negotiation mode is not supported and the CPRI rate is 6.1
Gbit/s.
9.8: auto-negotiation mode is not supported and the CPRI rate is 9.8
Gbit/s.

Local Slot No.

Indicates the slot number of the converged party in CPRI MUX. When
this parameter is set to 255, no slot number of the converged party is
specified. When the BBU where CPRI MUX is used is BBU3900, this
parameter does not need to be specified. When the BBU where CPRI
MUX is used is BBU3910, this parameter must be specified.

Cascading Level

Indicates the cascading level of the RRU chain/ring.

RRU No.

Indicates the number of RRUs connected on the RRU chain/ring.

Service impact

Technically, services of the original mode are not affected. However, the related operations
are performed around antennas, you are advised to disable the original RF module based on
the actual site conditions to ensure personal safety.

3.8.3 Dual-Star Topology (Load Sharing) for SDR RF


Modules
1. Scenario description and application scope

New RF modules work in multiple modes or the single mode of original RF modules is
expanded to multiple modes.

The following figure is an example.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Limitation on RF modules: The RF module must be multimode RF modules (of M


series).

Other limitations: For an RRU or RFU whose version is earlier than V3, the dual-star
topology is used and CPRI rates on the two sides must be consistent. The system
automatically negotiates for a CPRI rate that is supported by both sides. Therefore,
during CPRI rate planning, pay attention to the CPRI rate that can be supported by the
optical module or CPRI interface board on the other side. For an RRU or RFU whose
version is later than V3, CPRI rates on the two sides can be different.

2. Precautions
1) In dual-star topology for separate-MPT scenarios, one CRPI link is for one mode and
services of a mode are not affected by other modes. In load sharing for co-MPT scenarios, two
CRPI links are shared by multiple modes and modes are randomly assigned to the CPRI link
based on load balancing rules.
2) The length of the added CPRI cable is determined according to site survey. Determine
whether the CPRI fiber optic cable or the optical module works in a single mode or multiple
modes.
3) If the optical fiber is to be reused, check whether the optical fiber type matches the optical
fiber connector. If they do not match, the optical fiber must be transferred. For details, see
Reuse Guide and Checklist for CPRI Optical Cables in Distributed Base Stations.
3. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement
1) Expanding the mode of the original RF module to multiple modes

Material
Type

Material
Name

Quantity

Remarks

CPRI-based
topology

CPRI
electrical
cable

Same as the number of RRUs or


RFUs. Each RFU requires one CPRI
electrical cable.

Two ends of the


CPRI electrical cable
are connected to the
RFU and BBU,
respectively.

CPRI fiber
optic cable

Same as the number of RRUs. Each


RRU requires one CPRI fiber optic
cable.

Two ends of the


CPRI fiber optic
cable are connected
to the RRU and
BBU, respectively.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

116

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Material
Type

3 Planning Mode Transition

Material
Name

Quantity

Remarks

CPRI optical
module

Twice the number of RRUs or


RFUs. Each RRU or RFU requires
one CPRI cable and each of the
CPRI cables must be configured
with two optical modules.

Two ends of the


CPRI cable are
connected to the
RRU and BBU,
respectively.

2) Adding a new RF module working in multiple modes


Material
Type

Material
Name

Quantity

Remarks

CPRI-based
topology

CPRI
electrical
cable

Twice the number of RRUs or


RFUs. Each RFU requires two CPRI
electrical cables.

Two ends of the


CPRI electrical cable
are connected to the
RFU and BBU,
respectively.

CPRI fiber
optic cable

Twice the number of RRUs. Each


RRU requires two CPRI fiber optic
cables.

Two ends of the


CPRI fiber optic
cable are connected
to the RRU and
BBU, respectively.

CPRI optical
module

Four times the number of the RRUs


or RFUs Each RRU or RFU requires
one CPRI cable and each of the
CPRI cables must be configured
with two optical modules.

Two ends of the


CPRI cable are
connected to the
RRU and BBU,
respectively.

Software version requirement


Load sharing in co-MPT scenarios: SRAN8.0 and later

License requirement
None

Data configuration requirement


Values of the Networking Mode parameter of the RXU chain are changed. The ways to
change the parameter value are different for separate-MPT scenarios and load sharing
scenarios.
Dual-star topology for separate-MPT scenarios: Same as configuration for the chain
topology for the new mode.
Load sharing for co-MPT scenarios: Configure load sharing for the original RRU
configured with the chain topology.
The following table provides the related MOs.

MO
Parameter

Meaning

Chain No.

Indicates the ID of the RRU chain. It uniquely identifies a chain within

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

117

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

MO
Parameter

3 Planning Mode Transition

Meaning
a base station.

Topo Type

Indicates the type of the topology. In the ring topology, service data is
transferred through fiber optic cables on the HDLC links. In load
sharing, two CPRI fiber optic cables can be used for transferring
service data at the same time, which improves the transmission
capability. The physical states of the ring topology and load sharing
applications are similar.

Backup Mode

Indicates the backup mode of the RRU chain or ring, including cold
backup and hot backup. Cold backup indicates that when the link on
one end of the chain or ring fails, the service is interrupted for a short
period of time, and then continues on the other end of the chain or
ring. In hot backup mode, if the link on one end of the chain or ring
fails, the service switches to the other end of the chain or ring
immediately. In hot backup mode, only one RRU can be configured on
each chain. When the Topo Type parameter is set to RING and the
Backup Mode parameter is set to HOT, the head and the tail of the
ring must be configured on different BBUs.

Head Cabinet No.

Indicates the cabinet number of the board where the head CPRI port is
located.

Head Subrack No.

Indicates the subrack number of the board where the head CPRI port is
located.

Head Slot No.

Indicates the slot number of the board where the head CPRI port is
located.

Head Port No.

Indicates the number of the head CPRI port.

Tail Cabinet No.

Indicates the cabinet number of the board where the tail CPRI port is
located. Value NULL is displayed for the RRU chain which does not
have a tail CPRI port.

Tail Subrack No.

Indicates the subrack number of the board where the tail CPRI port is
located. Value NULL is displayed for the RRU chain which does not
have a tail CPRI port.

Tail Slot No.

Indicates the slot number of the board where the tail CPRI port is
located. Value NULL is displayed for the RRU chain which does not
have a tail CPRI port.

Tail Port No.

Indicates the number of the tail CPRI port. Value NULL is displayed
for the RRU chain which does not have a tail CPRI port.

BreakPoint
Position1

Indicates the breakpoint position 1 on the chain/ring. When this


parameter is set to 255, the breakpoint is disabled.

BreakPoint
Position2

Indicates the breakpoint position 2 on the chain/ring. When this


parameter is set to 255, the breakpoint is disabled.

Access Type

Indicates the access type of the RRU. The local port is used for the
connection of panels. The BBP is directly connected to the RRU/RFU.
The peer port is used for the convergence of backplane. The BBP is
connected to the IDX2 port to converge on other baseband processing

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

MO
Parameter

Meaning
boards so that the BBP can be connected to the RRU/RFU.

CPRI Line Rate

Indicates the user-defined rate. The values are as follows:


Auto: auto-negotiation mode.
1.25: auto-negotiation mode is not supported and the CPRI rate is 1.25
Gbit/s.
2.5: auto-negotiation mode is not supported and the CPRI rate is 2.5
Gbit/s.
4.9: auto-negotiation mode is not supported and the CPRI rate is 4.9
Gbit/s.
6.1: auto-negotiation mode is not supported and the CPRI rate is 6.1
Gbit/s.
9.8: auto-negotiation mode is not supported and the CPRI rate is 9.8
Gbit/s.

Local Slot No.

Indicates the slot number of the converged party in CPRI MUX. When
this parameter is set to 255, no slot number of the converged party is
specified. When the BBU where CPRI MUX is used is BBU3900, this
parameter does not need to be specified. When the BBU where CPRI
MUX is used is BBU3910, this parameter must be specified.

Cascading Level

Indicates the cascading level of the RRU chain/ring.

RRU No.

Indicates the number of RRUs connected on the RRU chain/ring.

Service impact
Technically, services of the original mode are not affected. However, the related
operations are performed around antennas, you are advised to disable the original RF
module based on the actual site conditions to ensure personal safety.

3.8.4 CPRI MUX for SDR RF Modules


1. Scenario description and application scope

CPRI MUX applies to the following scenarios:


- RF modules work in multiple modes.
- Less optic fiber cables are preferred. Compared with the dual-star topology, CPRI
MUX uses less optic fiber cables though the relationship between modes lessens as well.
- Stadium, subway, and high-speed train scenarios (chain CPRI MUX with multiple
cascading levels).

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

The following figure is an example.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Limitations:
Restriction on service specifications: The maximum service specifications of CPRI
MUX are less that those of the dual-star topology. In CPRI MUX, the bandwidth of the
baseband processing board that connects to CPRI fiber optic cables and the backplane
bandwidth of the converging and converged parties of CPRI MUX are limited.
Therefore, the specifications must be calculated based on factors such as the number of
ports connecting to CPRI fiber optic cables, port rate, number of cascaded RF modules,
main control board combination, and baseband processing board type. For details, see
CPRI MUX Feature Parameter Description.
Restriction on the slot and board type: CPRI MUX has requirements on board types that
can be supported by the converging party and converged party. In addition, if a
BBU3900 is used, the converging party must be configured in a certain slot. For details,
see CPRI MUX Feature Parameter Description.

2. Precautions
1) The length of the added CPRI cable is determined according to site survey. Determine
whether the CPRI fiber optic cable or the optical module works in a single mode or multiple
modes.
2) If the optical fiber is to be reused, check whether the optical fiber type matches the optical
fiber connector. If they do not match, the optical fiber must be transferred. For details, see
Reuse Guide and Checklist for CPRI Optical Cables in Distributed Base Stations.
3. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement
1) If the mode of the original RXU is to expanded to multiple modes, no additional RXU
is required.
2) A new RF module is added to serve multiple modes.

Material
Type

Material
Name

Quantity

Remarks

Auxiliary
materials

CPRI
electrical
cable

Same as the number of RRUs or


RFUs. Each RFU requires one CPRI
electrical cable.

Two ends of the


CPRI electrical cable
are connected to the
RFU and BBU,
respectively.

CPRI fiber
optic cable

Same as the number of RRUs. Each


RRU requires one CPRI fiber optic

Two ends of the


CPRI fiber optic

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Material
Type

3 Planning Mode Transition

Material
Name

CPRI optical
module

Quantity

Remarks

cable.

cable are connected


to the RRU and
BBU, respectively.

Twice the number of RRUs or


RFUs. Each RRU or RFU requires
one CPRI cable and each of the
CPRI cables must be configured
with two optical modules.

Two ends of the


CPRI cable are
connected to the
RRU and BBU,
respectively.

Software version requirement


CPRI MUX in separate-MPT scenarios: SRAN7.1

License requirement
None

Data configuration requirement


1) CPRI MUX in separate-MPT scenarios: Both the converging and converged parties
must be configured.
Converging party: A link needs to be configured as regular.
Converged party: Configure a link by setting parameters listed in the following table.
Access Type must be set to PEERPORT(peer port) and the correlation between the
local and peer ends must be specified. The following table provides the example.

Parameter
Name

Parameter ID

Setting Notes

Data Source

Access Type

AT

Set this parameter to


PEERPORT(peer
port).

Engineering design

Head Cabinet No.

HCN

Engineering design

Head Subrack No.

HSRN

Head Slot No.

HSN

Head Port No.

HPN

Set these parameters


to the cabinet
number, subrack
number, slot
number, and optical
port number of the
CPRI port on the
baseband processing
board of the peer
end, respectively.

Local Slot No.

LSN

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

For BBU3910s
used in separateMPT GU or GL
CPRI MUX and
BBU3900s, the
slot number does
not need to be
configured for
the converged
party. In this

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Engineering design
Engineering design
Engineering design

Equipment plan

121

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Parameter
Name

Parameter ID

Setting Notes

Data Source

case, set this


parameter to 255.

For BBU3910s
used in separateMPT scenarios
with UL CPRI
MUX, set this
parameter to the
slot number of
board used by
the converged
party.

2) CPRI MUX in co-MPT scenarios: A link is normally configured. The system


automatically assigns the converging and converged parties based on service
configurations.
For details, see CPRI MUX Feature Parameter Description.

Service impact

Scenario

Impact on Services of the Original Mode

Original mode as the


converging party and no
modification to the slot of the
original baseband processing
board

Services of the original mode are not affected.

Original mode as the


converging party and adjusting
the slot or the original
baseband processing board

Services carried by the baseband processing board of the


original mode are affected. In addition, services are
affected during the period from the adjustment of
baseband board slot to the configuration completion of
the original mode's data.

New mode as the converging


party

Connect the original CPRI cable to an RF module of the


new mode. Data of the original data needs to be modified.
Services are interrupted during the period from the CPRI
cable adjustment to the configuration completion of the
original mode's data.

3.9 Transmission Networking Planning


This section describes transmission networking planning.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

3.9.1 Transmission Networking Planning Process


Figure 1.1 Overall transmission networking planning process

Check whether independent transmission or co-transmission shall be used. The following


table provides the comparison between independent transmission and co-transmission.
Comparison
Item

Independent
Transmission

Co-transmission

Port requirement
for transmission
devices

An independent transmission port


must be configured for each
mode.

Multiple modes share a


transmission port.

IP addresses
requirement

For each mode, the port IP


address, O&M IP address, service
IP address, and signaling IP
address must be planned.

For each mode, the port IP address,


O&M IP address, service IP
address, and signaling IP address
must be planned.

The service IP address is the same


as the signaling IP address, and
can be the same as or different
from the O&M IP address.

The service IP address is the same


as the signaling IP address, and can
be the same as or different from
the O&M IP address.

The service IP address or


signaling IP address can be the
same as the port IP address.

The service IP address or signaling


IP address can be the same as the
port IP address.

The O&M IP address can be the


same as the port IP address.

The O&M IP address can be the


same as the port IP address.

(minimum)

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Comparison
Item

Independent
Transmission

Co-transmission
For panel co-transmission, an IP
address must be configured for the
co-transmission port.
For backplane co-transmission, no
port IP address needs to be planned
for the mode that does not provide
a transmission port.

Transmission
bandwidth
sharing

No sharing

Sharing

Co-IPsec/PKI

No sharing

Sharing is supported.

Reliability

All the modes are independent


from each other.

A reset or fault on the main control


board that provides a transmission
port for co-transmission affects
other modes.
The mode that provides a
transmission port for cotransmission must be deployed
first.

Check whether the original mode provides the transmission port.


It is recommended that the transmission port be configured on the board or mode that has the
strongest transmission capability when co-transmission is used.
However, if co-transmission is implemented through UMPT+UMPT, the transmission port
shall be provided by the primary BBU subrack. Therefore, in such a case, if the new mode is
configured in the secondary BBU subrack and has a stronger transmission capability, the
primary BBU subrack provides the transmission port for co-transmission.
If the interface capabilities of the original and new modes are similar, the transmission port of
the original mode is preferred. This can avoid service interruption caused by transmission
adjustment in the original mode.
Table 1.1 Mode transition scenario analysis
Categor
y

SeparateMPT or CoMPT

Scenario

Transmissio
n

Separate-MPT

New mode using independent transmission with separateMPT configuration


New mode using the transmission port provided by the
original mode with separate-MPT configuration
New mode providing a transmission port shared by the
original mode with separate-MPT configuration

Co-MPT mode
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Co-transmission for new and original modes with co-

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Categor
y

3 Planning Mode Transition

SeparateMPT or CoMPT

Scenario

expansion

MPT configuration

3.9.2 New Mode Using Independent Transmission


with Separate-MPT Configuration
1. Scenario description and application scope
In separate-MPT mode transition scenarios, the new mode provides a transmission port for
co-transmission, as shown in the following figure.

Transmission networking selection:


The transmission networking of the new mode is determined by the transmission type
supported by the new mode and actual site transmission condition. For example, if an eNodeB
supports Ethernet transmission and both Ethernet transmission and E1 transmission exist at
the site, Ethernet transmission must be configured for the eNodeB. If the site does not support
the transmission type supported by the new mode, transmission reconstruction must be
performed at the site.
2. Precautions
None
3. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement
Material requirements are determined by the transmission type of the new mode. For
details, see description about deployment of a base station of the new mode.

Material
Type

Material
Name

Quantity

Transmissio
n

E1/T1
electrical
cable

One, including four E1/T1 channels.

FE/GE
electrical
cable

One

FE/GE fiber

One

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Remarks

125

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Material
Type

3 Planning Mode Transition

Material
Name

Quantity

Remarks

optic cable
FE/GE
optical
module

One

Software version requirement


None

License requirement
Purchase the related license if the transmission type used by the new mode has license
requirements.

Data configuration requirement

The following table provides the related MOCs.


Domain

Configuratio
n Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

CME
Type

Transmission

New-mode main
control board

E1T1

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

ETHPORT

New-mode main
control board

PPPLNK

For details, see


section
"Configuring
Transport Data" in
3900 Series Base
Station Initial
Configuration
Guide.

New-mode main
control board

MPGRP

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

MPLNK

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

DEVIP

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

IPRT

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

OMCH

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

SCTPLNK

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

IPPATH

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

EPGROUP

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

USERPLANEHO
ST

Transmis
sion

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Transmis
sion
Transmis
sion

126

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

3 Planning Mode Transition

Configuratio
n Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

CME
Type

New-mode main
control board

USERPLANEPE
ER

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

SCTPHOST

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

SCTPPEER

Transmis
sion

Original mode: No change is required.


New mode: Configure the port IP address, O&M IP address, service link, signaling link, and
route in the same way as that for deploying a new base station. For details, see section
"Configuring Transport Data" in 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide.

Service impact
Services of the original mode are not affected. The new mode can provide services after
it is configured, transmission links are connected, and the base station is reset.

3.9.3 New Mode Using the Transmission Port


Provided by the Original Mode with Separate-MPT
Configuration
1. Scenario description and application scope
In mode transmission of a separate-mode base station, the new mode and original mode share
a transmission port provided by the original mode. Backplane co-transmission is
recommended, as shown in the following figure.

Transmission networking selection: No change is required because the transmission for the
original mode remains unchanged.
2. Precautions
Backplane co-transmission is recommended because this requires no additional IP address or
panel interconnection cable.
3. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement
No additional material is required.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

127

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Software version requirement


Backplane co-transmission: SRAN7.0 and later

License requirement
Related co-transmission licenses must be purchased.

Doma
in

Module
Type

License Control Item


Name (SBOM)

License
SBOM

Sales
Unit

Mod
e

Transmi
ssion

Cotransmissi
on

IP-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission on BS


side(GBTS)

88030QUG

Per BTS

Transmi
ssion

Cotransmissi
on

IP-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission on BS


side(NodeB)

88030QUR

Per
NodeB

Transmi
ssion

Cotransmissi
on

IP-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission on BS


side(eNodeB)

88030QUR

Per
eNodeB

Data configuration requirement

The following table provides the related MOCs.


Domain

Configuratio
n Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

CME
Type

Transmission

New-mode main
control board

TUNNEL

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

DEVIP

New-mode main
control board

IPRT

For details, see


section
"Configuring
Transport Data" in
3900 Series Base
Station Initial
Configuration
Guide.

New-mode main
control board

OMCH

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

SCTPLNK

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

IPPATH

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

EPGROUP

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

USERPLANEHO
ST

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

USERPLANEPE
ER

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

SCTPHOST

Transmis
sion

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Transmis
sion
Transmis
sion

128

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

3 Planning Mode Transition

Configuratio
n Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

CME
Type

New-mode main
control board

SCTPPEER

Transmis
sion

Original mode
providing a
transmission port

TUNNEL

Transmis
sion

Original mode
providing a
transmission port

IPRT

Transmis
sion

Original mode
providing a
transmission port

DHCPRELAYS
WITCH

Transmis
sion

Original mode
providing a
transmission port

DHCPSVRIP

Transmis
sion

Original mode:
The following items must be configured in the original mode:
- Backplane tunnel: The source slot number is set to the slot number of the board in the
original mode and the destination slot number is set to the slot number of the board in the new
mode.
- DHCP relay switch DHCPRELAYSWITCH and DHCP server IP address DHCPSVRIP
- uplink and downlink IP routes to the new mode
For details, see Co-Transmission Feature Parameter Description.
New mode:
- Backplane tunnel: The source slot number is set to the slot number of the board in the new
mode and the destination slot number is set to the slot number of the board in the original
mode.
- Configure the O&M IP address, service link, signaling link, and route of the new mode. For
details, see section "Configuring Transport Data" in 3900 Series Base Station Initial
Configuration Guide.

Service impact
Services of the original mode are not affected. The new mode can provide services once
it is started after the configuration and power-on.

3.9.4 New Mode Providing a Transmission Port


Shared by the Original Mode with Separate-MPT
Configuration
1. Scenario description and application scope

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

In mode transition of a separate-mode base station, the new mode provides a transmission port
connecting to the transmission network and the original mode shares the transmission port, as
shown in the following figure.

Transmission networking selection


None
2. Precautions
None
3. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement
No additional material is required for backplane co-transmission.

Software version requirement


Backplane co-transmission: SRAN7.0 and later

License requirement
Related co-transmission licenses must be purchased.

Doma
in

Module
Type

License Control Item


Name (SBOM)

License
SBOM

Sales
Unit

Mod
e

Transmi
ssion

Cotransmissi
on

IP-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission on BS


side(GBTS)

88030QUG

Per BTS

Transmi
ssion

Cotransmissi
on

IP-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission on BS


side(NodeB)

88030QUR

Per
NodeB

Transmi
ssion

Cotransmissi
on

IP-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission on BS


side(eNodeB)

88030QUR

Per
eNodeB

Data configuration requirement

The following table provides the related MOCs.


Domain

Configuratio
n Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

CME
Type

Transmission

New-mode main
control board

E1T1

For details, see


section

Transmis
sion

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

3 Planning Mode Transition

Configuratio
n Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

CME
Type

New-mode main
control board

ETHPORT

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

PPPLNK

New-mode main
control board

MPGRP

"Configuring
Transport Data" in
3900 Series Base
Station Initial
Configuration
Guide.

New-mode main
control board

MPLNK

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

TUNNEL

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

DEVIP

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

IPRT

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

OMCH

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

SCTPLNK

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

IPPATH

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

EPGROUP

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

USERPLANEHO
ST

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

USERPLANEPE
ER

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

SCTPHOST

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

SCTPPEER

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

DHCPRELAYS
WITCH

Transmis
sion

New-mode main
control board

DHCPSVRIP

Transmis
sion

Original-mode
main control board

TUNNEL

Transmis
sion

Original-mode
main control board

DEVIP

Transmis
sion

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Transmis
sion
Transmis
sion

131

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

3 Planning Mode Transition

Configuratio
n Object

MOC

Original-mode
main control board

IPRT

Parameter
Name

CME
Type
Transmis
sion

Original mode:
- Configure a backplane tunnel.
- Add a device IP address.
- Adjust the IP route.
For details, see Co-Transmission Feature Parameter Description.
New mode:
- Configure the DHCP relay switch DHCPRELAYSWITCH and DHCP server IP address
DHCPSVRIP for the original mode.
- Configure a backplane tunnel.
- Configure an IP route for the original mode.
- Configure the O&M IP address, service link, signaling link, and route of the new mode. For
details, see section "Configuring Transport Data" in 3900 Series Base Station Initial
Configuration Guide.

Service impact
Services of the original mode are interrupted during the period from transmission cable
adjustment to new site deployment and activation of the original mode's data.

3.9.5 Co-Transmission for New and Original Modes


with co-MPT Configuration
1. Scenario description and application scope
A new mode is added to the co-MPT base station and co-transmission is used for the new and
original modes, as shown in the following figure

Transmission networking selection


No change is required because the new and original modes use co-transmission networking.
2. Precautions
None
3. Engineering guidelines
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Material requirement
No new material is required.

Software version requirement


SRAN8.0 and later versions

License requirement
Related co-transmission licenses must be purchased.

Doma
in

Module
Type

License Control Item


Name (SBOM)

License
SBOM

Sales
Unit

Mod
e

Transmi
ssion

Cotransmissi
on

IP-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission on BS


side(GBTS)

88030QUG

Per BTS

Transmi
ssion

Cotransmissi
on

IP-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission on BS


side(NodeB)

88030QUR

Per
NodeB

Transmi
ssion

Cotransmissi
on

IP-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission on BS


side(eNodeB)

88030QUR

Per
eNodeB

Data configuration requirement

The following table provides the related MOCs.


Domain

Configuratio
n Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

CME
Type

Transmission

Node

DEVIP

Transmis
sion

Node

SCTPLNK

Node

IPPATH

For details, see


section
"Configuring
Transport Data" in
3900 Series Base
Station Initial
Configuration
Guide.

Node

EPGROUP

Transmis
sion

Node

USERPLANEHO
ST

Transmis
sion

Node

USERPLANEPE
ER

Transmis
sion

Node

SCTPHOST

Transmis
sion

Node

SCTPPEER

Transmis
sion

Node

CPBEARER

Transmis
sion

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Transmis
sion
Transmis
sion

133

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

3 Planning Mode Transition

Configuratio
n Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

CME
Type

New RAT

ABIS

Transmis
sion

New RAT

GBTSABISCP

Transmis
sion

New RAT

IUB

Transmis
sion

New RAT

IUBCP

Transmis
sion

New RAT

S1

Transmis
sion

New RAT

S1INTERFACE

Transmis
sion

New RAT

X2

Transmis
sion

New RAT

X2INTERFACE

Transmis
sion

Original mode:
Data of the original mode does not need any modification.
Node-related data needs to the changed as follows:
1) A port IP address DEVIP must be configured for the new mode. Note that this parameter is
required only when the port IP address is required for the new mode. If no new port IP address
is required, the new mode and original mode share the same port IP address.
2) The service link, signaling link, and route of the new mode must be configured.
New mode:
For new mode GU:
1) CPBEARER referenced by NODE must be configured on the signaling plane of the new
mode.
2) IPPATH or EPGROUP referenced by NODE must be configured on the user plane of the
new mode.
For new mode L:
1) CPBEARER or EPGROUP referenced by NODE must be configured on the signaling
plane of the new mode.
2) IPPATH or EPGROUP referenced by NODE must be configured on the user plane of the
new mode.
For details, see section "Configuring Transport Data" in 3900 Series Base Station Initial
Configuration Guide.
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

134

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Service impact
Services of the original mode are not affected. The new mode can provide services once
the configuration is completed.

3.10 Equipment Auxiliary Planning


1. Focus for equipment auxiliary planning
Equipment auxiliary planning covers installation, power supply, and heat dissipation for the
BBU and RF module of the new mode. The original BBU can be reconstructed or a new BBU
can be added to support the new mode. The following table provides the details.
Table 1.1 Focus for equipment auxiliary planning
Equip
ment

Scenari
o

Func
tion

Focus

BBU

Adding a
new mode
to the
original
BBU

Installa
tion

A BBU has been installed and installation is not needed.

Power
supply

Use the NEP-SD tool or PCT tool to determine whether


UPEU capacity expansion is required. If the UPEU
capacity expansion is required, DC power supply needs
to be provided to the new UPEU.
Note:
1. UPEUs of different types cannot be used together.
2. For the power supply capability of one UPEU or two
UPEUs, see BBU Hardware Description > BBU3900
and BBU3910 Hardware Description > BBU3900 and
BBU3910 Boards > UPEU in 3900 Series Base Station
Product Documentation.

Heat
dissipa
tion

In the high temperature areas, if an UPEU is added to the


BBU3900 of an outdoor DC cabinet, a high-speed FANc
must be added.
Note:
High temperature areas: areas where the number of days
during which the highest temperature exceeds 45C is
greater than 10 days in a year

Adding a
new BBU
for mode
transition

Installa
tion

If the new and original BBUs are installed in the same


cabinet, check whether the cabinet supports two BBUs. If
the new BBU is installed in another cabinet, check the
power supply and heat dissipation capabilities of the new
cabinet.
Note:
For the number of BBUs that can be installed in a
cabinet, see the section describing BBU/cabinet
specifications.

Power
supply
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Circuit breaker ports must be available on the DCDU to


provide power supply for the new BBU.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

135

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Equip
ment

RF
module

3 Planning Mode Transition

Scenari
o

SDR RF
module
without
new RF
module

Adding an
RFU

Func
tion

Focus

Heat
dissipa
tion

Check the heat dissipation capabilities of the cabinet.

Installa
tion

N/A

Power
supply

N/A

Heat
dissipa
tion

N/A

Installa
tion

1. Check whether the original cabinet supports the new


RF module (some Ver.A or Ver.B cabinets do not support
high-power RF modules). If the original cabinet does not
support the new RF module, a new cabinet shall be
added. Alternatively, you can upgrade or reconstruct the
original cabinet.

Note:
For the heat dissipation capability, see the section
describing BBU/cabinet specifications.

2. Check whether the original cabinet has sufficient


space. If no sufficient space is available, add a new
cabinet for the new RF module, such as a BTS3900,
BTS3900L, RFC, or BTS3910AL. When adding a new
cabinet, pay attention to the footprint for installing the
cabinet.
Note:
For the mapping between the RFUs and cabinets, see
Hardware Description > RFU Hardware Description
> Applicable Cabinets for RFUs.
For cabinet reconstruction, see "Installation guide for
enhancing existing cabinets" in this topic.
Power
supply

1. RFU power supply:


If the original cabinet is used, check whether the DCDU
of the original cabinet can provide sufficient DC power
supply. If more DC power supply is required, use circuit
breakers with larger capacity or add an input to the
circuit breaker.
If a new cabinet is used, check whether the AC power
system provides DC power to the DCDU of the new
cabinet (pay attention to the cable and circuit breaker).
2. Check whether the AC power system can provide
sufficient power supply. If more power supply is
required, add a PSU or a power supply cabinet. When
adding a new power cabinet, pay attention to the
footprint for installing the cabinet.
Note:
For details about how to calculate the required cables,

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Equip
ment

3 Planning Mode Transition

Scenari
o

Func
tion

Focus
cable diameter, and circuit breaker, see "Cable diameter
or circuit breaker calculation."

Adding an
RRU

Heat
dissipa
tion

If a new RFU can be installed in the cabinet, the RFU


heat dissipation requirement can be met.

Installa
tion

Determine where the RRU is to be installed. The RRU


can be installed on a pole, wall, or L-type stand. If the
RRU is installed on a pole or wall, pay attention to the
installation position and bearing capacity. If the RRU is
installed on the L-type stand, pay attention to the
installation position of the L-type stand.

Power
supply

1. RRU power supply:


RRU power cable: Check the diameter and length of the
RRU power cable based on the RRU type and distance
between the RRU and BBU.
DC power supply for the RRU: Check whether a new
DCDU is required and whether the new DCDU's circuit
breaker meets the related requirements. In addition, if the
DC power supply cable is routed from the cabinet, check
the cabinet cabling capability.
AC power supply: Check whether the AC power system
can provide sufficient power supply. If more power
supply is required, add a PSU or a power supply cabinet.
In addition, check whether the power system provides
sufficient output circuit breakers.
Note:
1. For details about how to calculate the required cables,
cable diameter, and circuit breaker, see "Cable diameter
or circuit breaker calculation."
2. You can determine the number of cables that can be
provided by a cabinet based on the number of RRUs or
RFUs supported by the cabinet. For details, see
specifications in "BBU and cabinet specifications."
3. For the mapping between RRUs and a cabinet, see the
number of RRUs and power specifications supported by
the cabinet in "BBU and cabinet specifications."

Transm
ission
equipm
ent

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Original
transmissi
on
equipment

Heat
dissipa
tion

N/A

Installa
tion

N/A

Power
supply

N/A

Heat
dissipa

N/A

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Equip
ment

3 Planning Mode Transition

Scenari
o

Func
tion

Focus

tion

Others

Adding a
new
transmissi
on
equipment
/Replacing
the
original
transmissi
on
equipment

Installa
tion

Check whether the cabinet has enough room for the new
transmission equipment.

Power
supply

Check whether power circuit breakers must be provided


for the transmission equipment.

Heat
dissipa
tion

The power consumption of the transmission equipment


and the total power consumption of other equipment
must meet the heat dissipation capabilities of the cabinet.

Air
conditione
r in the
equipment
room

Heat
dissipa
tion

If a device is added to an indoor site, check the heat


dissipation capability of the equipment room.

Equipment
room

Installa
tion

Pay attention to the feeder window, ground bar, and cable


tray in the equipment room during the site survey.

2. Power consumption of the BBU or cabinet


Use the PCT tool for calculation.
3. BBU and cabinet specifications
For details about BBU and cabinet specifications, see SingleRAN Multi-mode BTS Product
Specification.
4. Cabinet selection
For details about how to select a cabinet, see GUL Base Station Overview and Selection
Guide.
5. Cable diameter or circuit breaker calculation
For details, see Engineering Interface Parameter Design Guide for Wireless BTSs.
6. Installation guide for enhancing existing cabinets
The cabinet upgrading and reconstruction guides include the followings: BTS3900
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets, BTS3900A Installation Guide for
Enhancing Existing Cabinets, BTS3900L Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets,
and DBS3900 Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.
7. Engineering guidelines

Material requirement
Check whether a new material is required based on the planning descriptions in this
section.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Version requirement
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

138

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

None

License requirement
None

Data configuration requirement


Pay attention to configuration of the cabinet and monitoring parts in the cabinet.
For details, see Base Station Cabinets and Subracks (Including the BBU Subrack)
Configuration Feature Parameter Description and Monitoring Management Feature
Parameter Description.

Table 1.2 Key parameters related to the FMU


Domai
n

Configu
ration
Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

Param
eter ID

Example
Value

Equipme
nt

Adding an
FMU

FMU

Manager Cabinet
No.

MCN

Adding an
FMU

FMU

Manager Subrack
No.

MSRN

Adding an
FMU

FMU

Serial Number

MPN

Adding an
FMU

FMU

Address

ADDR

14

Adding an
FMU

FMU

Smart
Temperature
Control

STC

ENABLE(Enable
)

Table 1.3 Key parameters related to the TCU


Domai
n

Configu
ration
Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

Parame
ter ID

Example
Value

Equipme
nt

Adding a
TCU

TCU

Manager Cabinet
No.

MCN

Adding a
TCU

TCU

Manager
Subrack No.

MSRN

Adding a
TCU

TCU

Serial Number

MPN

Adding a
TCU

TCU

Address

ADDR

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Table 1.4 Key parameters related to the EMU


Domai
n

Configu
ration
Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

Parame
ter ID

Example
Value

Equipme
nt

Adding an
EMU

EMU

Manager Cabinet
No.

MCN

Adding an
EMU

EMU

Manager
Subrack No.

MSRN

Adding an
EMU

EMU

Serial Number

MPN

Adding an
EMU

EMU

Address

ADDR

Table 1.5 Key parameters related to the PMU


Domai
n

Configu
ration
Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

Parame
ter ID

Example
Value

Equipme
nt

Adding a
PMU

PMU

Manager Cabinet
No.

MCN

Adding a
PMU

PMU

Manager
Subrack No.

MSRN

Adding a
PMU

PMU

Serial Number

MPN

Adding a
PMU

PMU

Address

ADDR

Table 1.6 Key parameters related to the battery


Domai
n

Configu
ration
Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

Parame
ter ID

Example
Value

Equipme
nt

Adding a
PMU

BATTERY

Battery Type

BTYPE

VRLA_BAT(VR
LA Battery)

Adding a
PMU

BATTERY

Battery 1
Capacity

BC1

30

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

140

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Table 1.7 Key parameters related to the CCU


Domai
n

Configu
ration
Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

Parame
ter ID

Example
Value

Equipme
nt

Adding a
CCU

CCU

Manager Cabinet
No.

MCN

Adding a
CCU

CCU

Manager
Subrack No.

MSRN

Adding a
CCU

CCU

Serial Number

MPN

Adding a
CCU

CCU

DirectConnectFl
ag

DCF

YES (Yes)

Adding a
CCU

CCU

Cascade No.

CCN

Adding a
CCU

CCU

Connected RAT

CS

GSM

Service impact

Table 1.8 Service impact


Scenario

Impact on Services of the Original Mode

Adjusting the power system

Services of the entire site are interrupted.

Installing a new cabinet

Services of the original mode are not affected.

Expanding the capacity by


adding a new module in the
original cabinet

Services of the original mode are not affected.

Reconstructing the original


cabinet

Services of the original mode are interrupted during the


reconstruction.

3.11 Summary of Mode Transition Planning


3.11.1 License File Requirement
When adding a new mode, new RF modules, main control boards, or baseband processing
boards must be added, which requires the related single-mode licenses, for example, power or
TRX licenses. The way of purchasing such a license is the same as that for single-mode
equipment, and therefore, details are not described here.
This section uses multimode transition as an example to describe the license requirements.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Table 1.1 Summary of multimode BBOM license allocation


Do
mai
n

Mod
ule
Type

License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevi
ation

Sales
Unit

Mod
e

RF

Multiband
RF
modul
es
except
for
the
RRU3
961.

First Mode
First Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(UMTS)

MultiMode
MultiBand
License for
MultiBand RF
Module
(UMTS)
(Per Band
per RRU)

82205398

LQW9RF
BAND01

Per
band

RF

MultiMode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(UMTS)

MultiMode
MultiBand
License for
MultiBand RF
Module
(UMTS)
(Per Band
per RRU)

82205398

LQW9RF
BAND01

Per
band

RF

First Mode
First Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(LTE FDD)

MultiMode
MultiBand
License for
MultiBand RF
Module
(LTE
FDD) (Per
Band per
RRU)

82205382

LLT1MM
LMBRM0
1

Per
band

RF

MultiMode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(LTE FDD)

MultiMode
MultiBand
License for
MultiBand RF
Module
(LTE
FDD) (Per
Band per

82205382

LLT1MM
LMBRM0
1

Per
band

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

142

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Do
mai
n

Mod
ule
Type

3 Planning Mode Transition

License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevi
ation

Sales
Unit

Mod
e

RRU)
RF

Must
be
purch
ased
for
the
RRU3
961 if
both
the
800
MHz
and
900
MHz
freque
ncy
bands
are
used.

RF
800M/900
M Multi
Band
license

RF
800M/900
M Multi
Band
license

82204034

LLT1RFM
B01

Per
band
per
RRU

RF
GU

Nonblade
modul
e

GSM/UMT
S Dual
Mode
license

The
number of
RF Units
with
GSM/UM
TS dual
mode
function
enabled

82201199

LQW9MB
TSRF02

Per
sector

Blade
&AA
U

GSM/UMT
S Dual
Mode
license for
Blade&AA
U

The
number of
RF Units
with
GSM/UM
TS dual
mode
function
enabled

82201199

LQW9MB
TSRF02

Per
sector

Nonblade
modul
e

GSM/LTE
Dual Mode
license

GSM/LTE
Dual Mode
license(per
Sector)

82201472

LLT1GLD
M01

Per
sector

Blade
&AA
U

GSM/LTE
Dual Mode
license for

GSM/LTE
Dual Mode
license(per

82201472

LLT1GLD
M01

Per
sector

RF
GL

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

143

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Do
mai
n

RF
UL

RF
GUL

Mod
ule
Type

3 Planning Mode Transition

License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevi
ation

Sales
Unit

Mod
e

Blade&AA
U

Sector)

Nonblade
modul
e

UMTS/LTE
Dual Mode
license

UMTS/LT
E Dual
Mode
license(per
Sector)

82201473

LLT1ULD
M01

Per
sector

Blade
&AA
U

UMTS/LTE
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AA
U

UMTS/LT
E Dual
Mode
license(per
Sector)

82201473

LLT1ULD
M01

Per
sector

Nonblade
modul
e

RF
GSM/UMT
S Dual
Mode
license +
RF
GSM/LTE
Dual Mode
license

NA

NA

NA

Per
sector

U+L

N/A

NA

NA

Per
sector

U+L

or
RF
GSM/UMT
S Dual
Mode
license +
RF
UMTS/LTE
Dual Mode
license
Blade
&AA
U

GSM/UMT
S Dual
Mode
license for
Blade&AA
U+
GSM/LTE
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AA
U
or
GSM/UMT
S Dual

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Do
mai
n

Mod
ule
Type

3 Planning Mode Transition

License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevi
ation

Sales
Unit

Mod
e

Mode
license for
Blade&AA
U+
UMTS/LTE
Dual Mode
license for
Blade&AA
U
MPT

Multi
mode
coMPT

UMPT
Multi Mode
License(GS
M)

UMPT
Multi
Mode
License
(GSM)(per
UMPT)

82204202

LGB3UM
ML01

Per
UMPT

MPT

Multi
mode
coMPT

UMPT
Multi Mode
License(U
MTS)

UMPT
Multi
Mode
License
(UMTS)
(per
UMPT)

82203981

LQW9GU
DM01

Per
UMPT

MPT

Multi
mode
coMPT

UMPT
MultiMode
license
(LTE FDD)

UMPT
Multi
Mode
License
(per
UMPT)
(FDD)

82204259

LLT1UM
ML01

Per
UMPT

MPT

Multi
mode
coMPT

UMPT
Multi Mode
License
(per
UMPT)
(TDD)

UMPT
Multi
Mode
License
(per
UMPT)
(TDD)

82204285

LLT1TUM
ML01

Per
UMPT

Clock

Clock
sharin
g

Multi-mode
BS
Common
Reference
Clock(eNo
deB)

FunctionLTELLT1MCR
C01-Multimode BS
Common
Reference
Clock(eNo
deB)(Per

81201529

LLT1MCR
C01

Per
eNode
B

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Do
mai
n

Mod
ule
Type

3 Planning Mode Transition

License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevi
ation

Sales
Unit

Mod
e

eNodeB)
Baseb
and

Cobaseb
and

UBBP
First-Mode
license
(GSM)

UBBP
MultiMode
license
(GSM)
(Per
Module)

82204551

LGMIUB
BP

Per
UBBP

Baseb
and

Cobaseb
and

UBBP
MultiMode
license
(GSM)

UBBP
MultiMode
license
(GSM)
(Per
Module)

82204551

LGMIUB
BP

Per
UBBP

Baseb
and

Cobaseb
and

UBBP
First-Mode
license
(UMTS)

UBBP
MultiMode
license
(UMTS)

82204657

LQW9UB
PDM01

Per
UBBP

Baseb
and

Cobaseb
and

UBBP
MultiMode
license
(UMTS)

UBBP
MultiMode
license
(UMTS)

82204657

LQW9UB
PDM01

Per
UBBP

Baseb
and

Cobaseb
and

UBBP
First-Mode
license
(LTE FDD)

UBBP
MultiMode
license
(FDD)

82205382

LLT1MM
LMBRM0
1

Per
UBBP

Baseb
and

Cobaseb
and

UBBP
MultiMode
license
(FDD)

UBBP
MultiMode
license
(FDD)

82205382

LLT1MM
LMBRM0
1

Per
UBBP

Baseb
and

Cobaseb
and

UBBP
First-Mode
license
(LTE TDD)

UBBP
MultiMode
license
(TDD)

82204849

LLT1TUB
MML01

Per
UBBP

Baseb
and

Cobaseb
and

UBBP
MultiMode

UBBP
MultiMode

82204849

LLT1TUB
MML01

Per
UBBP

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Do
mai
n

Trans
missi
on

Mod
ule
Type

Cotrans
missi
on

3 Planning Mode Transition

License
Control
Item
Name
(SBOM)

License
Control
Item
Name
(BBOM)

license
(TDD)

license
(TDD)

IP-Based
Multi-mode
CoTransmissio
n on BS
side(eNode
B)

FunctionLTELLT1IPM
CT01-IPBased
Multimode CoTransmissi
on on BS
side(eNode
B)(Per
eNodeB)

License
BBOM

License
Abbrevi
ation

Sales
Unit

Mod
e

81201528

LLT1IPM
CT01

Per
eNode
B

Table 1.2 Multimode SBOM licenses


Doma
in

Module
Type

License Control Item


Name (SBOM)

License
SBOM

Sales
Unit

Mod
e

Clock

Clock
sharing

Multi-mode BS Common
Reference Clock(GBTS)

88030QUK

Per BTS

Clock

Clock
sharing

Multi-mode BS Common
Reference Clock(NodeB)

88030QUU

Per
NodeB

Clock

Clock
sharing

Multi-mode BS Common
Reference Clock(eNodeB)

88030QUW

Per
eNodeB

Transmi
ssion

Cotransmissi
on

IP-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission on BS


side(GBTS)

88030QUG

Per BTS

Transmi
ssion

Cotransmissi
on

IP-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission on BS


side(NodeB)

88030QUR

Per
NodeB

Transmi
ssion

Cotransmissi
on

IP-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission on BS


side(eNodeB)

88030QUR

Per
eNodeB

The license must be adjusted when a dependent GSM NE is to be reconstructed into an


independent GSM NE.

In GBSS R15.0, the control mechanism of BTS license is changed. The main change is that
eGBTS controls those features quoted in BTS independently. Before enable or use these
features, GTS should allocate sufficient licenses on U2000 eGBTS License Management
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

View. Otherwise, these features cannot be enabled and CS/PS transaction may even be
infected. The following table describes how to allocate license of those BTS features for each
eGBTS.
1.

The Features Included by eGBTS License File But Not Supported by the eGBTS
Site

Featu
re ID

License
Descriptio
n

Sale
Unit

GBTS
Suppo
rted

eGBTS
Suppor
ted

License allocating
guidance for newly
built eGBTS

High Power
(per TRX)

Per
TRX

Yes

No

License = 0

TRU which
works as
Multitransceivers
Resource of
the 3rd
generation
BTS (per
TRX)

Per
TRX

Yes

No

License = 0

BBU Carrier
Capacity
License (per
TRX)

per
TRX

Yes

No

License = 0

GBFD115901

PBT(Power
Boost
Technology)
(per TRX)

Per
TRX

Yes

No

License = 0

GBFD115902

Transmit
Diversity (per
TRX)

Per
TRX

Yes

No

License = 0

BTS3900B
Transceiver
Resource (per
TRX)

Per
TRX

Yes

No

License = 0

2.

The Features Supported by eGBTS Site R15.0

Multi-Carrier
60 W High
Power License
(per TRX)

Per
TRX

Yes

Yes

License = the number of


activated TRXs of GBTS
with GBTS Power Type (w)
set in [60 W, 80 W).
Related BSC MML:
LST GTRXDEV

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Multi-Carrier
80 W High

Per
TRX

Yes

Yes

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

License = the number of


TRXs of GBTS with GBTS
148

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Power License
(per TRX)

Power Type (w) set in (80


W).
Related BSC MML:
LST GTRXDEV

TRU which
works as
Multitransceivers
Resource of
3900 (per
TRX)

Per
TRX

Yes

Yes

Non-SubSite scene:
License = the number of
logical TRXs of eGBTS
the number of include GSM
TRX's Boards.
SubSite scene(Supported
begin eGBTS R16.0):
(1) International and China
Unicom: License = the
number of logical TRXs of
eGBTS * the number of
location groups the
number of RXUs from all
location groups.
(2) China Mobile:
License = the number of
logical TRXs of eGBTS
the number of RXUs from
the most RXUs location
group.
Related BSC MML:
LST GTRX;
LST BTSLOCGRPE;
Related eGBTS MML:
LST
GTRXGROUPSECTOREQ
M LST SECTOREQM

MRFD211801

Multi-mode
Dynamic
Power
Sharing(GSM)
(per Site)

Per Site

Yes

Yes

license = 1 if eGBTS's
Power Sharing Type set to
GUPWRSHR (GU Power
Sharing).
Related eGBTS MML:
LST GBTSPWRSHRGRP;

MRFD211703

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

2.0 MHz
Central
Frequency
point
separation
between GSM
and UMTS
mode(GSM)
(per Site)

Per Site

Yes

Yes

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

The license of this feature is


not checked in BTS. When
manually allocating the
license to eGBTS, GTS
should contact the Huawei
salesman and allocate 1
license for each eGBTS for
which the customer has
bought this feature.
149

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

MRFD211804

3 Planning Mode Transition

GSM Power
Control on
Interference
Frequency for
GU Small
Frequency
gap(GSM)
(per Site)

per
BTS

MRFD211505

Bandwidth
sharing of
MBTS Multimode CoTransmission(
GBTS) (per
Site)

Per Site

Yes

Yes

The license of this feature is


not checked in BTS. When
manually allocating the
license to eGBTS, GTS
should contact the Huawei
salesman and allocate 1
license for each eGBTS for
which the customer has
bought this feature.

MRFD211602

Multi-mode
BS Common
IPSec(GSM)
(per Site)

per
BTS

Yes

Yes

The license of this feature is


not checked in BTS. When
manually allocating the
license to eGBTS, GTS
should contact the Huawei
salesman and allocate 1
license for each eGBTS for
which the customer has
bought this feature.

MRFD211802

GSM and
UMTS
Dynamic
Spectrum
Sharing(GSM)
(per Site)

per
BTS

Yes

Yes

License = 1 if Spectrum
Sharing Allowed of eGBTS
set to YES.

Dynamic MA
for GU
Dynamic
Spectrum
Sharing(GSM)
(per Site)

per
BTS

MRFD211803

Yes

Yes

License = 1 if at least one


cell of the eGBTS set
Frequency-based Power
Control to ON.
Related eGBTS MML:
LST GLOCELLALGPARA

Related BSC MML:


LST GDSSPARA
Yes

Yes

License = 1 if in a eGBTS,
at least one channel's FH
Index Used After Frequency
Spectrum Sharing set to
value in range [0,63].
Related BSC MML:
LST GTRXCHANHOP;

MRFD211806

GSM and LTE


Dynamic
Power
Sharing(GSM)
(per Site)

Per
BTS

Yes

Yes

license = 1 if eGBTS's
Power Sharing Type set to
GLPWRSHR (GL Power
Sharing).
Related eGBTS MML:
LST GBTSPWRSHRGRP;

MRFD211901
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Multi-RAT
Carrier Joint
Shutdown(GB

Per
BTS

Yes

Yes

License = 1 if in the eGBTS,


at least one cell's Inter -RAT
Cell Dynamic Shutdown set

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

TS) (per Site)

to ON.
Related BSC MML:
LST GCELLSOFT

GBFD116602

IPSec Bypass
(per Site)

Per
BTS

No

Yes

License = 1 If eGBTS need


to open this feature by set
IPSec Bypass Switch to
ENABLE.
Related eGBTS MML:
LST IPSECBYPASSCFG

UMPT MultiMode
License(GSM)
(per UMPT)

Per
UMPT

No

Yes

1. license = 0 for each


eGBTS if in GO scenario
building eGBTS.
2. license = 0 for each
eGBTS if building multiRAT (with G) co-MPT
SRAN BTS (GU/GL/GUL).
3. license = 1 for each
eGBTS when expanding GRAT for multi-RAT (without
G) co-MPT SRAN BTS
(such as UL->GUL).

Antenna
Intermodulatio
n Performance
Detection (per
TRX)

Per
TRX

Yes

Yes

The license check of this


feature is triggered by
related maintaining MML. If
this feature is needed,
license = the number of
activated logical TRXs of
each eGBTS.
Related eGBTS MML:
STR RFTEST;
STR GBTSRFTST

Extended
Spectrum Scan
(per TRX)

Per
TRX

Yes

Yes

The license check of this


feature is triggered by
related eGBTS LMT GUI
maintaining function. If this
feature is needed, license =
the number of activated
logical TRXs of each
eGBTS.
Related eGBTS LMT GUI
maintenance function:
Offline spectrum scan
monitoring

3.
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

The Features Supported by eGBTS Site R15.1


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Feature
ID

License
Descripti
on

Sal
e
Uni
t

GBTS
Supp
orted

eGBTS
Suppor
ted

License allocating
guidance for newly
built eGBTS

GBFD151202

BTS IP
Active
Performance
Measuremen
t (per Site)

Per
BTS

No

Yes

license = 1 if eGBTS's
TWAMPCLIENT or
TWAMPRESPONDER
function is enabled.
Related BTS MML:
LST TWAMPCLIENT
LST TWAMPRESPONDER

4.

The Features Supported by eGBTS Site R16.0

Featu
re ID

License
Descriptio
n

Sale
Unit

GB
TS
Su
pp
ort
ed

eG
BT
S
Su
pp
ort
ed

License allocating
guidance for newly built
eGBTS

SubSite
Solution
License (per
Module)

Per
Module

Yes

Yes

License = the number of RXUs


which belong to the eGBTS location
group the number of RXUs which
belong to the location group which
has the most RXUs.
Related BSC MML:
LST BTSLOCGRPE
Related BTS MML:
LST SECTOR
LST RRU

RFU co-cell
Solution
License (per
Module)

Per
Module

Yes

Yes

License = the number of RFUs


which belong to the eGBTS location
group
Related BSC MML:
LST BTSLOCGRPE
Related BTS MML:
LST SECTOR
LST RRU

GBFD115903

4-Way
Receiver
Diversity (per
TRX)

Per
TRX

Yes

Yes

License = the number of TRXs


which is configured 4-Way Receiver
Diversity.
Related BSC MML:
LST GTRX
Related BTS MML:

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Featu
re ID

3 Planning Mode Transition

License
Descriptio
n

Sale
Unit

GB
TS
Su
pp
ort
ed

eG
BT
S
Su
pp
ort
ed

License allocating
guidance for newly built
eGBTS

LST GTRXGROUP
-

GBFD160209

GBFD160210

UBBP MultiMode license


(GSM) (Per
Module)

Per
Module

IPSec
redundancy
among multiSeGWs (per
BTS)

Per
BTS

BTS
supporting
PKI
redundancy
(per BTS)

Per
BTS

Yes

Yes

License = the number of


GBTSBBRES
Related BTS MML:
LST GBTSBBRES

No

Yes

license = 1 if eGBTS's IPSec


redundancy function is enabled.
Related BTS MML:
LST IKEPEER

No

Yes

license = 1 if eGBTS's PKI


redundancy function is enabled.
Related BTS MML:
LST CA
LST CRLTSK

MRFD261103

AAS RAT
Specific
Tilting (GSM)
(Per RU)

Per RU

No

Yes

The license of this feature is not


checked in BTS. When manually
allocating the license to eGBTS,
GTS should contact the Huawei
salesman and allocate the number of
licenses which equals the number of
AASs which the customer has
bought.

Not
Commer
cial

AAS Virtual
Four Uplink
Channels for
GSM (per
RU)

Per RU

No

Yes

License = the number of AARUs


whose four virtual ports are used as
the receiving channel by
GTRXGROUP.
Related BTS MML:
LST GTRXGROUP
LST GTRXGROUPSECTOREQM
LST AARU

5.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

The Features Supported by eGBTS Site R17.0

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Featu
re ID

License
Descriptio
n

Sale
Unit

GB
TS
Su
pp
ort
ed

eG
BTS
Sup
por
ted

License allocating
guidance for newly built
eGBTS

GBFD170205

GTMUb
SingleOM
(Per BTS)

per
BTS

No

Yes

license = 1 if the GTMUb functions


as the main control board of the
eGBTS.
Ralated eGBTS MML:
DSP BRDMFRINFO

6.

The Features Supported by eGBTS Site R17.1

Featur
e ID

License
Descriptio
n

Sale
Unit

GB
TS
Sup
por
ted

eG
BT
S
Su
pp
ort
ed

License allocating
guidance for newly built
eGBTS

GBFD171205

BTS
Supporting
Multi-Carrier
PKI (per
BTS)

per
BTS

No

Yes

license = 1 if eGBTS's configuration


MPT is GTMU.

GBFD171206

BTS
Supporting
IPSec
Redirection
(per BTS)

per
BTS

No

Yes

The license of this feature is not


checked in BTS. When manually
allocating the license to eGBTS,
GTS should contact the Huawei
salesman and allocate 1 license to
the base station which the customer
has bought.

Multi-Mode
Multi-Band
License for
Multi-Band
RF Module
(GSM) (Per
Band per
RRU)

per
Band
per
RRU

Yes

Yes

Calculate the number of all the


frequency bands used by multi-band
RRU in all the GSM cells.

Related BTS MML:


DSP BRD

Related BTS MML:


LST GTRX
Related BTS MML:
LST GTRXGROUPSECTOREQM
LST SECTOREQM

7.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

The Features Supported by eGBTS Site R18.1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

154

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Featur
e ID

License
Descriptio
n

Sale
Unit

GBT
S
Sup
por
ted

eG
BT
S
Su
pp
ort
ed

License allocating
guidance for newly built
eGBTS

GBFD181202

BTS
Supporting
Digital
Certificate
Whitelist
Management
(Per BTS)

per
BTS

No

Yes

license = 1 if eGBTS is opened the


switch of IKECHECKSW.
Related BTS MML:
LST CERTCFG

3.11.2 NE Software Version Requirement


If multiple NEs are involved, the highest requirements for the NE software version must be
used. For example, if backplane co-transmission requires SRAN7.0 or later versions and cobaseband requires SRAN8.0 or later, the NE must use SRAN9.0 or later versions. For details
about the version mapping between related NEs and base stations, see Multimode Base
Station Release Notes.

3.11.3 Board and Cable Installation Requirement.


The following table lists the materials required for mode transition.
The materials include the key materials required during mode transition but does not include
materials for new site deployment.
Table 1.1 Materials required for mode transition
Material Type

Material Name

Quantity

RF

RRU/RFU

Determined based
on the plan

CPRI high-speed
cable

Determined based
on the plan

For the RFU

CPRI fiber optic


cable

Determined based
on the plan

For the RRU

Optical module

Determined based
on the plan

For the RRU

RRU power cable

Determined based
on the plan

For the RRU

RF interconnection
cable

Determined based
on the plan

Required by the
GSM, multimode,
and UMTS RF
modules

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Remarks

155

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Material Type

Material Name

Quantity

Remarks

Antenna and feeder

Antenna

Same as the number


of sectors in the new
mode

Required when the


original antenna is to
be reconstructed or
replaced

Feeder

Twice the number of


sectors

Not required when


the RRU and
antenna are directly
connected to each
other.
The length of the
feeder needs to be
determined
according to the site
survey.

Jumper

SBT

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

The length of the


jumper needs to be
determined
according to the site
survey.
Same as the number
of sectors

Required on the
antenna side when
the following
conditions are met:

RET is configured
for the new
mode.

No TMA is
configured.

The RRU and


antenna are not
directly
connected to
each other.

TMA

Same as the number


of sectors

Configured as
required by the
network plan.

RCU

Same as the number


of sectors

Required when RET


is required but no
internal RET is
available.

AISG cable

Same as the number


of sectors

Required for
connecting to the
SBT or TMA when
RET is required. The
lengths of the AISG
cable vary with
scenarios.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Material Type

MPT

Material Name

Quantity

Remarks

AISG cable from the


RRU

Same as the number


of sectors

Required when the


RRU and RET are
directly connected to
each other.

Combiner

Four times the


number of sectors

The combiner model


is determined by
frequency bands
where signals are to
be combined.

UMPT(L)/LMPT

Determined based
on the plan

An LTE main
control board is
added.
Use a newly
delivered board
because such boards
work in the
maintenance mode
by default. If you do
not use a newly
delivered board, this
board may not work
in the maintenance
mode, and a false
alarm may be
generated during
mode transition and
services of the newly
deployed mode may
be interrupted.

UMPT(U)/WMPT

Determined based
on the plan

A UMTS main
control board is
added.
Use a newly
delivered board
because such boards
work in the
maintenance mode
by default. If you do
not use a newly
delivered board, this
board may not work
in the maintenance
mode, and a false
alarm may be
generated during
mode transition and
services of the newly
deployed mode may
be interrupted.

GTMU
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Determined based

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

A GSM main control


157

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Material Type

BBU
interconnection and
BBU

Material Name

BBU subrack

Quantity

Remarks

on the plan

board is added.

Determined based
on the plan

Used for BBU


expansion.
When BBU3900 and
BBU3910 are
interconnected, the
BBU3900 must be
used as the primary
BBU subrack.

Transmission cable

Some

Used for base station


transmission

Cable for BBU


interconnection

Some

BBU
interconnection
through
UCIU+UMPT: One
optical fiber and two
optical modules are
required for BBU
interconnection.
BBU
interconnection
through
UMPT+UMPT: A
cable is required for
BBU
interconnection.

UCIU

Determined based
on the plan

Used for BBU


interconnection
through
UCIU+UMPT.
The UCIU board
must be installed in
the same BBU as the
GTMU board is
installed because of
the GTMU hardware
limitation.

3.11.4 Data Configuration Requirement


This section summarizes the data configuration requirements for mode transition of a base
station (including the GBTS) during planning, helping users specify or import the related
parameters to the CME when the CME is used for creating scripts.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Domain

Configura
tion
Object

MOC

Paramete
r Name

Para
met
er ID

Value
(Examp
le)

CM
E
Ty
pe

RF
module

Adding an
RXU

RRU

Cabinet No.

CN

RF

Adding an
RXU

RRU

Subrack No.

SRN

60

RF

Adding an
RXU

RRU

Slot No.

SN

RF

Adding an
RXU

RRU

RRU type

RT

MRRU

RF

Adding an
RXU

RRU

RRU Topo
Position

TP

TRUNK
(in the
main chain
or ring)

RF

Adding an
RXU

RRU

RRU
Chain/Ring
No.

RCN

RF

Adding an
RXU

RRU

RRU Position

PS

RF

Adding an
RXU

RRU

RF Unit
Working
Mode

RS

GL

RF

Adding an
RXU

RRU

Number of
RX channels

RXN
UM

RF

Adding an
RXU

RRU

Number of
TX channels

TXN
UM

RF

Root BBU
mode

CTRLLNK

Local Link
No.

LN

Equ
ipm
ent

Root BBU
mode

CTRLLNK

Local Cabinet
No.

CN

Equ
ipm
ent

Root BBU
mode

CTRLLNK

Local Subrack
No.

SRN

Equ
ipm
ent

Root BBU
mode

CTRLLNK

Local Slot No.

SN

Equ
ipm
ent

Root BBU
mode

CTRLLNK

Upper Cabinet
No.

UPCN

Equ
ipm
ent

BBU
interconne
ction

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

Clock
GBTS

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

3 Planning Mode Transition

Configura
tion
Object

MOC

Paramete
r Name

Para
met
er ID

Value
(Examp
le)

CM
E
Ty
pe

Root BBU
mode

CTRLLNK

Upper
Subrack No.

UPSR
N

Equ
ipm
ent

Root BBU
mode

CTRLLNK

Upper Slot
No.

UPSN

Equ
ipm
ent

Root BBU
mode

CTRLLNK

Upper Port
No.

UPPT

Equ
ipm
ent

Leaf BBU
mode

CTRLLNK

Local Link
No.

LN

Equ
ipm
ent

Leaf BBU
mode

CTRLLNK

Local Cabinet
No.

CN

Equ
ipm
ent

Leaf BBU
mode

CTRLLNK

Local Subrack
No.

SRN

Equ
ipm
ent

Leaf BBU
mode

CTRLLNK

Local Slot No.

SN

Equ
ipm
ent

Leaf BBU
mode

CTRLLNK

Upper Cabinet
No.

UPCN

Equ
ipm
ent

Leaf BBU
mode

CTRLLNK

Upper
Subrack No.

UPSR
N

Equ
ipm
ent

Leaf BBU
mode

CTRLLNK

Upper Slot
No.

UPSN

Equ
ipm
ent

Leaf BBU
mode

CTRLLNK

Upper Port
No.

UPPT

Equ
ipm
ent

Original
mode/new
mode

BTSCLK

Clock Type

ClkTy
pe

PEER_CL
K

Equ
ipm
ent

BTSCLK

Peer Mode

STAN
DAR
D

Set this
parameter
to the
mode of
the

Equ
ipm
ent

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

3 Planning Mode Transition

Configura
tion
Object

MOC

Paramete
r Name

Para
met
er ID

Value
(Examp
le)

CM
E
Ty
pe

reference
clock.
Clock

Original
mode/new
mode

CLKMODE

Clock
Working
Mode

MOD
E

Set this
parameter
to
MANUAL
(Manual).

Equ
ipm
ent

CLKMODE

Selected
Clock Source

CLKS
RC

Set this
parameter
to
PEERCL
K(Peer
Clock).

Equ
ipm
ent

PEERCLK

Peer Clock
No.

PN

Set this
parameter
to 0.

Equ
ipm
ent

PEERCLK

Peer Standard

PS

Set this
parameter
to the
mode of
the
reference
clock.

Equ
ipm
ent

MPT

Original
mode/new
mode

Working
Mode

Working
Mode

WM

Set this
parameter
to
CONCUR
RENT(Co
ncurrent).

Equ
ipm
ent

Baseband

Original
mode/new
mode

BBP

Base Band
Work
Standard

BBW
S

Determine
d by the
UBBP
configurati
on plan

Equ
ipm
ent

Original
mode/new
mode

MDU

Base Band
Work
Standard

BBW
S

Determine
d by the
mode
planned
for the
UMDU

Equ
ipm
ent

New-mode
main control
board

E1T1

Transmiss
ion

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Tran
smis
sion

161

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

3 Planning Mode Transition

Configura
tion
Object

MOC

Paramete
r Name

New-mode
main control
board

ETHPORT

Tran
smis
sion

New-mode
main control
board

PPPLNK

Tran
smis
sion

New-mode
main control
board

MPGRP

Tran
smis
sion

New-mode
main control
board

MPLNK

Tran
smis
sion

New-mode
main control
board

TUNNEL

Tran
smis
sion

New-mode
main control
board

DEVIP

Tran
smis
sion

New-mode
main control
board

IPRT

Tran
smis
sion

New-mode
main control
board

OMCH

Tran
smis
sion

New-mode
main control
board

SCTPLNK

Tran
smis
sion

New-mode
main control
board

IPPATH

Tran
smis
sion

New-mode
main control
board

EPGROUP

Tran
smis
sion

New-mode
main control
board

and
USERPLAN
EHOST (in
end point
configuration
mode)

Tran
smis
sion

New-mode
main control

USERPLAN
EPEER

Tran
smis

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Para
met
er ID

Value
(Examp
le)

CM
E
Ty
pe

162

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

3 Planning Mode Transition

Configura
tion
Object

MOC

Paramete
r Name

board

Para
met
er ID

Value
(Examp
le)

CM
E
Ty
pe
sion

New-mode
main control
board

SCTPHOST

Tran
smis
sion

New-mode
main control
board

SCTPPEER

Tran
smis
sion

New-mode
main control
board

DHCPRELA
YSWITCH

Tran
smis
sion

New-mode
main control
board

DHCPSVRIP

Tran
smis
sion

Originalmode main
control board

TUNNEL

Tran
smis
sion

Originalmode main
control board

DEVIP

Tran
smis
sion

Originalmode main
control board

IPRT

Tran
smis
sion

3.11.5 Tool Requirements for Co-MPT Reconstruction


Co-MPT reconstruction and mode expansion require special tools. These tools are deployed
on the standalone CME. The following table lists these tools.
Tool Name

How to Obtain

BSC component coMPT reconstruction


configuration data
conversion:
SRANconvert_BSC
Module_V***R***C
**SPC***.zip

Obtain the corresponding co-MPT conversion components based


on the versions.

BTS component coMPT reconstruction


configuration data
conversion:
SRANconvert_GBTS

Obtain the corresponding co-MPT conversion components based


on the versions.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

http://support.huawei.com/carrier/navi#col=software&path=PBI17851894/PBI1-7854240/PBI1-7275801/PBI1-19953556/PBI113761

http://support.huawei.com/carrier/navi#col=software&path=PBI17851894/PBI1-7854240/PBI1-7275801/PBI1-19953557/PBI113751

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

163

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

3 Planning Mode Transition

Tool Name

How to Obtain

&SRANModule_V**
*R***C**SPC***.zi
p
Data planning
template for co-MPT
reconstruction
configuration data
conversion

NOTE
Use the data planning template for the corresponding SRAN version during
co-MPT reconstruction.

The following is the CME Client installation directory of the


English version: U2000 installation
folder\client\client\Data\Common\SRANconvert\local\en_US
The following is the CME Client installation directory of the
Chinese version: U2000 installation
folder\client\client\Data\Common\SRANconvert\local\zh_CN

Standalone CME

Obtain the software version of the standalone CME based on the


versions.
http://support.huawei.com/carrier/navi#col=software&path=PBI17851894/PBI1-7854702/PBI1-7275896/PBI1-21103986/PBI121044913

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

164

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Mode Transition Examples

This section describes mode transition using the MO involved in each domain for mode
transition planning based on application scenarios as an example. These mode transition
examples can be used as references for customizing the CME template during data creation.

4.1 Example: Mode Transition from GU to GU+L


(UCIU+UMPT)
This chapter takes the transition from a GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station to a GU+L
(UCIU+UMPT) triple-mode base station as an example. This chapter lists the managed
objects (MOs) to be configured during the transition. Figure 4-1 shows the hardware
configurations before and after mode transition. Figure 4-2 shows the transmission
networking topology before and after mode transition.
Figure 1.1 Hardware configurations before and after mode transition

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

165

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Figure 1.2 Transmission networking topology before and after mode transition

Table 4-1 lists the major differences before and after mode transition.
Table 2.1 Major differences before and after mode transition
Item

Before Transition

After Transition

Mode

GSM and UMTS dual-mode

GSM, UMTS, and LTE


triple-mode

Service configuration

GSM and UMTS operating


in the 900 MHz frequency
band, three sectors
configured

GSM and UMTS operating


in the 900 MHz frequency
band, three sectors
configured; GSM and LTE
operating in the 1800 MHz
frequency band, three
sectors configured

900 MHz: GSM S2/2/2/,


UMTS S2/2/2, 1T2R

900 MHz: GSM S2/2/2/,


UMTS S2/2/2, 1T2R
1800 MHz: GSM S2/2/2,
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Item

Before Transition

After Transition
LTE S1/1/1 (1x5 MHz),
2T2R

BBU

One BBU; GSM and UMTS


sharing the same BBU

Two BBUs interconnected


through UCIU+UMPT
GSM and UMTS sharing the
same BBU; LTE using the
other BBU

RF typology

Dual-star topology for GU


RF modules

Dual-star topology for both


GU RF modules and GL RF
modules

Transmission scheme

Co-transmission through
panel interconnection for
GSM and UMTS, IP over
Ethernet

Co-transmission through
UMPT backplane, IP over
Ethernet

Clock networking

GSM and UMTS sharing the


IEEE 1588 V2 reference
clock

GSM, UMTS, and LTE


using an IEEE 1588 V2
reference clock

The following tables list the MOs involved in the mode transition in different domains. The
data in these tables can be the references for data configuration in summary tables.
Table 2.2 LTE global data configuration
Dom
ain

Configura
tion
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Globa
l

LTE

CnOperator

CN Operator ID

CnOperator

CN Operator name

LTE

CnOperator

CN Operator type

CNOPERATOR
_PRIMARY

CnOperator

Mobile Country code

502

CnOperator

Mobile network code

04

Clock

TIMESRC

Time Source

NTP

Clock

NTPCP

IPv4 Address of NTP


Server

10.141.142.22

Clock

NTPCP

Synchronization Period

Clock

TASM

Clock Working Mode

MANUAL

Clock

TASM

Clock Source No.

Clock

TASM

Selected Clock Source

IPCLK

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

167

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Dom
ain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configura
tion
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Clock

TASM

Clock Synchronization
Mode

FREQ

Clock

TASM

Quality Level

QL_PRC

Clock

IPCLKLNK

Link No.

Clock

IPCLKLNK

Protocol Type

PTP

Clock

IPCLKLNK

Cabinet No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

0/1/7

Clock

IPCLKLNK

Server IPv4

170.179.179.34

Clock

IPCLKLNK

Client IPv4

160.70.7.10

Clock

IPCLKLNK

Domain

Table 2.3 LTE equipment data configuration


Domain

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

Equipment

LTE

SUBRACK

Cabinet No.

Cabinet No.: 0

Subrack No.

Subrack No.: 1

Subrack Type

Type: BBU3900

MPT

MPT

Cabinet No.

MPT

MPT

Subrack No.

MPT

MPT

Slot No.

MPT

MPT

Board Type

UMPT

Baseband

BBP

Cabinet No.

Baseband

BBP

Subrack No.

Baseband

BBP

Slot No.

Baseband

BBP

Board Type

LBBP

Baseband

BBP

Work Mode

FDD

CPRI-based
topology

RRUCHAIN

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Three RRU chains


are connected to
optical fiber
cables through
three optical ports
0, 1, and 2 on the
168

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

baseband
processing board.
RF module

RRU

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Configure an RRU
on the new RRU
chain. The subrack
No. of the RRU
must be different
from that of a
configured RRU
and the working
mode of the RRU
must be set to
GSM_LTE.
Subrack No. is
set to 63, 64, and
65 for the GL
RRUs.

Feeder

RET

Device No.

0, 1, and 2

Antenna and
feeder

RET

RET Type

SINGLE_RET

Antenna and
feeder

RET

Polar Type

DUAL

Antenna and
feeder

RET

Antenna Scenario

REGULAR

Antenna and
feeder

RET

Control Port
Cabinet No.

Antenna and
feeder

RET

Control Port
Subrack No.

63, 64, and 65

Antenna and
feeder

RET

Control Port Slot


No.

Antenna and
feeder

RETSUBUNIT

Device No.

0, 1, and 2

Antenna and
feeder

RETSUBUNIT

Subunit No.

Antenna and
feeder

RETSUBUNIT

Connect to the
following:
0\63\0 R0A0\63\0 R0B
0\64\0 R0A0\64\0 R0B
0\65\0 R0A-

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

0\65\0 R0B

Table 2.4 LTE transmission data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

LTE

SCTPLNK

Link No.

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

0/1/7

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First Local IP
Address

160.70.7.13

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Local SCTP
Port No.

2913

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First Peer IP
Address

125.120.120.1

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Peer SCTP Port


No.

2910

Transmission

CPBEARER

CP Bear No.

Transmission

CPBEARER

Flag

MASTER

Transmission

CPBEARER

Bear Type

SCTP

Transmission

CPBEARER

Link No.

Transmission

IPPATH

Path ID

Transmission

IPPATH

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

0/1/7

Transmission

IPPATH

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

IPPATH

Port Type

ETH

Transmission

IPPATH

Port No.

Transmission

IPPATH

Path Type

ANY

Transmission

IPPATH

Local IP

160.70.7.13

Transmission

IPPATH

Peer IP

171.23.36.1

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface ID

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface CP
Bearer ID

Transmission

S1Interface

CN Operator ID

Transmission

S1Interface

MME Release

Release_R10

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface Is
Blocked

FALSE

Transmission

OMCH

Standby Status

MASETR

Transmission

OMCH

Local IP

160.70.7.13

Transmission

OMCH

Local Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

OMCH

Peer IP

10.141.142.22

Transmission

OMCH

Peer Mask

255.255.255.0

Transmission

DEVIP

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

0\1\7

Transmission

DEVIP

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

DEVIP

Port Type

ETH

Transmission

DEVIP

Port No.

Transmission

DEVIP

IP Address

160.70.7.13

Transmission

DEVIP

Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

TUNNEL

Configure a
tunnel between
the UMPT and
GTMU boards,
and a tunnel
between the
UMPT and
WMPT boards
for backplane
transmission.
Both tunnels are
for downlink
transmission.

Transmission

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

IPRT

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Route Index

Configure eight
IP routes to the
following items:
U2000, clock,
SG-W, MME,
BSC, RNC,
GSM tunnel,
and UMTS
171

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
tunnel.
Set the route
type to Next
Hop for all the
IP routes except
for the two
routes to
tunnels and
specify the IP
addresses as
planned.
Set the route
type to IF and
port type to
TUNNEL for
IP routes to
tunnels.

Transmission

VLANMAP

Next Hop IP

160.70.7.10

Transmission

VLANMAP

Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

VLANMAP

VLAN Mode

SINGLEVLAN

Transmission

VLANMAP

VLAN ID

446

Transmission

VLANMAP

Set VLAN
Priority

DISABLE

Transmission

CTRLLNK

The local board


is the UMPT
whose cabinet
No., subrack
No., and slot
No. being 0, 1,
and 7,
respectively.
The peer board
is the UCIU
whose cabinet
No., subrack
No., and slot
No. all being 0.

Transmission

ETHPORT

Port No.

0 and 1

Transmission

ETHPORT

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to those of the
UMPT in
subrack 1.

Transmission

ETHPORT

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

ETHPORT

Port Attribute

Two values:

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
COPPER
FIBER

Transmission

DHCPSVRIP

DHCP Server
IP Address

Set the DHCP


server IP
address to the
IP address of
the U2000 and
MBSC for
deployment.

Transmission

DHCPRELAYS
WITCH

DHCP Relay
Switch

ENABLE

Transmission

DHCPSW

OMCH AutoEstablishment
Switch

ENABLE

Transmission

DHCPSW

Vlanscan
Switch

DISABLE

Table 2.5 LTE radio data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Feeder

LTE

SECTOR

Add three
sectors.
They use the
following
antennas:
0:
0,63,0,0;0,63,0,
1
1:
0,64,0,0;0,64,0,
1
2:
0,65,0,0;0,65,0,
1

Antenna and
feeder

SECTOREQM

Three pieces of
sector
equipment are
added.
They
correspond to
sectors 0

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
through 2.
The following
sector antennas
are used:
0:
0,63,0,0,3,0;0,6
3,0,1,3,0
1:
0,64,0,0,3,0;0,6
4,0,1,3,0
2:
0,65,0,0,3,0;0,6
5,0,1,3,0

Radio

Cell

Three LTE cells


are added with
the following
key parameters
and the
corresponding
values:
FrequencyBand
:3
DlEarfcn: 1600
DlBandwidth:
CELL_BW_N5
0
UlBandwidth:
CELL_BW_N5
0
FddTddInd:
CELL_FDD
Transmit and
receive mode:
2T2R
Sector
equipment:
corresponding
to sector
equipment 0
through 2.

Radio

BASEBANDE
QM

Baseband
Equipment
Type

ULDL

Radio

BASEBANDE
QM

UMTS UL
Demodulation

DEM_4_CHAN

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Mode
Radio

BASEBANDE
QM

Baseband
Equipment
Board

0,1,3

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Table 2.6 GSM data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

CPRI-based
topology

GSM

BTSRXUCHAI
N

Configure three
RRU chains on
optical ports 3,
4, and 5 on the
GTMU.

CPRI-based
topology

BTSRXUBRD

Added one
MRRU to
position 1 of
each of the
newly added
three chains.

RF module

BTSRXUBP

Working
Standard

GSM_AND_LT
E
Note that the
working mode
of the new RF
module must be
set to GL.

Radio

GCELL

Radio

TRXINFO

Configure two
TRXs in each
cell using the
main and
diversity RX
channels.

Radio

TRXBIND2PH
YBRD

Bind three cells


to the R0As of
three RRUs,
respectively.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Freq. Band

Add three cells


that are served
by the
DCS1800
frequency band.

175

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Table 2.7 GSM transmission data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

GSM

BTSDEVIP

Port Type

LOOPINTERF
ACE

Transmission

BTSDEVIP

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No. of
the GTMU

Transmission

BTSDEVIP

IP Address

88.200.8.241

Transmission

BTSIP

BTS
Communication
Type

LOGICIP

Transmission

BTSIP

BTS IP

88.200.8.241

Transmission

BTSIP

BSC IP

26.14.1.1

Transmission

BTSESN

BTS Interface
Board Bar Code
1

21021127226T
BA915704

Transmission

BTSESN

OM Bear Board

BACKBOARD

Transmission

BTSTUNNEL

--

From the
GTMU to
UMPT (LTE),
the tunnel No.
is 0.

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Destination IP
Address

26.14.1.1 (BSC)

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Route Index

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Route Type

OUTIF

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No. of
the ports

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No. of
the GTMU

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Interface Type

TUNNEL

Transmission

BTSCLK

Clock Type

PEER_CLK

Transmission

BTSCLK

Peer Mode

LTE

Transmission

IPRT

Subrack No

Transmission

IPRT

Slot No

14

Transmission

IPRT

Destination IP
address

88.200.8.241

Transmission

IPRT

Next hop type

Gateway

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

176

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

Transmission

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

IPRT

Forward route
address

26.14.0.1

Table 2.8 UMTS equipment data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Clock

UMTS

PEERCLK

Peer Clock No.

Clock

PEERCLK

Peer Standard

LTE

Clock

TASM

Clock Working
Mode

MANUAL

Clock

TASM

Clock Source
No.

Clock

TASM

Selected Clock
Source

PEERCLK

Clock

TASM

Clock
Synchronizatio
n Mode

FREQ

Clock

TASM

Quality Level

QL-SSU-B

Table 2.9 UMTS transmission data configuration


Domain

Configurat
ion Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

UMTS

DEVIP

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to the cabinet
No./subrack
No./slot No. of
the WMPT

Transmission

DEVIP

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

DEVIP

Port Type

LOOPINT

Transmission

DEVIP

Port No.

Transmission

DEVIP

IP Address

88.200.8.242

Transmission

DEVIP

Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Set the local IP


address (base
station side) and
destination IP
177

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurat
ion Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
address (base
station
controller side)
of an SCTP link
to LTE IP
addresses.

Transmission

IPPATH

Set the local IP


address (base
station side) and
destination IP
address (base
station
controller side)
of an IP path to
LTE IP
addresses.

Transmission

OMCH

Transmission

TUNNEL

The tunnel
starts from the
WMPT to the
UMPT and the
direction is
uplink.

Transmission

IPRT

Configure IP
routes to the
U2000, RNC,
and UMPT.
Remove the
clock route.

Local IP

Change it to an
address on the
LTE side.

Route Type: IF
Port Type:
TUNNEL

4.2 Example: Mode Transition from GO to GL


This chapter takes the transition from a GSM only (GO) single-mode base station to a GSM
and LTE dual-mode base station as an example. This chapter lists the managed objects (MOs)
to be configured during the transition. Figure 4-3 shows the hardware configurations before
and after mode transition. Figure 4-4 shows the transmission networking topology before and
after mode transition.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Figure 1.1 Hardware configurations before and after mode transition

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Figure 1.2 Transmission networking topology before and after mode transition

Table 4-10 lists the major differences before and after mode transition.
Table 2.1 Major differences before and after mode transition
Item

Before Transition

After Transition

Mode

GSM only single-mode

GSM and LTE dual-mode

Service configuration

GSM operating in the 900


MHz frequency band, three
sectors configured; GSM
operating in the 1800 MHz
frequency band, three
sectors configured

GSM operating in the 900


MHz frequency band, three
sectors configured; GSM
and LTE operating in the
1800 MHz frequency band,
three sectors configured

900 MHz: GSM S4/4/4,


1T2R

900 MHz: GSM S4/4/4,


1T2R

1800 MHz: GSM S2/2/2,

1800 MHz: GSM S2/2/2,

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Item

BBU

Before Transition

After Transition

1T2R

LTE S1/1/1 (1x5 MHz),


2T2R

One BBU

One BBU
GSM and LTE using the
same BBU and GSM
configured with UBRI

RF typology

Star topology for GO RF


modules

Star topology for GO RF


modules and dual-star
topology for GL RF modules

Transmission scheme

Transmission through panel,


IP over Ethernet

GSM and LTE cotransmission through


backplane interconnection
with LTE port connected to
the transport network, IP
over Ethernet

Clock networking

GO IEEE 1588 V2 reference


clock

GSM and LTE sharing an


IEEE 1588 V2 reference
clock

The following tables list the MOs involved in the mode transition in different domains. The
data in these tables can be the references for data configuration in summary tables.
Table 2.2 LTE global data configuration
Dom
ain

Configura
tion
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

LTE

CnOperator

CN Operator ID

CnOperator

CN Operator name

LTE

CnOperator

CN Operator type

CNOPERATOR
_PRIMARY

CnOperator

Mobile Country code

502

CnOperator

Mobile network code

04

Clock

TIMESRC

Time Source

NTP

Clock

NTPCP

IPv4 Address of NTP


Server

10.141.142.22

Clock

NTPCP

Synchronization Period

Clock

TASM

Clock Working Mode

MANUAL

Clock

TASM

Clock Source No.

Clock

TASM

Selected Clock Source

IPCLK

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Dom
ain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configura
tion
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Clock

TASM

Clock Synchronization
Mode

FREQ

Clock

TASM

Quality Level

QL_PRC

Clock

IPCLKLNK

Link No.

Clock

IPCLKLNK

Protocol Type

PTP

Clock

IPCLKLNK

Cabinet No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to those of the
main control
board

Clock

IPCLKLNK

Server IPv4

170.179.179.34

Clock

IPCLKLNK

Client IPv4

160.70.7.10

Clock

IPCLKLNK

Domain

Globa
l

APPLICATION

Application
Maintenance Mode

INSTALL

Trans
missi
on

ETHPORT

Port No.

Trans
missi
on

ETHPORT

Cabinet No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to those of the
main control
board

Trans
missi
on

ETHPORT

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Table 2.3 LTE equipment data configuration


Domain

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

MPT

LTE

MPT

Cabinet No.

MPT

MPT

Subrack No.

MPT

MPT

Slot No.

MPT

MPT

Board Type

LMPT

Baseband

BBP

Cabinet No.

Baseband

BBP

Subrack No.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

Baseband

BBP

Slot No.

Baseband

BBP

Board Type

LBBP

Baseband

BBP

Work Mode

FDD

Equipment

CABINET

Cabinet No.

Cabinet No.: 0 and


1

Cabinet Type

Cabinet Type:
BTS3900
Equipment

SUBRACK

Cabinet No.

Cabinet No.: 0

Subrack No.

Subrack 0:
BBU3900

Subrack Type

Subrack 11: FMU


Subrack 4: RFU
CPRI-based
topology

RRUCHAIN

RF

RFU

Six RRU chains


are connected to
the fiber optical
cables through the
six CPRI ports on
the baseband
processing board.
Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Add six RFUs:


1/4/0 - 1/4/5

RF

RFU

RRU Topo Position

TRUCK

RF

RFU

RRU Chain No.

0-5

RF

RFU

RRU Position

RF

RFU

RRU type

MRFU

RF

RFU

RF Unit Working
Mode

GL

RF

RFU

Number of RX
channels

RF

RFU

Number of TX
channels

Antenna and
feeder

RET

Device No.

0, 1, and 2

Antenna and
feeder

RET

RET Type

SINGLE_RET

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

183

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

Antenna and
feeder

RET

Polar Type

DUAL

Antenna and
feeder

RET

Antenna Scenario

REGULAR

Antenna and
feeder

RET

Control Port
Cabinet No.

Antenna and
feeder

RET

Control Port
Subrack No.

Antenna and
feeder

RET

Control Port Slot


No.

0, 2, and 4

Antenna and
feeder

RETSUBUNIT

Device No.

0, 1, and 2

Antenna and
feeder

RETSUBUNIT

Subunit No.

Antenna and
feeder

RETSUBUNIT

Connect Port 1
Cabinet No.

Connect to the
following:
1\4\0 R0A- 1\4\1
R0A
1\4\2 R0A- 1\4\3
R0A
1\4\4 R0A- 1\4\5
R0A

Table 2.4 LTE transmission data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

LTE

SCTPLNK

Link No.

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

The main
control board
provides
transmission
ports.

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First Local IP
Address

160.70.7.10

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Local SCTP
Port No.

2913

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First Peer IP

125.120.120.1

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

184

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Address
Transmission

SCTPLNK

Peer SCTP Port


No.

2910

Transmission

CPBEARER

CP Bear No.

Transmission

CPBEARER

Flag

MASTER

Transmission

CPBEARER

Bear Type

SCTP

Transmission

CPBEARER

Link No.

Transmission

IPPATH

Path ID

Transmission

IPPATH

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to those of the
main control
board

Transmission

IPPATH

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

IPPATH

Port Type

ETH

Transmission

IPPATH

Port No.

Transmission

IPPATH

Path Type

ANY

Transmission

IPPATH

Local IP

160.70.7.10

Transmission

IPPATH

Peer IP

171.23.36.1

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface ID

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface CP
Bearer ID

Transmission

S1Interface

CN Operator ID

Transmission

S1Interface

MME Release

Release_R8

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface Is
Blocked

FALSE

Transmission

OMCH

Standby Status

MASETR

Transmission

OMCH

Local IP

Base Station
Transport
Data\OM
Plane\*OmCh
LocalIP

Transmission

OMCH

Local Mask

Base Station
Transport
Data/OM
Plane/*OmCh
LocalMask

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

OMCH

Peer IP

Base Station
Transport
Data\OM
Plane\OmCh
DstIP

Transmission

OMCH

Peer Mask

Base Station
Transport
Data\OM
Plane\OmCh
DstMask

Transmission

DEVIP

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to those of the
main control
board

Transmission

DEVIP

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

DEVIP

Port Type

ETH

Transmission

DEVIP

Port No.

Transmission

DEVIP

IP Address

160.70.7.10

Transmission

DEVIP

Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

TUNNEL

Transmission

IPRT

The tunnel
starts from the
UMPT to the
GTMU and the
direction is
downlink.
Route Index

Configure six IP
routes: for
OMCH, for
IPCLK, to the
GBTS, S-GW,
MME, and
BSC,
respectively.
Set the route
type to Next
Hop for all the
IP routes except
for the two
routes to the
GBTS and
specify the IP
addresses as
planned.
Set the route
type to IF and

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
port type to
TUNNEL for
IP routes to
tunnels.

Transmission

VLANMAP

Next Hop IP

160.70.7.10

Transmission

VLANMAP

Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

VLANMAP

VLAN Mode

SINGLEVLAN

Transmission

VLANMAP

VLAN ID

446

Transmission

VLANMAP

Set VLAN
Priority

DISABLE

Transmission

DHCPSVRIP

DHCP Server
IP Address

Set the DHCP


server IP
address to the
IP address of
the U2000 and
MBSC for
deployment.

Transmission

DHCPRELAYS
WITCH

DHCP Relay
Switch

ENABLE

Transmission

DHCPSW

OMCH AutoEstablishment
Switch

ENABLE

Transmission

DHCPSW

Vlanscan
Switch

DISABLE

Table 2.5 LTE radio data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Antenna and
feeder

LTE

SECTOR

Sector ID

Add three
sectors.

Sector Name
Sector Antenna

They use the


following
antennas:
0: 1, 4, 0, 0; 1,
4, 1, 0
1: 1, 4, 2, 0; 1,
4, 3, 0
2: 1, 4, 4, 0; 1,
4, 5, 0

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain
Antenna and
feeder

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

SECTOREQM

Sector
Equipment ID

Three pieces of
sector
equipment are
added.
They
correspond to
sectors 0
through 2.
The following
sector antennas
are used:
0:
1,4,0,0,3,0;1,4,1
,0,3,0
1:
1,4,2,0,3,0;1,4,3
,0,3,0
2:
1,4,4,0,3,0;1,4,5
,0,3,0

Cell

Three LTE cells


are added with
the following
key parameters
and the
corresponding
values:
FrequencyBand
:3
DlEarfcn: 1250
DlBandwidth:
CELL_BW_N5
0
UlBandwidth:
CELL_BW_N5
0
FddTddInd:
CELL_FDD
Transmit and
receive mode:
2T2R
Sector
equipment:
corresponding
to sector
equipment 0

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

188

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
through 2.
Baseband
equipment:
share equipment
0.

Baseband

BASEBANDE
QM

Baseband
Equipment ID

Baseband

BASEBANDE
QM

Baseband
Equipment
Type

ULDL

Baseband

BASEBANDE
QM

UMTS UL
Demodulation
Mode

DEM_4_CHAN

Baseband

BASEBANDE
QM

Baseband
Equipment
Board

0, 0, 3

Table 2.6 GSM configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Equipment

GSM

BTSBRD

Add a UBRI to
slot 2
(0_0_2_1).

Equipment

BTSCABINET

Cabinet No.

Add a BTS3900
to cabinet 1.

CPRI-based
topology

BTSRXUCHAI
N

Add six chains


that are
connected to
fiber optical
cables through
six CPRI
optical ports on
the UBRI.

RF

BTSRXUBRD

Added one
MRFU to
position 1 of
each of the
newly added six
chains.

RF

BTSRXUBP

Working
Standard

GSM_AND_LT
E
Note that the

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
working mode
of the new RF
module must be
set to GL.

RF

TRXBIND2PH
YBRD

Bind the TRX


of the cell
served by the
1800 MHz to
the 1800 MHz
MRFU in
cabinet 1.

Table 2.7 BSC Configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

GSM

BTSDEVIP

Port Type

LOOPINTERF
ACE

Transmission

BTSDEVIP

*Port No.

Transmission

BTSDEVIP

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to the cabinet
No./subrack
No./slot No. of
the GTMU

Transmission

BTSDEVIP

IP Index

Transmission

BTSDEVIP

IP Address

88.200.8.37

Transmission

BTSDEVIP

IP Mask

255.255.255.0

Transmission

BTSDEVIP

BTS Inner IP
Switch

NO

Transmission

BTSIP

BTS
Communication
Type

LOGICIP

Transmission

BTSIP

BTS IP

88.200.8.37

Transmission

BTSIP

BSC IP

40.13.3.200

Transmission

BTSIP

BTS MultiIP
Switch

NO

Transmission

BTSESN

BTS Interface
Board Bar Code
1

21021127229T
AB020269

Transmission

BTSESN

OM Bear Board

BACKBOARD

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

190

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

BTSTUNNEL

The tunnel
starts from the
GTMU to the
UMPT and is
used for
interconnection
through panel
transmission.

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Route Index

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Destination IP
Address

40.13.3.200

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Destination
Address Mask

255.255.255.25
5

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Route Type

OUTIF

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No. of
the GTMU

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Interface Type

TUNNEL

Transmission

BTSCLK

Clock Type

PEER_CLK

Transmission

BTSCLK

Peer Mode

LTE

Transmission

IPRT

Subrack No.

Transmission

IPRT

Slot No.

14

Transmission

IPRT

Destination IP
address

Set the
destination IP
addresses to the
IP addresses of
the GBTS:
88.200.8.37
160.70.7.10

Transmission

IPRT

Destination
address mask

255.255.255.25
5

Transmission

IPRT

Next hop type

Gateway

Transmission

IPRT

Forward route
address

40.13.3.1

Transmission

IPRT

Priority

HIGH

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

4.3 Example: Mode Transition from GO to GU


This chapter takes the transition from a GSM only (GO) single-mode base station to a GSM
and UMTS dual-mode base station as an example. This chapter lists the managed objects
(MOs) to be configured during the transition. Figure 4-5 shows the hardware configurations
before and after mode transition. Figure 4-6 shows the transmission networking topology
before and after mode transition.
Figure 1.1 Hardware configurations before and after mode transition

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Figure 1.2 Transmission networking topology before and after mode transition

Table 4-17 lists the major differences before and after mode transition.
Table 2.1 Major differences before and after mode transition
Item

Before Transition

After Transition

Mode

GSM only single-mode

GSM and UMTS dual-mode

Service configuration

GSM operating in the 900


MHz frequency band, three
sectors configured

GSM and UMTS operating


in the 900 MHz frequency
band, three sectors
configured

900 MHz: GSM S4/4/4,


1T2R

900 MHz: GSM S4/4/4/,


UMTS S2/2/2, 1T2R

BBU

One BBU

GSM and UMTS sharing the


same BBU

RF typology

Chain topology

Dual-star topology for GU


RF modules

Transmission scheme

Independent transmission
through panel, IP over
Ethernet

GSM and UMTS


independent transmission
through panel, IP over

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

193

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Item

Before Transition

After Transition
Ethernet

Clock networking

IP reference clock

GSM and UMTS using an


independent IP reference
clock

The following tables list the MOs involved in the mode transition in different domains. The
data in these tables can be the references for data configuration in summary tables.
Table 2.2 UMPT data configuration
Domain

Configur
ation
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recomme
nded
Value

Clock

UMTS

IPCLKLNK

Link No.

Clock

IPCLKLNK

Protocol Type

PTP

Clock

IPCLKLNK

Cabinet No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.
of the main
control board

Clock

IPCLKLNK

Server IPv4

170.179.179.3
4

Clock

TIMESRC

Time Source

NTP

Clock

TASM

Clock Working Mode

MANUAL

Clock

TASM

Clock Source No.

Clock

TASM

Selected Clock Source

IPCLK

Clock

TASM

Clock Synchronization
Mode

FREQ

Clock

TASM

Quality Level

QL_PRC

Global

UNODEBMNT
MODE

Maintenance Mode

INSTALL

Table 2.3 MBSC global data configuration


Domain

Configur
ation
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recomme
nded
Value

Equipment

MBSC

NE

Network Element
Name

U_Transition_
100

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

194

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

MOC

Parameter

Recomme
nded
Value

Equipment

NE

Product Type

BTS3900_WC
DMA

Equipment

NE

NodeB Template

BTS3900_WC
DMA_IP
RAN_2Channels
Demodulation
_3Sector

Equipment

NODEB

RNC Name

MBSC252

Equipment

NODEB

NodeB ID

44

Equipment

NODEB

Subrack No.

Equipment

NODEB

Slot No.

Equipment

NODEB

Subsystem No.

Equipment

NODEB

IUB Transport Bearer


Type

IP_TRANS

Equipment

NODEB

IP Transport Apart Ind

SUPPORT

Equipment

NODEB

NodeB Host Type

SINGLEHOS
T

Equipment

NODEB

Sharing Type Of
NodeB

DEDICATED

Equipment

NODEB

Cn Operator Index

Transmissio
n

ETHIP

Subrack No.

Transmissio
n

ETHIP

Slot No.

14

Transmissio
n

ETHIP

Port No.

Transmissio
n

ETHIP

IP address index

Transmissio
n

ETHIP

Local IP address

26.14.1.1

Transmissio
n

ETHIP

Subnet mask

255.255.0.0

Transmissio
n

NCP

Bearing Link Type

SCTP

Transmissio
n

NCP

Port No.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Configur
ation
Object

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configur
ation
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recomme
nded
Value

Transmissio
n

NCP

Bearing Link Type

SCTP

Transmissio
n

NCP

SCTP link No.

1001

Transmissio
n

NCP

SCTP link No.

1002

Transmissio
n

ADJNODE

Adjacent Node ID

2340

Transmissio
n

ADJNODE

Adjacent Node Name

U_Transition_
100

Transmissio
n

ADJNODE

Transport Type

IP

Transmissio
n

IPCLKLNK

Client IPv4

26.14.7.15

Radio

ULOCELL

Add two cells


to each of the
three new
RFUs with
1T2R.

Radio

Cell

Add two cells


to each of the
three new
RFUs with
1T2R.

Transmissio
n

SCTPLNK

Application type

Add two
SCTP links.
Both peer IP
addresses are
26.14.7.15.
Peer ports are
port 1024 and
port 1025.

Transmissio
n

IPPATH

Adjacent Node ID

2340

Transmissio
n

IPPATH

IP path ID

1
2
3
4

Transmissio
n
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

IPPATH

Interface Type

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

IUB

196

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configur
ation
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recomme
nded
Value

Transmissio
n

IPPATH

Transport Type

IP

Transmissio
n

IPPATH

IP path type

EF
AF43
AF23
AF13

Transmissio
n

IPPATH

Local IP address

26.14.1.1

Transmissio
n

IPPATH

Peer IP address

26.14.7.15

Transmissio
n

NODEBALGO
PARA

NodeB Name

U_Transition_
100

Transmissio
n

NODEBALGO
PARA

NodeB LDC algorithm


switch

000000

Transmissio
n

NODEBALGO
PARA

NodeB Max HSDPA


User Number

6144

Transmissio
n

NODEBALGO
PARA

NodeB Max HSUPA


User Number

6144

Transmissio
n

NODEBALGO
PARA

HSUPA Credit
Consume Type

MBR

Transmissio
n

NODEBALGO
PARA

NodeB Algorithm
Enhancement Switch

Radio

CELLLDR

DL LDR first action

BERateRed

Radio

CELLLDR

DL LDR second action

NoAct

Radio

CELLLDR

DL LDR third action

NoAct

Radio

CELLLDR

DL LDR eighth action

Radio

CELLLDR

DL LDR ninth action

Radio

CELLLDR

DL LDR tenth action

Radio

CELLLDR

DL LDR Eleventh
Action

Radio

CELLLDR

DL LDR twelfth action

Radio

CELLLDR

DL LDR-BE rate
reduction RAB number

Radio

CELLLDR

DL LDR un-ctrl RT
Qos re-nego RAB num

BERateRed

Radio

CELLLDR

UL LDR third action

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configur
ation
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recomme
nded
Value

Radio

CELLLDR

UL LDR fourth action

Radio

CELLLDR

UL LDR fifth action

Radio

CELLLDR

UL LDR sixth action

Radio

CELLLDR

UL LDR seventh
action

Radio

CELLLDR

UL LDR eighth action

Radio

CELLLDR

UL LDR Ninth Action

Radio

CELLLDR

UL LDR-BE rate
reduction RAB number

Radio

CELLLDR

UL LDR un-ctrl RT
Qos re-nego RAB num

SF8

Radio

CELLLDR

UL PS should be HO
user number

SF8

Radio

CELLLDR

UL LDR-AMR rate
reduction RAB number

SF8

Radio

NODEBOLC

DL OLC released RAB


number

Radio

NODEBOLC

UL OLC released RAB


number

Radio

NODEBOLC

MBMS Services
Number Released

Radio

NODEBOLC

Sequence of User
Release

MBMS_REL

Table 2.4 UMTS equipment data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

MPT

UMTS

MPT

Cabinet No.

MPT

MPT

Subrack No.

MPT

MPT

Slot No.

MPT

MPT

Board Type

WMPT

MPT

MPT

Enable Flag

ENABLE

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Baseband

BBP

Cabinet No.

Baseband

BBP

Subrack No.

Baseband

BBP

Slot No.

Baseband

BBP

Board Type

WBBP

Baseband

BBP

Work Mode

FDD

Baseband

BASEBANDE
QM

Baseband
Equipment ID

Baseband

BASEBANDE
QM

Baseband
Equipment
Type

ULDL

Baseband

BASEBANDE
QM

UMTS UL
Demodulation
Mode

DEM_2_CHAN

Baseband

BASEBANDE
QM

Baseband
Equipment
Board

0, 0, 3

CPRI-based
topology

RRUCHAIN

Three RRU
chains are
connected to
three optical
ports 0, 2, and 4
on the baseband
processing
board.

RF

RFU

Add one RFU


to port 0 of each
of the three
newly added
chains.

Table 2.5 UMTS transmission data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

UMTS

NODEBPATH

PATH ID

Four paths 1
through 4.

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Add two new


SCTP links.
Both IP
addresses are
26.14.7.15.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
Local ports are
port 1024 and
port 1025.

Transmission

CPBEARER

Transmission

IUBCP

Add two CP
bearers with two
corresponding
SCTP links.
Port Type

NCP
CCP

Transmission

IUBCP

CP Port No.

/
0

Transmission

IUBCP

Belong Flag

MASTER

Transmission

IUBCP

CPBear ID

2
3

Transmission

IPPATH

Four IP paths.
The DSCPs are
46, 38, 22, and
14.

Transmission

OMCH

Standby Status

MASETR

Transmission

OMCH

Local IP

26.14.7.15

Transmission

OMCH

Local Mask

Base Station
Transport
Data/OM
Plane/*OmCh
LocalMask

Transmission

OMCH

Peer IP

10.141.142.22

Transmission

DEVIP

IP Address

IP address:
160.70.7.10
Type: ETH

Transmission

NTPCP

IPv4 Address
of NTP Server

10.141.142.22

Transmission

NTPCP

IP Mode

IPV4

Transmission

NTPCP

Synchronizatio
n Period(min)

10

Transmission

NTPCP

Port Number

123

Transmission

NTPCP

Authentication
Mode

PLAIN

Transmission

NTPCP

Master Flag

Master

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

Transmission

MOC

Parameter

IPRT

Recommen
ded Value
Add two IP
routes.
Destination IP
addresses:
170.179.179.34
10.0.0.0

Table 2.6 UMTS radio data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Antenna and
feeder

UMTS

SECTOR

Sector Antenna

0, 4, 0, R0A; 0,
4, 0, R0B
0, 4, 2, R0A; 0,
4, 2, R0B
0, 4, 4, R0A; 0,
4, 4, R0B

Table 2.7 GSM equipment data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

RF

GSM

BTSRXUBP

Working
Standard

GSM_AND_U
MTS

4.4 Example: Mode Transition from UO to UL


This chapter takes the transition from a UMTS only (GO) single-mode base station to a
UMTS and LTE dual-mode base station as an example. This chapter lists the managed objects
(MOs) to be configured during the transition. Figure 4-7 shows the hardware configurations
before and after mode transition. Figure 4-8 shows the transmission networking topology
before and after mode transition.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Figure 1.1 Hardware configurations before and after mode transition

Figure 1.2 Transmission networking topology before and after mode transition

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Table 4-24 lists the major differences before and after mode transition.
Table 2.1 Major differences before and after mode transition
Item

Before Transition

After Transition

Mode

UMTS only single-mode

UMTS and LTE dual-mode

Service configuration

UMTS operating in the 1700


MHz frequency band, three
sectors configured 1700
MHz: UMTS S2/2/2, 1T2R

UMTS and LTE operating in


the 1700 MHz frequency
band, three sectors
configured
1700 MHz: UMTS S2/2/2,
LTE S1/1/1 (1x5 MHz),
2T2R

BBU

One BBU

UMTS and LTE share a


BBU, the WBBPf board is
configured for UMTS, and
the LBBPd board is
configured for LTE.

RF typology

Chain topology

Chain topology with UL


sharing CRPI links

Transmission scheme

Transmission through panel,


IP over Ethernet

UMTS and LTE independent


transmission through panel,
IP over Ethernet

Clock networking

IEEE 1588 V2 reference


clock

UMTS and LTE sharing an


IEEE 1588 V2 reference
clock

The following tables list the MOs involved in the mode transition in different domains. The
data in these tables can be the references for data configuration in summary tables.
Table 2.2 LTE global data configuration
Dom
ain

Configura
tion
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Globa
l

LTE

CnOperator

CN Operator ID

CnOperator

CN Operator name

LTE

CnOperator

CN Operator type

CNOPERATOR
_PRIMARY

CnOperator

Mobile Country code

502

CnOperator

Mobile network code

04

Clock

TIMESRC

Time Source

NTP

Clock

NTPCP

IPv4 Address of NTP

10.141.142.22

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Dom
ain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configura
tion
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Server
Clock

NTPCP

Synchronization Period

Clock

TASM

Clock Working Mode

MANUAL

Clock

TASM

Clock Source No.

Clock

TASM

Selected Clock Source

PEERCLK

Trans
missi
on

ETHPORT

Port No.

Trans
missi
on

ETHPORT

Cabinet No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to those of the
main control
board

Trans
missi
on

ETHPORT

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Table 2.3 LTE equipment data configuration


Domain

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

Baseband

LTE

BBP

Cabinet No.

Baseband

BBP

Subrack No.

Baseband

BBP

Slot No.

Baseband

BBP

Board Type

LBBP

Baseband

BBP

Work Mode

FDD

CPRI-based
topology

RRUCHAIN

RF

RRU

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Add an RRU
chain on optical
port 0 on the
baseband
processing board.
Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Add three
cascaded RRUs to
the new RRU
chain.

204

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Table 2.4 LTE transmission data configuration


Domain

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Add an LMPT
to provide
transmission
ports.

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First Local IP
Address

160.70.7.12

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Local SCTP
Port No.

2913

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First Peer IP
Address

125.120.120.1

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Peer SCTP Port


No.

2910

Transmission

CPBEARER

CP Bear No.

Transmission

CPBEARER

Flag

MASTER

Transmission

CPBEARER

Bear Type

SCTP

Transmission

CPBEARER

Link No.

Transmission

IPPATH

Path ID

Transmission

IPPATH

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to the cabinet
No./subrack
No./slot No. of
the LMPT.

Transmission

IPPATH

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

IPPATH

Port Type

ETH

Transmission

IPPATH

Port No.

Transmission

IPPATH

Path Type

ANY

Transmission

IPPATH

Local IP

160.70.7.12

Transmission

IPPATH

Peer IP

171.23.36.1

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface ID

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface CP
Bearer ID

Transmission

S1Interface

CN Operator ID

Transmission

S1Interface

MME Release

Release_R10

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface Is
Blocked

FALSE

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Configurati
on Object

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

S1Interface

Control Mode

MANUAL_MO
DE

Transmission

OMCH

Standby Status

MASETR

Transmission

OMCH

Local IP

160.70.7.12

Transmission

OMCH

Local Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

OMCH

Peer IP

10.141.142.22

Transmission

OMCH

Peer Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

DEVIP

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to the cabinet
No./subrack
No./slot No. of
the LMPT.

Transmission

DEVIP

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

DEVIP

Port Type

ETH

Transmission

DEVIP

Port No.

Transmission

DEVIP

IP Address

160.70.7.12

Transmission

DEVIP

Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

IPRT

Route Index

Configure three
IP routes: one
for OMCH, one
to the S-GW,
and one to the
MME.
OMCH
TO SG-W
TO MME
Set the route
type to Next
Hop and
specify the IP
addresses as
planned.

Transmission

VLANMAP

Next Hop IP

160.70.7.12

Transmission

VLANMAP

Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

VLANMAP

VLAN Mode

SINGLEVLAN

Transmission

VLANMAP

VLAN ID

446

Transmission

VLANMAP

Set VLAN
Priority

DISABLE

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Table 2.5 LTE radio data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Antenna and
feeder

LTE

SECTOR

Sector ID

Add three
sectors.

Sector Name
Sector Antenna

They use the


following
antennas:
0:
0,60,0,R0A;0,6
0,0,R0B
1: 0, 61, 0,
R0A; 0, 61, 0,
R0B
2: 0, 62, 0,
R0A; 0, 62, 0,
R0B

Radio

Cell

Three LTE cells


are added with
the following
key parameters
and the
corresponding
values:
FrequencyBand
:3
DlEarfcn: 1450
DlBandwidth:
CELL_BW_N5
0
UlBandwidth:
CELL_BW_N5
0
FddTddInd:CE
LL_FDD
Transmit and
receive mode:
1T2R
Sector
equipment:
corresponding
to sector
equipment 0
through 2.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

207

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Table 2.6 UMTS data configuration


Domain

Configur
ation
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recomme
nded
Value

RF

UMTS

RRU

RF Unit Working
Mode

UL

4.5 Example: Mode Transition from GU to GU


(CPRI MUX)+L (BBU Interconnection, Inter-BBU
Triple-Mode SDR)
This chapter takes the transition from a GSM and UMTS (GU) dual-mode base station with
dual-star topology to a GU (CPRI MUX)+L (inter-BBU SDR and BBU interconnection)
triple-mode base station as an example. This chapter lists the managed objects (MOs) to be
configured during the transition. Figure 4-9 shows the hardware configurations before and
after mode transition. Figure 4-10 shows the transmission networking topology before and
after mode transition.
Figure 1.1 Hardware configurations before and after mode transition

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Figure 1.2 Transmission networking topology before and after mode transition

Table 4-30 lists the major differences before and after mode transition.
Table 2.1 Major differences before and after mode transition
Item

Before Transition

After Transition

Mode

GSM and UMTS dual-mode

GSM, UMTS, and LTE


triple-mode

Service configuration

GSM and UMTS operating


in the 900 MHz frequency
band, three sectors
configured

GSM and UMTS operating


in the 900 MHz frequency
band, three sectors
configured; LTE operating
in the 800 MHz frequency
band, three sectors
configured

900 MHz: GSM S2/2/2/,


UMTS S2/2/2, 1T2R

900 MHz: GSM S2/2/2/,


UMTS S2/2/2, 1T2R
800 MHz: LTE S1/1/1 (1x10
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Item

Before Transition

After Transition
MHz), 2T2R

BBU

One BBU; GSM and UMTS


sharing the same BBU

Two BBUs interconnected


through UCIU+UMPT
GSM and UMTS sharing the
same BBU; LTE using the
other BBU

RF typology

Dual-star topology for GU


RF modules

CPRI MUX topology for


GSM and UMTS, intersubrack dual-star topology
for LTE

Transmission scheme

Co-transmission through
panel interconnection for
GSM and UMTS, IP over
Ethernet

Co-transmission through
UMPT backplane
interconnection, IP over
Ethernet

Clock networking

GSM and UMTS sharing the


IEEE 1588 V2 reference
clock

GSM, UMTS, and LTE


using an IEEE 1588 V2
reference clock

The following tables list the MOs involved in the mode transition in different domains. The
data in these tables can be the references for data configuration in summary tables.
Table 2.2 LTE global data configuration
Domain

Configur
ation
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recomme
nded
Value

Global

LTE

CnOperator

CN Operator ID

CnOperator

CN Operator name

LTE

CnOperator

CN Operator type

CNOPERATO
R_PRIMARY

CnOperator

Mobile Country code

502

CnOperator

Mobile network code

04

Clock

TIMESRC

Time Source

NTP

Clock

NTPCP

IPv4 Address of NTP


Server

10.141.142.22

Clock

NTPCP

Synchronization
Period

Clock

TASM

Clock Working Mode

MANUAL

Clock

TASM

Clock Source No.

Clock

TASM

Selected Clock Source

IPCLK

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configur
ation
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recomme
nded
Value

Clock

TASM

Clock Synchronization
Mode

FREQ

Clock

TASM

Quality Level

QL_PRC

Equipment

EQUIPMENT

Maintenance Mode

INSTALL

Table 2.3 LTE equipment data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Equipment

LTE

SUBRACK

Cabinet No.

Equipment

SUBRACK

Subrack No.

Equipment

SUBRACK

Subrack Type

BBU3900

MPT

MPT

Cabinet No.

MPT

MPT

Subrack No.

MPT

MPT

Slot No.

MPT

MPT

Board Type

UMPT

MPT

MPT

Enable Flag

ENABLE

Baseband

BBP

Cabinet No.

Baseband

BBP

Subrack No.

Baseband

BBP

Slot No.

Baseband

BBP

Board Type

LBBP

Baseband

BBP

Work Mode

FDD

Equipment

BBUFAN

Cabinet No.

Equipment

BBUFAN

Subrack No.

Equipment

BBUFAN

Slot No.

16

Equipment

PEU

Cabinet No.

Equipment

PEU

Subrack No.

Equipment

PEU

Slot No.

19

CPRI-based
topology

RRUCHAIN

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Configure three
RRU chains to
optical ports 0
through 2 on the
LBBP board.
211

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

RF

RRU

BBU
interconnection

CTRLLNK

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
Configure an
RRU on the
new RRU
chain. The RRU
working mode
must be set to
GUL. The GUL
RRU subracks
must be
assigned with
numbers 60, 61,
and 62.

Local Link No.

The local board


is the UMPT
whose cabinet
No., subrack
No., and slot
No. being 0, 1,
and 7,
respectively.
The peer board
is the UCIU
whose cabinet
No., subrack
No., and slot
No. being 0, 0,
and 4,
respectively.

Table 2.4 LTE transmission data configuration


Domain

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

ETHPORT

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to those of the
UMPT in
subrack 1.

Transmission

ETHPORT

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

DEVIP

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to those of the
UMPT in
subrack 1.

Transmission

DEVIP

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

DEVIP

Port Type

ETH

Transmission

DEVIP

Port No.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Configurati
on Object

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

DEVIP

IP Address

160.70.7.10

Transmission

DEVIP

Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

TUNNEL

Configure a
tunnel between
the UMPT and
GTMU boards,
and a tunnel
between the
UMPT and
WMPT boards
for backplane
transmission.

Transmission

IPRT

Configure
routes from the
base station to
the U2000,
BSC, RNC,
MME, S-GW,
IP clock, the
GTMU board,
and the WMPT
board. The
routes to the
U2000, BSC,
RNC, MME,
and S-GW are
panel routes,
and two tunnels
must be
configured for
the transmission
through
backplane for
GTMU and
WMPT boards.

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Link No.

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

The main
control board in
subrack 1
provides
transmission
ports.

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First Local IP
Address

160.70.7.10

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Local SCTP

2913

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Configurati
on Object

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Port No.
Transmission

SCTPLNK

First Peer IP
Address

125.120.120.1

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Peer SCTP Port


No.

2910

Transmission

OMCH

Standby Status

MASETR

Transmission

OMCH

Local IP

160.70.7.10

Transmission

OMCH

Local Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

OMCH

Peer IP

10.141.142.22

Transmission

OMCH

Peer Mask

255.255.255.0

Transmission

IPPATH

Path ID

Transmission

IPPATH

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to those of the
main control
board

Transmission

IPPATH

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

IPPATH

Port Type

ETH

Transmission

IPPATH

Port No.

Transmission

IPPATH

Path Type

ANY

Transmission

IPPATH

Local IP

160.70.7.10

Transmission

IPPATH

Peer IP

171.23.36.1

Transmission

CPBEARER

CP Bear No.

Transmission

CPBEARER

Flag

MASTER

Transmission

CPBEARER

Bear Type

SCTP

Transmission

CPBEARER

Link No.

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface ID

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface CP
Bearer ID

Transmission

S1Interface

CN Operator ID

Transmission

S1Interface

MME Release

Release_R10

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface Is
Blocked

FALSE

Transmission

VLANMAP

Next Hop IP

160.70.7.10

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

VLANMAP

Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

VLANMAP

VLAN Mode

SINGLEVLAN

Transmission

VLANMAP

VLAN ID

446

Transmission

VLANMAP

Set VLAN
Priority

DISABLE

Transmission

DHCPSVRIP

DHCP Server
IP Address

Set the DHCP


server IP
address to the
IP address of
the U2000 and
MBSC for
deployment.

Transmission

DHCPRELAYS
WITCH

DHCP Relay
Switch

ENABLE

Transmission

DHCPSW

OMCH AutoEstablishment
Switch

ENABLE

Transmission

DHCPSW

Vlanscan
Switch

DISABLE

Table 2.5 LTE radio data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Antenna and
feeder

LTE

SECTOR

Sector ID

Add three
sectors.

Sector Name
Sector Antenna

They use the


following
antennas:
0:
0, 60, 0, 0; 0,
60, 0, 1
1:
0, 61, 0, 0; 0,
61, 0, 1
2:
0, 62, 0, 0; 0,
62, 0, 1

Antenna and
feeder

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

SECTOREQM

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Sector
Equipment ID

Three pieces of
sector
equipment are
215

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
added.
They
correspond to
sectors 0
through 2.
The following
sector antennas
are used:
0:
0, 60, 0, 0, 3, 0;
0, 60, 0, 1, 3, 0
1:
0, 61, 0, 0, 3, 0;
0, 61, 0, 1, 3, 0
2:
0, 62, 0, 0, 3, 0;
0, 62, 0, 1, 3, 0

Radio

Cell

Three LTE cells


are added with
the following
key parameters
and the
corresponding
values:
FrequencyBand
: 20
DlEarfcn:
6200
DlBandwidth:
CELL_BW_N5
0
UlBandwidth:
CELL_BW_N5
0
FddTddInd:
CELL_FDD
Transmit and
receive mode:
2T2R
Sector
equipment:
corresponding
to sector
equipment 0
through 2.
Baseband

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
equipment:
share equipment
0.

Table 2.6 GSM data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

CPRI-based
topology

GSM

BTSRXUCHAI
N

RF

BTSRXUBP

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
Set the Access
Type column in
the BTS RXU
Chain area to
PEERPORT
and the Head
Board No.
column to that
of the WBBP in
slot 3.

Working
Standard

GSM_AND_U
MTS_AND_LT
E
Note: The
working mode
the RF module
must be
changed to
GUL.

Table 2.7 GSM transmission data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

GSM

BTSDEVIP

Port Type

LOOPINTERF
ACE

Transmission

BTSDEVIP

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No. of
the GTMU

Transmission

BTSDEVIP

IP Address

88.200.8.236

Transmission

BTSIP

BTS
Communication
Type

LOGICIP

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

BTSIP

BTS IP

88.200.8.236

Transmission

BTSIP

BSC IP

25.14.1.1

Transmission

BTSESN

BTS Interface
Board Bar Code
1

21021127226T
A9025307

Transmission

BTSESN

OM Bear Board

BACKBOARD

Transmission

BTSTUNNEL

--

From the
GTMU to
UMPT (LTE),
the tunnel No.
is 0.

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Destination IP
Address

25.14.1.1 (BSC)

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Route Index

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Route Type

OUTIF

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No. of
the ports

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No. of
the GTMU

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Interface Type

TUNNEL

Transmission

BTSCLK

Clock Type

PEER_CLK

Transmission

BTSCLK

Peer Mode

LTE

Transmission

IPRT

Subrack No

Transmission

IPRT

Slot No

14

Transmission

IPRT

Destination IP
address

88.200.8.236

Transmission

IPRT

Next hop type

Gateway

Transmission

IPRT

Forward route
address

25.14.0.1

Table 2.8 BSC data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

BSC

BTSDEVIP

Port Type

LOOPINTERF
ACE

BTSDEVIP

*Port No.

Transmission
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

BTSDEVIP

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to the cabinet
No./subrack
No./slot No. of
the GTMU

Transmission

BTSDEVIP

IP Index

Transmission

BTSDEVIP

IP Address

88.200.8.236

Transmission

BTSDEVIP

IP Mask

255.255.255.0

Transmission

BTSDEVIP

BTS Inner IP
Switch

NO

Transmission

BTSIP

BTS
Communication
Type

LOGICIP

Transmission

BTSIP

BTS IP

88.200.8.236

Transmission

BTSIP

BSC IP

25.14.1.1

Transmission

BTSIP

BTS MultiIP
Switch

NO

Transmission

BTSESN

BTS Interface
Board Bar Code
1

21021127226T
A9025307

Transmission

BTSESN

OM Bear Board

BACKBOARD

BBU
interconnection

BTSTUNNEL

Source: GTMU
Destination:
UMPT
The tunnel is
used for
backplane
transmission
interconnection.

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Route Index

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Destination IP
Address

Device IP
address of the
BSC: 25.14.1.1

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Destination
Address Mask

255.255.255.25
5

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Route Type

OUTIF

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No. of
the GTMU

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

219

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

BTSIPRT

Interface Type

TUNNEL

Clock

BTSCLK

Clock Type

PEER_CLK

Clock

BTSCLK

Peer Mode

LTE

Transmission

IPRT

Subrack No.

Transmission

IPRT

Slot No.

14

Transmission

IPRT

Destination IP
address

88.200.8.236

Transmission

IPRT

Destination
address mask

255.255.255.25
5

Transmission

IPRT

Next hop type

Gateway

Transmission

IPRT

Forward route
address

25.14.0.1

Transmission

IPRT

Priority

HIGH

Table 2.9 UMTS equipment data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Clock

UMTS

PEERCLK

Peer Clock No.

Clock

PEERCLK

Peer Standard

LTE

RF

RRU

RF Unit
Working Mode

Set the working


mode of RRUs
in subracks 60
through 62 to
GUL.

Table 2.10 UMTS transmission data configuration


Domain

Configurat
ion Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

UMTS

DEVIP

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to the cabinet
No./subrack
No./slot No. of
the WMPT

Transmission

DEVIP

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

DEVIP

Port Type

LOOPINT

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurat
ion Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

DEVIP

Port No.

Transmission

DEVIP

IP Address

88.200.8.238

Transmission

DEVIP

Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Set the local IP


address (base
station side) and
destination IP
address (base
station
controller side)
of an SCTP link
to LTE IP
addresses.

Transmission

IPPATH

Set the local IP


address (base
station side) and
destination IP
address (base
station
controller side)
of an IP path to
LTE IP
addresses.

Transmission

OMCH

BBU
interconnection

TUNNEL

The tunnel
starts from the
WMPT to the
UMPT and the
direction is
uplink.

Transmission

IPRT

Reconfigure IP
routes.
Configure
tunnel routes to
the U2000,
RNC, and
UMPT board,
and remove the
routes to the
BSC and IP
clock server.

Local IP

Change it to an
address on the
LTE side.

Route Type: IF
Port Type:
TUNNEL
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

221

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurat
ion Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

IPRT

Destination IP

Configure a
route from the
RNC to the
NodeB.

Transmission

NODEBIP

NodeB
TransType

IPTRANS_IP

Transmission

NODEBIP

NodeB
IP_TRANS IP
address

88.200.8.238

Transmission

NODEBIP

NodeB
IP_TRANS IP
Mask

255.255.255.25
5

Transmission

NODEBIP

NodeB
IP_TRANS
Subrack No.

Transmission

NODEBIP

NodeB
IP_TRANS Slot
No.

14

Transmission

NODEBIP

Whether
Binding logical
port or not

NO

4.6 Example: Mode Transition from GO to G*L


This chapter takes the transition from a GSM only (GO) single-mode base station to a G*L
(CPRI MUX) dual-mode base station as an example. This chapter lists the managed objects
(MOs) to be configured during the transition. Figure 4-11 shows the hardware configurations
before and after mode transition. Figure 4-12 shows the transmission networking topology
before and after mode transition.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Figure 1.1 Hardware configurations before and after mode transition

Figure 1.2 Transmission networking topology before and after mode transition

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Table 4-40 lists the major differences before and after mode transition.
Table 2.1 Major differences before and after mode transition
Item

Before Transition

After Transition

Mode

GSM only single-mode

Co-MPT GSM and LTE dual-mode

Service
configurat
ion

GSM only in the 1800 MHz


frequency band, three sectors
configured

GSM and LTE operating in the 1800


MHz frequency band, three sectors
configured

1800 MHz: GSM S2/2/2, 1T2R

1800 MHz: GSM S2/2/2, LTE S1/1/1,


GSM 1T2R, LTE 2T2R

BBU

One BBU

One BBU configured with UMPT_GL

RF
typology

Star topology for GO RF modules

GL CPRI MUX topology

Transmiss
ion
scheme

IP over Ethernet

GSM and LTE co-transmission, IP


over Ethernet

Clock
networkin
g

IP reference clock

Co-MPT GL synchronous Ethernet


clock

In this scenario, the GBTS must be reconstructed into an eGBTS, and the data plan must be
filled out. The filling method is described in the following table.
Data plan filling for reconstruction from a GBTS to an eGBTS
1. Filling in the GlobalPlanning page

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

PlanningXLSVer

Plan Table Version

SRAN11.1

Description

BscSctpIdBase

Start BSC SCTPID


Default value: 5000

5000

GSM parameter,
which is
mandatory

BtsSctpPortBase

Start SCTP port of a


base station Default
value: 8001

8001

GSM parameter,
which is optional

BtsTrxPerSctp

Number of TRXs
supported by each
SCTP of a base
station Default value:
12

12

GSM parameter,
which is optional

BtsOMCHPeerIP

Peer IP address of the


OM channel in a base
station

10.141.14.22

GSM parameter,
which is
mandatory

BtsOMCHPeerIPMa
sk

Peer IP mask of the


OM channel in a base
station

255.255.255.0

GSM parameter,
which is
mandatory

SRANBaselineRAT

Primary mode during


the SRAN data
merge. Default value:
L

This parameter
does not need to be
set for single-mode
base stations, and it
is optional for
MBTSs.

WORKMODE

Work mode Default


value: E1_UNBA

Mandatory when
E1/T1 transmission
is used in GSM

ActBTSSoftwareVer
sion

Version number of the


activated GBTS
evolution software
(GTMU software of a
special V900 version)

GSM evolution,
mandatory

BSCNodeRedundan
cyBSCName

Name of the currently


reconstructed BSC in
the BSC node
redundancy scenario

Mandatory in the
BSC node
redundancy
scenario

ActGTMUSoftwareV
ersion

Version number of the


activated GTMU
SingleOM
reconstruction
software (GTMU
software of a special
V900 version)

GTMU SingleOM,
mandatory

2. Filling in the SitePlanning page

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Table 2.2 Fields to be filled in the SitePlanning page


Field

Description

Examples

ConvertFlag

Conversion ID

Yes

BtsName

GBTS name

GBTS_XX

NextHop

Gateway IP address of the


base station

Fill in the table according to


actual conditions.

GTMU Abandoned

Whether to abandon the


GTMU for GSM after the
conversion. Default value: NO

YES

UMPTSlot

Slot number of the GSM main


control board after the
conversion. Default value: 7

The following tables list the MOs involved in the mode transition from an eGBTS to GL coMPT in different domains. The data in these tables can be the references for data
configuration in summary tables.
Table 2.3 LTE global data configuration
Dom
ain

Configura
tion
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Globa
l

LTE

CnOperator

CN Operator ID

CnOperator

CN Operator name

LTE

CnOperator

CN Operator type

CNOPERATOR
_PRIMARY

CnOperator

Mobile Country code

502

CnOperator

Mobile network code

04

Clock

TIMESRC

Time Source

NTP

Clock

NTPCP

IPv4 Address of NTP


Server

10.141.142.22

Clock

NTPCP

Synchronization Period

Clock

TASM

Clock Working Mode

MANUAL

Clock

TASM

Clock Source No.

Clock

TASM

Selected Clock Source

PEERCLK

Trans
missi
on

ETHPORT

Port No.

Trans
missi

ETHPORT

Cabinet No./Subrack

Corresponding
to those of the

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

226

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Dom
ain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configura
tion
Object

MOC

on
Trans
missi
on

ETHPORT

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

No./Slot No.

main control
board

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Table 2.4 LTE equipment data configuration


Domain

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

Baseband

LTE

BBP

Cabinet No.

Baseband

BBP

Subrack No.

Baseband

BBP

Slot No.

Baseband

BBP

Board Type

UBBP

Baseband

BBP

Work Mode

FDD

CPRI-based
topology

RRUCHAIN

RF

RRU

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Put the RRU as


RRU 0 in the
RRU chain.

RF

RRU

RF Unit Working
Mode

GL

Move the RRU


chain to the
optical port 0 to 2
on the baseband
processing board
and add a new
RRU chain in the
optical port 0 to 2,
respectively.

Table 2.5 LTE transmission data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

LTE

SCTPLNK

Link No.

SCTPLNK

Cabinet
No./Subrack

A new added
UMPT provides

Transmission

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

227

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

No./Slot No.

transmission.

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First Local IP
Address

160.70.7.12

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Local SCTP
Port No.

2913

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First Peer IP
Address

125.120.120.1

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Peer SCTP Port


No.

2910

Transmission

CPBEARER

CP Bear No.

Transmission

CPBEARER

Flag

MASTER

Transmission

CPBEARER

Bear Type

SCTP

Transmission

CPBEARER

Link No.

Transmission

IPPATH

Path ID

Transmission

IPPATH

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to the cabinet
No./subrack
No./slot No. of
the UMPT

Transmission

IPPATH

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

IPPATH

Port Type

ETH

Transmission

IPPATH

Port No.

Transmission

IPPATH

Path Type

ANY

Transmission

IPPATH

Local IP

160.70.7.12

Transmission

IPPATH

Peer IP

171.23.36.1

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface ID

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface CP
Bearer ID

Transmission

S1Interface

CN Operator ID

Transmission

S1Interface

MME Release

Release_R10

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface Is
Blocked

FALSE

Transmission

OMCH

Standby Status

MASETR

Transmission

OMCH

Local IP

160.70.7.12

Transmission

OMCH

Local Mask

255.255.0.0

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

228

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

OMCH

Peer IP

10.141.142.22

Transmission

OMCH

Peer Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

DEVIP

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to the cabinet
No./subrack
No./slot No. of
the UMPT

Transmission

DEVIP

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

DEVIP

Port Type

ETH

Transmission

DEVIP

Port No.

Transmission

DEVIP

IP Address

160.70.7.12

Transmission

DEVIP

Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

IPRT

Route Index

Configure three
IP routes.
The functions
are as follows:
OMCH
TO SG-W
TO MME
Set the route
type to Next
Hop and
specify the IP
addresses as
planned.

Transmission

VLANMAP

Next Hop IP

160.70.7.12

Transmission

VLANMAP

Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

VLANMAP

VLAN Mode

SINGLEVLAN

Transmission

VLANMAP

VLAN ID

446

Transmission

VLANMAP

Set VLAN
Priority

DISABLE

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

229

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Table 2.6 LTE radio data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Antenna and
feeder

LTE

SECTOR

Sector ID

Add three
sectors.

Sector Name
Sector Antenna

They use the


following
antennas:
0:
0,60,0,R0A;0,6
0,0,R0B
1: 0, 61, 0,
R0A; 0, 61, 0,
R0B
2: 0, 62, 0,
R0A; 0, 62, 0,
R0B

Radio

Cell

Three LTE cells


are added with
the following
key parameters
and the
corresponding
values:
FrequencyBand
:3
DlEarfcn: 1450
DlBandwidth:
CELL_BW_N5
0
UlBandwidth:
CELL_BW_N5
0
FddTddInd:
CELL_FDD
Transmit and
receive mode:
1T2R
Sector
equipment:
corresponding
to sector
equipment 0
through 2.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

230

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

4.7 Example: Mode Transition from UO to G*U


This chapter takes the transition from a UMTS only (UO) single-mode base station to a coMPT GSM and UMTS (GU) dual-mode base station that uses CPRI MUX star topology as an
example. This chapter lists the managed objects (MOs) to be configured during the transition.
Figure 4-13 shows the hardware configurations before and after mode transition. Figure 4-14
shows the transmission networking topology before and after mode transition.
Figure 1.1 Hardware configurations before and after mode transition

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

231

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Figure 1.2 Transmission networking topology before and after mode transition

Table 4-46 lists the major differences before and after mode transition.
Table 2.1 Major differences before and after mode transition
Item

Before Transition

After Transition

Mode

UMTS only single-mode

Co-MPT GSM and UMTS


dual-mode

Service configuration

UMTS operating in the 900


MHz frequency band, three
sectors configured

GSM and UMTS operating


in the 900 MHz frequency
band, three sectors
configured

900 MHz: UMTS S2/2/2,


Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

232

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Item

Before Transition

After Transition

1T2R

900 MHz: UMTS S2/2/2,


GSM S2/2/2, 1T2R

BBU

One BBU

One BBU configured with


UMPT_GU

RF typology

Chain topology

The GU star topology using


CPRI MUX is used. A
UBRIb is added on the
eGBTS side. A WBBPf is
added on the NodeB side
and the original WBBPd is
moved to slot 0.

Transmission scheme

Transmission through panel,


IP over Ethernet

GSM and UMTS cotransmission, IP over


Ethernet

Clock networking

IEEE 1588 V2 reference


clock

GSM and UMTS sharing the


IEEE 1588 V2 reference
clock

Data plan filling involved in the transition from a separate-MPT UMTS only base
station to a co-MPT UMTS only base station
1. GlobalPlanning page: No filling is required.
2. SitePlanning page
Table 2.2 Fields to be filled in the SitePlanning page
Field

Description

Examples

ConvertFlag

Conversion ID

Yes

NodeBName

NodeB name

NodeB_XX

The following tables list the MOs involved in the mode transition in different domains. The
data in these tables can be the references for data configuration in summary tables.
Table 2.3 UMTS data configuration
Domain

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

CPRI-based
topology

UMTS

RRUCHAIN

The slot housing


the board which
provides RRU
chain ports is
changed from slot

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

233

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

3 to slot 1.
RF

RRU

The working
mode of RRUs is
changed from
UMTS single
mode to GU dual
mode.

Baseband

BBP

Add a WBBPf to
slot 3 and change
the slot housing
the original
WBBPd to slot 0.

Baseband

BASEBANDE
QM

Baseband
Equipment ID

Baseband

BASEBANDE
QM

Baseband
Equipment Type

ULDL

Baseband

BASEBANDE
QM

UMTS UL
Demodulation Mode

ULDL

Baseband

BASEBANDE
QM

Baseband
Equipment Board

0,0,0;0,0,3

Table 2.4 BSC data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

GSM

ADJNODE

Adjacent Node
ID

14410

GCELL

Three cells
working on the
900 MHz
frequency band

Radio

Values of Local
Cell ID are 0, 1,
and 2,
respectively.
Values of TRX
Group ID are
441, 442, and
443,
respectively.
Transmission
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

SCTPLNK
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Application

ABISCP
234

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

type
Transmission

SCTPLNK

SCTP link ID

1441

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Signalling link
mode

SERVER

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First local IP
address

25.14.1.1

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First destination
IP address

25.14.24.141

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Destination
SCTP port No.

1026

Transmission

IPPATH

Adjacent Node
ID

14410

Transmission

IPPATH

Path ID

Transmission

IPPATH

Interface Type

ABIS

Transmission

IPPATH

Is eGBTS

Yes

Transmission

IPPATH

IP path type

QoS

Transmission

IPPATH

Local IP
address

25.14.1.1

Transmission

IPPATH

Peer IP address

25.14.24.141

Table 2.5 GSM equipment data configuration


Domain

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

Equipment

GSM

BRI

Add a UBRI to
slot 1.

CPRI-based
topology

RRUCHAIN

Change the board


providing RRU
chain ports from
the WBBP to the
UBRIb for CPRI
connection.

RF

RRU

RF Unit Working
Mode

GU

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

235

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Table 2.6 GSM transmission data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

GSM

DEVIP

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to those of the
main control
board

Transmission

DEVIP

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

DEVIP

Port Type

ETH

Transmission

DEVIP

Port No.

Transmission

DEVIP

IP Address

25.14.24.141

Transmission

DEVIP

Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

VLANMAP

Next Hop IP

25.14.0.1

Transmission

VLANMAP

Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

VLANMAP

VLAN Mode

SINGLEVLAN

Transmission

VLANMAP

VLAN ID

457

Transmission

VLANMAP

Set VLAN
Priority

DISABLE

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Link No.

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

The main
control board
provides
transmission
ports.

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First Local IP
Address

25.14.24.141

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Local SCTP
Port No.

1026

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First Peer IP
Address

25.14.1.1

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Peer SCTP Port


No.

58080

Transmission

GBTSPATH

Path ID

0
Configure an IP
path ID for the
eGBTS. (Note
that the IP path
ID cannot be
the same as that
of UMTS
before

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

236

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
transition.
Otherwise, the
original data
will be
overwritten.)

Transmission

CPBEARER

CP Bear No.

0
Note that the
CP Bear No.
cannot be the
same as that of
UMTS before
transition.
Otherwise, the
original data
will be
overwritten.)

Transmission

CPBEARER

Flag

MASTER

Transmission

CPBEARER

Bear Type

SCTP

Transmission

CPBEARER

Link No.

Transmission

IPPATH

Path ID

Transmission

IPPATH

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to those of the
main control
board

Transmission

IPPATH

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

IPPATH

Port Type

ETH

Transmission

IPPATH

Port No.

Transmission

IPPATH

Path Type

ANY

Transmission

IPPATH

Local IP

25.14.24.141

Transmission

IPPATH

Peer IP

25.14.1.1

Transmission

GBTSABISCP

Control Port ID

Transmission

GBTSABISCP

CP Bear No.

Table 2.7 GSM radio data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Antenna and
feeder

GSM

SECTOR

Sector ID

Add three

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

237

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Sector Name

sectors.

Sector Antenna

They use the


following
antennas:
0:
0,60,0,R0A;0,6
0,0,R0B
1:
0,61,0,R0A;0,6
1,0,R0B
2:
0,62,0,R0A;0,6
2,0,R0B

Antenna and
feeder

SECTOREQM

Sector
Equipment ID

Three pieces of
sector
equipment are
added.
They
correspond to
sectors 0
through 2.
The following
sector antennas
are used:
0:
0,60,0,R0B,RX
_MODE,;0,60,0
,R0A,RXTX_M
ODE,MASTER
1:
0,61,0,R0B,RX
_MODE,;0,61,0
,R0A,RXTX_M
ODE,MASTER
2:
0,62,0,R0B,RX
_MODE,;0,62S,
0,R0A,RXTX_
MODE,MASTE
R

Radio

GTRXGROUP

TRX Group ID

441, 442, and


443
Note that the
TRX group IDs
must be

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

238

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
consistent with
those on the
BSC side.

Radio

GTRXGROUP

Local Cell ID

0, 1, and 2

Radio

GTRXGROUP

Sending Mode

SINGLESND

Radio

GTRXGROUP

Receiving
Mode

MAINDIVERS
ITY
Note that the
configuration of
transmit and
receive mode
must be
consistent with
the number of
sector
equipment
antennas.

Radio

GTRXGROUP

Working Mode

INDEPENDEN
T

Radio

GTRXGROUP

Sector
Equipment ID

0, 1, and 2

Global

APPLICATION

Application
Maintenance
Mode

INSTALL

4.8 Example: Mode Transition from GU to


G[U*L]
This section takes the transition from a separate-MPT GSM and UMTS (GU) dual-mode base
station to a GSM (GTMU), UMTS, and LTE (G+UL) multimode base station with dual-star
topology (GU 900 MHz) and CPRI MUX topology (GL 1800 MHz) as an example. This
chapter lists the managed objects (MOs) to be configured during the transition. Figure 4-15
shows the hardware configurations before and after mode transition. Figure 4-16 shows the
transmission networking topology before and after mode transition.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

239

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Figure 1.1 Hardware configurations before and after mode transition

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

240

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Figure 1.2 Transmission networking topology before and after mode transition

Table 4-53 lists the major differences before and after mode transition.
Table 2.1 Major differences before and after mode transition
Item

Before Transition

After Transition

Mode

Separate-MPT GSM and


UMTS dual-mode

G[U*L] multimode

Service configuration

GSM and UMTS operating


in the 900 MHz frequency
band, three sectors
configured

GSM and UMTS operating


in the 900 MHz frequency
band, three sectors
configured; GSM and LTE
operating in the 1800 MHz

900 MHz: UMTS S1/1/1,


Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

241

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Item

Before Transition

After Transition

1T2R; GSM S2/2/2, 1T2R

frequency band, three


sectors configured
900 MHz: UMTS S1/1/1,
GSM S2/2/2
1800 MHz: LTE S1/1/1,
GSM S2/2/2

BBU

One BBU

One BBU. UMTS and LTE


sharing the MPT and LTE
configured with LBBPd

RF typology

Dual-star topology (GU 900


MHz)

Dual-star topology (GU 900


MHz) and CPRI MUX
topology (GL 1800 MHz)

Transmission scheme

GSM E1 transmission,
UMTS transmission through
panel, IP over Ethernet

GSM E1 transmission
remains unchanged. UMTS
and LTE co-transmission
through IP over Ethernet

Clock networking

GSM using the E1 reference


clock, UMTS sharing the
GSM reference clock

GSM using the E1 reference


clock, UMTS and LTE
sharing the GSM reference
clock

Data plan filling involved in the transition from a separate-MPT UMTS only base
station to a co-MPT UMTS only base station
1. GlobalPlanning page: No filling is required.
2. SitePlanning page
Table 2.2 Fields to be filled in the SitePlanning page
Field

Description

Examples

ConvertFlag

Conversion ID

Yes

NodeBName

NodeB name

NodeB_XX

The following tables list the MOs involved in the mode transition in different domains. The
data in these tables can be the references for data configuration in summary tables.
Table 2.3 GSM configuration
Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Radio

GSM

GCELL

Freq. Band

Add three cells


that are served
by the
DCS1800

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

242

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
frequency band.

Radio

TRXINFO

Configure two
TRXs in each
cell using the
main and
diversity RX
channels.

Radio

TRXBIND2PH
YBRD

Bind three cells


to the R0As of
three RRUs,
respectively.

CPRI-based
topology

BTSRXUCHAI
N

Add three RFU


or RRU chains
that connect to
optical ports 3,
4, and 5 on the
board in slot 3
of subrack 0 of
cabinet 0. The
chain numbers
are 3, 4, and 5,
which must be
different those
for the GSM
macro base
station. If the
chain numbers
are the same,
related data will
be overwritten.

RF

BTSRXUBRD

Add one RRU


to position 1 of
each of the
three newly
added chains.
The cabinet
No., subrack
No., and slot
No. of the three
RRUs 0/60/0,
0/61/0,
and0/62/0,
respectively

RF

BTSRXUBP

MRRU/GRRU/
AIRU Sending
Receiving
Mode

DOUBLEDOU
BLE_ANTENN
A

RF

BTSRXUBP

Working

GSM_AND_LT

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

243

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Standard

Table 2.4 LTE global data configuration


Domain

Configur
ation
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Global

LTE

CnOperator

CN Operator ID

Global

CnOperator

CN Operator name

LTE

Global

CnOperator

CN Operator type

CNOPERATOR
_PRIMARY

Global

CnOperator

Mobile Country
code

502

Global

CnOperator

Mobile network
code

04

Transmission

SCTPPEER

First Peer IP
Address

125.120.120.1

USERPLANEP
EER

Peer IP Address

171.23.36.1

APPLICATIO
N

Application
Maintenance Mode

Transmission
Global

(To MME)
(To S-GW)
INSTALL

Table 2.5 LTE equipment data configuration


Domain

Configura
tion
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

Equipment

LTE

eNodeBFuncti
on

eNodeB ID

380

CPRIbased
topology

RRUCHAIN

Add three RRU


chains to optical
ports 3 through 5
on the interface
board in slot 3.

RF

RRU

Added one RRU


to position 0 of
each of the newly
added three
chains. The

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

244

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configura
tion
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value
cabinet
No./subrack
No./slot No. of the
three RRUs are as
follows:
0/60/0 - 0/62/0
Working mode:
GL

Baseband

BBP

Base Band Work


Standard

GSM-0&UMTS1&LTE_FDD1&LTE_TDD-0

Table 2.6 LTE transmission data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

LTE

SCTPLNK

Link No.

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

The main
control board
provides
transmission
ports.

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First Local IP
Address

160.70.7.15

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Local SCTP
Port No.

2913

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First Peer IP
Address

125.120.120.1

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Peer SCTP Port


No.

2910

Transmission

CPBEARER

CP Bear No.

Transmission

CPBEARER

Flag

MASTER

Transmission

CPBEARER

Bear Type

SCTP

Transmission

CPBEARER

Link No.

Transmission

IPPATH

Path ID

Transmission

IPPATH

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to those of the
main control
board

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

245

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

IPPATH

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

IPPATH

Port Type

ETH

Transmission

IPPATH

Port No.

Transmission

IPPATH

Path Type

ANY

Transmission

IPPATH

Local IP

160.70.7.15

Transmission

IPPATH

Peer IP

171.23.36.1

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface ID

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface CP
Bearer ID

Transmission

S1Interface

CN Operator ID

Transmission

S1Interface

MME Release

Release_R8

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface Is
Blocked

FALSE

Transmission

DEVIP

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to those of the
main control
board

Transmission

DEVIP

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

DEVIP

Port Type

ETH

Transmission

DEVIP

Port No.

Transmission

DEVIP

IP Address

160.70.7.15

Transmission

DEVIP

Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

IPRT

Route Index

Configure two
IP routes.
Destination IP
addresses:
171.23.36.1
125.120.120.1
The route type
is set to
NEXTHOP.

Transmission

VLANMAP

Next Hop IP

160.70.7.10

Transmission

VLANMAP

Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

VLANMAP

VLAN Mode

SINGLEVLAN

Transmission

VLANMAP

VLAN ID

446

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

246

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

Transmission

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

VLANMAP

Set VLAN
Priority

DISABLE

Table 2.7 LTE radio data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Antenna and
feeder

LTE

SECTOR

Sector ID

Add three
sectors.

Sector Name
Sector Antenna

They use the


following
antennas:
3:
0,60,0,R0A;0,6
0,0,R0B
4:
0,61,0,R0A;0,6
1,0,R0B
5:
0,62,0,R0A;0,6
2,0,R0B

Antenna and
feeder

SECTOREQM

Sector
Equipment ID

Three pieces of
sector
equipment are
added.
They
correspond to
sectors 3
through 5.
The following
sector antennas
are used:
3:
0,60,0,R0A,RX
TX_MODE,M
ASTER;0,60,0,
R0B,RXTX_M
ODE,MASTER
4:
0,61,0,R0A,RX
TX_MODE,M
ASTER;0,61,0,
R0B,RXTX_M
ODE,MASTER

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

247

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
5:
0,62,0,R0A,RX
TX_MODE,M
ASTER;0,62,0,
R0B,RXTX_M
ODE,MASTER

Radio

Cell

Three LTE cells


are added with
the following
key parameters
and the
corresponding
values:
FrequencyBand
:3
DlEarfcn: 1600
DlBandwidth:
CELL_BW_N5
0
UlBandwidth:
CELL_BW_N5
0
FddTddInd:
CELL_FDD
Transmit and
receive mode:
1T2R
Sector
equipment:
corresponding
to sector
equipment 3
through 5.

4.9 Example: Mode Transition from GU to GU+L


(UMPT+UMPT, BBU Interconnection)
This chapter takes the transition from a GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station to a GU+L
(UMPT+UMPT) triple-mode base station as an example. This chapter lists the managed
objects (MOs) to be configured during the transition. Figure 4-17 shows the hardware
configurations before and after mode transition. Figure 4-18 shows the transmission
networking topology before and after mode transition.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

248

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Figure 1.1 Hardware configurations before and after mode transition

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

249

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Figure 1.2 Transmission networking topology before and after mode transition

Table 4-60 lists the major differences before and after mode transition.
Table 2.1 Major differences before and after mode transition
Item

Before Transition

After Transition

Mode

GSM and UMTS dual-mode

GSM, UMTS, and LTE triple-mode

Service
configurati
on

GSM and UMTS operating in


the 900 MHz frequency band,
three sectors configured

GSM and UMTS operating in the 900


MHz frequency band, three sectors
configured; GSM and LTE operating in the
1800 MHz frequency band, three sectors
configured

900 MHz: GSM S2/2/2/, UMTS


S2/2/2, 1T2R

900 MHz: GSM S2/2/2/, UMTS S2/2/2,


1T2R
1800 MHz: GSM S2/2/2, LTE S1/1/1
(1x10 MHz), 2T2R
BBU
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

One BBU; GSM and UMTS

Two BBUs interconnected through

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

250

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Item

4 Mode Transition Examples

Before Transition

After Transition

sharing the same BBU

UMPT+UMPT
GSM and UMTS sharing the same BBU;
LTE using the other BBU

RF
typology

Dual-star topology for GU RF


modules

Dual-star topology for both GU RF


modules and GL RF modules

Transmissi
on scheme

GSM and UMTS independent


transmission, IP over Ethernet

GSM and UMTS independent


transmission, LTE co-transmission through
backplane with a port on UMTS connected
to the transport network, IP over Ethernet

Clock
networkin
g

GSM and UMTS using an


independent IEEE 1588 V2
reference clock, respectively

GSM and UMTS using an independent


IEEE 1588 V2 reference clock,
respectively, LTE and UMTS sharing one
IEEE 1588 V2 reference clock

The following tables list the MOs involved in the mode transition in different domains. The
data in these tables can be the references for data configuration in summary tables.
Table 2.2 LTE global data configuration
Dom
ain

Configura
tion
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Globa
l

LTE

CnOperator

CN Operator ID

Globa
l

CnOperator

CN Operator name

LTE

Globa
l

CnOperator

CN Operator type

CNOPERATOR
_PRIMARY

Globa
l

CnOperator

Mobile Country code

502

Globa
l

CnOperator

Mobile network code

04

Clock

TIMESRC

Time Source

NTP

Clock

NTPCP

IPv4 Address of NTP


Server

10.141.142.22

Clock

NTPCP

Synchronization Period

Clock

TASM

Clock Working Mode

MANUAL

Clock

TASM

Clock Source No.

Clock

TASM

Selected Clock Source

PEERCLK

Clock

TASM

Clock Synchronization

FREQ

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

251

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Dom
ain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configura
tion
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Mode
Clock

TASM

Quality Level

QL_PRC

Clock

PEERCLK

Peer Standard

UMTS

Clock

PEERCLK

Peer Clock No.

Equip
ment

EQUIPMENT

Maintenance Mode

INSTALL

Table 2.3 LTE equipment data configuration


Domain

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

MPT

LTE

MPT

Cabinet No.

MPT

MPT

Subrack No.

MPT

MPT

Slot No.

MPT

MPT

Board Type

LMPT

Baseband

BBP

Cabinet No.

Baseband

BBP

Subrack No.

Baseband

BBP

Slot No.

Baseband

BBP

Board Type

LBBP

Baseband

BBP

Work Mode

FDD

Equipment

CABINET

Cabinet No.

Cabinet No.: 0

Cabinet Type

Type: BTS3900

Cabinet No.

Cabinet No.: 0

Subrack No.

Subrack 0:
BBU3900

Equipment

SUBRACK

Subrack Type

Subrack 11: FMU


Subrack 4: RFU
CPRI-based
topology

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

RRUCHAIN

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Three RRU chains


are connected to
three optical ports
0, 2, and 4 on the
baseband
processing board.

252

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

RF

RFU

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Configure an RFU
on the new RRU
chain. The RFU
slot number must
be different from
that of the
configured RFU
for GU, and the
working mode of
the RFU must be
set to GSM_LTE.

Antenna and
feeder

RET

Device No.

0, 1, and 2

Antenna and
feeder

RET

RET Type

SINGLE_RET

Antenna and
feeder

RET

Polar Type

DUAL

Antenna and
feeder

RET

Antenna Scenario

REGULAR

Antenna and
feeder

RET

Control Port
Cabinet No.

Antenna and
feeder

RET

Control Port
Subrack No.

Antenna and
feeder

RET

Control Port Slot


No.

3, 4, and 5

Antenna and
feeder

RETSUBUNIT

Device No.

0, 1, and 2

Antenna and
feeder

RETSUBUNIT

Subunit No.

Antenna and
feeder

RETSUBUNIT

Connect Port 1
Cabinet No.

Connect to the
following:
0\4\3 R0A- 0\4\3
R0B
0\4\4 R0A0\4\4R0B
0\4\5 R0A- 0\4\5
R0B

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

253

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Table 2.4 LTE transmission data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

LTE

SCTPLNK

Link No.

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

0/1/7

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First Local IP
Address

160.133.3.12

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Local SCTP
Port No.

2913

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First Peer IP
Address

125.120.120.1

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Peer SCTP Port


No.

2910

Transmission

CPBEARER

CP Bear No.

Transmission

CPBEARER

Flag

MASTER

Transmission

CPBEARER

Bear Type

SCTP

Transmission

CPBEARER

Link No.

Transmission

IPPATH

Path ID

Transmission

IPPATH

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

0/1/7

Transmission

IPPATH

Subboard Type

BACK_BOAR
D

Transmission

IPPATH

Port Type

TUNNEL

Transmission

IPPATH

Port No.

Transmission

IPPATH

Path Type

ANY

Transmission

IPPATH

Local IP

160.133.3.12

Transmission

IPPATH

Peer IP

171.23.36.1

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface ID

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface CP
Bearer ID

Transmission

S1Interface

CN Operator ID

Transmission

S1Interface

MME Release

Release_R10

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface Is
Blocked

FALSE

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

254

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

OMCH

Standby Status

MASETR

Transmission

OMCH

Local IP

160.133.3.12

Transmission

OMCH

Local Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

OMCH

Peer IP

10.141.142.22

Transmission

OMCH

Peer Mask

255.255.255.0

Transmission

DEVIP

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

0/1/7

Transmission

DEVIP

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

DEVIP

Port Type

LOOPINT

Transmission

DEVIP

Port No.

Transmission

DEVIP

IP Address

160.133.3.12

Transmission

DEVIP

Mask

255.255.0.0

BBU
interconnection

TUNNEL

The tunnel
starts from the
UMPT to the
GTMU and the
direction is
downlink.

Transmission

IPRT

Route Index

Configure the
IP routes for the
U2000, MME,
and S-GW. If
co-transmission
through
backplane
interconnection
is used, the
tunnel provides
routing.

BBU
interconnection

CTRLLNK

Local Link No.

The local board


is the UMPT
whose cabinet
No., subrack
No., and slot
No. being 0, 1,
and 7,
respectively.
The peer board
is the UMPT
whose cabinet
No., subrack

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

255

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
No., and slot
No. being 0, 0,
and 7,
respectively.

Transmission

ETHPORT

Port No.

Transmission

ETHPORT

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to those of the
UMPT in
subrack 1.

Transmission

ETHPORT

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

Table 2.5 LTE radio data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Antenna and
feeder

LTE

SECTOR

Sector ID

Add three
sectors.

Sector Name
Sector Antenna

They use the


following
antennas:
0:
0,4,3,0;0,4,3,1
1:
0,4,4,0;0,4,4,1
2:
0,4,5,0;0,4,5,1

Antenna and
feeder

SECTOREQM

Sector
Equipment ID

Three pieces of
sector
equipment are
added.
They
correspond to
sectors 0
through 2.
The following
sector antennas
are used:
0:
0,4,3,0,3,0;0,4,3
,1,3,0
1:

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

256

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
0,4,4,0,3,0;0,4,4
,1,3,0
2:
0,4,5,0,3,0;0,4,5
,1,3,0

Radio

Cell

Three LTE cells


are added with
the following
key parameters
and the
corresponding
values:
FrequencyBand
:3
DlEarfcn: 1600
DlBandwidth:
CELL_BW_N5
0
UlBandwidth:
CELL_BW_N5
0
FddTddInd:
CELL_FDD
Transmit and
receive mode:
2T2R
Sector
equipment:
corresponding
to sector
equipment 0
through 2.
Baseband
equipment:
share equipment
0.

Table 2.6 GSM data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

CPRI-based
topology

GSM

BTSRXUCHAI
N

Configure three
RRU chains on
optical ports 1,
3, and 5 on the

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

257

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
GTMU.

RF

BTSRXUBRD

Added one
MRRU to
position 0 of
each of the
newly added
three chains.

RF

BTSRXUBP

Working
Standard

GSM_AND_LT
E
Note that the
working mode
of the new RF
module must be
set to GL.

Radio

GCELL

Freq. Band

Add three cells


that are served
by the
DCS1800
frequency band.

Radio

TRXINFO

Configure two
TRXs in each
cell using the
main and
diversity RX
channels.

Radio

TRXBIND2PH
YBRD

Bind three cells


to the R0As of
three RRUs,
respectively.

Table 2.7 UMTS data configuration


Domain

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

BBU
interconnection

UMTS

CTRLLNK

Local Link No.

The local board is


the UMPT whose
cabinet No.,
subrack No., and
slot No. being 0,
1, and 7,
respectively.
The peer board is
the UMPT whose

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

258

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

cabinet No.,
subrack No., and
slot No. being 0,
0, and 7,
respectively.
BBU
interconnection

TUNNEL

Add a tunnel to
the UMPT_L
board.
The tunnel
direction is uplink.

Transmission

IPRT

Configure IP
routes. Configure
a tunnel to the
UMPT_L board.

Transmission

DHCPSVRIP

DHCP Server IP
Address

Set the IP address


of the DHCP
server to that of
the U2000. The IP
address is used for
base station
deployment.

Transmission

DHCPRELAY
SWITCH

DHCP Relay Switch

ENABLE

Transmission

DHCPSW

OMCH AutoEstablishment
Switch

ENABLE

Transmission

DHCPSW

Vlanscan Switch

DISABLE

4.10 Example: Mode Transition from GU+L


(UCIU+UMPT) to GU+LT (UCIU+UMPT)
This chapter takes the transition from a GU+L (UCIU+UMPT) triple-mode base station to a
GU+LT (UCIU+UMPT) quadruple-mode base station as an example. This chapter lists the
managed objects (MOs) to be configured during the transition. Figure 4-19 shows the
hardware configurations before and after mode transition. Figure 4-20 shows the transmission
networking topology before and after mode transition.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

259

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Figure 1.1 Hardware configurations before and after mode transition

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

260

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Figure 1.2 Transmission networking topology before and after mode transition

Table 4-67 lists the major differences before and after mode transition.
Table 2.1 Major differences before and after mode transition
Item

Before Transition

After Transition

Mode

GU+L triple mode

GU+LT quadruple-mode

Service
configurati
on

GSM and UMTS operating in


the 900 MHz frequency band,
GSM and LTE operating in the
1800 MHz frequency band,
three sectors configured

GSM and UMTS operating in the 900


MHz frequency band, GSM and LTE
operating in the 1800 MHz frequency
band, LTE TDD operating in the 2600
MHz frequency band, three sectors

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

261

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Item

4 Mode Transition Examples

Before Transition

After Transition

900 MHz: GSM S2/2/2/, UMTS


S2/2/2, 1T2R

configured

1800 MHz: GSM S2/2/2, LTE


S1/1/1, 2T2R

900 MHz: GSM S2/2/2/, UMTS S2/2/2,


1T2R
1800 MHz: GSM S2/2/2, LTE S1/1/1,
2T2R
2600 MHz: TDD S1/1/1 (1 x 20 MHz),
4T4R

BBU

Two BBUs interconnected


through UCIU+UMPT

Two BBUs interconnected through


UCIU+UMPT

GSM and UMTS sharing the


same BBU; LTE using the other
BBU

GSM and UMTS sharing the same BBU,


LTE using the other BBU. The TDD mode
is configured for the BBU of the eNodeB.

RF
typology

Dual-star topology for both GU


RF modules and GL RF
modules

Dual-star topology for both GU and GL


RF modules, star topology for TDD RF
modules

Transmissi
on scheme

GSM and UMTS cotransmission through backplane


interconnection and connected
to LTE, IP over Ethernet

Remains the same.

Clock
networkin
g

GSM and UMTS share the LTE


IEEE 1588v2 reference clock.
The frequency synchronization
mode is configured.

LTE uses the GPS reference clock and the


clock synchronization mode is time
synchronization. GSM and UMTS share
the LTE reference clock. The time
synchronization mode is configured for
GSM and UMTS. For the clock changes,
see the following descriptions.

The following tables list the MOs involved in the mode transition in different domains. The
data in these tables can be the references for data configuration in summary tables.
Table 2.2 BSC data configuration
Domain

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

Clock

BSC

BTSCLK

CLKSYNCMODE

TIMESYN

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

262

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Table 2.3 UMTS data configuration


Domain

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

Clock

UMTS

TASM

Clock
Synchronization
Mode

TIME

Table 2.4 LTE global data configuration


Dom
ain

Configura
tion
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Clock

LTE

GPS

GPS Clock No.

Clock

GPS

Cabinet No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

0/1/0

Clock

CnOperator

Way to Get Position

AUTO_SEARC
H

Clock

GPS

GPS Work Mode

GPS

Clock

GPS

Mobile network code

04

Clock

TASM

Clock Working Mode

MANUAL

Clock

TASM

Clock Source No.

Clock

TASM

Selected Clock Source

GPS

Clock

TASM

Clock Synchronization
Mode

TIME

Clock

TASM

Quality Level

QL-SSU-B

Table 2.5 LTE equipment data configuration


Domain

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

Equipment

LTE

USCU

Cabinet No.

Equipment

USCU

Subrack No.

Equipment

USCU

Slot No.

Equipment

USCU

Board Type

LMPT

Baseband

BBP

Cabinet No.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

263

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

Baseband

BBP

Subrack No.

Baseband

BBP

Slot No.

Baseband

BBP

Board Type

LBBP

Baseband

BBP

Work Mode

FDD

Equipment

CABINET

Cabinet No.

Cabinet No.: 0 and


1

Cabinet Type

Cabinet Type:
BTS3900
Equipment

SUBRACK

Cabinet No.

Cabinet No.: 0

Subrack No.

Subrack 0:
BBU3900

Subrack Type

Subrack 11: FMU


Subrack 4: RFU
CPRI-based
topology

RRUCHAIN

Three RRU chains


are connected to
optical fiber
cables through
three optical ports
3, 4, and 53 on the
baseband board.

RF

RFU

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

One RRU is added


to the new RRU
chain.
Working mode:
TDL

Antenna and
feeder

RET

Device No.

0, 1, and 2

Antenna and
feeder

RET

RET Type

SINGLE_RET

Antenna and
feeder

RET

Polar Type

DUAL

Antenna and
feeder

RET

Antenna Scenario

REGULAR

Antenna and
feeder

RET

Control Port
Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No. of
the three new

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

264

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

RRUs
Antenna and
feeder

RETSUBUNIT

Device No.

0, 1, and 2

Antenna and
feeder

RETSUBUNIT

Subunit No.

Antenna and
feeder

RETSUBUNIT

Connect Port 1
Cabinet No.

Connected to
channels A and B
of the three RRUs

Table 2.6 LTE radio data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Antenna and
feeder

LTE

SECTOR

Sector ID

Add three
sectors.

Sector Name
Sector Antenna

They use the


following
antennas:
3:
0, 60, 0, 0; 0,
60, 0, 1; 0, 60,
0, 2; 0, 60, 0, 3
4:
0, 61, 0, 0; 0,
61, 0, 1; 0, 61,
0, 2; 0, 61, 0, 3
5:
0, 62, 0, 0; 0,
62, 0, 1; 0, 62,
0, 2; 0, 62, 0, 3

Antenna and
feeder

SECTOREQM

Sector
Equipment ID

Three pieces of
sector
equipment are
added.
They
correspond to
sectors 0
through 2.
The following
sector antennas
are used:

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

265

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
3:
0, 60, 0, 0, 3, 0;
0, 60, 0, 1, 3, 0;
0, 60, 0, 2, 3, 0;
0, 60, 0, 3, 3, 0
4:
0, 61, 0, 0, 3, 0;
0, 61, 0, 1, 3, 0;
0, 61, 0, 2, 3, 0;
0, 61, 0, 3, 3, 0
5:
0, 62, 0, 0, 3, 0;
0, 62, 0, 1, 3, 0;
0, 62, 0, 2, 3, 0;
0, 62, 0, 3, 3, 0

Radio

Cell

Three LTE cells


are added with
the following
key parameters
and the
corresponding
values:
FrequencyBand
: 38
DlEarfcn:
38150
DlBandwidth:
CELL_BW_N2
5
UlBandwidth:
CELL_BW_N2
5
FddTddInd:
CELL_TDD
Transmit and
receive mode:
4T4R
Working mode:
UL_DL
Sector
equipment:
corresponding
to sector
equipment 3
through 5.
Baseband
equipment:

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

266

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
share equipment
0.

Radio

CellOp

Add for cell 4


and cell 5.
With the related
parameters set
as follows:
Local tracking
area ID: 4 and 5
Cell reserved
for operator:
CELL_NOT_R
ESERVED_FO
R_OP

Radio

CnOperatorTa

Add for cell 4


and cell 5.
With the related
parameters set
as follows:
Local tracking
area ID: 4 and 5
CN Operator
ID: 0
Tracking area
code: 4 and 5

4.11 Example: Mode Transition from LO to G*L


CPRI Load Sharing4.8, 4.9
This chapter takes the transition from an LTE single-mode base station to a co-MPT GSM and
LTE (GL) dual-mode base station using CPRI MUX load sharing as an example. This chapter
lists the managed objects (MOs) to be configured during the transition. Figure 4-21 shows the
hardware configurations before and after mode transition. Figure 4-22 shows the transmission
networking topology before and after mode transition.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

267

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Figure 1.1 Hardware configurations before and after mode transition

Figure 1.2 Transmission networking topology before and after mode transition

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

268

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Table 4-73 lists the major differences before and after mode transition.
Table 2.1 Major differences before and after mode transition
Item

Before Transition

After Transition

Mode

LTE single-mode

Co-MPT GSM and LTE dual-mode

Service
configurat
ion

LTE operating in the 1800 MHz


frequency band, three sectors
configured

GSM and LTE operating in the 1800


MHz frequency band, three sectors
configured

1800 MHz: LTE S1/1/1, 2T2R

1800 MHz: GSM S2/2/2, LTE S1/1/1,


GSM 1T2R, LTE 2T2R

BBU

One BBU

One BBU configured with GL coMPT, GSM configured with the


UBRIb

RF
typology

Star topology for LO RF modules

GL CPRI MUX load sharing

Transmiss
ion
scheme

IP over Ethernet

GSM and LTE co-transmission, IP


over Ethernet

Clock
networkin
g

Synchronous Ethernet clock

Co-MPT GL synchronous Ethernet


clock

Data plan filling involved in the transition from a separate-MPT LTE only base station
to a co-MPT LTE only base station

Filling in the GlobalPlanning page


No

Filling in the SitePlanning page

Table 2.2 Filling in fields in the SitePlanning page


Field

Description

Examples

ConvertFlag

Conversion ID

Yes

eNodeBName

eNodeB name

eNodeB_XX

The following tables list the MOs involved in the mode transition in different domains. The
data in these tables can be the references for data configuration in summary tables.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

269

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Table 2.3 LTE data configuration


Domain

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

RF

LTE

RRU

RF Unit Working
Mode

GL

RRUCHAIN

Topo Type

LOADBALANCE

CPRI-based
topology

Table 2.4 BSC data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

BSC

ADJNODE

Adjacent Node
ID

523

GCELL

Three cells
working on the
1800 MHz
frequency band

Radio

Local Cell ID:


3, 4, and 5
TRX Group ID:
0, 1, and 2
Transmission

SCTPLNK

Application
type

ABISCP

Transmission

SCTPLNK

SCTP link ID

523

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Signalling link
mode

SERVER

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First local IP
address

25.14.1.1

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First destination
IP address

25.14.7.10

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Destination
SCTP port No.

1024

Transmission

IPPATH

Adjacent Node
ID

523

Transmission

IPPATH

IP path ID

Transmission

IPPATH

Interface Type

ABIS

Transmission

IPPATH

Is eGBTS

Yes

Transmission

IPPATH

IP path type

QoS

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

270

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

IPPATH

Local IP
address

25.14.1.1

Transmission

IPPATH

Peer IP address

25.14.7.10

Table 2.5 GSM equipment data configuration


Domain

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

Equipment

GSM

BRI

Add an UBRI
board to slot 1.

CPRI-based
topology

RRUCHAIN

Change Topo
Type to LOAD
BALANCE for
the RRU chain
and add CPRI
ports to the
UBRIb board.

RF

RRU

RF Unit Working
Mode

GL

Table 2.6 GSM transmission data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

GSM

DEVIP

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to those of the
main control
board

Transmission

DEVIP

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

DEVIP

Port Type

ETH

Transmission

DEVIP

Port No.

Transmission

DEVIP

IP Address

25.14.7.10

Transmission

DEVIP

Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

VLANMAP

Next Hop IP

25.14.0.1

Transmission

VLANMAP

Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

VLANMAP

VLAN Mode

SINGLEVLAN

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

271

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

VLANMAP

VLAN ID

457

Transmission

VLANMAP

Set VLAN
Priority

DISABLE

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Link No.

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

The main
control board
provides
transmission
ports.

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First Local IP
Address

25.14.7.10

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Local SCTP
Port No.

1024

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First Peer IP
Address

25.14.1.1

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Peer SCTP Port


No.

58080

Transmission

GBTSPATH

Path ID

1
Configure an IP
path ID for the
eGBTS. (Note
that the IP path
ID cannot be
the same as that
of UMTS
before
transition.
Otherwise, the
original data
will be
overwritten.)

Transmission

CPBEARER

CP Bear No.

1
Note that the
CP Bear No.
cannot be the
same as that of
UMTS before
transition.
Otherwise, the
original data
will be
overwritten.)

Transmission

CPBEARER

Flag

MASTER

Transmission

CPBEARER

Bear Type

SCTP

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

272

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

CPBEARER

Link No.

Transmission

IPPATH

Path ID

Transmission

IPPATH

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

Corresponding
to those of the
main control
board

Transmission

IPPATH

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

IPPATH

Port Type

ETH

Transmission

IPPATH

Port No.

Transmission

IPPATH

Path Type

ANY

Transmission

IPPATH

Local IP

25.14.24.141

Transmission

IPPATH

Peer IP

25.14.1.1

Transmission

GBTSABISCP

Control Port ID

Transmission

GBTSABISCP

CP Bear No.

Table 2.7 GSM radio data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Antenna and
feeder

GSM

SECTOREQM

Sector
Equipment ID

Three pieces of
sector
equipment are
added.
They
correspond to
sectors 0
through 2.
The following
sector antennas
are used:
3:
0,60,0,R0B,RX
_MODE,SLAV
E;0,60,0,R0A,R
XTX_MODE,
MASTER
4:
0,61,0,R0B,RX

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

273

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
_MODE,SLAV
E;0,61,0,R0A,R
XTX_MODE,
MASTER
5:
0,62,0,R0B,RX
_MODE,SLAV
E;0,62,0,R0A,R
XTX_MODE,
MASTER

Antenna and
feeder

GTRXGROUP

TRX Group ID

0, 1, and 2

Radio

GTRXGROUP

Local Cell ID

3, 4, and 5

Radio

GTRXGROUP

Sector
Equipment ID

3, 4, and 5

Note that the


TRX group IDs
must be
consistent with
those on the
BSC side.

4.12 Example: Mode Transition from G*U to


G*U*L (Outdoor BBU)
This chapter takes the transition from a GSM and UMTS (GU) dual-mode base station
configured with outdoor BBUs to a GU900 (CPRI MUX) + L1800 triple-mode base station as
an example. This chapter lists the managed objects (MOs) to be configured during the
transition. Figure 4-23 shows the hardware configurations before and after mode transition.
Figure 4-24 shows the transmission networking topology before and after mode transition.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

274

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Figure 1.1 Hardware configurations before and after mode transition

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

275

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Figure 1.2 Transmission networking topology before and after mode transition

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

276

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Table 4-80 lists the major differences before and after mode transition.
Table 2.1 Major differences before and after mode transition
Item

Before Transition

After Transition

Mode

GSM and UMTS dual-mode

GSM, UMTS, and LTE


triple-mode

Service configuration

GSM and UMTS operating


in the 900 MHz frequency
band, three sectors
configured

GSM and UMTS operating


in the 900 MHz frequency
band, three sectors
configured; LTE operating
in the 1800 MHz frequency
band, three sectors
configured

900 MHz: UMTS S2/2/2,


GSM S2/2/2, 1T2R

900 MHz: UMTS S2/2/2,


GSM S2/2/2, 1T2R
1800 MHz: LTE S1/1/1
(1x10 MHz), 1T2R
RF typology

GU CPRI MUX

GU CPRI MUX + LTE star


topology

Transmission scheme

GU co-transmission and
separate service bearers, IP
over Ethernet

GUL co-transmission and


separate service bearers, IP
over Ethernet

Clock networking

GSM and UMTS sharing the


IEEE 1588 V2 reference
clock

GSM, UMTS, and LTE


sharing the IEEE 1588 V2
reference clock

The following tables list the MOs involved in the mode transition in different domains. The
data in these tables can be the references for data configuration in summary tables.
Table 2.2 LTE global data configuration
Dom
ain

Configura
tion
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Globa
l

LTE

CnOperator

CN Operator ID

Globa
l

CnOperator

CN Operator name

LTE

Globa
l

CnOperator

CN Operator type

CNOPERATOR
_PRIMARY

Globa
l

CnOperator

Mobile Country code

502

Globa
l

CnOperator

Mobile network code

04

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

277

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Dom
ain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configura
tion
Object

Globa
l

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

APPLICATION

Application
Maintenance Mode

INSTALL

Table 2.3 LTE equipment data configuration


Domain

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

Equipment

LTE

eNodeBFunctio
n

eNodeB ID

49122

Baseband

MDU

Base Band Work


Standard

GSM-1&UMTS1&LTE_FDD1&LTE_TDD-0

Equipment

CABINET

Cabinet No.

Equipment

CABINET

Cabinet Type

VIRTUAL

Equipment

SUBRACK

Subrack No.

Equipment

SUBRACK

Subrack Type

PMU

Equipment

PMU

Cabinet No.

Equipment

PMU

Subrack No.

Baseband

PMU

Slot No.

Equipment

PMU

Manager Cabinet
No.

Equipment

PMU

Manager Subrack
No.

Equipment

PMU

Manager Port No.

Equipment

PMU

Address

Equipment

PMU

Power System Type

ETP

Equipment

CABINET

Cabinet No.

10

Equipment

CABINET

Cabinet Type

BBC

Equipment

SUBRACK

Cabinet No.

10

Equipment

SUBRACK

Subrack No.

Equipment

SUBRACK

Subrack Type

TCU

Equipment

TCU

Cabinet No.

10

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

278

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

Equipment

TCU

Subrack No.

Equipment

TCU

Slot No.

Equipment

TCU

Manager Cabinet
No.

Equipment

TCU

Manager Subrack
No.

Equipment

TCU

Manager Port No.

Equipment

TCU

Address

24

Equipment

BATTERY

Cabinet No.

Equipment

BATTERY

Subrack No.

Equipment

BATTERY

Slot No.

Equipment

BATTERY

Installation Type

OUTER

Equipment

BATTERY

Battery Type

VRLA_BAT

CPRI-based
topology

RRUCHAIN

Add three RRU


chains to optical
ports 3 through 5
on the board in
slot 6.

RF

RRU

Added one RRU


to position 0 of
each of the newly
added three
chains. The RRUs
work in LO mode.

Table 2.4 LTE transmission data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Transmission

LTE

SCTPLNK

Link No.

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

0\0\6

Transmission

SCTPLNK

First Local IP
Address

160.70.11.91

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Local SCTP

2913

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

279

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Port No.
Transmission

SCTPLNK

First Peer IP
Address

125.120.120.1

Transmission

SCTPLNK

Peer SCTP Port


No.

2910

Transmission

CPBEARER

CP Bear No.

Transmission

CPBEARER

Flag

MASTER

Transmission

CPBEARER

Bear Type

SCTP

Transmission

CPBEARER

Link No.

Transmission

IPPATH

Path ID

Transmission

IPPATH

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

0\0\6

Transmission

IPPATH

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

IPPATH

Port Type

ETH

Transmission

IPPATH

Port No.

Transmission

IPPATH

Path Type

ANY

Transmission

IPPATH

Local IP

160.70.11.91

Transmission

IPPATH

Peer IP

171.23.36.1

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface ID

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface CP
Bearer ID

Transmission

S1Interface

CN Operator ID

Transmission

S1Interface

MME Release

Release_R10

Transmission

S1Interface

S1 Interface Is
Blocked

FALSE

Transmission

DEVIP

Cabinet
No./Subrack
No./Slot No.

0\0\6

Transmission

DEVIP

Subboard Type

BASE_BOARD

Transmission

DEVIP

Port Type

ETH

Transmission

DEVIP

Port No.

Transmission

DEVIP

IP Address

160.70.11.91

Transmission

DEVIP

Mask

255.255.0.0

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

280

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

Transmission

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

IPRT

Route Index

Configure two
IP routes.
Destination IP
addresses:
125.120.120.1
171.23.36.1
The route type
is set to
NEXTHOP.

Transmission

VLANMAP

Next Hop IP

160.70.7.10

Transmission

VLANMAP

Mask

255.255.0.0

Transmission

VLANMAP

VLAN Mode

SINGLEVLAN

Transmission

VLANMAP

VLAN ID

446

Transmission

VLANMAP

Set VLAN
Priority

DISABLE

Table 2.5 LTE radio data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Antenna and
feeder

LTE

SECTOR

Sector ID

Add three
sectors.

Sector Name
Sector Antenna

They use the


following
antennas:
63:
0,63,0,R0A;0,6
3,0,R0B
64:
0,64,0,R0A;0,6
4,0,R0B
65:
0,65,0,R0A;0,6
5,0,R0B

Antenna and
feeder

SECTOREQM

Sector
Equipment ID

Three pieces of
sector
equipment are
added.
They
correspond to
sectors 63

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

281

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
through 65.
The following
sector antennas
are used:
63:
0,63,0,R0B,RX
TX_MODE,M
ASTER;0,63,0,
R0A,RXTX_M
ODE,MASTER
64:
0,64,0,R0B,RX
TX_MODE,M
ASTER;0,64,0,
R0A,RXTX_M
ODE,MASTER
65:
0,65,0,R0B,RX
TX_MODE,M
ASTER;0,65,0,
R0A,RXTX_M
ODE,MASTER

Radio

Cell

Three LTE cells


are added with
the following
key parameters
and the
corresponding
values:
FrequencyBand
:3
DlEarfcn: 1600
DlBandwidth:
CELL_BW_N5
0
UlBandwidth:
CELL_BW_N5
0
FddTddInd:
CELL_FDD
Transmit and
receive mode:
2T2R
Sector
equipment:
corresponding
to sector

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

282

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
equipment 63
through 65.

4.13 Example: Mode Transition from LO (FDD)


to LO (FDD+TDD)
This chapter takes the transition from an LTE FDD base station without co-BBP to an LTE
(FDD+TDD) base station as an example. Figure 4-25 shows the hardware configurations
before and after mode transition.
Figure 1.1 Hardware configurations before and after mode transition

The LMPT cannot be shared by LTE FDD and LTE TDD to form a co-MPT base station. If an LMPT is
used, replace the LMPT with the UMPT, and then perform mode transition. For the operation guide of
replacing the LMPT with the UMPT, see section "Replacing the Main Control Board When No SeGW Is
Deployed" or "Replacing the Main Control Board When an SeGW Is Deployed" in eRAN
Reconfiguration Guide.

Table 1.1 Major differences before and after mode transition


Item

Before Transition

After Transition

Mode

LTE FDD

LTE (FDD+TDD)

Service
configuratio
n

LTE FDD, one sector

LTE FDD, one sector; LTE TDD, one sector

2100 MHz (FDD): LTE 1,


20 MHz, 2T2R

2100 MHz (FDD): LTE 1, 20 MHz, 2T2R

BBU

The BBU works in LTE


only mode.

The BBU works in LTE only mode. An


LBBPd2 board is added to slot 2 and the
BBU is configured to support TDD.

RF
typology

RRU chain

RRU chain. A TDD RRU chain is added on


the newly added LBBPd2 board.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

2300 MHz (TDD): LTE 1, 20 MHz, 4T4R

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

283

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

Item

Before Transition

After Transition

Transmissio
n scheme

IP over Ethernet

Remains the same.

Clock
networking

The IEEE 1588 V2


reference clock is used and
the clock synchronization
mode is frequency
synchronization.

LTE uses the GPS reference clock and the


clock synchronization mode is time
synchronization. In this scenario, the GPS
reference clock is used as an example.
NOTE
To use the IEEE 1588 V2 reference clock, change
the clock synchronization mode to time
synchronization.

The following tables list the MOs involved in the mode transition in different domains. The
data in these tables can be the references for data configuration in summary tables.
Table 1.2 Common data configuration
Domain

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

Recommend
ed Value

Clock

LTE

GPS Clock
Link

GPS Clock No.

Cabinet No.

Subrack No.

Slot No.

Way to Get Position

AUTO_SEARCH

Clock Working
Mode

MANUAL(Manua
l)

CLKSYNCMODE

TIME

Selected Clock
Source

GPS

TASM

Table 1.3 LTE equipment data configuration


Domain

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

Recommend
ed Value

Baseband

LTE

BBP

Cabinet No.

Subrack No.

Slot No.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

284

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

CPRI-based
topology

RF

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

4 Mode Transition Examples

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

RRUCHAIN

RRU

Parameter
Name

Recommend
ed Value

Board Type

LBBP

Work Mode

TDD

Administrative State

UNBLOCKED

Chain No.

Topo Type

CHAIN

Backup Mode

COLD

Access Type

LOCALPORT

Head Cabinet No.

Head Subrack No.

Head Slot No.

Head Port No.

Cabinet No.

Subrack No.

61

Slot No.

RRU Topo Position

TRUNK

RRU Chain No.

RRU Position

RRU type

LRRU

RRU Name

TDD_RRU1

Administrative State

UNBLOCKED

VSWR alarm postprocessing switch

OFF

VSWR alarm postprocessing


threshold(0.1)

30

VSWR alarm
threshold(0.1)

20

RF Unit Working
Mode

TDL

Number of RX
channels

Number of TX

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

285

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

Recommend
ed Value

channels
Frequency Min
Bandwidth(kHz)

5000

Low Current Protect


Switch

Enable

Table 1.4 LTE radio data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

Recommen
ded Value

Baseband

LTE

SECTOR

Sector ID

Sector Name

sector_1

Sector Antenna

0, 61, 0, R0A;
0, 61, 0, R0B
0, 61, 0, R0C;
0, 61, 0, R0D

SECTOREQM

Radio

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Cell

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Sector
Equipment ID

Sector ID

Sector
Equipment
Antenna

0, 61, 0, R0A,
RXTX_MODE,
MASTER; 0,
61, 0, R0B,
RXTX_MODE,
MASTER; 0,
61, 0, R0C,
RXTX_MODE,
MASTER; 0,
61, 0, R0D,
RXTX_MODE,
MASTER

Local Cell ID

Cell Name

Csg indicator

BOOLEAN_FA
LSE

Uplink cyclic
prefix length

NORMAL_CP

Downlink

NORMAL_CP
286

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

Recommen
ded Value

cyclic prefix
length

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Frequency band

40

Uplink
EARFCN
indication

NOT_CFG

Downlink
EARFCN

38900

Uplink
bandwidth

CELL_BW_N1
00

Downlink
bandwidth

CELL_BW_N1
00

Cell ID

Physical cell ID

Cell active state

CELL_ACTIV
E

Cell admin state

CELL_UNBLO
CK

Cell FDD TDD


indication

CELL_TDD

Subframe
assignment

SA1

Special
subframe
patterns

SSP5

Cell specific
offset(dB)

dB0

Frequency
offset(dB)

dB0

Root sequence
index

High speed flag

LOW_SPEED

Preamble
format

Customized
bandwidth
configure
indicator

NOT_CFG

287

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

Baseband

Radio

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Cell sector
equipment

CellOp

Parameter
Name

Recommen
ded Value

Emergency
Area Id
indicator

NOT_CFG

Ue max power
allowed
configure
indicator

NOT_CFG

Flag of MultiRRU Cell

BOOLEAN_FA
LSE

CPRI
Compression

NO_COMPRE
SSION

Air Cell Flag

BOOLEAN_FA
LSE

Cell
transmission
and reception
mode

4T4R

Work mode

UL_DL

Cell Standby
Mode

ACTIVE

Intra Frequency
RAN Sharing
Indication

BOOLEAN_TR
UE

Local cell ID

Sector
equipment ID

Reference
signal
power(0.1dBm)

32767

Baseband
equipment ID

255

Local cell ID

Add for cell 1.


With the related
parameters set
as follows:
Local tracking
area ID: 1
Cell reserved
for operator:
CELL_NOT_R
ESERVED_FO

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

288

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter
Name

Recommen
ded Value
R_OP

Local tracking
area ID

Cell reserved
for operator

Operator uplink
RB used
ratio(%)

16

Operator
downlink RB
used ratio(%)

16

MME configure
number

CELL_MME_C
FG_NUM_0

Operator Ue
Number
Ratio(%)

16

4.14 Example: Mode Transition from LO (TDD)


to LO (FDD+TDD)
This chapter takes the transition from an LTE TDD base station without co-BBP to an LTE
(FDD+TDD) base station as an example. Figure 4-26 shows the hardware configurations
before and after mode transition.
Figure 1.1 Hardware configurations before and after mode transition

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

289

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

4 Mode Transition Examples

The LMPT cannot be shared by LTE FDD and LTE TDD to form a co-MPT base station. If an LMPT is
used, replace the LMPT with the UMPT, and then perform mode transition. For the operation guide of
replacing the LMPT with the UMPT, see section "Replacing the Main Control Board When No SeGW Is
Deployed" or "Replacing the Main Control Board When an SeGW Is Deployed" in eRAN
Reconfiguration Guide.

Table 1.1 Major differences before and after mode transition


Item

Before Transition

After Transition

Mode

LTE TDD

LTE (FDD+TDD)

Service
configuratio
n

LTE TDD, one sector

LTE FDD, one sector; LTE TDD, one sector

2300 MHz (TDD): LTE 1,


20 MHz, 4T4R

2300 MHz (TDD): LTE 1, 20 MHz, 4T4R

BBU

The BBU works in LTE


only mode.

The BBU works in LTE only mode. An


LBBPd2 board is added to slot 2 and the
BBU is configured to support FDD.

RF
typology

RRU chain

RRU chain. An FDD RRU chain is added on


the newly added LBBPd2 board.

Transmissio
n scheme

IP over Ethernet

Remains the same.

Clock
networking

LTE uses the GPS reference


clock and the clock
synchronization mode is
time synchronization. In
this scenario, the GPS
reference clock is used as
an example.

Remains the same.

2600 MHz (FDD): LTE 1, 20 MHz, 2T2R

NOTE
The LTE TDD mode supports
GPS/RGPS, IEEE1588 V2 or
1PPS+TOD reference clock.

Table 1.2 LTE equipment data configuration


Domain

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

Baseband

LTE

BBP

Cabinet No.

BBP

Subrack No.

BBP

Slot No.

BBP

Board Type

LBBP

BBP

Work Mode

FDD

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

290

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Config
uratio
n
Object

MOC

CPRI-based
topology

RRUCHAIN

RF

RRU

Parameter

Recommend
ed Value

Add an RRU to
optical port 0 on
the newly added
baseband
processing board.
Cabinet No.
Slot No.

One RRU in
subrack 61 is
added to the new
RRU chain.

RRU

RRU type

LRRU

RRU

RF Unit Working
Mode

LO

RRU

Number of RX
channels

Actual number of
transmit and
receive antennas
used by RRUs.
For example, 2.

Subrack No.

Number of TX
channels

Table 1.3 LTE radio data configuration


Domain

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value

Baseband

LTE

SECTOR

Sector ID

SECTOR

Sector Antenna

0, 61, 0, R0A;
0, 61, 0, R0B

SECTOREQM

Sector
Equipment ID

Add one sector


equipment
corresponding
to the newly
added sector. 1
is an example.

Sector ID

SECTOREQM

Radio

Cell

Sector
Equipment
Antenna

0, 61, 0, R0A;
0, 61, 0, R0B
Add one FDD
LTE cell: cell 1.
The related key
parameters are
set as follows:
FrequencyBand
:7

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

291

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Domain

4 Mode Transition Examples

Configurati
on Object

MOC

Parameter

Recommen
ded Value
DlEarfcn: 3000
DlBandwidth:
CELL_BW_N1
00
UlBandwidth:
CELL_BW_N1
00
FddTddInd:
CELL_FDD
Cell
transmission
and reception
mode: 2T2R
Work mode:
UL_DL

EUCELLSECT
OREQM

CellOp

Local cell ID
Sector
equipment ID

Corresponding
to the cell and
sector
equipment
Add for cell 1.
With the related
parameters set
as follows:
Local tracking
area ID: 1
Cell reserved
for operator:
CELL_NOT_R
ESERVED_FO
R_OP

CnOperatorTa

Add for cell 1.


With the related
parameters set
as follows:

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Local
tracking area
ID: 1

CN Operator
ID: 0

Tracking area
code: 11

292

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

5 Mode Transition Implementation

Mode Transition Implementation

5.1 Policies
Because the live network is affected during mode transition of a multimode base station, you
are advised to make preparations and perform the operations that do not affect services in
advance, and perform the operations that affect services in parallel. This can shorten the
service interruption duration.
During mode transition, data configuration and hardware adjustment are key operations and
the services are interrupted during these operations. Services can be restored only when these
two operations are consistent because they are interdependent. For example, when a CPRI
link is moved to a new port on the BBU during the transition, data related to the CPRI link
must be adjusted accordingly. Services of a multimode base station can be restored only when
the port adjustment is consistent with data configured for the CPRI link.
During mode transition, adjusting hardware and activating data configuration interrupt
services. Therefore, you are advised to perform these two operations in parallel. This
minimizes the service interruption duration during mode transition.
1. Complete operations that do not affect services in advance, such as pre-installation of
equipment of the new mode. Perform operations that affect services in parallel if possible to
shorten the duration.
2. During mode transition, hardware adjustment is required and must be performed with data
configuration in some transition scenarios. Only in this way the services can be restored
normally. Such hardware adjustment can be adjustment of CPRI links or transmission links. In
this case, perform hardware adjustment and data configuration activation in parallel to shorten
the service interruption period.
3. Upgrade the original mode before mode transition.
4. Before mode transition, perform refarming on the original mode to allocate a new
frequency to the new mode if necessary. Refarming shall be completed before site
reconstruction. In addition, ensure that a sufficient buffer zone is reserved for site
reconstruction during refarming.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

293

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

5 Mode Transition Implementation

5.2 Procedure for Implementing Mode


Transition
Figure 1.1 The following figure describes the procedure for implementing mode transition.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

294

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

5 Mode Transition Implementation

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

295

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

6 Upgrading Base Station Software

Upgrading Base Station


Software

6.1 Recording Base Station Status Before


Mode Transition
Record the alarm status and service KPIs of a base station before mode transition for future
comparison.
Alarms must be cleared before mode transition. For details, see Table 6-1.
Table 1.1 Alarms to be cleared
Alarm Type

Alarm

Remarks

Hardware

Alarms such as ALM-26200


Board Hardware Fault and
ALM-26532 RF Unit
Hardware Fault

Service

Alarms such as ALM-28010


Carrier Configuration Error,
ALM-28011 RF Unit RX
Channel Fault, ALM-28203
Local Cell Unusable, ALM28211 Cell Configuration
Abnormal, and ALM-28201
Local Cell Blocked

Communication

Alarms such as ALM-26235


RF Unit Maintenance Link
Failure, ALM-25901
Remote Maintenance Link
Failure, and ALM-26270
Inter-System
Communication Failure

Inter-system conflict

Alarms such as ALM-26272


Inter-System RF Unit

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

296

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

6 Upgrading Base Station Software

Alarm Type

Alarm

Remarks

Parameter Settings Conflict,


ALM-26274 Inter-System
Board Object Configuration
Conflict, and ALM-26277
Inter-System Control Rights
Conflict

The service KPIs need to be collected based on site requirements. The following table lists the
common KPIs to be checked.
Table 1.2 Common KPIs
KPI Check Item

Counter to Check

Traffic volume

CS Erlang, PS services of 64 kbit/s, 128


kbit/s, or 384 kbit/s, HSDPA, HSUPA, RRC
setups, and RAB setups (CS, PS, and HSPA)

Service setup success rate

RRC, RAB, and HSPA

Handover success rate

Intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and interRAT

Service drop rate

AMR, PS, HSDPA, and HSUPA

Others

KPIs specified by customers

6.2 Upgrading Base Station Software


Check whether the original versions of the GBTS and NodeB are the target versions of
SRAN. If the versions are not SRAN11.0, upgrade the base stations to the target version.
Refer to the upgrade guide of the target version during upgrade. For details about local USBassisted deployment procedure, see section "USB+U2000-based Commissioning" in 3900
Series Base Station Commissioning Guide.

6.3 Upgrading Software of Base Stations in the


Co-MPT Reconstruction Scenario
If the base station to be reconstructed includes a GBTS and the GBTS is to be reconstructed
into an eGBTS, the GTMU board must be converted. Before the conversion, download the
GTMU evolution software.
Visit http://support.huawei.com/carrier/, download the GTMU evolution software
corresponding to the MBTS'version (the software version is the V900 version).

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

297

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Preparing Data

This section describes the procedure for preparing data during mode transition.

7.1 Adding a BBU Interconnection Link on the


GSM Side (UCIU)
Step 1 For GBTSs, UCIU boards cannot be added using a summary data file. Instead, you can use
MML commands on the MBSC to add the UCIU boards before data synchronization. (The
MML command is ADD BTSBRD.)

Step 2 For GBTSs, BBU interconnection links cannot be added using a summary data file. Instead,
you can run MML commands on the MBSC to add the interconnect links before data
synchronization. (The MML command is ADD BTSCTRLLNK.)

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

298

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

----End

7.2 Synchronizing Data Configuration


Step 1 On the U2000, click
in the upper left corner. Then, on the Application Center panel of
the U2000, double-click Topo View.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

299

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Step 2 Right-click the MBSC to which the GBTS belongs and choose Synchronize NE
Configuration Data.

Step 3 Synchronize the UMTS data to the U2000, right-click the NodeB and choose Synchronize
NE Configuration Data.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

300

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Step 4 Double-click CME on the Application Center tab page.

Step 5 On the CME, choose Area Management > Current Area > Synchronize NEs to
synchronize data to the U2000.
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

301

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Step 6 In the displayed Synchronize NE(s) dialog box, select the MBSC and base station to be
synchronized.

Step 7 In the created planned data area, choose Area Management > Planned Area > Create
Planned Area. In the displayed Create Planned Area dialog box, add the MBSC and base
station, and click OK.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

302

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

----End

You are advised to save configuration data on each base station side by referring to Saving
Configuration Data on the Base Station Side Before Mode Transition after synchronization for data
configuration rollback. For details about how to perform data configuration rollback, see Rolling Back
Base Station Configurations.

7.3 Preparing Data for Co-MPT Reconstruction

If co-MPT reconstruction involves the GSM mode and the corresponding BSC works in
redundancy backup mode, convert data based on the data planning tables of the primarily
BSC and secondarily BSC.
Start the Converting co-MPT Reconstruction Data in the standalone CME to convert data for
Reconstructing Base Stations into Co-MPT Base Stations

Step 1 Choose SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Co-MPT Data Conversion from the
menu bar to start the reconstruction wizard.
Step 2 Perform the following operations as required.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

303

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Option

Description

The data planning file for


base stations to be
reconstructed is available

Clear Export file and click Next.

The data planning file for


1. Select Export file.
base stations to be
2. Select the base station controller that the base stations to be reconstructed belong
reconstructed is unavailable
to and select the base station version.
and you expect to export the
The base station controller name is required only when GBTSs or separate-MPT
file first and then modify
base stations that contain GBTSs are to be reconstructed.
data
3. Select base stations whose data you want to export from the base station list.
4. Click Next.
5. Click Edit File on the right of Planning data file.
6. Modify parameters in the data planning file as required, and then save and close
the file.
Step 3 Import the edited data planning file.
a.

Specify save paths for the prepared data planning file, base station
conversion component, and base station controller conversion component.

i.

Click Next.

Step 4 Set common parameters for site deployment and click Next.
Common parameters include the subnet mask, area, ESN, and hot patch version.
Step 5 The CME starts the reconstruction. When the reconstruction is successful, the CME generates
site deployment lists, base station configuration files, and an incremental script for the base
station controller. Then, click Finish.
You can directly deliver the generated files to NEs for them to take effect. You can continue to
modify data on the CME to adjust the reconstructed base stations, for example, to introduce
RATs and reconstruct the transmission. After the data is modified, use the function of
exporting auto-deployment data provided by the CME to export the site deployment lists and
base station configuration files. If base station controller data is modified, you also have to
export an incremental script for the base station controller.

For details about how to export auto-deployment data, see Exporting Auto-Deployment
Data Files (Standalone). Note that you need to select Reconstruct site when
selecting a specific site deployment scenario, and load the site deployment list exported
in 5.

For details about how to export an incremental script, see Exporting Incremental
Scripts (Standalone).

separate-MPT to co-MPT reconstruction.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

304

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

7.4 Configuring GSM Data


This section describes how to prepare and adjust GSM data when the GSM is used as the
original and new modes.
Only the eGBTS is supported in scenarios where the GSM works as a new mode. In this case,
all the data is configured using the summary data file for introducing RATs (SRAN
application) on the CME. For details about the configuration method, see Preparing
Transmission, Equipment, and Radio Adjustment Data (Co-MPT).
The following table list the configuration method when the GSM works as the original mode.
Table 1.1 GSM working as the original mode
Scena
rio

Data
Type

CME Template

Reference

GBTS

Equipment
data

The CME template provides a method of


configuring equipment data on the
common configuration interface or the
device panel of the LMT.

Adjusting RF Data
(GBTS)

Transmissi
on data

The CME template is used for inter-BSC


reparenting based on the TDM and IP.

Adjusting GBTS
Transmission Data

Radio data

a) Cell and neighbor relationships: The


CME template is used as a data file for
Radio Network Planning (RNP).

Adjusting GBTS
Radio Data

b) Cell algorithm parameters: The CME


template is used as a parameter file for
radio network optimization (RNO).
eGBTS

Equipment
data

a) The CME template is used to configure


the summary data file in batches (GSM
application).

Adjusting Co-MPT
Device Data

b) The CME template is used to adjust RF


data using the summary data file. It only
applies to RF-related data adjustment and
RXU board/TRX/cell capacity expansion
or decrease.
Transmissi
on data

a) Adjust the transmission data of the base


station and controller together through
batch adjustment over the Abis interface.

Adjusting Co-MPT
Transmission Data

b) Adjust the transmission data of the base


station through batch configuration of the
summary data file (GSM application).
Radio data

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

The CME template is used for batch


configuration of the summary data file.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

Adjusting Co-MPT
Radio Data

305

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

7.4.2 Preparing Equipment Data


This section describes how to adjust equipment data in co-MPT and separate-MPT scenarios
when the original mode is GSM. The equipment data to be adjusted includes the antenna and
feeder, BBU, RXU, and CPRI.

7.4.2.1 Adjusting RF Data (GBTS)


You can adjust GBTS data only on the common configuration interface or the device panel of
the LMT.
If only the RF-related equipment and radio data needs to be adjusted, use the summary data
file to adjust RF data. The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.
Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
----End
For details, see Importing and Exporting GBTS RF Adjustment Data (Based on RNCs of
SRAN9.0 or Later Versions) (standalone function).
Importing and Exporting GBTS Data for RF Adjustment

Export a data file for GBTS RF adjustment.

Step 1 Start the function of exporting GBTS data for RF adjustment.


a.

On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose GSM Application >
Export Data > Export RF Adjustment Data (CME client mode) or CME
> GSM Application > Export Data > Export RF Adjustment Data
(U2000 client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to select NE
versions and base station types.

j.

Select the version of the base station controller managing base stations to be
reconfigured.

k.

Set the base station type to GBTS.

l.

Click Next to start the wizard of exporting GBTS data for RF adjustment.

Step 2 Verify the selected base station controller version in the NE version drop-down list.
Step 3 Click Add. Three modes for selecting base stations are available. You can select one of them
based on site requirements. For details about the modes, see Object Selection Modes.
Step 4 Click Next and perform operations based on application scenarios.
Scenario

Operation

Perform operations when a data file


for RF adjustment has been prepared.
Then, the CME exports base station

1. Select Summary data file.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

2. Specify save paths for both the prepared data file for RF adjustment

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

306

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Scenario

Operation

data based on the configuration


objects in the prepared data file.

and the file where base station data is to be exported.

Perform operations when no data file


for RF adjustment is prepared. Then,
the CME exports base station data
based on the configuration objects
selected in the wizard.

1. Select Custom MOC.


2. Select configuration objects of the base stations to be exported and
specify a save path of the file where the base station data is to be
exported.
NOTE:
By default, the CME selects the minimum set of mandatory MOCs.

Step 5 Click Next. The CME starts the export.


Step 6 After the export succeeds, click Finish.
NOTE:
After the export succeeds, you can click the link in the dialog box to open the exported file.

Import a data file for GBTS RF adjustment.

Step 1 Start the function of importing GBTS data for RF adjustment.


a. On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose GSM Application > Import Data >
Import RF Adjustment Data (CME client mode) or CME > GSM Application > Import
Data > Import RF Adjustment Data (U2000 client mode). A dialog box is displayed for
you to select NE versions and base station types.
a.

Select the version of the base station controller managing base stations to
be reconfigured.

m.

Set the base station type to GBTS.

n.

Click Next to start the wizard of importing GBTS data for RF adjustment.

Step 2 Verify the selected base station controller version in the NE version drop-down list and select
the base station controller managing base stations whose RF data is to be reconfigured from
the NE drop-down list.
Step 3 Select the data file for RF adjustment to be imported.
Step 4 Click Next and select base stations whose RF data is to be reconfigured.
You can select base stations in the NE list. You can also click Load to quickly select base
stations defined in the file by importing a file.
NOTE:

When selecting base stations in the NE list, you can select base stations and then click Export to
export the selected base stations as a file for future selections.
If the file is unavailable when you select base stations by importing a file, you can click Export to
obtain a file, edit the file, and then click Load to import the file into the CME.

For details about rules for loading the file, see File Rules.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

307

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Step 5 Optional: Select Best effort.


NOTE:

If Best effort is selected, the CME skips the error information and continues the import. When
the import is complete, the CME rolls back only incorrect base station data.
If Best effort is not selected, the CME rolls back all the imported data if the import fails.

Step 6 Optional: If you need to export scripts to separate files based on GBTSs, select Export
scripts in separate files based on GBTSs, and perform the following operations:
NOTE:

If data in the current planned data area has been reconfigured, and you want to export scripts using
the Export scripts in separate files based on GBTSs option, you have to export the
scripts for reconfiguring the data first.

If you adjust RFs for co-group and co-coverage cells that do not belong to the same base station, you
cannot generate scripts in separate files by base station.

a.

Specify a save path for scripts.

o.

Set an encryption mode for exported scripts.


No: The exported scripts do not have encryption passwords and no encryption

passwords are required when you loading projects.


Yes: The exported scripts have encryption passwords. When loading projects,

you have to enter encryption passwords by performing the following operations:


NOTE:
If an encrypted password has been set for the exproted script, you cannot check the script on the local
PC. Instead, you have to check it using the script executor.
i.

Select Yes.

ii.

Click Set Password. In the displayed dialog box, enter the encryption password as
required.
The password must contain 6 to 32 characters.

iii.

Click OK.
The exported encrypted script files are in .ecf format.

p.

Optional: If you need to activate scripts immediately after the wizard is complete,
select Launch the script executor if the task is successful.

Step 7 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for you to set attributes.
Set attributes based on Table 1. To set FH Attributes and Channel Rule, you need to click
Advanced.
Table 1 Setting attributes
Attribute

Description

Cell ID

The CME can automatically allocate IDs to new cells and TRXs.

TRX ID

Automatic allocation rules: After you enter a reference ID in the wizard, the CME
searches for available IDs from the reference ID and allocates them to new cells and
TRXs. For example, after allocating a reference TRX ID to the first TRX, the CME

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

308

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Table 1 Setting attributes


Attribute

Description

generates a new ID by automatically adding 1 to the reference TRX ID and allocates the
new ID to the second TRX. If the generated ID has been used, the CME automatically
adds 1 to the ID until it is available and allocates the ID to the second TRX.
NOTE:
FH Attributes

The minimum ID available under the NE selected in the wizard functions as the start value by

The CME
generates data based on the FH type in the data file for RF adjustment. If the
default on the CME.
FH type is not specified in the data file, the CME generates data based on the FH type
When the imported data file contains different NEs, the CME searches for available IDs from the
selected
in the wizard.
preset start value and allocates them.
NOTE:

Channel Rule

FH type has the following values: NO_FH, RF_FH, BaseBand_FH(BCCH HOP), and
BaseBand_FH(BCCH NOT HOP), indicating no FH, RF FH, baseband FH (BCCH TRX
involved), and baseband FH (BCCH TRX not involved), respectively.

The configuration of the FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency band parameter is as follows:

When FH type is NO_FH, the configuration of FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency band does not
take effect.

When FH type is RF_FH, FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency band can be set to In Different


MAGroup or In One MAGroup.

When FH type is BaseBand_FH(BCCH HOP) or BaseBand_FH(BCCH NOT HOP), FH in


PGSM/EGSM frequency band can be set to In Different MAGroup, In One MAGroup, or
EGSM Frequency Not In Any MAGroup.

Set channel allocation rules based on the RF adjustment scenarios.

New Cells Channel Rule: configured when the data file for RF adjustment contains

new cells or you need to re-allocate channels of existing cells. For details about
channel allocation rules, see Channel Allocation Rules.
NOTE:
In the data file for RF adjustment, if Cell Extension Type is set to Double Timeslot Extension Cell, the
configuration of Channel Rule does not take effect. The CME automatically allocates timeslots 0 and 2
on the BCCH TRX to the BCCH and SDCCH, respectively, and allocates all the other timeslots in the
cell to TCHs.

Existed Cells Channel Rule: configured when the data file for RF adjustment

contains only new TRXs or you need to add TRXs in an existing cell.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

When Channel Allocation Rule 0 for TRXs is selected, the CME re-allocates
all channels of the imported cells based on the channel allocation rule specified
by New Cells Channel Rule.

When Channel Allocation Rule 1 for TRXs is selected, the CME allocates
only channels of new TRXs based on the following rules:
1.

Rank TRXs by TRX No. in ascending order.

2.

Allocate PDCCHs: PDCCHs are allocated to channels 6, 5, 7, 4, 3, 2, 1, and 0


of a TRX in sequence.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

309

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Table 1 Setting attributes


Attribute

Description
3.

Allocate SDCCHs: Based on the sequence of TRX numbers, allocate SDCCHs


to channel 0 of all new TRXs in the current cell, channel 1, and so on.

NOTE:

The rules do not take effect when the cell to which a TRX belongs is a double timeslot extension
cell.
The number of available channels is the difference between the sum of Number of PDCH and
Number of SDCCH specified in the data file for RF adjustment and the number of configured
channels of the cell to which new TRXs belong.

Step 8 Click Next. The CME starts the import.


If...

Then...

The import is
successful

Click Finish.

The import fails

1. You can view the error report. You can also double-click an error message in the error list
area. The CME opens the imported file and locates the error data cell in the file.
2. Modify error data based on the error message.
3. After the modification, click Retry to import the file.

7.4.2.2 Adjusting Equipment Data in Co-MPT Scenarios


When the original mode is GSM in co-MPT scenarios, you need to use the summary data file
for batch configuration on the CME. If only the RF-related equipment data (RXU
board/TRX/cell capacity) needs to be adjusted, you can adjust RF data using the summary
data file.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.
Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
----End
For details about how to use the summary data file for batch configuration, see Importing and
Exporting Co-MPT BTS Batch Configuration Data.
Importing and Exporting Co-MPT Base Station Data for Batch Configuration

Export base station data to the summary data file.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

310

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Export Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data
(CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Export
Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to configure data in batches, as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Exporting base station bulk configuration data

Step 2 Select a reconfiguration scenario, RAT of NEs, versions of base stations and base station
controllers, and list of base stations. Then, click Next.

If you select the GSM base station controller and base station data, the implementation
of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Abis interface data of a
single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing and Exporting Abis
Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration.

If you select the UMTS base station controller and base station data, the implementation
of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Iub interface data of a
single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing and Exporting Iub Data
for Batch Reconfiguration.

If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be
reconfigured together.

Step 3 Select Custom MOC, set objects you want to export, and specify a save path for the exported
file.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

311

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

NOTE:
To export data based on the objects contained in a prepared summary data file, perform the following
steps: For details about the export mechanism, see Introduction to the Export Mechanism for
Exporting Data Based On an Existing File.
a.

Select Bulk configuration template.

b.

In Bulk configuration data file, select the prepared file and export configuration data
from the CME based on the MOs in this file.

c.

In Export path, specify a save path for the file that contains the exported data.

Step 4 Click Next. The CME verifies the configuration data to be exported.
If the verification fails, the CME does not export data.
Step 5 After the export is complete, click Finish.

Open the local summary data file and reconfigure data in the summary data file based on planned
data.If parameters to be reconfigured for each base station are the same and numbers of parameter
records are the same, it is convenient to reconfigure them in the MOC-integration view. For detailed
operations, see Editing a Summary Data File for Batch Configuration (MOC-Integration View).
Import the modified summary data file.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Import Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data
(CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Import
Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to import data for batch configuration.
Step 2 Specify the RAT of NEs to be imported, determine whether to import base station controller
data (base station data must be selected), and click Next.
If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be reconfigured
together.
Step 3 Start a wizard based on scenarios.
If...

Then...

You have selected GSM The CME starts the wizard for importing Abis interface data. For detailed operations, see
base station controllers Importing and Exporting Abis Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
and base stations in the
preceding step
You have selected
The CME starts the wizard for importing Iub interface data. For detailed operations, see
UMTS base station
Importing and Exporting Iub Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
controllers and base
stations in the preceding
step
You have selected only
base stations in the
preceding step

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

The CME starts the wizard for importing base station data for batch configuration. The
procedure is as follows:
1. Select the file you want to import and click Next.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

312

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If...

7 Preparing Data

Then...
NOTE:
The CME supports the file import even if the RAT contained in the file is different from the selected
RAT. For example, if GSM is selected but the RAT contained in the file is UMTS or LTE, the file can
still be imported.

2. Select the base stations for which you want to import the file and click Next.
NOTE:
If Best effort is selected, the CME skips the error information and continues the import. When
the import is complete, the CME rolls back only incorrect base station data.

If Best effort is not selected, the CME rolls back all the imported data if the import fails.

3. After the import is complete, click Finish.

If the CME displays a message stating that the operation is successful, configuration
data has been successfully imported.

If the CME displays a message stating that the import failed, base station configuration
data failed to be imported. If this occurs, you have to reconfigure the data based on
the error information.

NOTE:
In the error message list, you can:

Click an error message to view the details at the bottom of the wizard.

Double-click an error message to switch to the corresponding location in the imported file. Then,
reconfigure the data based on the error information.

For details about how to adjust RF data using the summary data file, see Importing and
Exporting Co-MPT BTS RF Adjustment Data (standalone function).
Importing and Exporting Co-MPT Base Station Data for RF Adjustment

Export the summary data file for RF adjustment.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the CME, choose SRAN Application > MBTS Application >
Export Data > Export Base Station RF Adjustment Data. A dialog box is
displayed.
Step 2 Set parameters displayed in the dialog box and specify the base stations whose data you want
to export.

Select Co-MPT BTS RF Adjustment from the Scenario drop-down list.

Specify the RATs of the base stations whose data you want to export.

Specify the versions of the base stations and base station controller whose data you
want to export.

Select the base stations whose data you want to export.

You can select base stations in the NE list. You can also click Load to quickly select
base stations defined in the file by importing a file.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

313

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

NOTE:
When selecting base stations in the NE list, you can select base stations and then click Export to
export the selected base stations as a file for future selections.

If the file is unavailable when you select base stations by importing a file, you can click Export to
obtain a file, edit the file, and then click Load to import the file into the CME.

For details about rules for loading the file, see File Rules.

Step 3 Click Next. Then, specify the export mode, summary data file, and export path.
Table 3 Setting an export mode
Export Mode

Operation

Custom MOC: Select objects you

1. Select Custom MOC.

want to export in the wizard


directly and enable the CME to
export data based on the selected
objects.

2. Select objects to be exported.


NOTE:
The CME adds objects that support adjustment by default. You can adjust the objects as
required.

3. Specify a save path for the exported files in Export path.


RF adjustment template: Export

1. Select RF adjustment template.


data based on the objects contained 2. Select the prepared summary data file for adjustment in RF adjustment
in a prepared file.
data file.
3. Specify a save path for the exported files in Export path.
Step 4 Click Next. The CME starts the export.
Step 5 Click Finish.

Import the summary data file for RF adjustment.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the CME, choose SRAN Application > MBTS Application >
Import Data > Import Base Station RF Adjustment Data. A dialog box is
displayed.
Step 2 Select the file you want to import.
Step 3 Click Next, select the base stations for which you want to import the file.
You can select base stations in the NE list. You can also click Load to quickly select base
stations defined in the file by importing a file.
NOTE:
When selecting base stations in the NE list, you can select base stations and then click Export to
export the selected base stations as a file for future selections.

If the file is unavailable when you select base stations by importing a file, you can click Export to
obtain a file, edit the file, and then click Load to import the file into the CME.

For details about rules for loading the file, see File Rules.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

314

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Step 4 Optional: To generate configuration scripts in the wizard, select Export scripts and perform
the following operations:
Select the mode of generating scripts.

a.

Scripts on the controller side:

To save scripts of logical base stations in the same file, select Batch.

To save scripts of logical base stations in separate files by base station, select
One by one.

Scripts on the base station side (only base stations in SRAN10.1 and later support
splitting scripts by RRU chain/ring):
To generate RRU incremental scripts in different files by RRU chain/ring, select Split
scripts by RRU chain. The CME automatically generates common incremental
scripts and RRU chain/ring incremental scripts. For base stations whose RRU
chain/ring fails to be separated, the CME generates scripts that are not separated.
NOTE:
If the common incremental script of the base station depends on the incremental RRU chain/ring script
or if two incremental RRU chain/ring scripts are associated, scripts cannot be separated by RRU
chain/ring.

q.

Specify a save path for scripts.

r.

Set an encryption mode for exported scripts.

No: The exported scripts do not have encryption passwords and no encryption passwords

are required when you loading projects.

Yes: The exported scripts have encryption passwords. When loading projects, you have

to enter encryption passwords by performing the following operations:


NOTE:
If an encrypted password has been set for the exproted script, you cannot check the script on the local
PC. Instead, you have to check it using the script executor.
i.

Select Yes.

ii.

Click Set Password. In the displayed dialog box, enter the encryption password as
required.
The password must contain 6 to 32 characters.

iii.

Click OK.
The exported encrypted script files are in .ecf format.

Step 5 Click Next, set the parameters for GSM service.


Table 4 Setting attributes
Attribute

Description

Cell ID

The CME can automatically allocate IDs to new cells and TRXs.

TRX ID

Automatic allocation rules: After you enter a reference ID in the wizard, the CME
searches for available IDs from the reference ID and allocates them to new cells and

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

315

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Table 4 Setting attributes


Attribute

Description

TRXs. For example, after allocating a reference TRX ID to the first TRX, the CME
generates a new ID by automatically adding 1 to the reference TRX ID and allocates the
new ID to the second TRX. If the generated ID has been used, the CME automatically
adds 1 to the ID until it is available and allocates the ID to the second TRX.
FH Attributes

NOTE:
The
generates
basedunder
on the
in the
datawizard
file for
RF adjustment.
the by
CME
The minimum
IDdata
available
theFH
NEtype
selected
in the
functions
as the startIfvalue
default
on the
CME. in the data file, the CME generates data based on the FH type
FH type
is not
specified

selected
in the
the imported
wizard. data file contains different NEs, the CME searches for available IDs from the
When
preset start value and allocates them.
NOTE:
FH type has the following values: NO_FH, RF_FH, BaseBand_FH(BCCH HOP), and
BaseBand_FH(BCCH NOT HOP), indicating no FH, RF FH, baseband FH (BCCH TRX
involved), and baseband FH (BCCH TRX not involved), respectively.

Channel Rule

The configuration of the FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency band parameter is as follows:

When FH type is NO_FH, the configuration of FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency


band does not take effect.

When FH type is RF_FH, FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency band can be set to In


Different MAGroup or In One MAGroup.

When FH type is BaseBand_FH(BCCH HOP) or BaseBand_FH(BCCH NOT


HOP), FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency band can be set to In Different
MAGroup, In One MAGroup, or EGSM Frequency Not In Any MAGroup.

Set channel allocation rules based on the RF adjustment scenarios.

New Cells Channel Rule: configured when the data file for RF adjustment contains

new cells or you need to re-allocate channels of existing cells. For details about
channel allocation rules, see Channel Allocation Rules.
NOTE:
In the data file for RF adjustment, if Cell Extension Type is set to Double Timeslot
Extension Cell, the configuration of Channel Rule does not take effect. The CME
automatically allocates timeslots 0 and 2 on the BCCH TRX to the BCCH and SDCCH, respectively,
and allocates all the other timeslots in the cell to TCHs.

Existed Cells Channel Rule: configured when the data file for RF adjustment

contains only new TRXs or you need to add TRXs in an existing cell.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

When Channel Allocation Rule 0 for TRXs is selected, the CME re-allocates
all channels of the imported cells based on the channel allocation rule specified
by New Cells Channel Rule.

When Channel Allocation Rule 1 for TRXs is selected, the CME allocates
only channels of new TRXs based on the following rules:
1.

Rank TRXs by TRX No. in ascending order.

2.

Allocate PDCCHs: PDCCHs are allocated to channels 6, 5, 7, 4, 3, 2, 1, and 0


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

316

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Table 4 Setting attributes


Attribute

Description
of a TRX in sequence.
3.

Allocate SDCCHs: Based on the sequence of TRX numbers, allocate SDCCHs


to channel 0 of all new TRXs in the current cell, channel 1, and so on.

NOTE:
The rules do not take effect when the cell to which a TRX belongs is a double timeslot extension
cell.

The number of available channels is the difference between the sum of Number of PDCH and
Number of SDCCH specified in the data file for RF adjustment and the number of configured
channels of the cell to which new TRXs belong.

Step 6 Click Next, when the import is complete, click Finish.

If the CME displays a message stating that the operation is successful, configuration data
has been successfully imported.

If the CME displays a message stating that the import failed, base station configuration
data failed to be imported. If this occurs, you have to reconfigure the data based on the
error information.
NOTE:
In the error message list, you can:

Click an error message to view the details at the bottom of the wizard.

Double-click an error message to switch to the corresponding location in the imported file. Then,
reconfigure the data based on the error information.

Follow-up Procedure
If you select Split scripts by RRU chain in the wizard of importing RF adjustment data,
you need to activate common incremental scripts of a single base station during script
activation and then activate RRU chain/ring incremental scripts in sequence by task. The
CME does not allow you to activate multiple scripts of a base station simultaneously. After
activating a script, ensure that the script takes effect on the base station side and the
base station is connected before activating the next script.

7.4.3 Preparing Transmission Data


This section describes how to adjust transmission data in co-MPT and separate-MPT
scenarios when the original mode is GSM. The transmission data to be adjusted includes the
following MOs: IP, IPPATH, SCTPLINK, CPBEAR, and IPRT.

7.4.3.1 Adjusting GBTS Data


When the GBTS works as the original mode, use the following functions on the CME to
adjust GBTS data: Export GBTS data, Import the Abis interface data that has been
reconfigured in batches, and Reparent IP GBTS within BSC.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the template files based on the mode transition planning results.
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

317

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
----End
For the method of adjusting data of a GBTS using TDM transmission, perform the following
steps:
1. Export GBTS data. For details, see the exporting function in section
Importing and Exporting GBTS Data (Summary)

Export GBTS data.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose GSM Application > Export Data
> Export GBTS Summary Data (CME client mode) or CME > GSM Application
> Export Data > Export GBTS Summary Data (U2000 client mode). A dialog box
is displayed for you to select GBTSs.
Step 2 Select a base station controller version from the NE version drop-down list.
Step 3 Click Add. Three GBTS selection modes are available. Select a mode as required. For details
about the modes, see Object Selection Modes.
Step 4 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for you to specify a save path.
NOTE:
If manual timeslots are configured in selected GBTSs, a dialog box is displayed to ask whether to
continue and provide GBTSs for which manual timeslots are configured.

Click Yes. A dialog box is displayed for you to specify a save path.

Click No to return to the dialog box for selecting GBTSs.

Step 5 Select a summary data file and specify a save path.


The CME uses the selected summary data file as a template for the exported GBTS
configuration data and exports the file to the specified path.
Step 6 Click Next. The CME starts to export the data.
Step 7 When the export is successful, click Finish.
NOTE:
After the file is exported, you can click the path link in the dialog box to navigate to the folder where the
exported file is located.

Import GBTS data.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

318

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

NOTE:
The CME provides the Export scripts in separate files based on GBTSs option for
you to export scripts. You can export scripts to separate files based on GBTSs and export shared
objects to a file.

If data in the current planned data area has been reconfigured, and you want to export scripts using
the Export scripts in separate files based on GBTSs option, you have to export the
scripts for reconfiguring the data first.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose GSM Application > Import Data
> Import GBTS Summary Data (CME client mode) or CME > GSM Application
> Import Data > Import GBTS Summary Data (U2000 client mode). A dialog box
is displayed for you to select a summary data file.
Step 2 In the NE version and NE drop-down lists, select the base station controller to which base
stations to be created belong and its version.
Step 3 Select the summary data file you want to import.
If redundant device objects exist after the data for creating base stations in the summary data
file and data in the template are combined, after Delete redundant RF equipment data is
selected, the CME automatically deletes the device objects and subobjects that have not been
referenced by the cell.
Step 4 Click Next and select base stations you want to create.
You can select base stations in the NE list. You can also click Load to quickly select base
stations defined in the file by importing a file.
NOTE:
When selecting base stations in the NE list, you can select base stations and then click Export to
export the selected base stations as a file for future selections.

If the file is unavailable when you select base stations by importing a file, you can click Export to
obtain a file, edit the file, and then click Load to import the file into the CME.

For details about rules for loading the file, see File Rules.

Step 5 Optional: If you need to export scripts to separate files based on GBTSs, select Export
scripts in separate files based on GBTSs, and perform the following operations:

a.

Specify a save path for scripts.

s.

Set an encryption mode for exported scripts.

No: The exported scripts do not have encryption passwords and no encryption passwords

are required when you loading projects.

Yes: The exported scripts have encryption passwords. When loading projects, you have

to enter encryption passwords by performing the following operations:


NOTE:
If an encrypted password has been set for the exproted script, you cannot check the script on the local
PC. Instead, you have to check it using the script executor.
i.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Select Yes.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

319

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Click Set Password. In the displayed dialog box, enter the encryption password as
required.

ii.

The password must contain 6 to 32 characters.


Click OK.

iii.

The exported encrypted script files are in .ecf format.

Optional: If you need to activate scripts immediately after the wizard is complete,
select Launch the script executor if the task is successful.

t.

Step 6 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for you to set attributes.
Step 7 Set BTS ID, Cell ID, and TRX ID based on the planned data.
NOTE:
The minimum ID available under the NE selected in the wizard functions as the start value by
default on the CME.

When the imported data file contains different NEs, the CME searches for available IDs from the
preset start value and allocates them.

Step 8 (Optional) Click Advanced. The advanced settings dialog box is displayed.
On the FH Attributes tab page, set the FH type based on the planned data
and determine whether to use the FH for GSM bands differentiated by the
P-GSM band and E-GSM band

a.

NOTE:

FH type has the following values: NO_FH, RF_FH, BaseBand_FH(BCCH HOP), and
BaseBand_FH(BCCH NOT HOP), indicating no FH, RF FH, baseband FH (BCCH TRX
involved), and baseband FH (BCCH TRX not involved), respectively.

The configuration of the FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency band parameter is as follows:

When FH type is NO_FH, the configuration of FH in PGSM/EGSM


frequency band does not take effect.

When FH type is RF_FH, FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency band can be set to


In Different MAGroup or In One MAGroup.

When FH type is BaseBand_FH(BCCH HOP) or BaseBand_FH(BCCH


NOT HOP), FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency band can be set to In Different
MAGroup, In One MAGroup, or EGSM Frequency Not In Any
MAGroup.

u.

On the Channel Rule tab page, set the channel allocation rule for cells.

v.

Click OK.

Step 9 Click Next. The CME starts the import.


If...

Then...

The import is
successful

Click Finish.

The import fails

1. You can view the error report. You can also double-click an error message in the error list
area. The CME opens the imported file and locates the error data cell in the file.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

320

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If...

7 Preparing Data

Then...
2. Modify error data based on the error message.
3. After the modification, click Retry to import the file.

"Importing and Exporting GBTS Data (Summary)."


2. Import the Abis interface data that has been reconfigured in batches. For details, see the
importing function in section
Importing and Exporting Abis Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration

Export the Abis interface data for batch reconfiguration.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose GSM Application > Export Data
> Export Abis Bulk Configuration Data (CME client mode) or CME > GSM
Application > Export Data > Export Abis Bulk Configuration Data (U2000
client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to export the data you want to
reconfigure in batches.
Step 2 Select the base station controller version, base station version, and related base station, and
click Next.
You can select base stations in the NE list. You can also click Load to quickly select base
stations defined in the file by importing a file.
NOTE:

When selecting base stations in the NE list, you can select base stations and then click Export to
export the selected base stations as a file for future selections.
If the file is unavailable when you select base stations by importing a file, you can click Export to
obtain a file, edit the file, and then click Load to import the file into the CME.

For details about rules for loading the file, see File Rules.

Step 3 Perform operations based on application scenarios.


If you need to...

Then...

Select objects you want to export in the wizard directly 1. Select Custom MOC.
and enable the CME to export data based on the selected 2. Select objects you want to export and specify a save
objects.
path for the exported file.
NOTE:
This mode does not apply to GBTSs.

Export data based on the objects contained in a prepared 1. Select Bulk configuration template.
file.
2. In Bulk configuration data file, select the
prepared file and export configuration data from the
CME based on the MOs in this file.
3. In Export path, specify a save path for the file that
contains the exported data.
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

321

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Step 4 Click Next. The CME verifies the configuration data to be exported.
If the verification fails, the CME does not export data.
Step 5 After the export is complete, click Finish.

Import the Abis interface data that has been reconfigured in batches.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose GSM Application > Import Data
> Import Abis Bulk Configuration Data (CME client mode) or CME > GSM
Application > Import Data > Import Abis Bulk Configuration Data (U2000
client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to import the Abis data that has been
reconfigured in batches.
Step 2 Perform operations as required.
If you need to...

Then...

Import the file only (without


generating a script immediately
when the export is successful)

Select the file you want to import and click Next. The CME starts to import the
file.

Generate a script file


immediately when the import is
successful

1. Select the file you want to import and select Export script by wizard.
2. Click Next.
3. Set the script generation information.

NOTE:

a.

This mode does not apply to GBTSs.

Select Batch or One by one to generate all logical base station


scripts in one script file or generate scripts by base station,
respectively.

NOTE:
When multiple base stations share MOs at the bottom link layer, such as MOs ETHIP,
PPPLNK, and MPGRP, if the script generation mode is set to One by one, primary
information (information about the subrack and slot numbers of an interface board) about
these MOs cannot be modified if the related IP addresses are not changed. Otherwise, data
may conflict after being imported into the CME.

b.

(Optional) If One by one is selected, click Up or Down to


adjust the sequence for running base station scripts.

c.

Specify a save path for the script file.

d. (Optional) Set an encryption mode for exported scripts.


No: The exported scripts do not have encryption passwords and no encryption
passwords are required when you loading projects.

Yes: The exported scripts have encryption passwords. When loading projects,
you have to enter encryption passwords by performing the following operations:

NOTE:
If an encrypted password has been set for the exproted script, you cannot check the script
on the local PC. Instead, you have to check it using the script executor.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

1.

Select Yes.

2.

Click Set Password. In the displayed dialog box, enter the


encryption password as required.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

322

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If you need to...

7 Preparing Data

Then...
The password must contain 6 to 32 characters.
3.

Click OK.
The exported encrypted script files are in .ecf format.
e.

(Optional) To enable the CME to automatically start the script


executor after a script is generated successfully in the wizard,
select Launch the script executor if the task is successful.

f.

Click Next. The CME starts to import the data.

Step 3 View the import report and click Finish.


"Importing and Exporting Abis Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration."
For the method of adjusting data of a GBTS using IP transmission, see Reparenting IP GBTS
within BSC.
Preparing Reparenting Scripts

Step 1 On the main menu of the planned data area, choose CME > GSM Application >
Reparent IP GBTS within BSC (U2000 client mode) or GSM Application >
Reparent IP GBTS within BSC (CME client mode). A dialog box is displayed for
you to configure reparenting information.
Step 2 Clear Export File.
Step 3 Click Next. In the displayed dialog box, select the reparenting data planning file you want to
import.
NOTICE:
You are advised to import a reparenting data planning file that is edited in and exported from CMEs of
the same version.

Step 4 Click Next. The CME verifies the reparenting data planning file and displays the verification
result.

If the verification is successful, a message is displayed stating that the verification is


successful.

If the verification fails, the CME displays a dialog box showing the parameters whose
values are incorrectly configured in the file. You can click Retry to edit the file again.

Step 5 Click Finish to exit the wizard.


Step 6 Export the reparenting scripts. For detailed operations, see Exporting Incremental Scripts
from a Planned Data Area.
The CME automatically generates reparenting rollback scripts when exporting reparenting
scripts.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

323

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

7.4.3.2 Adjusting Co-MPT Data


In co-MPT scenarios where the original mode is GSM, if only the base station data needs to
be adjusted, use the summary data file for batch configuration (GSM application) on the CME
to configure transmission data. If the data of the base station and controller needs to be
adjusted together, use the Abis batch adjustment data.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.
Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
----End
For details about how to use the summary data file for batch configuration (GSM application),
see Importing and Exporting Co-MPT BTS Batch Configuration Data.
Importing and Exporting Co-MPT Base Station Data for Batch Configuration

Export base station data to the summary data file.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Export Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data
(CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Export
Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to configure data in batches, as shown in Figure 1.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

324

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Figure 1 Exporting base station bulk configuration data

Step 2 Select a reconfiguration scenario, RAT of NEs, versions of base stations and base station
controllers, and list of base stations. Then, click Next.

If you select the GSM base station controller and base station data, the implementation
of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Abis interface data of a
single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing and Exporting Abis
Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration.

If you select the UMTS base station controller and base station data, the implementation
of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Iub interface data of a
single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing and Exporting Iub Data
for Batch Reconfiguration.

If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be
reconfigured together.

Step 3 Select Custom MOC, set objects you want to export, and specify a save path for the exported
file.
NOTE:
To export data based on the objects contained in a prepared summary data file, perform the following
steps: For details about the export mechanism, see Introduction to the Export Mechanism for
Exporting Data Based On an Existing File.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

325

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

a.

Select Bulk configuration template.

b.

In Bulk configuration data file, select the prepared file and export configuration data
from the CME based on the MOs in this file.

c.

In Export path, specify a save path for the file that contains the exported data.

Step 4 Click Next. The CME verifies the configuration data to be exported.
If the verification fails, the CME does not export data.
Step 5 After the export is complete, click Finish.

Open the local summary data file and reconfigure data in the summary data file based on planned
data.If parameters to be reconfigured for each base station are the same and numbers of parameter
records are the same, it is convenient to reconfigure them in the MOC-integration view. For detailed
operations, see Editing a Summary Data File for Batch Configuration (MOC-Integration View).
Import the modified summary data file.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Import Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data
(CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Import
Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to import data for batch configuration.
Step 2 Specify the RAT of NEs to be imported, determine whether to import base station controller
data (base station data must be selected), and click Next.
If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be reconfigured
together.
Step 3 Start a wizard based on scenarios.
If...

Then...

You have selected GSM The CME starts the wizard for importing Abis interface data. For detailed operations, see
base station controllers Importing and Exporting Abis Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
and base stations in the
preceding step
You have selected
The CME starts the wizard for importing Iub interface data. For detailed operations, see
UMTS base station
Importing and Exporting Iub Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
controllers and base
stations in the preceding
step
You have selected only
base stations in the
preceding step

The CME starts the wizard for importing base station data for batch configuration. The
procedure is as follows:
1. Select the file you want to import and click Next.
NOTE:
The CME supports the file import even if the RAT contained in the file is different from the selected
RAT. For example, if GSM is selected but the RAT contained in the file is UMTS or LTE, the file can
still be imported.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

326

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If...

7 Preparing Data

Then...
2. Select the base stations for which you want to import the file and click Next.
NOTE:
If Best effort is selected, the CME skips the error information and continues the import. When
the import is complete, the CME rolls back only incorrect base station data.

If Best effort is not selected, the CME rolls back all the imported data if the import fails.

3. After the import is complete, click Finish.

If the CME displays a message stating that the operation is successful, configuration
data has been successfully imported.

If the CME displays a message stating that the import failed, base station configuration
data failed to be imported. If this occurs, you have to reconfigure the data based on
the error information.

NOTE:
In the error message list, you can:

Click an error message to view the details at the bottom of the wizard.

Double-click an error message to switch to the corresponding location in the imported file. Then,
reconfigure the data based on the error information.

For details about how to use the Abis batch adjustment data, see Importing and Exporting
Abis Batch Adjustment Data.
Importing and Exporting Abis Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration

Export the Abis interface data for batch reconfiguration.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose GSM Application > Export Data
> Export Abis Bulk Configuration Data (CME client mode) or CME > GSM
Application > Export Data > Export Abis Bulk Configuration Data (U2000
client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to export the data you want to
reconfigure in batches.
Step 2 Select the base station controller version, base station version, and related base station, and
click Next.
You can select base stations in the NE list. You can also click Load to quickly select base
stations defined in the file by importing a file.
NOTE:

When selecting base stations in the NE list, you can select base stations and then click Export to
export the selected base stations as a file for future selections.
If the file is unavailable when you select base stations by importing a file, you can click Export to
obtain a file, edit the file, and then click Load to import the file into the CME.

For details about rules for loading the file, see File Rules.

Step 3 Perform operations based on application scenarios.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

327

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

If you need to...

Then...

Select objects you want to export in the wizard directly 1. Select Custom MOC.
and enable the CME to export data based on the selected 2. Select objects you want to export and specify a save
objects.
path for the exported file.
NOTE:
This mode does not apply to GBTSs.

Export data based on the objects contained in a prepared 1. Select Bulk configuration template.
file.
2. In Bulk configuration data file, select the
prepared file and export configuration data from the
CME based on the MOs in this file.
3. In Export path, specify a save path for the file that
contains the exported data.
Step 4 Click Next. The CME verifies the configuration data to be exported.
If the verification fails, the CME does not export data.
Step 5 After the export is complete, click Finish.

Import the Abis interface data that has been reconfigured in batches.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose GSM Application > Import Data
> Import Abis Bulk Configuration Data (CME client mode) or CME > GSM
Application > Import Data > Import Abis Bulk Configuration Data (U2000
client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to import the Abis data that has been
reconfigured in batches.
Step 2 Perform operations as required.
If you need to...

Then...

Import the file only (without


generating a script immediately
when the export is successful)

Select the file you want to import and click Next. The CME starts to import the
file.

Generate a script file


immediately when the import is
successful

1. Select the file you want to import and select Export script by wizard.
2. Click Next.
3. Set the script generation information.

NOTE:

a.

This mode does not apply to GBTSs.

Select Batch or One by one to generate all logical base station


scripts in one script file or generate scripts by base station,
respectively.

NOTE:
When multiple base stations share MOs at the bottom link layer, such as MOs ETHIP,
PPPLNK, and MPGRP, if the script generation mode is set to One by one, primary
information (information about the subrack and slot numbers of an interface board) about
these MOs cannot be modified if the related IP addresses are not changed. Otherwise, data

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

328

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If you need to...

7 Preparing Data

Then...
may conflict after being imported into the CME.

b.

(Optional) If One by one is selected, click Up or Down to


adjust the sequence for running base station scripts.

c.

Specify a save path for the script file.

d.

(Optional) Set an encryption mode for exported scripts.

No: The exported scripts do not have encryption passwords and no encryption
passwords are required when you loading projects.

Yes: The exported scripts have encryption passwords. When loading projects, you
have to enter encryption passwords by performing the following operations:

NOTE:
If an encrypted password has been set for the exproted script, you cannot check the script
on the local PC. Instead, you have to check it using the script executor.

1.

Select Yes.

2.

Click Set Password. In the displayed dialog box, enter the


encryption password as required.
The password must contain 6 to 32 characters.

3.

Click OK.
The exported encrypted script files are in .ecf format.
e.

(Optional) To enable the CME to automatically start the script


executor after a script is generated successfully in the wizard,
select Launch the script executor if the task is successful.

f.

Click Next. The CME starts to import the data.

Step 3 View the import report and click Finish.

7.4.4 Preparing Radio Data


This section describes how to adjust radio data in co-MPT and separate-MPT scenarios when
the original mode is GSM. The radio data to be adjusted includes the MOs related to the cell,
TRX, and sector.

7.4.4.1 Adjusting GBTS Data


When the original mode is GSM where the GBTS is used, you need to use the data file for
RNP and inter-BSC reparenting based on the TDM and IP on the CME to configure cells and
neighbor relationships and cell algorithm parameters, respectively.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.
Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
----End

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

329

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

The detailed operation is as follows:


For details about the data file for RNP, see Importing and Exporting Radio Plan Data.
Importing and Exporting Planned Radio Data

Export the planned radio data.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose GSM Application > Export Data
> Export Radio Network Planning Data (CME client mode) or CME > GSM
Application > Export Data > Export Radio Network Planning Data (U2000
client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to select NEs.
Step 2 Select the base station controller and version of the NE to which the cells whose neighboring
and external cell data you need to export belong.
You can click
Objects in Batches.

to load common objects in batches. For details, see Loading Common

Step 3 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for you to select export options.
Step 4 Select one or more data types as required.

Select one or more external cell types in the External Cell Type area.

Set the neighboring cell data that you need to export in the Neighboring Relationship
Type area.
a.

Select one or more neighbor relationship types.

w.

Click Add. Three cell selection modes are available. Select cells in any mode based
on site requirements. For details about the modes, see Object Selection Modes.

NOTE:
To configure two cells under different base station controllers as neighboring cells, you need to export
data of external cells and neighboring cells and add the corresponding external cells to the exported file.
Otherwise, the neighbor relationships fail to be configured.

Step 5 Click Next to specify a file format (TXT, XLS, or XLSM) and a save path.

XLS and XLSM files contain all the configuration objects. Each configuration object
corresponds to a sheet.
Sheet names must not be changed. Otherwise, the CME fails to process data in the file
during the import.

The TXT file contains only the selected configuration objects. Each configuration object
corresponds to a TXT file.
The TXT file name must not be changed. Otherwise, the CME fails to process data in the
file during the import.

If the data to be exported exceeds 65,535 rows, save the data as a TXT or an XLSM file.

Step 6 Click Next. The CME exports neighbor relationship and external cell data.
Step 7 When the export is successful, click Finish.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

330

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

NOTE:
After the file is exported, you can click the path link in the dialog box to navigate to the folder where the
exported file is located.

Import the planned radio data.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose GSM Application > Import Data
> Import Radio Network Planning Data (CME client mode) or CME > GSM
Application > Import Data > Import Radio Network Planning Data (U2000
client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to select files.
Step 2 Select a base station controller version from the NE version drop-down list.
Step 3 Select the file to be imported in TXT, XLS, or XLSM format.
Step 4 Click Add File to add the modified radio network data planning file.
Step 5 Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for you to select an import mode.
Step 6 Select the type of the data to be imported and an import mode as required. For details, see
Table 2.
Table 2 Description of import modes
Import Mode

Whether
the
Object
Data
Exists on
the CME

Whether
Data Result on the CME After File Import
the Object
Data
Exists in
the File

Append

Yes

Yes

The CME overwrites the existing data with the data in the
file.

No

Yes

For the external cell data, the CME adds the data in the
file.

The CME processes neighbor relationships in the


following methods:

If the external cells related to the neighbor


relationships to be imported have been configured
on the CME, the CME adds the neighboring cell
data in the file.

If the external cells related to the neighbor


relationships to be imported have not been
configured on the CME and the source cell
cannot be found, the CME does not process the
data.

If the local cell related to the neighbor


relationships to be imported does not exist on the
CME, the CME does not process the data.

NOTE:

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

331

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Table 2 Description of import modes


Import Mode

Whether
the
Object
Data
Exists on
the CME

Whether
Data Result on the CME After File Import
the Object
Data
Exists in
the File

BIDIRECTION in the file takes effect only in the Append


mode.

If BIDIRECTION is set to Yes and inverse neighboring cells


do not exist, the CME processes data in the following ways:

Parameter values for the inverse neighboring cells come


from the source cell.

If no external cell exists, the CME also automatically


configures external cells and uses the default NE values
for the parameters of the external cells.

If any external cells exist and the parameter


configurations of the external cells are different from
those of the source cell, the CME does not reconfigure
external cell parameters and obtains the parameter
values of neighboring cells from the source cell.

Yes

No

No data in the CME changes.

Yes

Yes

NOTE:
Neighbor
relationships
are No
updated on a cell
basis.

The CME overwrites the existing data with the data in the
file.

Yes

The CME adds the data in the file.

No

The CME deletes the existing data.

Yes

Yes

The CME deletes the existing data.

No

Yes

No data in the CME changes.

Yes

No

No data in the CME changes.

Update

External cells are Yes


updated on a base
station
controller
basis.

Delete

Step 7 Click Next. The CME starts to import and verify the data.
If...

Then...

The verification fails

1. Modify data according to the displayed verification error information.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

If the CME displays the error information link, click the link and reconfigure the

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

332

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If...

7 Preparing Data

Then...
related data.

If the CME displays the error information description, locate the error manually
based on the description and reconfigure the related data.

2. Click Retry to import the reconfigured data.


The verification succeeds

Click Finish to exit.

NOTE:
When importing the planned radio data, the CME automatically shields the invalid parameters in the file
without affecting the import of the other data. For example, the CME automatically shields the neighbor
relationships that fail to be imported because the related cells do not exist.

For details about inter-BSC reparenting based on the TDM and IP, see Importing and
Exporting Radio Network Optimization Data.
Importing and Exporting Radio Network Optimization Data

Export radio network optimization data

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose GSM Application > Export Data
> Export *** (CME client mode) or CME > GSM Application > Export Data >
Export *** (U2000 client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to select cells.

NOTE:
Export *** can be Export Cell Parameter Data, Export Cell Frequency Data, and
Export Neighboring Cell BA Data.

Step 2 Select cells whose data you want to export.


If you need to...

Then...

Export data of all cells under an


NE

1. Choose NE from the Selected by drop-down list.


2. Select a base station controller version from the NE version drop-down
list.
3. Select a base station controller whose cell data you want to export.
You can click
to load common objects in batches. For details, see
Loading Common Objects in Batches.

Export data of certain cells under 1. Choose Cell from the Selected by drop-down list.
an NE
2. Select a base station controller version from the NE version drop-down
list.
3. Click Add. Three modes for selecting cells are displayed.
Select a mode as required. For details about the modes, see Object

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

333

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If you need to...

7 Preparing Data

Then...
Selection Modes.

NOTE:
When you choose Export Cell Frequency Data, to filter other frequencies than those used by the
TRXs and FH groups, select Remove redundant frequencies.

Step 3 (Optional and required when you choose Export Cell Parameter Data) Click Next. Select
parameters you want to export, and click

NOTE:

You can click Save To File in the lower part of the dialog box to save the selected objects as a
file. You can directly load the file if you need to export these objects again.
You can click Load From File in the lower part of the dialog box to load the exported file that
contains the selected parameters. In this way, you do not need to manually select parameters.

Step 4 Click Next, and perform related operations based on the type of the data and file to be
exported.
Data Type File
Type
Export Cell
Parameter
Data

Operations

Negotiated 1. Select the file to be exported in TXT, XLS, or XLSM format.


data file
XLS and XLSM files contain all the configuration objects. Each configuration
object corresponds to a sheet.
Sheet names must not be changed. Otherwise, the CME fails to process data in the
file during the import.

The TXT file contains only the selected configuration objects. Each configuration
object corresponds to a TXT file.
The TXT file name must not be changed. Otherwise, the CME fails to process data
in the file during the import.

If the data to be exported exceeds 65,535 rows, save the data as a TXT or an XLSM
file.

2. Specify a save path for the file to be exported.


Negotiated 1. Select the file to be exported in TXT, XLS, or XLSM format.
Export
Neighboring data file
XLS and XLSM files contain all the configuration objects. Each configuration
Cell BA Data
object corresponds to a sheet.
Sheet names must not be changed. Otherwise, the CME fails to process data in the
file during the import.

The TXT file contain all the configuration objects. Each configuration object
corresponds to a TXT file. If a configuration object is empty, no TXT file is
generated for it.
The TXT file name must not be changed. Otherwise, the CME fails to process data
in the file during the import.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

If the data to be exported exceeds 65,535 rows, save the data as a TXT or an XLSM
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

334

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Data Type File


Type

7 Preparing Data

Operations

file.
2. Specify a save path for the file to be exported.
Export Cell
Frequency
Data

Negotiated 1. Set the export type to Negotiated Data.


data file
2. Select the file to be exported in TXT, XLS, or XLSM format.

XLS and XLSM files contain all the configuration objects. Each configuration
object corresponds to a sheet.
Sheet names must not be changed. Otherwise, the CME fails to process data in the
file during the import.

The TXT file contain all the configuration objects. Each configuration object
corresponds to a TXT file. If a configuration object is empty, no TXT file is
generated for it.
The TXT file name must not be changed. Otherwise, the CME fails to process data
in the file during the import.

If the data to be exported exceeds 65,535 rows, save the data as a TXT or an XLSM
file.

3. Specify a save path for the file to be exported.


Summary
data file

1. Set the export type to Summary Data.


2. Select the path of the summary data file.
You can obtain the default summary data file Summary Data File-2G Cell
Frequency Data.xls from U2000 client installation
path\client\client\Data\BSC
version\Model\summarytemplates\GSM\language.
3. Select a file format, XLS or XLSM.
If the data to be exported exceeds 65,535 rows, save the data as an XLSM file.
4. Specify a save path for the file to be exported.

Step 5 Click Next. The CME starts to export the data.


Step 6 When the export is successful, click Finish.
NOTE:
After the file is exported, you can click the path link in the dialog box to navigate to the folder where the
exported file is located.

Import radio network optimization data.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose GSM Application > Import Data
> Import *** (CME client mode) or CME > GSM Application > Import Data >
Import *** (U2000 client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to select files.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

335

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

NOTE:
Import *** can be Import Cell Parameter Data, Import Cell Frequency Data, and
Import Neighboring Cell BA Data.

Step 2 Select a base station controller version from the NE version drop-down list.
NOTE:
If the file format of Import Cell Frequency Data is XLS or XLSM, no NE version needs to be
specified.

Step 3 Select the file to be imported in TXT, XLS, or XLSM format.


Step 4 Click Add File to add the modified files.
NOTE:
If the controller version is not BSC6000 V901R013 and the file format of Import Cell Frequency
Data is XLS or XLSM, you can select files of different controller versions to import at a time.

Step 5 Click Next, and perform related operations based on the type of the data to be imported.
Data Type

Operations

Import
Cell Parameter Data

Import
Cell Frequency Data

The CME starts to import and verify the data.

Import
1. Select either of the following modes as required:
Neighboring
Append: adds or modifies neighboring cell BA data. The CME overwrites
Cell BA Data

the existing neighboring cell BA data with the data in the imported file.

Update: updates neighboring cell BA data. The CME updates the existing
neighboring cell BA data based on the data in the imported file.

2. Click Next. The CME starts to import and verify the data.
Step 6 Perform related operations based on the verification result.
If...

Then...

The verification fails

1. Modify data according to the displayed verification error information.

If the CME displays the error information link, click the link and reconfigure the
related data.

If the CME displays the error information description, locate the error manually
based on the description and reconfigure the related data.

2. Click Retry to import the reconfigured data.


The verification succeeds

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Click Finish to exit.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

336

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

7.4.4.2 Adjusting Co-MPT Data


When the original mode is GSM in co-MPT scenarios, you need to use the summary data file
for batch configuration on the CME to configure radio data.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.
Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
----End
For details, see Importing and Exporting Co-MPT BTS Batch Configuration Data.
Importing and Exporting Co-MPT Base Station Data for Batch Configuration

Export base station data to the summary data file.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Export Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data
(CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Export
Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to configure data in batches, as shown in Figure 1.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

337

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Figure 1 Exporting base station bulk configuration data

Step 2 Select a reconfiguration scenario, RAT of NEs, versions of base stations and base station
controllers, and list of base stations. Then, click Next.

If you select the GSM base station controller and base station data, the
implementation of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Abis
interface data of a single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing
and Exporting Abis Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration.

If you select the UMTS base station controller and base station data, the
implementation of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Iub
interface data of a single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing
and Exporting Iub Data for Batch Reconfiguration.

If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be
reconfigured together.

Step 3 Select Custom MOC, set objects you want to export, and specify a save path for the exported
file.
NOTE:
To export data based on the objects contained in a prepared summary data file, perform the following
steps: For details about the export mechanism, see Introduction to the Export Mechanism for
Exporting Data Based On an Existing File.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

338

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

a.

Select Bulk configuration template.

b.

In Bulk configuration data file, select the prepared file and export configuration data
from the CME based on the MOs in this file.

c.

In Export path, specify a save path for the file that contains the exported data.

Step 4 Click Next. The CME verifies the configuration data to be exported.
If the verification fails, the CME does not export data.
Step 5 After the export is complete, click Finish.

Open the local summary data file and reconfigure data in the summary data file based on planned
data.If parameters to be reconfigured for each base station are the same and numbers of parameter
records are the same, it is convenient to reconfigure them in the MOC-integration view. For detailed
operations, see Editing a Summary Data File for Batch Configuration (MOC-Integration View).
Import the modified summary data file.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Import Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data
(CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Import
Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to import data for batch configuration.
Step 2 Specify the RAT of NEs to be imported, determine whether to import base station controller
data (base station data must be selected), and click Next.
If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be reconfigured
together.
Step 3 Start a wizard based on scenarios.
If...

Then...

You have selected GSM The CME starts the wizard for importing Abis interface data. For detailed operations, see
base station controllers Importing and Exporting Abis Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
and base stations in the
preceding step
You have selected
The CME starts the wizard for importing Iub interface data. For detailed operations, see
UMTS base station
Importing and Exporting Iub Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
controllers and base
stations in the preceding
step
You have selected only
base stations in the
preceding step

The CME starts the wizard for importing base station data for batch configuration. The
procedure is as follows:
1. Select the file you want to import and click Next.
NOTE:
The CME supports the file import even if the RAT contained in the file is different from the selected
RAT. For example, if GSM is selected but the RAT contained in the file is UMTS or LTE, the file can
still be imported.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

339

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If...

7 Preparing Data

Then...
2. Select the base stations for which you want to import the file and click Next.
NOTE:
If Best effort is selected, the CME skips the error information and continues the import. When
the import is complete, the CME rolls back only incorrect base station data.

If Best effort is not selected, the CME rolls back all the imported data if the import fails.

3. After the import is complete, click Finish.

If the CME displays a message stating that the operation is successful, configuration
data has been successfully imported.

If the CME displays a message stating that the import failed, base station configuration
data failed to be imported. If this occurs, you have to reconfigure the data based on
the error information.

NOTE:
In the error message list, you can:

Click an error message to view the details at the bottom of the wizard.

Double-click an error message to switch to the corresponding location in the imported file. Then,
reconfigure the data based on the error information.

7.4.5 Preparing Transmission, Equipment, and Radio


Adjustment Data (Co-MPT)
This section describes how to configure data where GSM works as a new mode. All the data
is configured using the summary data file for introducing RATs (SRAN application) on the
CME. The configuration procedure is as follows:
The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.
Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
----End
For the details, see Introducing RATs to Co-MPT Base Stations in Batches.
Introducing RATs to Co-MPT Base Stations in Batches

Before exporting data based on a customized summary data file, use the function of customizing a
summary data file to customize a summary data file for RAT introduction. For details about how to
customize a summary data file, see Manually Customizing a Summary Data File.
In RAT introduction scenarios, you need to customize application maintenance mode parameters,
including AT and APPMNTMODE, of each RAT to a summary data file. When setting parameter values,
you are advised to set APPMNTMODE of the RAT to be introduced to TESTING.

Export co-MPT base station data to the summary data file for introducing RATs.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

340

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Export Data > Export Base Station Multimode Expansion
Data (CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application >
Export Data > Export Base Station Multimode Expansion Data (U2000
client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to export co-MPT base station data.
Step 2 Select a scenario, RAT to be introduced to the co-MPT base station (for example, select LTE
for a co-MPT (GU) base station to be expanded to a co-MPT (GUL) base station), controller
version, base station version, base station to which RATs are to be introduced, and sample
base station, as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Export expansion data

NOTE:
If you need to select base stations in batches by using a file, click Export to obtain an Excel file, edit
the file, and click Load to import it.

Step 3 Click Next and perform operations based on application scenarios.


Option

Operation

Summary data file: Select this option when a


summary data file has been prepared. Then, the CME
exports base station data based on the configuration
objects in the prepared summary data file.

1. Select Summary data file.


2. Specify save paths for both the prepared summary data
file and the file where base station data is to be
exported.

Custom MOC: Select this option when no summary


1. Select Custom MOC.
data file is prepared. Then, the CME exports base station 2. Select configuration objects of the base stations to be
data based on the configuration objects selected in the
exported and the save path for the file where the base
wizard.
station data is to be exported.
Step 4 Click Next. The CME starts to export the data.
Step 5 After the export is complete, click Finish.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

341

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

NOTE:
After the export is complete, you can click the link in the dialog box to open the exported file.

Configure data in the exported file.

Summary data file, see Editing a Summary Data File (Customization Tool-based).

Custom MOC, see Editing a Summary Data File (MOC Export-based) .

Import the summary data file in which data about RATs to be introduced has been edited into the CME.
Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Import Data > Import Base Station Multimode Expansion
Data (CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application >
Import Data > Import Base Station Multimode Expansion Data (U2000
client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to import the summary data file for
introducing RATs.
Step 2 Click

and select the summary data file to be imported.

Step 3 Click Next and select co-MPT base stations for which you want to expand RATs.
If...

Then...

The imported summary


1. Click Next and select base stations you want to create.
data file contains only data 2. (Optional) Select Best Effort.
about base stations
NOTE:

The imported summary


data file contains data
about both base station
controllers and base
stations

If Best effort is selected, the CME skips the error information and continues the import.
When the import is complete, the CME rolls back only incorrect base station data.

If Best effort is not selected, the CME rolls back all the imported data if the import fails.

1. Click Next and select base stations you want to create.


2. (Optional) Select Best Effort.
NOTE:

If Best effort is selected, the CME skips the error information and continues the import.
When the import is complete, the CME rolls back only incorrect base station data.

If Best effort is not selected, the CME rolls back all the imported data if the import fails.

3. Optional: To generate configuration scripts in a wizard, select Export scripts


and perform the following operations:
a.

Select a mode for generating scripts.

NOTE:

To generate scripts of logical base stations in the same file, select Batch.

To generate scripts of logical base stations in different files by base station, select One by
one.

b.

Specify a save path for scripts.

4. (Optional) Set an encryption mode for exported scripts.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

No: The exported scripts do not have encryption passwords and no encryption
passwords are required when you loading projects.

Yes: The exported scripts have encryption passwords. When loading projects, you
have to enter encryption passwords by performing the following operations:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

342

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If...

7 Preparing Data

Then...
NOTE:
If an encrypted password has been set for the exproted script, you cannot check the script on the
local PC. Instead, you have to check it using the script executor.

1.

Select Yes.

2.

Click Set Password. In the displayed dialog box, enter the encryption
password as required.
The password must contain 6 to 32 characters.

3.

Click OK.
The exported encrypted script files are in .ecf format.

Step 4 (Optional and required when the new RATs include GSM) Click Next to set import options.
Set the start ID, frequency hopping attributes, and channel rules based on planned data.
Step 5 Click Next. The CME starts the import.
If...

Then...

The import
succeeds

Click Finish to exit the wizard.

The import fails

1. View the failure report, or double-click the error message in the error list to open the
summary data file and locate the cell where the error data exists.
2. Modify error data based on the error message.
3. After data is corrected, click Retry to import the summary data file again.

Follow-up Procedure
After introducing RATs to the base station, use the function of exporting auto-deployment
files to export the deployment list and data configuration file in the RAT introduction
scenario. For detailed operations, see Exporting Files Related to Base Station
Creation/RAT Introduction to Co-MPT Base Stations.
NOTE:
You can use either of the following methods to adjust other data after introducing RATs to a base station:

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Export the deployment list and data configuration file for RAT introduction, and deliver them to the
live network for them to take effect. Then synchronize the data to the planned data area, adjust other
data, and then export an incremental script.

Do not export the deployment list and data configuration file for RAT introduction. Instead, continue
adjusting other data, and then use the function of exporting the site deployment list and data
configuration files to combine and export data in the RAT introduction and adjustment scenarios.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

343

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

7.5 Configuring UMTS Data


This section describes how to prepare and adjust UMTS data when UMTS is used as the
original and new modes.
The following table list the configuration method when UMTS works as the original mode.
Table 1.1 UMTS working as the original mode
Scena
rio

Data
Type

CME Template

Reference

Separate
-MPT

Equipment
data

a) The CME template is used to configure


the summary data file in batches (UMTS
application).

Adjusting
Separate-MPT
Device Data

b) The CME template is used to adjust RF


data using the summary data file. It only
applies to RF-related data adjustment and
RXU board/TRX/cell capacity expansion
or decrease.
Transmissi
on data

a) Adjust the transmission data of the base


station and controller together through
batch adjustment over the Iub interface.

Adjusting
Separate-MPT
Transmission Data

b) Adjust the transmission data of the base


station through batch configuration of the
summary data file (UMTS application).

CoMPT

Radio data

The CME template is used to configure


the summary data file in batches (UMTS
application).

Adjusting
Separate-MPT
Radio Data

Equipment
data

a) The CME template is used to configure


the summary data file in batches (SRAN
application).

Adjusting Co-MPT
Device Data

b) The CME template is used to adjust RF


data using the summary data file. It only
applies to RF-related data adjustment and
RXU board/TRX/cell capacity expansion
or decrease.
Transmissi
on data

The CME template is used to configure


the summary data file in batches (SRAN
application).

Adjusting Co-MPT
Transmission Data

Radio data

The CME template is used to configure


the summary data file in batches (SRAN
application).

Adjusting Co-MPT
Radio Data

The following table list the configuration method when UMTS works as the new mode.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

344

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Table 1.2 UMTS working as the new mode


Scena
rio

Data
Type

CME Template

Reference

Separate
-MPT

Equipment,
transmissio
n, and
radio data

The CME template is used to deploy a


new site using the summary data file. In
this scenario, the equipment, transmission,
and radio data shares one summary data
file.

Configuring
Separate-MPT Data

CoMPT

Equipment,
transmissio
n, and
radio data

The CME template is used to introduce


RATs using the summary data file (SRAN
application).

Configuring CoMPT Data

7.5.2 Preparing Equipment Data


This section describes how to adjust equipment data in co-MPT and separate-MPT scenarios
when the original mode is UMTS. The equipment data to be adjusted includes the antenna and
feeder, BBU, RXU, and CPRI.

7.5.2.1 Separate-MPT
When the original mode is UMTS, you need to use the summary data file for batch
configuration (UMTS application) on the CME. If only the RF-related equipment data (RXU
board/TRX/cell capacity) needs to be adjusted, you can adjust RF data using the summary
data file.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.
Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
----End
For details about how to use the summary data file for batch configuration, see Importing and
Exporting NodeB Batch Configuration Data.
Importing and Exporting NodeB Data for Batch Configuration

Exporting NodeB data for batch configuration.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose UMTS Application > Export
Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (CME client mode) or
CME > UMTS Application > Export Data > Export Base Station Bulk
Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to
export the data you want to reconfigure in batches, as shown in Figure 1.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

345

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Figure 1 Exporting base station bulk configuration data

Step 2 In the Scenario drop-down list, select NodeB Bulk Configuration or Co-MPT BTS Bulk
Configuration based on the NodeB configuration.
Step 3 Select NodeBs whose data you want to reconfigure and click Next.
Step 4 Select Custom MOC, set objects you want to export, and specify a save path for the exported
file.
NOTE:
To export data based on the objects contained in a prepared summary data file, perform the following
steps: For details about the export mechanism, see Introduction to the Export Mechanism for
Exporting Data Based On an Existing File.
a.

Select Bulk configuration template.

b.

In Bulk configuration data file, select the prepared file and export configuration data
from the CME based on the MOs in this file.

c.

In Export path, specify a save path for the file that contains the exported data.

Step 5 Click Next. The CME verifies the configuration data to be exported.
If the verification fails, the CME does not export data.
Step 6 After the export is complete, click Finish.

Open the exported summary data file and modify the file as planned.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

346

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

You are advised to convert the summary data file to an MOC-integration view and edit the data. For
detailed operations, see Editing a Summary Data File for Batch Configuration (MOC-Integration View).

Import NodeB data for batch reconfiguration.


Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose UMTS Application > Import
Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (CME client mode) or
CME > UMTS Application > Import Data > Import Base Station Bulk
Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to
import the data that has been reconfigured in batches.
Step 2 Select the file you want to import and click Next.
Step 3 Select base stations whose data you want to import, and click Next.
NOTE:
If Best effort is selected, the CME skips the error information and continues the import. When

the import is complete, the CME rolls back only incorrect base station data.

If Best effort is not selected, the CME rolls back all the imported data if the import fails.

Step 4 After the import is complete, click Finish.

If the CME displays a message stating that the operation is successful, configuration data
has been successfully imported.

If the CME displays a message stating that the import failed, base station configuration
data failed to be imported. If this occurs, you have to reconfigure the data based on the
error information.
NOTE:
In the error message list, you can:

Click an error message to view the details at the bottom of the wizard.

Double-click an error message to switch to the corresponding location in the imported file. Then,
reconfigure the data based on the error information.

For details about how to adjust RF data using the summary data file, see Importing and
Exporting NodeB RF Adjustment Data (standalone function).
Importing and Exporting Co-MPT Base Station Data for RF Adjustment

Export the summary data file for RF adjustment.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the CME, choose SRAN Application > MBTS Application >
Export Data > Export Base Station RF Adjustment Data. A dialog box is
displayed.
Step 2 Set parameters displayed in the dialog box and specify the base stations whose data you want
to export.

Select Co-MPT BTS RF Adjustment from the Scenario drop-down list.

Specify the RATs of the base stations whose data you want to export.

Specify the versions of the base stations and base station controller whose data you want
to export.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

347

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Select the base stations whose data you want to export.


You can select base stations in the NE list. You can also click Load to quickly select
base stations defined in the file by importing a file.
NOTE:
When selecting base stations in the NE list, you can select base stations and then click Export to
export the selected base stations as a file for future selections.

If the file is unavailable when you select base stations by importing a file, you can click Export to
obtain a file, edit the file, and then click Load to import the file into the CME.

For details about rules for loading the file, see File Rules.

Step 3 Click Next. Then, specify the export mode, summary data file, and export path.
Table 3 Setting an export mode
Export Mode

Operation

Custom MOC: Select objects you

1. Select Custom MOC.

want to export in the wizard


directly and enable the CME to
export data based on the selected
objects.

2. Select objects to be exported.


NOTE:
The CME adds objects that support adjustment by default. You can adjust the objects as
required.

3. Specify a save path for the exported files in Export path.


RF adjustment template: Export

1. Select RF adjustment template.


data based on the objects contained 2. Select the prepared summary data file for adjustment in RF adjustment
in a prepared file.
data file.
3. Specify a save path for the exported files in Export path.
Step 4 Click Next. The CME starts the export.
Step 5 Click Finish.

Import the summary data file for RF adjustment.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the CME, choose SRAN Application > MBTS Application >
Import Data > Import Base Station RF Adjustment Data. A dialog box is
displayed.
Step 2 Select the file you want to import.
Step 3 Click Next, select the base stations for which you want to import the file.
You can select base stations in the NE list. You can also click Load to quickly select base
stations defined in the file by importing a file.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

348

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

NOTE:
When selecting base stations in the NE list, you can select base stations and then click Export to
export the selected base stations as a file for future selections.

If the file is unavailable when you select base stations by importing a file, you can click Export to
obtain a file, edit the file, and then click Load to import the file into the CME.

For details about rules for loading the file, see File Rules.

Step 4 Optional: To generate configuration scripts in the wizard, select Export scripts and perform
the following operations:
Select the mode of generating scripts.

a.

Scripts on the controller side:

To save scripts of logical base stations in the same file, select Batch.

To save scripts of logical base stations in separate files by base station, select
One by one.

Scripts on the base station side (only base stations in SRAN10.1 and later support
splitting scripts by RRU chain/ring):
To generate RRU incremental scripts in different files by RRU chain/ring, select Split
scripts by RRU chain. The CME automatically generates common incremental
scripts and RRU chain/ring incremental scripts. For base stations whose RRU
chain/ring fails to be separated, the CME generates scripts that are not separated.
NOTE:
If the common incremental script of the base station depends on the incremental RRU chain/ring script
or if two incremental RRU chain/ring scripts are associated, scripts cannot be separated by RRU
chain/ring.

x.

Specify a save path for scripts.

y.

Set an encryption mode for exported scripts.

No: The exported scripts do not have encryption passwords and no encryption passwords

are required when you loading projects.

Yes: The exported scripts have encryption passwords. When loading projects, you have

to enter encryption passwords by performing the following operations:


NOTE:
If an encrypted password has been set for the exproted script, you cannot check the script on the local
PC. Instead, you have to check it using the script executor.
i.

Select Yes.

ii.

Click Set Password. In the displayed dialog box, enter the encryption password as
required.

The password must contain 6 to 32 characters.


iii.

Click OK.
The exported encrypted script files are in .ecf format.

Step 5 Click Next, set the parameters for GSM service.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

349

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Table 4 Setting attributes


Attribute

Description

Cell ID

The CME can automatically allocate IDs to new cells and TRXs.

TRX ID

Automatic allocation rules: After you enter a reference ID in the wizard, the CME
searches for available IDs from the reference ID and allocates them to new cells and
TRXs. For example, after allocating a reference TRX ID to the first TRX, the CME
generates a new ID by automatically adding 1 to the reference TRX ID and allocates the
new ID to the second TRX. If the generated ID has been used, the CME automatically
adds 1 to the ID until it is available and allocates the ID to the second TRX.
NOTE:
The minimum ID available under the NE selected in the wizard functions as the start value by
default on the CME.

FH Attributes

When the imported data file contains different NEs, the CME searches for available IDs from the
preset start value and allocates them.

The CME generates data based on the FH type in the data file for RF adjustment. If the
FH type is not specified in the data file, the CME generates data based on the FH type
selected in the wizard.
NOTE:

FH type has the following values: NO_FH, RF_FH, BaseBand_FH(BCCH HOP), and
BaseBand_FH(BCCH NOT HOP), indicating no FH, RF FH, baseband FH (BCCH TRX
involved), and baseband FH (BCCH TRX not involved), respectively.

Channel Rule

The configuration of the FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency band parameter is as follows:

When FH type is NO_FH, the configuration of FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency


band does not take effect.

When FH type is RF_FH, FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency band can be set to In


Different MAGroup or In One MAGroup.

When FH type is BaseBand_FH(BCCH HOP) or BaseBand_FH(BCCH NOT


HOP), FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency band can be set to In Different
MAGroup, In One MAGroup, or EGSM Frequency Not In Any MAGroup.

Set channel allocation rules based on the RF adjustment scenarios.

New Cells Channel Rule: configured when the data file for RF adjustment contains

new cells or you need to re-allocate channels of existing cells. For details about
channel allocation rules, see Channel Allocation Rules.
NOTE:
In the data file for RF adjustment, if Cell Extension Type is set to Double Timeslot
Extension Cell, the configuration of Channel Rule does not take effect. The CME
automatically allocates timeslots 0 and 2 on the BCCH TRX to the BCCH and SDCCH, respectively,
and allocates all the other timeslots in the cell to TCHs.

Existed Cells Channel Rule: configured when the data file for RF adjustment

contains only new TRXs or you need to add TRXs in an existing cell.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

When Channel Allocation Rule 0 for TRXs is selected, the CME re-allocates
all channels of the imported cells based on the channel allocation rule specified
by New Cells Channel Rule.

When Channel Allocation Rule 1 for TRXs is selected, the CME allocates

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

350

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Table 4 Setting attributes


Attribute

Description
only channels of new TRXs based on the following rules:
1.

Rank TRXs by TRX No. in ascending order.

2.

Allocate PDCCHs: PDCCHs are allocated to channels 6, 5, 7, 4, 3, 2, 1, and 0


of a TRX in sequence.

3.

Allocate SDCCHs: Based on the sequence of TRX numbers, allocate SDCCHs


to channel 0 of all new TRXs in the current cell, channel 1, and so on.

NOTE:
The rules do not take effect when the cell to which a TRX belongs is a double timeslot extension
cell.

The number of available channels is the difference between the sum of Number of PDCH and
Number of SDCCH specified in the data file for RF adjustment and the number of configured
channels of the cell to which new TRXs belong.

Step 6 Click Next, when the import is complete, click Finish.

If the CME displays a message stating that the operation is successful, configuration data
has been successfully imported.

If the CME displays a message stating that the import failed, base station configuration
data failed to be imported. If this occurs, you have to reconfigure the data based on the
error information.
NOTE:
In the error message list, you can:

Click an error message to view the details at the bottom of the wizard.

Double-click an error message to switch to the corresponding location in the imported file. Then,
reconfigure the data based on the error information.

Follow-up Procedure
If you select Split scripts by RRU chain in the wizard of importing RF adjustment data,
you need to activate common incremental scripts of a single base station during script
activation and then activate RRU chain/ring incremental scripts in sequence by task. The
CME does not allow you to activate multiple scripts of a base station simultaneously. After
activating a script, ensure that the script takes effect on the base station side and the
base station is connected before activating the next script.

7.5.2.2 Co-MPT
When the original mode is UMTS, you need to use the summary data file for batch
configuration (SRAN application) on the CME. If only the RF-related equipment data (RXU
board/TRX/cell capacity) needs to be adjusted, you can adjust RF data using the summary
data file.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

351

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
----End
For details about how to use the summary data file for batch configuration (SRAN
application), see Importing and Exporting Co-MPT BTS Batch Configuration Data.
Importing and Exporting Co-MPT Base Station Data for Batch Configuration

Export base station data to the summary data file.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Export Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data
(CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Export
Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to configure data in batches, as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Exporting base station bulk configuration data

Step 2 Select a reconfiguration scenario, RAT of NEs, versions of base stations and base station
controllers, and list of base stations. Then, click Next.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

If you select the GSM base station controller and base station data, the implementation
of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Abis interface data of a

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

352

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing and Exporting Abis
Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration.

If you select the UMTS base station controller and base station data, the implementation
of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Iub interface data of a
single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing and Exporting Iub Data
for Batch Reconfiguration.

If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be
reconfigured together.

Step 3 Select Custom MOC, set objects you want to export, and specify a save path for the exported
file.
NOTE:
To export data based on the objects contained in a prepared summary data file, perform the following
steps: For details about the export mechanism, see Introduction to the Export Mechanism for
Exporting Data Based On an Existing File.

b.

Select Bulk configuration template.

c.

In Bulk configuration data file, select the prepared file and export configuration
data from the CME based on the MOs in this file.

d.

In Export path, specify a save path for the file that contains the exported data.

Step 4 Click Next. The CME verifies the configuration data to be exported.
If the verification fails, the CME does not export data.
Step 5 After the export is complete, click Finish.

Open the local summary data file and reconfigure data in the summary data file based on planned data.If
parameters to be reconfigured for each base station are the same and numbers of parameter records are the
same, it is convenient to reconfigure them in the MOC-integration view. For detailed operations, see Editing a
Summary Data File for Batch Configuration (MOC-Integration View) .

Import the modified summary data file.


Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Import Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data
(CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Import
Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to import data for batch configuration.
Step 2 Specify the RAT of NEs to be imported, determine whether to import base station controller
data (base station data must be selected), and click Next.
If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be reconfigured
together.
Step 3 Start a wizard based on scenarios.
If...

Then...

You have selected GSM The CME starts the wizard for importing Abis interface data. For detailed operations, see
base station controllers Importing and Exporting Abis Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
and base stations in the
preceding step
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

353

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If...

7 Preparing Data

Then...

You have selected


The CME starts the wizard for importing Iub interface data. For detailed operations, see
UMTS base station
Importing and Exporting Iub Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
controllers and base
stations in the preceding
step
You have selected only
base stations in the
preceding step

The CME starts the wizard for importing base station data for batch configuration. The
procedure is as follows:
1. Select the file you want to import and click Next.
NOTE:
The CME supports the file import even if the RAT contained in the file is different from the selected
RAT. For example, if GSM is selected but the RAT contained in the file is UMTS or LTE, the file can
still be imported.

2. Select the base stations for which you want to import the file and click Next.
NOTE:
If Best effort is selected, the CME skips the error information and continues the import. When
the import is complete, the CME rolls back only incorrect base station data.

If Best effort is not selected, the CME rolls back all the imported data if the import fails.

3. After the import is complete, click Finish.

If the CME displays a message stating that the operation is successful, configuration
data has been successfully imported.

If the CME displays a message stating that the import failed, base station configuration
data failed to be imported. If this occurs, you have to reconfigure the data based on
the error information.

NOTE:
In the error message list, you can:

Click an error message to view the details at the bottom of the wizard.

Double-click an error message to switch to the corresponding location in the imported file. Then,
reconfigure the data based on the error information.

For details about how to adjust RF data using the summary data file, see Importing and
Exporting Co-MPT BTS RF Adjustment Data (standalone function).
Importing and Exporting Co-MPT Base Station Data for RF Adjustment

Export the summary data file for RF adjustment.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the CME, choose SRAN Application > MBTS Application >
Export Data > Export Base Station RF Adjustment Data. A dialog box is
displayed.
Step 2 Set parameters displayed in the dialog box and specify the base stations whose data you want
to export.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Select Co-MPT BTS RF Adjustment from the Scenario drop-down list.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

354

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Specify the RATs of the base stations whose data you want to export.

Specify the versions of the base stations and base station controller whose data you want
to export.

Select the base stations whose data you want to export.


You can select base stations in the NE list. You can also click Load to quickly select
base stations defined in the file by importing a file.
NOTE:
When selecting base stations in the NE list, you can select base stations and then click Export to
export the selected base stations as a file for future selections.

If the file is unavailable when you select base stations by importing a file, you can click Export to
obtain a file, edit the file, and then click Load to import the file into the CME.

For details about rules for loading the file, see File Rules.

Step 3 Click Next. Then, specify the export mode, summary data file, and export path.
Table 3 Setting an export mode
Export Mode

Operation

Custom MOC: Select objects you

1. Select Custom MOC.

want to export in the wizard


directly and enable the CME to
export data based on the selected
objects.

2. Select objects to be exported.


NOTE:
The CME adds objects that support adjustment by default. You can adjust the objects as
required.

3. Specify a save path for the exported files in Export path.


RF adjustment template: Export

1. Select RF adjustment template.


data based on the objects contained 2. Select the prepared summary data file for adjustment in RF adjustment
in a prepared file.
data file.
3. Specify a save path for the exported files in Export path.
Step 4 Click Next. The CME starts the export.
Step 5 Click Finish.

Import the summary data file for RF adjustment.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the CME, choose SRAN Application > MBTS Application >
Import Data > Import Base Station RF Adjustment Data. A dialog box is
displayed.
Step 2 Select the file you want to import.
Step 3 Click Next, select the base stations for which you want to import the file.
You can select base stations in the NE list. You can also click Load to quickly select base
stations defined in the file by importing a file.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

355

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

NOTE:
When selecting base stations in the NE list, you can select base stations and then click Export to
export the selected base stations as a file for future selections.

If the file is unavailable when you select base stations by importing a file, you can click Export to
obtain a file, edit the file, and then click Load to import the file into the CME.

For details about rules for loading the file, see File Rules.

Step 4 Optional: To generate configuration scripts in the wizard, select Export scripts and perform
the following operations:
Select the mode of generating scripts.

a.

Scripts on the controller side:

To save scripts of logical base stations in the same file, select Batch.

To save scripts of logical base stations in separate files by base station, select
One by one.

Scripts on the base station side (only base stations in SRAN10.1 and later support
splitting scripts by RRU chain/ring):
To generate RRU incremental scripts in different files by RRU chain/ring, select Split
scripts by RRU chain. The CME automatically generates common incremental
scripts and RRU chain/ring incremental scripts. For base stations whose RRU
chain/ring fails to be separated, the CME generates scripts that are not separated.
NOTE:
If the common incremental script of the base station depends on the incremental RRU chain/ring script
or if two incremental RRU chain/ring scripts are associated, scripts cannot be separated by RRU
chain/ring.

z.

Specify a save path for scripts.

aa.

Set an encryption mode for exported scripts.

No: The exported scripts do not have encryption passwords and no encryption passwords

are required when you loading projects.

Yes: The exported scripts have encryption passwords. When loading projects, you have

to enter encryption passwords by performing the following operations:


NOTE:
If an encrypted password has been set for the exproted script, you cannot check the script on the local
PC. Instead, you have to check it using the script executor.
i.

Select Yes.

ii.

Click Set Password. In the displayed dialog box, enter the encryption password as
required.
The password must contain 6 to 32 characters.

iii.

Click OK.
The exported encrypted script files are in .ecf format.

Step 5 Click Next, set the parameters for GSM service.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

356

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Table 4 Setting attributes


Attribute

Description

Cell ID

The CME can automatically allocate IDs to new cells and TRXs.

TRX ID

Automatic allocation rules: After you enter a reference ID in the wizard, the CME
searches for available IDs from the reference ID and allocates them to new cells and
TRXs. For example, after allocating a reference TRX ID to the first TRX, the CME
generates a new ID by automatically adding 1 to the reference TRX ID and allocates the
new ID to the second TRX. If the generated ID has been used, the CME automatically
adds 1 to the ID until it is available and allocates the ID to the second TRX.
NOTE:
The minimum ID available under the NE selected in the wizard functions as the start value by
default on the CME.

FH Attributes

When the imported data file contains different NEs, the CME searches for available IDs from the
preset start value and allocates them.

The CME generates data based on the FH type in the data file for RF adjustment. If the
FH type is not specified in the data file, the CME generates data based on the FH type
selected in the wizard.
NOTE:

FH type has the following values: NO_FH, RF_FH, BaseBand_FH(BCCH HOP), and
BaseBand_FH(BCCH NOT HOP), indicating no FH, RF FH, baseband FH (BCCH TRX
involved), and baseband FH (BCCH TRX not involved), respectively.

Channel Rule

The configuration of the FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency band parameter is as follows:

When FH type is NO_FH, the configuration of FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency


band does not take effect.

When FH type is RF_FH, FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency band can be set to In


Different MAGroup or In One MAGroup.

When FH type is BaseBand_FH(BCCH HOP) or BaseBand_FH(BCCH NOT


HOP), FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency band can be set to In Different
MAGroup, In One MAGroup, or EGSM Frequency Not In Any MAGroup.

Set channel allocation rules based on the RF adjustment scenarios.

New Cells Channel Rule: configured when the data file for RF adjustment contains

new cells or you need to re-allocate channels of existing cells. For details about
channel allocation rules, see Channel Allocation Rules.
NOTE:
In the data file for RF adjustment, if Cell Extension Type is set to Double Timeslot
Extension Cell, the configuration of Channel Rule does not take effect. The CME
automatically allocates timeslots 0 and 2 on the BCCH TRX to the BCCH and SDCCH, respectively,
and allocates all the other timeslots in the cell to TCHs.

Existed Cells Channel Rule: configured when the data file for RF adjustment

contains only new TRXs or you need to add TRXs in an existing cell.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

When Channel Allocation Rule 0 for TRXs is selected, the CME re-allocates
all channels of the imported cells based on the channel allocation rule specified
by New Cells Channel Rule.

When Channel Allocation Rule 1 for TRXs is selected, the CME allocates

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

357

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Table 4 Setting attributes


Attribute

Description
only channels of new TRXs based on the following rules:
1.

Rank TRXs by TRX No. in ascending order.

2.

Allocate PDCCHs: PDCCHs are allocated to channels 6, 5, 7, 4, 3, 2, 1, and 0


of a TRX in sequence.

3.

Allocate SDCCHs: Based on the sequence of TRX numbers, allocate SDCCHs


to channel 0 of all new TRXs in the current cell, channel 1, and so on.

NOTE:
The rules do not take effect when the cell to which a TRX belongs is a double timeslot extension
cell.

The number of available channels is the difference between the sum of Number of PDCH and
Number of SDCCH specified in the data file for RF adjustment and the number of configured
channels of the cell to which new TRXs belong.

Step 6 Click Next, when the import is complete, click Finish.

If the CME displays a message stating that the operation is successful, configuration data
has been successfully imported.

If the CME displays a message stating that the import failed, base station configuration
data failed to be imported. If this occurs, you have to reconfigure the data based on the
error information.
NOTE:
In the error message list, you can:

Click an error message to view the details at the bottom of the wizard.

Double-click an error message to switch to the corresponding location in the imported file. Then,
reconfigure the data based on the error information.

Follow-up Procedure
If you select Split scripts by RRU chain in the wizard of importing RF adjustment data,
you need to activate common incremental scripts of a single base station during script
activation and then activate RRU chain/ring incremental scripts in sequence by task. The
CME does not allow you to activate multiple scripts of a base station simultaneously. After
activating a script, ensure that the script takes effect on the base station side and the
base station is connected before activating the next script.

7.5.3 Preparing Transmission Data


This section describes how to adjust equipment data in co-MPT and separate-MPT scenarios
when the original mode is UMTS. The transmission data to be adjusted includes the following
MOs: IP, IPPATH, SCTPLINK, CPBEAR, and IPRT.

7.5.3.1 Separate-MPT
In separate-MPT scenarios where the original mode is UMTS, if only the base station data
needs to be adjusted, use the summary data file for batch configuration (GSM application) on
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

358

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

the CME to configure transmission data. If the data of the base station and controller needs to
be adjusted together, use the Iub batch adjustment data.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.
Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
----End
For details about how to use the summary data file for batch configuration (UMTS
application), see Importing and Exporting NodeB Batch Configuration Data.
Importing and Exporting Co-MPT Base Station Data for Batch Configuration

Export base station data to the summary data file.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Export Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data
(CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Export
Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to configure data in batches, as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Exporting base station bulk configuration data

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

359

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Step 2 Select a reconfiguration scenario, RAT of NEs, versions of base stations and base station
controllers, and list of base stations. Then, click Next.

If you select the GSM base station controller and base station data, the implementation
of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Abis interface data of a
single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing and Exporting Abis
Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration.

If you select the UMTS base station controller and base station data, the implementation
of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Iub interface data of a
single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing and Exporting Iub Data
for Batch Reconfiguration.

If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be
reconfigured together.

Step 3 Select Custom MOC, set objects you want to export, and specify a save path for the exported
file.
NOTE:
To export data based on the objects contained in a prepared summary data file, perform the following
steps: For details about the export mechanism, see Introduction to the Export Mechanism for
Exporting Data Based On an Existing File.
a.

Select Bulk configuration template.

b.

In Bulk configuration data file, select the prepared file and export configuration data
from the CME based on the MOs in this file.

c.

In Export path, specify a save path for the file that contains the exported data.

Step 4 Click Next. The CME verifies the configuration data to be exported.
If the verification fails, the CME does not export data.
Step 5 After the export is complete, click Finish.

Open the local summary data file and reconfigure data in the summary data file based on planned data.If
parameters to be reconfigured for each base station are the same and numbers of parameter records are the
same, it is convenient to reconfigure them in the MOC-integration view. For detailed operations, see Editing a
Summary Data File for Batch Configuration (MOC-Integration View) .

Import the modified summary data file.


Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Import Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data
(CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Import
Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to import data for batch configuration.
Step 2 Specify the RAT of NEs to be imported, determine whether to import base station controller
data (base station data must be selected), and click Next.
If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be reconfigured
together.
Step 3 Start a wizard based on scenarios.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

360

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If...

7 Preparing Data

Then...

You have selected GSM The CME starts the wizard for importing Abis interface data. For detailed operations, see
base station controllers Importing and Exporting Abis Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
and base stations in the
preceding step
You have selected
The CME starts the wizard for importing Iub interface data. For detailed operations, see
UMTS base station
Importing and Exporting Iub Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
controllers and base
stations in the preceding
step
You have selected only
base stations in the
preceding step

The CME starts the wizard for importing base station data for batch configuration. The
procedure is as follows:
1. Select the file you want to import and click Next.
NOTE:
The CME supports the file import even if the RAT contained in the file is different from the selected
RAT. For example, if GSM is selected but the RAT contained in the file is UMTS or LTE, the file can
still be imported.

2. Select the base stations for which you want to import the file and click Next.
NOTE:
If Best effort is selected, the CME skips the error information and continues the import. When
the import is complete, the CME rolls back only incorrect base station data.

If Best effort is not selected, the CME rolls back all the imported data if the import fails.

3. After the import is complete, click Finish.

If the CME displays a message stating that the operation is successful, configuration
data has been successfully imported.

If the CME displays a message stating that the import failed, base station configuration
data failed to be imported. If this occurs, you have to reconfigure the data based on
the error information.

NOTE:
In the error message list, you can:

Click an error message to view the details at the bottom of the wizard.

Double-click an error message to switch to the corresponding location in the imported file. Then,
reconfigure the data based on the error information.

For details about how to use the Iub batch configuration data, see
Exporting Iub Batch Configuration Data
Exporting Iub Data for Batch Reconfiguration

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose UMTS Application > Export
Data > Export Iub Bulk Configuration Data (CME client mode) or CME > UMTS
Application > Export Data > Export Iub Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

361

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to export Iub bulk configuration data, as
shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Exporting Iub bulk configuration data

Step 2 In the Scenario drop-down list, select NodeB Bulk Configuration or Co-MPT BTS Bulk
Configuration based on the NodeB configuration.
Step 3 Select NEs whose data is to be reconfigured and the NE versions.
The CME can export Iub data about both the base station controller and base stations and can
also export Iub data only about the base station controller.
If you need to...

Then...

Export Iub data about


both the base station
controller and NodeBs

1. Select UMTS controller and select a base station controller version.


2. Select NodeB and select a NodeB version.
NOTE:
NodeBCommon indicates that the NodeB version is V100R016.

3. Select NodeBs from the list, and click Next.


You can select base stations in the NE list. You can also click Load to quickly select
base stations defined in the file by importing a file.
NOTE:

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

When selecting base stations in the NE list, you can select base stations and then click Export
to export the selected base stations as a file for future selections.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

362

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If you need to...

7 Preparing Data

Then...

If the file is unavailable when you select base stations by importing a file, you can click Export
to obtain a file, edit the file, and then click Load to import the file into the CME.

For details about rules for loading the file, see File Rules.

Export Iub data only


about the base station
controller

1. Select UMTS controller and select a base station controller version.


2. Clear NodeB.
3. Select a base station controller in the NE list, and click Next.
You can select base station controllers in the NE list. You can also click Load to
quickly select base station controllers defined in the file by importing a file.
NOTE:

When selecting base station controllers in the NE list, you can select base station controllers and
then click Export to export the selected base station controllers as a file for future selections.

If the file is unavailable when you select base station controllers by importing a file, you can
click Export to obtain a file, edit the file, and then click Load to import the file into the CME.

For details about rules for loading the file, see File Rules.

Step 4 Select an export mode.


If...

Then...

A summary data file is


available and you
expect to export data
based on the objects
contained in the file

1. Select Bulk configuration template.


2. In Bulk configuration data file, select the prepared file and export configuration
data from the CME based on the MOs in this file.
3. In Export path, specify a save path for the file that contains the exported data.

NOTE:

The NE version in the


Cover sheet of the
selected file must be
the same as that
selected in 3.

To export NodeB data


between
products,
you have to select the
summary data file for
the destination base
station controller. The
version of the base
station
controller
contained
in the
summary data file
must be the same as
the SPC version
under the same R
version for the base
station
controller
selected in 3.

No summary data file is 1. Select Custom MOC.


available
2. (Optional and required only when the base station controllers are in RAN16.0 and
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

363

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If...

7 Preparing Data

Then...
later versions and you have to export base station data between products) Select
Other UMTS controller version and select a version.
The version must be the same as the SPC version under the same R version of the
base station controller selected in 3.
3. Select objects you want to export and specify a save path for the exported file.
NOTE:
By default, objects related to the Iub interface have been added. You can adjust the objects as
required.

Step 5 Click Next. The CME verifies the configuration data to be exported.
If the verification fails, the CME does not export data.
Step 6 After the export is complete, click Finish.

Importing Iub Batch Configuration Data


Importing Iub Data for Batch Reconfiguration

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose UMTS Application > Import
Data > Import Iub Bulk Configuration Data (CME client mode) or CME > UMTS
Application > Import Data > Import Iub Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client
mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to import Iub batch reconfiguration data.
Step 2 Select a file to be imported and set whether to generate configuration scripts through a wizard.
If...

Then...

Configuration
scripts do not
need to be
generated

Clear Export script by wizard and click Next.

Configuration
scripts need to
be generated

Select Export script by wizard and click Next. Then, set the sequence for generating scripts
as required.
1. Select Batch or One by one to generate all logical base station scripts in one script file or
generate scripts by base station, respectively.
NOTE:
When multiple NodeBs share MOs at the bottom link layer, such as MOs ETHIP, PPPLNK, and MPGRP, if
the script generation mode is set to One by one, primary information (information about the subrack and
slot numbers of an interface board) about these MOs cannot be modified if the related IP addresses are not
changed. Otherwise, data may conflict after being imported into the CME.

2. (Optional) If One by one is selected, click Up or Down to adjust the sequence for running
base station scripts.
3. Specify a save path for the script file.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

364

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If...

7 Preparing Data

Then...
4. (Optional) To enable the CME to automatically start the script executor after a script is
generated successfully in the wizard, select Launch the script executor if the task is
successful.
5. (Optional) Set an encryption mode for exported scripts.

No: The exported scripts do not have encryption passwords and no encryption passwords are

required when you loading projects.

Yes: The exported scripts have encryption passwords. When loading projects, you have to

enter encryption passwords by performing the following operations:


NOTE:
If an encrypted password has been set for the exproted script, you cannot check the script on the local PC.
Instead, you have to check it using the script executor.

1.

Select Yes.

2.

Click Set Password. In the displayed dialog box, enter the encryption password as
required.
The password must contain 6 to 32 characters.

3.

Click OK.
The exported encrypted script files are in .ecf format.

Step 3 (Optional) Set information about transport data reconfiguration as required.


If...

Then...

The NodeB in the selected file contains only Iub


data on the RNC side and you need to enable
automatic update of the Iub data on the NodeB side
based on the control plane IP address, user plane IP
address, OMCH IP address, and NodeB ATM
address for the Iub interface on the RNC side

Select Update ATM/IP address from RNC to the NodeB


that does not exist in the summary/IUB file.

Delete the existing transport data of the Iub


interface and reconfigure the data based on the
transport data in the summary data file

This option is available only when the imported file


contains only controller data.

This function is available only when the following


condition is met: On the RNC, the same local IP address
is configured for multiple SCTPLNK records on the
RNC, and the same local IP address is configured for
multiple IPPATH records.

The base station script is generated only when the logical


NodeB in the imported Iub bulk configuration data has
the corresponding physical NodeB.

This function applies only to single-mode base stations


and co-MPT base stations (UO). For co-MPT base
stations that contain multiple RATs, the CME does not
automatically update the transport data on the NodeB
base on the Iub interface data on the RNC.

Select Overwrite the Iub data (Do not inherit the MOCs
those do not exist in the summary file).

Step 4 Click Next. The CME starts to import data.


Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

365

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If...

Then...

The import is
successful

Click Finish.

7 Preparing Data

NOTE:
If the CME detects that the parameter values of a shared object in the imported summary data file conflict, it
displays the conflict information in the following scenarios:

The import fails

If a parameter value in the summary data file conflicts with an existing value in the planned data area, the
CME displays the conflict information and the conflict locating information.

If multiple parameter values conflict in the summary data file (for example, the parameter values of the
same object are the same under different base stations), the CME displays only conflict information.

If a parameter has the preceding two types of conflicts, the CME provides locating information about
only one data conflict, and displays other conflict information. You can check whether to modify the
configuration data based on the displayed information.

1. You can view the error report. You can also double-click an error message in the error list
area. The CME opens the imported file and locates the error data cell in the file.
2. Modify error data based on the error message.
3. After the modification, click Retry to import the file.

7.5.3.2 Co-MPT
When the original mode is UMTS, you need to use the summary data file for batch
configuration (SRAN application) on the CME to configure transmission data.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.
Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
----End
For details, see Importing and Exporting Co-MPT BTS Batch Configuration Data.
Importing and Exporting Co-MPT Base Station Data for Batch Configuration

Export base station data to the summary data file.

Step 4 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS Application
> Export Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (CME client mode) or
CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Export Data > Export Base Station
Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to
configure data in batches, as shown in Figure 1.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

366

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Figure 1 Exporting base station bulk configuration data

Step 5 Select a reconfiguration scenario, RAT of NEs, versions of base stations and base station
controllers, and list of base stations. Then, click Next.

If you select the GSM base station controller and base station data, the implementation
of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Abis interface data of a
single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing and Exporting Abis
Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration.

If you select the UMTS base station controller and base station data, the implementation
of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Iub interface data of a
single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing and Exporting Iub Data
for Batch Reconfiguration.

If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be
reconfigured together.

Step 6 Select Custom MOC, set objects you want to export, and specify a save path for the exported
file.
NOTE:
To export data based on the objects contained in a prepared summary data file, perform the following
steps: For details about the export mechanism, see Introduction to the Export Mechanism for
Exporting Data Based On an Existing File.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

367

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

a.

Select Bulk configuration template.

b.

In Bulk configuration data file, select the prepared file and export configuration data
from the CME based on the MOs in this file.

c.

In Export path, specify a save path for the file that contains the exported data.

Step 7 Click Next. The CME verifies the configuration data to be exported.
If the verification fails, the CME does not export data.
Step 8 After the export is complete, click Finish.

Open the local summary data file and reconfigure data in the summary data file based on planned data.If
parameters to be reconfigured for each base station are the same and numbers of parameter records are the
same, it is convenient to reconfigure them in the MOC-integration view. For detailed operations, see Editing a
Summary Data File for Batch Configuration (MOC-Integration View) .

Import the modified summary data file.


Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Import Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data
(CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Import
Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to import data for batch configuration.
Step 2 Specify the RAT of NEs to be imported, determine whether to import base station controller
data (base station data must be selected), and click Next.
If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be reconfigured
together.
Step 3 Start a wizard based on scenarios.
If...

Then...

You have selected GSM The CME starts the wizard for importing Abis interface data. For detailed operations, see
base station controllers Importing and Exporting Abis Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
and base stations in the
preceding step
You have selected
The CME starts the wizard for importing Iub interface data. For detailed operations, see
UMTS base station
Importing and Exporting Iub Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
controllers and base
stations in the preceding
step
You have selected only
base stations in the
preceding step

The CME starts the wizard for importing base station data for batch configuration. The
procedure is as follows:
1. Select the file you want to import and click Next.
NOTE:
The CME supports the file import even if the RAT contained in the file is different from the selected
RAT. For example, if GSM is selected but the RAT contained in the file is UMTS or LTE, the file can
still be imported.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

368

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If...

7 Preparing Data

Then...
2. Select the base stations for which you want to import the file and click Next.
NOTE:
If Best effort is selected, the CME skips the error information and continues the import. When
the import is complete, the CME rolls back only incorrect base station data.

If Best effort is not selected, the CME rolls back all the imported data if the import fails.

3. After the import is complete, click Finish.

If the CME displays a message stating that the operation is successful, configuration
data has been successfully imported.

If the CME displays a message stating that the import failed, base station configuration
data failed to be imported. If this occurs, you have to reconfigure the data based on
the error information.

NOTE:
In the error message list, you can:

Click an error message to view the details at the bottom of the wizard.

Double-click an error message to switch to the corresponding location in the imported file. Then,
reconfigure the data based on the error information.

7.5.4 Preparing Radio Data


This section describes how to adjust radio data in co-MPT and separate-MPT scenarios when
the original mode is UMTS. The radio data to be adjusted includes the MOs related to the cell,
TRX, and sector.

7.5.4.1 Separate-MPT
When the original mode is UMTS in separate-MPT scenarios, you need to use the summary
data file for batch configuration (SRAN application) on the CME to configure radio data.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.
Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
----End
For details, see Importing and Exporting NodeB Batch Configuration Data.
Importing and Exporting Abis Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration

Export the Abis interface data for batch reconfiguration.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose GSM Application > Export Data
> Export Abis Bulk Configuration Data (CME client mode) or CME > GSM
Application > Export Data > Export Abis Bulk Configuration Data (U2000
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

369

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to export the data you want to
reconfigure in batches.
Step 2 Select the base station controller version, base station version, and related base station, and
click Next.
You can select base stations in the NE list. You can also click Load to quickly select base
stations defined in the file by importing a file.
NOTE:

When selecting base stations in the NE list, you can select base stations and then click Export to
export the selected base stations as a file for future selections.
If the file is unavailable when you select base stations by importing a file, you can click Export to
obtain a file, edit the file, and then click Load to import the file into the CME.

For details about rules for loading the file, see File Rules.

Step 3 Perform operations based on application scenarios.


If you need to...

Then...

Select objects you want to export in the wizard directly 1. Select Custom MOC.
and enable the CME to export data based on the selected 2. Select objects you want to export and specify a save
objects.
path for the exported file.
NOTE:
This mode does not apply to GBTSs.

Export data based on the objects contained in a prepared 1. Select Bulk configuration template.
file.
2. In Bulk configuration data file, select the
prepared file and export configuration data from the
CME based on the MOs in this file.
3. In Export path, specify a save path for the file that
contains the exported data.
Step 4 Click Next. The CME verifies the configuration data to be exported.
If the verification fails, the CME does not export data.
Step 5 After the export is complete, click Finish.

Import the Abis interface data that has been reconfigured in batches.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose GSM Application > Import Data
> Import Abis Bulk Configuration Data (CME client mode) or CME > GSM
Application > Import Data > Import Abis Bulk Configuration Data (U2000
client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to import the Abis data that has been
reconfigured in batches.
Step 2 Perform operations as required.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

370

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

If you need to...

Then...

Import the file only (without


generating a script immediately
when the export is successful)

Select the file you want to import and click Next. The CME starts to import the
file.

Generate a script file


immediately when the import is
successful

1. Select the file you want to import and select Export script by wizard.
2. Click Next.
3. Set the script generation information.

NOTE:

a.

This mode does not apply to GBTSs.

Select Batch or One by one to generate all logical base station


scripts in one script file or generate scripts by base station,
respectively.

NOTE:
When multiple base stations share MOs at the bottom link layer, such as MOs ETHIP,
PPPLNK, and MPGRP, if the script generation mode is set to One by one, primary
information (information about the subrack and slot numbers of an interface board) about
these MOs cannot be modified if the related IP addresses are not changed. Otherwise, data
may conflict after being imported into the CME.

b.

(Optional) If One by one is selected, click Up or Down to


adjust the sequence for running base station scripts.

c.

Specify a save path for the script file.

d.

(Optional) Set an encryption mode for exported scripts.

No: The exported scripts do not have encryption passwords and no

encryption passwords are required when you loading projects.

Yes: The exported scripts have encryption passwords. When loading projects,

you have to enter encryption passwords by performing the following


operations:
NOTE:
If an encrypted password has been set for the exproted script, you cannot check the script
on the local PC. Instead, you have to check it using the script executor.

1.

Select Yes.

2.

Click Set Password. In the displayed dialog box, enter the


encryption password as required.
The password must contain 6 to 32 characters.

3.

Click OK.
The exported encrypted script files are in .ecf format.
e.

(Optional) To enable the CME to automatically start the script


executor after a script is generated successfully in the wizard,
select Launch the script executor if the task is successful.

f.

Click Next. The CME starts to import the data.

Step 3 View the import report and click Finish.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

371

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

7.5.4.2 Co-MPT
When the original mode is UMTS in co-MPT scenarios, you need to use the summary data
file for batch configuration (SRAN application) on the CME to configure radio data.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.
Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
----End
For details, see Importing and Exporting Co-MPT BTS Batch Configuration Data.
Importing and Exporting Co-MPT Base Station Data for Batch Configuration

Export base station data to the summary data file.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Export Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data
(CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Export
Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to configure data in batches, as shown in Figure 1.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

372

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Figure 1 Exporting base station bulk configuration data

Step 2 Select a reconfiguration scenario, RAT of NEs, versions of base stations and base station
controllers, and list of base stations. Then, click Next.

If you select the GSM base station controller and base station data, the implementation
of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Abis interface data of a
single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing and Exporting Abis
Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration.

If you select the UMTS base station controller and base station data, the implementation
of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Iub interface data of a
single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing and Exporting Iub Data
for Batch Reconfiguration.

If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be
reconfigured together.

Step 3 Select Custom MOC, set objects you want to export, and specify a save path for the exported
file.
NOTE:
To export data based on the objects contained in a prepared summary data file, perform the following
steps: For details about the export mechanism, see Introduction to the Export Mechanism for
Exporting Data Based On an Existing File.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

373

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

a.

Select Bulk configuration template.

b.

In Bulk configuration data file, select the prepared file and export configuration data
from the CME based on the MOs in this file.

c.

In Export path, specify a save path for the file that contains the exported data.

Step 4 Click Next. The CME verifies the configuration data to be exported.
If the verification fails, the CME does not export data.
Step 5 After the export is complete, click Finish.

Open the local summary data file and reconfigure data in the summary data file based on planned data.If
parameters to be reconfigured for each base station are the same and numbers of parameter records are the
same, it is convenient to reconfigure them in the MOC-integration view. For detailed operations, see Editing a
Summary Data File for Batch Configuration (MOC-Integration View) .

Import the modified summary data file.


Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Import Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data
(CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Import
Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to import data for batch configuration.
Step 2 Specify the RAT of NEs to be imported, determine whether to import base station controller
data (base station data must be selected), and click Next.
If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be reconfigured
together.
Step 3 Start a wizard based on scenarios.
If...

Then...

You have selected GSM The CME starts the wizard for importing Abis interface data. For detailed operations, see
base station controllers Importing and Exporting Abis Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
and base stations in the
preceding step
You have selected
The CME starts the wizard for importing Iub interface data. For detailed operations, see
UMTS base station
Importing and Exporting Iub Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
controllers and base
stations in the preceding
step
You have selected only
base stations in the
preceding step

The CME starts the wizard for importing base station data for batch configuration. The
procedure is as follows:
1. Select the file you want to import and click Next.
NOTE:
The CME supports the file import even if the RAT contained in the file is different from the selected
RAT. For example, if GSM is selected but the RAT contained in the file is UMTS or LTE, the file can
still be imported.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

374

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If...

7 Preparing Data

Then...
2. Select the base stations for which you want to import the file and click Next.
NOTE:
If Best effort is selected, the CME skips the error information and continues the import. When
the import is complete, the CME rolls back only incorrect base station data.

If Best effort is not selected, the CME rolls back all the imported data if the import fails.

3. After the import is complete, click Finish.

If the CME displays a message stating that the operation is successful, configuration
data has been successfully imported.

If the CME displays a message stating that the import failed, base station configuration
data failed to be imported. If this occurs, you have to reconfigure the data based on
the error information.

NOTE:
In the error message list, you can:

Click an error message to view the details at the bottom of the wizard.

Double-click an error message to switch to the corresponding location in the imported file. Then,
reconfigure the data based on the error information.

7.5.5 Adjusting Transmission, Device, and Radio


Data
This section describes how to configure data in both separate-MPT and co-MPT scenarios
when UMTS works as the new mode. The CME templates for the two scenarios are different.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.
Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
----End
The following table lists the corresponding CME template and reference for each scenario.
Table 1.1 UMTS working as the new mode
Scena
rio

Data
Type

CME Template

Reference

Separate
-MPT

Equipment,
transmissio
n, and
radio data

The CME template is used to deploy a


new site using the summary data file. In
this scenario, the equipment, transmission,
and radio data shares one summary data
file.

Configuring
Separate-MPT Data

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

375

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Scena
rio

Data
Type

CME Template

Reference

CoMPT

Equipment,
transmissio
n, and
radio data

The CME template is used to introduce


RATs using the summary data file (SRAN
application).

Configuring CoMPT Data

7.5.5.2 Separate-MPT
When the new mode is UMTS in separate-MPT scenarios, deploy a new site using the
summary data file on the CME.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
1

Set separate-MPT BTS primary mode.

Setting Primary and Secondary RATs for Base Stations

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose CME > SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > MBTS RAT Priority Settings (U2000 client mode) or SRAN Application >
MBTS Application > MBTS RAT Priority Settings (CME client mode). A dialog box is
displayed for you to set priorities of the RATs that comprise a multimode base station.

If the current primary and secondary RATs are inconsistent with the planned ones,
perform 2 through 3.

If the current primary and secondary RATs are consistent with the planned ones, perform
3.

Step 2 Change the primary and secondary RATs according to the separate-MPT base station type.
The selected RAT is the primary RAT, and the other is the secondary RAT.
LTE_TDD indicates only the LTE TDD base stations that are supported since SRAN11.0, and
no LTE FDD cells can be added for such base stations.
Step 3 Click OK. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the settings are successful.
Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 Create a summary data file.


1.

Customize a summary data file (non-security).

Customizing a Summary Data File (Non-Secure Networking)


Expand All
1.

Open the summary data file in the basic scenario by using the function of customizing a summary
data file.

a.

On the menu bar, choose Advanced > Customize Summary Data File (CME client
mode) or CME > Advanced > Customize Summary Data File (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to open the summary data file.

b.

Perform operations as required.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

376

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

To adjust the sheets, configuration objects, and parameter names in a user-defined


summary data file, select Custom to select a user-defined summary data file.

To use a default summary data file, select Default, GBTS/NodeB/eNodeB Summary,


NodeB, NodeB version, and Scenario Basic Summary Template in sequence.
NOTE:
You are advised to select the default summary data file Scenario Basic Summary Template.
The causes are as follows:

Scenario Basic Summary Template is the minimum set of configuration parameters for
base station creation. After you select information required for creating base stations, such as the
link mode, telecom operator sharing mode, and security information on the customization wizard,
the CME automatically adds related parameters to the summary data file according to your selection.
You can use the customization wizard to combine base station creation scenarios, which reduces
redundant parameters generated in the summary data file.

Other default summary data files are classified by scenario and contain all parameters in the related
scenarios. Therefore, the following problems may occur:

Redundant parameters are generated.

A summary data file fails to be verified due to data collision when the
customization wizard is used.
You can learn the introduction to scenarios by checking the information
displayed on the GUI of the summary data file.

c.

After the configuration is complete, click OK. The main window for customizing a summary data
file is displayed, as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Window for customizing a summary data file

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

377

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Tab page, which displays a set of NE configuration parameters. This area can be customized.

NE configuration parameter navigation tree, which consists of NE configuration objects and


parameters. An NE configuration object consists of multiple NE configuration parameters. This area
cannot be modified.

Table, which lists the mappings between the parameter groups and parameters in a summary data file
and the NE configuration objects and parameters, respectively.
NE configuration objects and parameters are not editable. Parameter groups and parameters in a
summary data file can be customized.
: indicates a modified record.

: indicates an added record. Such tags will not be displayed next time after you save the summary
data file.

NOTE:
When the values of NE MOC and NE Attribute are empty in a record, the parameter is a new one in the
summary data file and there is no mapping between the parameter and NE configuration objects.
This parameter is referenced by other configuration parameters. If this parameter is not referenced, the parameter
value does not take effect.

If multiple NE configuration parameters are in the same summary parameter group and share the same name, they
are combined into a column in the generated summary data file.

Editable records are highlighted in white; Records that are not editable are highlighted in
can be deleted but cannot be modified are highlighted in

2.

; Records that

Start the wizard for customizing a summary data file, and customize basic and transport parameters
in a summary data file. Figure 2 shows the operation example.
NOTE:
The parameter specifications defined in the basic base station creation wizard must be lower than those
provided by NEs. If the planned data exceeds the defined parameter specifications, you can manually
customize data after completing operations by following the wizard.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

378

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Figure 2 Operations on the wizard

Tip1

The configuration sequence is displayed as "protocol layer + configuration object." Configure


data from the bottom to the top and from base stations to base station controllers based on the
protocol layers and NE types.
After the operations in the wizard are complete, a customization report is generated. The
report displays user-specified information, automatically added MOs and planned parameter
values (excluding default values), and information that needs to be set manually.

Tip2
3.

Configure data based on the planned data in each step on the wizard.

(Optional and required when the summary data file customized on the wizard does not contain all
parameters to be configured) Manually customize parameters to be configured in the summary data
file.

If you need
to...

Then...

Add a tab page

Figure 3 shows an operation example.

Add parameters on a Figure 4 shows an operation example.


tab page

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

379

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Figure 3 Example of adding a tab page

Figure 4 Example of adding parameters on a tab page

Observe the following items during the customization:

The parameter marked in red is the primary key parameter under the configuration
object. When adding a parameter, you must add the primary key parameter under the
configuration object to which the parameter belongs.

Only one configuration object can be customized on the XXXX Pattern orXXXX List
tab page.

A configuration object must not be allocated to different parameter groups on the


Common Data tab page.
One configuration object can be customized only on one tab page or on one tab page and
the Common Data tab page.

Parameter names in the same parameter group cannot be duplicate.

Parameter group names and parameter names cannot be empty.

Click
to verify validity of the edited summary data file. Then, modify the file based on the
verification result.
If the verification fails, you can double-click the error message. Then, the CME automatically locates
the error. You have to rectify the error until the verification succeeds.
NOTE:
If an alarm is generated indicating that the branch parameter does not exist in the verification result, you
need to determine whether to customize the parameter to the summary data file based on the planned
data. The alarm does not affect the subsequent operation of saving data.

When the verification is successful, click

to save the summary data file (this button applies only to

a user-defined summary data file), or click


to save the file to a local PC. If you perform copy and
paste operations when saving the file, the file will fail to be saved.
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

380

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

2.

7 Preparing Data

Customize a summary data file (security).

Customizing a Summary Data File (Secure)


Expand All
1.

Open the summary data file in the basic scenario by using the function of customizing a summary
data file.

a.

On the menu bar, choose Advanced > Customize Summary Data File (CME client
mode) or CME > Advanced > Customize Summary Data File (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to open the summary data file.

b.

Perform operations as required.

To adjust the sheets, configuration objects, and parameter names in a user-defined


summary data file, select Custom to select a user-defined summary data file.

To use a default summary data file, select Default, GBTS/NodeB/eNodeB Summary,


NodeB, NodeB version, and Scenario Basic Summary Template in sequence.
NOTE:
You are advised to select the default summary data file Scenario Basic Summary Template.
The causes are as follows:

Scenario Basic Summary Template is the minimum set of configuration parameters for
base station creation. After you select information required for creating base stations, such as the
link mode, telecom operator sharing mode, and security information on the customization wizard,
the CME automatically adds related parameters to the summary data file according to your selection.
You can use the customization wizard to combine base station creation scenarios, which reduces
redundant parameters generated in the summary data file.

Other default summary data files are classified by scenario and contain all parameters in the related
scenarios. Therefore, the following problems may occur:

Redundant parameters are generated.

A summary data file fails to be verified due to data collision when the
customization wizard is used.
You can learn the introduction to scenarios by checking the information
displayed on the GUI of the summary data file.

c.

After the configuration is complete, click OK. The main window for customizing a summary data
file is displayed, as shown in Figure 1.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

381

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Figure 1 Window for customizing a summary data file

Tab page, which displays a set of NE configuration parameters. This area can be customized.

NE configuration parameter navigation tree, which consists of NE configuration objects and


parameters. An NE configuration object consists of multiple NE configuration parameters. This area
cannot be modified.

Table, which lists the mappings between the parameter groups and parameters in a summary data file
and the NE configuration objects and parameters, respectively.
NE configuration objects and parameters are not editable. Parameter groups and parameters in a
summary data file can be customized.
: indicates a modified record.

: indicates an added record. Such tags will not be displayed next time after you save the summary
data file.

NOTE:
When the values of NE MOC and NE Attribute are empty in a record, the parameter is a new one in the
summary data file and there is no mapping between the parameter and NE configuration objects.
This parameter is referenced by other configuration parameters. If this parameter is not referenced, the parameter
value does not take effect.

If multiple NE configuration parameters are in the same summary parameter group and share the same name, they
are combined into a column in the generated summary data file.

Editable records are highlighted in white; Records that are not editable are highlighted in
can be deleted but cannot be modified are highlighted in

2.

; Records that

Start the wizard for customizing a summary data file, and customize basic, transport, and security
data in the file.
NOTE:
The parameter specifications defined in the basic base station creation wizard must be lower than those
provided by NEs. If the planned data exceeds the defined parameter specifications, you can manually
customize data after completing operations by following the wizard.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

382

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide
a.

7 Preparing Data

Use the customization wizard to customize basic and transport data. Figure 2 shows an
operation example.
Figure 2 Operations on the wizard

Tip1

The configuration sequence is displayed as "protocol layer + configuration object." Configure


data from the bottom to the top and from base stations to base station controllers based on the
protocol layers and NE types.
After the operations in the wizard are complete, a customization report is generated. The
report displays user-specified information, automatically added MOs and planned parameter
values (excluding default values), and information that needs to be set manually.

Tip2
b.

Configure data based on the planned data in each step on the wizard.
Use the security wizard to customize security-related data. Figure 3 shows an operation
example.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

383

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Figure 3 Operations on the wizard

NOTE:
When configuring data in the wizard, observe the following:

Parameters with * in the wizard are mandatory.


Optional parameters are configured based on site requirements. For example, when configuring the
CRL file, you need to set the user name and password for the CRL server based on site requirements.

Tip 1

Steps in a wizard to be emphasized on are marked with Tip in the preceding figure. You can view
related descriptions based on site requirements.

When multi-level CA certificates in the certificate chain provided by you are stored separately,
configure multiple CA records.

When you provide a certificate chain file, configure a certificate chain record.

Tip 2

Configure security gateway information records based on collected IKE and IPsec algorithms and
combination status of these algorithms provided by you. For example, two IKE algorithms, two IPsec
algorithms, and only three IKE and IPsec algorithm combination methods are provided. You need to
configure only three security gateway information records.

Tip 3

Sequence Number of IPsec tunnel of IPsec tunnels configured for the same port cannot be

duplicate.

Tip 4

3.

Values of Sequence number of SeGW corresponding to this tunnel corresponding to


Sequence number of SeGW configured in the preceding step.

After the operations in the wizard are complete, a customization report is generated. The report
displays user-specified information, automatically added MOs and planned parameter values
(excluding default values), and information that needs to be set manually.

(Optional and required when the summary data file customized on the wizard does not contain all
parameters to be configured) Manually customize parameters to be configured in the summary data
file.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

384

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

If you need
to...

Then...

Add a tab page

Figure 4 shows an operation example.

Add parameters on a Figure 5 shows an operation example.


tab page
Figure 4 Example of adding a tab page

Figure 5 Example of adding parameters on a tab page

Observe the following items during the customization:

The parameter marked in red is the primary key parameter under the configuration
object. When adding a parameter, you must add the primary key parameter under the
configuration object to which the parameter belongs.

Only one configuration object can be customized on the XXXX Pattern orXXXX List
tab page.

A configuration object must not be allocated to different parameter groups on the


Common Data tab page.
One configuration object can be customized only on one tab page or on one tab page and
the Common Data tab page.

Parameter names in the same parameter group cannot be duplicate.

Parameter group names and parameter names cannot be empty.

Click
to verify validity of the edited summary data file. Then, modify the file based on the
verification result.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

385

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

If the verification fails, you can double-click the error message. Then, the CME automatically locates
the error. You have to rectify the error until the verification succeeds.
NOTE:
If an alarm is generated indicating that the branch parameter does not exist in the
verification result, you need to determine whether to customize the parameter to the
summary data file based on the planned data. The alarm does not affect the
subsequent operation of saving data.

When the verification is successful, click

to save the summary data file (this button applies only to

a user-defined summary data file), or click


to save the file to a local PC. If you perform copy and
paste operations when saving the file, the file will fail to be saved.

Specify a summary data file.


Editing a Summary Data File
Expand All

Step 1 Open a user-defined summary data file.


Step 2 On the menu bar of the Excel file, click Add-Ins.
If the macro function is not displayed under Add-Ins, verify the following settings:

In Microsoft Office Excel 2003, the macro function must be enabled and the macro
security level must be set to Medium.

In Microsoft Office Excel 2007 and Excel 2010, the macro function must be enabled.

For detailed operations, see Setting the Macro Security Level in an Excel File.

Step 3 Edit basic data.


a.

Edit global data, which is the same for all base stations, on the Common
Data sheet. Such parameters include the telecom operator information and
OSS IP address.

bb.

Edit basic information, which is different for all base stations, on the Base Station
Transport Data sheet or the MO list sheet (XXXX List). For example:

Edit the basic base station information including the base station name and type
on the Base Station Transport Data sheet.

Edit base station functions and locations on the corresponding MO list sheet
(XXXX List).

Step 4 Edit device data.


a.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

The configuration data of devices uses the values in the base station
template. Therefore, you need to set the name of the prepared base station
template on the Base Station Transport Data sheet.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

386

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

NOTE:
Only the default template name is displayed in the drop-down list for selecting a template in the
summary data file. Therefore, before selecting a user-defined template, you have to click
to add the user-defined template name to the drop-down
list.
Information about the user-defined template must be consistent with that about the existing template on
the CME.
cc.

Edit clock data and time data on the Common Data sheet.

Step 5 Edit transport data.


a.

Edit the data planned for each base station, such as the IP address, subnet, and port
number, on the Base Station Transport Data sheet.

b.

Edit the parameters for the MOs corresponding to each interface on the corresponding MO sheets
(XXXX List or XXXX Pattern). For example, device IP addresses and SCTP links are MOs.

If the value of a parameter on the XXXX Pattern sheet varies among base stations, you
can click
and select the parameter that needs to be referenced.
Microsoft Excel automatically generates the reference path for the parameter in the
summary data file. Figure 1 provides an example for using the reference function.
Advantage of the reference function: The value of one parameter can be referenced on
multiple XXXX Pattern sheets. Therefore, after a reference relationship is set, you only
need to change the referenced parameter value and do not need to modify the
parameters on the XXXX Pattern sheets even if the referenced parameter value
changes.
Restriction of the reference function:

The parameters to be referenced must be on the Common Data or Base Station


Transport Data sheet.

If a branch parameter has been set to be referenced by another parameters, the summary
data file does not enable or disable the parameters controlled by the branch parameter.
The CME will still check accuracy of all the parameters during the import.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

387

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Figure 1 Example for using the reference function

Under the Device IP Address object in the preceding figure, to retain the parameter
value of IP Address on port 0 in slot 7 of subrack 0 in cabinet 0 the same as the
parameter value of IP 1 under the NodeB IP address object on the Base Station
Transport Data sheet, you have to enter the path of the referenced parameter Base
Station Transport Data\NodeB IP address\IP 1 as the parameter value of IP Address
on port 0 in slot 7 of subrack 0 in cabinet 0. The CME assigns a parameter value based
on the reference path.

During IP route configuration, if the value obtained after a logic AND operation is
performed on the IP address and subnet mask is not equal to the IP address, you need to
use the macro function
address that meets the rule.

to convert the IP address to an IP

The IP address verification rule is the same as the NE configuration rule. That is, after a
logical AND operation is performed on the IP address and subnet mask, the obtained
value is equal to the IP address.
For detailed operations related to macro functions, see Figure 2.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

388

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Figure 2 Settings

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

389

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Specify the sheet, parameter group, and parameter name that correspond to
the IP addresses and subnet masks to be calculated.

Specify locations in the summary data file for the calculated IP addresses and
subnet masks.

To use the calculated IP addresses and subnet masks to overwrite existing


data in the summary data file, perform the following operations:

1. Select Select Filling Column.


2. Specify the names of the parameter group and parameter mapped to the
data to be overwritten.

To add a row next to the parameter specified in step 1 and show the
calculated IP addresses and subnet masks in the added row, perform the
following operations:

1. Select Add Filling Column.


2. Enter the names of the parameter group and parameter to be displayed in
the row.
3

Click Add and add a conversion rule. You can repeat steps 1 and 2 to add
multiple conversion rules.

This function provides the following calculation methods:

Non-32-bit subnet mask: After you enter IP addresses and subnet masks, a
logic AND operation is performed on them. The obtained network codes
replace the IP addresses, and the subnet masks are replaced with
255.255.255.255.

32-bit subnet mask: The IP addresses remain the same. The entered subnet
masks are replaced with 255.255.255.255.

Click OK. Excel starts the calculation based on the preset information.

Step 6 Add radio data.


Click the cell sheet, set the value of each parameter and the template name based on the
planned data.
NOTE:
Only the default template name is displayed in the drop-down list for selecting a template in the
summary data file. Therefore, before selecting a user-defined template, you have to click
to add the user-defined template name to the drop-down
list.
Information about the user-defined template must be consistent with that about the existing template on
the CME.

Step 7 Configure automatic deployment data about the base stations to be created.
Click the Auto Deployment sheet and set the value of each parameter based on the planned
data.
Step 8 Close the modified summary data file.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

390

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Import the summary data file.


Importing a Summary Data File

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose UMTS Application > Import
Data > Import Base Station Summary Data (CME client mode) or CME > UMTS
Application > Import Data > Import Base Station Summary Data (U2000 client
mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to create base stations using a summary data
file.
Step 2 Click

and select the file you want to import.

If redundant device objects exist after the data for creating base stations in the summary data
file and data in the template are combined, after Delete redundant RF equipment data is
selected, the CME automatically deletes the device objects and subobjects that have not been
referenced by the cell.
Step 3 Click Next and select base stations you want to create.
You are advised not to select sample base stations.
You can select base stations in the NE list. You can also click Load to quickly select base
stations defined in the file by importing a file.
NOTE:

When selecting base stations in the NE list, you can select base stations and then click Export to
export the selected base stations as a file for future selections.
If the file is unavailable when you select base stations by importing a file, you can click Export to
obtain a file, edit the file, and then click Load to import the file into the CME.

For details about rules for loading the file, see File Rules.

Step 4 (Optional) Select Best effort.


This option is available only when the imported summary data file contains base station
controller data.

If Best effort is selected, the CME skips the error information and continues the import.
When the import is complete, the CME rolls back only incorrect base station data.

If Best effort is not selected, the CME rolls back all the imported data if the import
fails.

Step 5 (Optional and required when the CME generates scripts during the import of the summary
data file) Select Export Scripts and specify a save path for the scripts.

If Batch is selected, NodeB scripts are generated in the same file.

If One by one is selected, the generated scripts are divided by NodeB. One file is
generated for each NodeB, and shared object data is generated in an independent file.

Step 6 Click Next. The CME starts the import.


If...

Then...

The import is
successful

Click Finish.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

391

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

If...

Then...

The import fails

1. You can view the error report. You can also double-click an error message in the error list
area. The CME opens the imported file and locates the error data cell in the file.
2. Modify error data based on the error message.
3. After the modification, click Retry to import the file.

Import a radio plan data file.


Importing a Radio Data Planning File

Step 1 Obtain the radio data planning file 3G Radio Network Planning Data
Template.xls from U2000 client installation path\client\client\Data\BSC
version\Model\local\language\Template.
Step 2 Open the file and reconfigure the data as planned.
You are not allowed to modify the parameters marked in gray in the file.
Step 3 Import the radio data planning file.
The CME imports the file by NE. For example, the CME contains data about 10 NEs and data
only about one of the NEs is contained in the file to be imported. After the file is imported, the
CME reconfigures data only about the specified NE in the file. For data about the other NEs,
the CME reconfigures only the interlocked data.
NOTE:

a.

When you modify a parameter that supports automatic synchronization in UCELL, the CME
automatically updates the parameters (for example, external cell information) that are associated
with this parameter on other RNCs in the planned data area. For details about associated parameters,
see the Associated_Parameter.xls file in U2000 client installation
path\client\client\Data\Common\AssociatedParameter\language.

You can set Cell Parameter Auto-Synchronization Policy to ensure


consistency between parameters on other BSCs and eNodeBs that are associated
with this parameter or ensure consistency of the associated parameters of all
cells in the current data area. For detailed operations, see Setting System
Options..

You can use the inter-U2000 neighboring cell management function to ensure
that the cell associated parameters are consistent in different U2000 systems. For
detailed operations, see Synchronizing Inter-OSS System Neighboring Cell
Data.

In the RNC in Pool management scenario, you need to configure neighboring cell data only on the
master RNC and then import the configured data. After the master RNC is configured, you can
synchronize the configuration of the backup RNC with the configuration of the master RNC using
the consistency check function. For detailed operations about the consistency check, see Checking
and Correcting the Differentiated Data Between the Master RNC and Backup or Overflow
RNCs.

On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose UMTS Application > Import Data >
Import Radio Network Planning Data (CME client mode) or CME > UMTS

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

392

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Application > Import Data > Import Radio Network Planning Data (U2000 client

mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to select files.


b.

Specify an NE version and TXT, XLS, or XLSM as the format of the file you want to import, and
click Add File to select a data planning file.

c.

Click Next. A dialog box is displayed for you to select an import mode.

d.

Select configuration objects you want to import.

Table 2 describes the configuration objects in Basic Info.

Table 3 describes the configuration objects in External Cell Type and Neighboring
Cell Relationship Type and the import modes.
NOTE:

When adding a GSM cell, the CME allocates a new index to the added GSM cell if the index of the
GSM cell conflicts with an existing index on the CME.

When importing neighbor relationships, the CME automatically skips those involving cells that do
not exist.

If cell indexes are not set for the external cell data in the imported file, the CME allocates the related
cell indexes based on whether the cell names exist on the CME. The allocation mechanism is as
follows:

If an external cell exists on the CME, the CME changes the cell index to the
existing one.

If an excel cell does not exist on the CME, the CME automatically allocates a
cell index.

Table 2 Configuration objects in Basic Info


Configuration
Object

Wheth
er
Data
Exists
on the
CME

Wheth
er
Data
Exists
in the
File

Results After the File Is Imported into the


CME

NodeB

Yes

Yes

The CME contains the existing data and the NodeB data in the
file and reallocates NodeB IDs.

No

Yes

The CME adds the NodeB data in the file.

Yes

No

Data on the CME remains unchanged.

Yes

Yes

The CME overwrites the existing data using the cell data in the
file.

No

Yes

The CME adds the cell data in the file. The principles for
selecting a cell template are as follows:

Cell

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

In the data planning file, if the TEMPLATENAME parameter


of the cell is empty, the CME creates the cell by using the
cell template selected in the dialog box.

In the data planning file, if you specify a cell template name

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

393

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Table 2 Configuration objects in Basic Info


Configuration
Object

Wheth
er
Data
Exists
on the
CME

Wheth
er
Data
Exists
in the
File

Results After the File Is Imported into the


CME

NodeB

Yes

Yes

The CME contains the existing data and the NodeB data in the
file and reallocates NodeB IDs.

No

Yes

The CME adds the NodeB data in the file.


in the TEMPLATENAME parameter, the CME creates the
cell by using the cell template specified in the file. In this
case, the cell template selected in the dialog box does not
take effect.
NOTE:
If data about the URA, LAC, SAC, RAC, and SPG referenced by the
cell does not exist on the CME, the CME automatically adds the data.

Yes

No

Data on the CME remains unchanged.

Yes

Yes

The CME overwrites the existing data using the radio data of
the physical NodeBs in the file.

Radio data of physical No


NodeBs
only
in
V100R016
can
be
Yes
imported.

Yes

Data on the CME remains unchanged.

No

Data on the CME remains unchanged.

Physical NodeB radio


data
NOTE:

You can reconfigure


radio data of physical
NodeBs
in
other
versions in batches by
using a summary data
file.

Table 3 Description of import modes


Import Mode

Whether
the
Object
Data
Exists on
the CME

Whether
Data Result on the CME After File Import
the Object
Data
Exists in
the File

Append

Yes

Yes

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

The CME overwrites the existing data with the data in the
file.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

394

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Table 2 Configuration objects in Basic Info


Configuration
Object

Wheth
er
Data
Exists
on the
CME

Wheth
er
Data
Exists
in the
File

Results After the File Is Imported into the


CME

NodeB

Yes

Yes

The CME contains the existing data and the NodeB data in the
file and reallocates NodeB IDs.

No

Yes

The CME adds the NodeB data in the file.

No

Yes

For the external cell data, the CME adds the data in the
file.

The CME processes neighbor relationships in the


following methods:

If the external cells related to the neighbor


relationships to be imported have been configured
on the CME, the CME adds the neighboring cell
data in the file.

If the external cells related to the neighbor


relationships to be imported have not been
configured on the CME and the source cell
cannot be found, the CME does not process the
data.

If the local cell related to the neighbor


relationships to be imported does not exist on the
CME, the CME does not process the data.

NOTE:
BIDIRECTION in the file takes effect only in the
Append mode.

Yes

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

No

If BIDIRECTION is set to Yes and inverse neighboring


cells do not exist, the CME processes data in the following
ways:

Parameter values for the inverse neighboring cells come


from the source cell.

If no external cell exists, the CME also automatically


configures external cells and uses the default NE values
for the parameters of the external cells.

If any external cells exist and the parameter


configurations of the external cells are different from
those of the source cell, the CME does not reconfigure
external cell parameters and obtains the parameter
values of neighboring cells from the source cell.

No data in the CME changes.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

395

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Table 2 Configuration objects in Basic Info


Configuration
Object

Wheth
er
Data
Exists
on the
CME

Wheth
er
Data
Exists
in the
File

Results After the File Is Imported into the


CME

NodeB

Yes

Yes

The CME contains the existing data and the NodeB data in the
file and reallocates NodeB IDs.

No

Yes

The CME adds the NodeB data in the file.

Yes

Yes

The CME overwrites the existing data with the data in the
file.

Neighbor
relationships
are No
updated on a cell
basis.

Yes

The CME adds the data in the file.

External cells are Yes


updated on a base
station
controller
basis.

No

The CME deletes the existing data.

Yes

Yes

The CME deletes the existing data.

No

Yes

No data in the CME changes.

Yes

No

No data in the CME changes.

Update
NOTE:

Delete

e.

Click Next. The CME starts the import.


NOTE:
The CME automatically filters invalid parameters in the file when verifying the import.

f.

Perform operations based on the import result.

Table 4 Operation description


If...

Then...

The import is
successful

The CME displays a message stating that the import is successful. Click Finish.

The import fails 1. The dialog box displays a message stating that error data exists in the data planning file. You
can view the error report or double-click the error record in the lower part of the dialog box
to open the data file. The CME locates the error data row in the file according to the error
information in the dialog box. Then, you can reconfigure data based on the information. If the
location information in the error record is incomplete, the CME cannot automatically locate
the row in the file.
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

396

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Table 4 Operation description


If...

Then...
2. After reconfiguring data, you can click Retry to import the data again.

----End

7.5.5.3 Co-MPT
When the new mode is UMTS, you need to use the summary data file for introducing RATs
(SRAN application) on the CME to configure data.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.
Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
----End
For details, see Expanding Mode of a Co-MPT BTS in Batches.
Introducing RATs to Co-MPT Base Stations in Batches

Before exporting data based on a customized summary data file, use the function of customizing a summary
data file to customize a summary data file for RAT introduction. For details about how to customize a
summary data file, see Manually Customizing a Summary Data File.
In RAT introduction scenarios, you need to customize application maintenance mode parameters, including AT
and APPMNTMODE, of each RAT to a summary data file. When setting parameter values, you are advised to
set APPMNTMODE of the RAT to be introduced to TESTING.

Export co-MPT base station data to the summary data file for introducing RATs.
Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Export Data > Export Base Station Multimode Expansion
Data (CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application >
Export Data > Export Base Station Multimode Expansion Data (U2000
client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to export co-MPT base station data.
Step 2 Select a scenario, RAT to be introduced to the co-MPT base station (for example, select LTE
for a co-MPT (GU) base station to be expanded to a co-MPT (GUL) base station), controller
version, base station version, base station to which RATs are to be introduced, and sample
base station, as shown in Figure 1.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

397

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Figure 1 Export expansion data

NOTE:
If you need to select base stations in batches by using a file, click Export to obtain an Excel file, edit
the file, and click Load to import it.

Step 3 Click Next and perform operations based on application scenarios.


Option

Operation

Summary data file: Select this option when a


summary data file has been prepared. Then, the CME
exports base station data based on the configuration
objects in the prepared summary data file.

1. Select Summary data file.


2. Specify save paths for both the prepared summary data
file and the file where base station data is to be
exported.

Custom MOC: Select this option when no summary


1. Select Custom MOC.
data file is prepared. Then, the CME exports base station 2. Select configuration objects of the base stations to be
data based on the configuration objects selected in the
exported and the save path for the file where the base
wizard.
station data is to be exported.
Step 4 Click Next. The CME starts to export the data.
Step 5 After the export is complete, click Finish.
NOTE:
After the export is complete, you can click the link in the dialog box to open the exported file.

Configure data in the exported file.

Summary data file, see Editing a Summary Data File (Customization Tool-based).

Custom MOC, see Editing a Summary Data File (MOC Export-based) .

Import the summary data file in which data about RATs to be introduced has been edited into the CME.
Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Import Data > Import Base Station Multimode Expansion
Data (CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application >

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

398

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Import Data > Import Base Station Multimode Expansion Data (U2000
client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to import the summary data file for
introducing RATs.
Step 2 Click

and select the summary data file to be imported.

Step 3 Click Next and select co-MPT base stations for which you want to expand RATs.
If...

Then...

The imported summary


1. Click Next and select base stations you want to create.
data file contains only data 2. (Optional) Select Best Effort.
about base stations
NOTE:

The imported summary


data file contains data
about both base station
controllers and base
stations

If Best effort is selected, the CME skips the error information and continues the import.
When the import is complete, the CME rolls back only incorrect base station data.

If Best effort is not selected, the CME rolls back all the imported data if the import fails.

1. Click Next and select base stations you want to create.


2. (Optional) Select Best Effort.
NOTE:

If Best effort is selected, the CME skips the error information and continues the import.
When the import is complete, the CME rolls back only incorrect base station data.

If Best effort is not selected, the CME rolls back all the imported data if the import fails.

3. Optional: To generate configuration scripts in a wizard, select Export scripts


and perform the following operations:
a.

Select a mode for generating scripts.

NOTE:

To generate scripts of logical base stations in the same file, select Batch.

To generate scripts of logical base stations in different files by base station, select One by
one.

b.

Specify a save path for scripts.

4. (Optional) Set an encryption mode for exported scripts.

No: The exported scripts do not have encryption passwords and no encryption
passwords are required when you loading projects.

Yes: The exported scripts have encryption passwords. When loading projects, you
have to enter encryption passwords by performing the following operations:

NOTE:
If an encrypted password has been set for the exproted script, you cannot check the script on the
local PC. Instead, you have to check it using the script executor.

1.

Select Yes.

2.

Click Set Password. In the displayed dialog box, enter the encryption
password as required.
The password must contain 6 to 32 characters.

3.

Click OK.
The exported encrypted script files are in .ecf format.

Step 4 (Optional and required when the new RATs include GSM) Click Next to set import options.
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

399

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Set the start ID, frequency hopping attributes, and channel rules based on planned data.
Step 5 Click Next. The CME starts the import.
If...

Then...

The import
succeeds

Click Finish to exit the wizard.

The import fails

1. View the failure report, or double-click the error message in the error list
to open the summary data file and locate the cell where the error data
exists.
2. Modify error data based on the error message.
3. After data is corrected, click Retry to import the summary data file again.

Follow-up Procedure
After introducing RATs to the base station, use the function of exporting auto-deployment
files to export the deployment list and data configuration file in the RAT introduction
scenario. For detailed operations, see Exporting Files Related to Base Station
Creation/RAT Introduction to Co-MPT Base Stations.
NOTE:
You can use either of the following methods to adjust other data after introducing RATs to a base station:

Export the deployment list and data configuration file for RAT introduction, and deliver them to the
live network for them to take effect. Then synchronize the data to the planned data area, adjust other
data, and then export an incremental script.

Do not export the deployment list and data configuration file for RAT introduction. Instead, continue
adjusting other data, and then use the function of exporting the site deployment list and data
configuration files to combine and export data in the RAT introduction and adjustment scenarios.

7.6 Configuring LTE Data


This section describes how to prepare and adjust LTE data when LTE works as the original
and new modes.
The following table list the configuration method when LTE works as the original mode.
Table 1.1 LTE working as the original mode
Scena
rio

Data
Type

CME Template

Reference

Separate
-MPT

Equipment
data

The CME template is used to configure


the summary data file in batches (LTE
application).

Adjusting SeparateMPT Device Data

Transmissi
on data

The CME template is used to configure


the summary data file in batches (LTE
application).

Adjusting SeparateMPT Transmission


Data

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

400

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

Scena
rio

CoMPT

7 Preparing Data

Data
Type

CME Template

Reference

Radio data

The CME template is used to configure


the summary data file in batches (LTE
application).

Adjusting SeparateMPT Radio Data

Equipment
data

The CME template is used to adjust RF


data (SRAN application).

Adjusting Co-MPT
Device Data

Transmissi
on data

The CME template is used to configure


the summary data file in batches (SRAN
application).

Adjusting Co-MPT
Transmission Data

Radio data

The CME template is used to configure


the summary data file in batches (SRAN
application).

Adjusting Co-MPT
Radio Data

The following table list the configuration method when LTE works as the new mode.
Table 1.2 LTE working as the new mode
Scena
rio

Data
Type

CME Template

Reference

Separate
-MPT

Equipment,
transmissio
n, and
radio data

The CME template is used to deploy a


new site using the summary data file.

Adjusting SeparateMPT Data

CoMPT

Equipment,
transmissio
n, and
radio data

The CME template is used to introduce


RATs using the summary data file (SRAN
application).

Adjusting Co-MPT
Data

7.6.1 Preparing Equipment Data


This section describes how to adjust equipment data in co-MPT and separate-MPT scenarios
when the original mode is LTE. The equipment data to be adjusted includes the antenna and
feeder, BBU, RXU, and CPRI.

7.6.1.1 Separate-MPT
When the original mode is LTE in separate-MPT scenarios, you need to use the summary data
file for batch configuration (LTE application) on the CME. If only the RF-related equipment
data (RXU board/TRX/cell capacity) needs to be adjusted, you can adjust RF data using the
summary data file.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.
Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

401

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Step 3 Import the template file.


----End
For details about how to use the summary data file for batch configuration (LTE application),
see Importing and Exporting eNodeB Batch Configuration Data.
Importing and Exporting Co-MPT Base Station Data for Batch Configuration

Export base station data to the summary data file.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Export Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data
(CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Export
Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to configure data in batches, as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Exporting base station bulk configuration data

Step 2 Select a reconfiguration scenario, RAT of NEs, versions of base stations and base station
controllers, and list of base stations. Then, click Next.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

If you select the GSM base station controller and base station data, the implementation
of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Abis interface data of a
single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing and Exporting Abis
Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

402

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

If you select the UMTS base station controller and base station data, the implementation
of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Iub interface data of a
single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing and Exporting Iub Data
for Batch Reconfiguration.

If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be
reconfigured together.

Step 3 Select Custom MOC, set objects you want to export, and specify a save path for the exported
file.
NOTE:
To export data based on the objects contained in a prepared summary data file, perform the following
steps: For details about the export mechanism, see Introduction to the Export Mechanism for
Exporting Data Based On an Existing File.
a.

Select Bulk configuration template.

b.

In Bulk configuration data file, select the prepared file and export configuration data
from the CME based on the MOs in this file.

c.

In Export path, specify a save path for the file that contains the exported data.

Step 4 Click Next. The CME verifies the configuration data to be exported.
If the verification fails, the CME does not export data.
Step 5 After the export is complete, click Finish.

Open the local summary data file and reconfigure data in the summary data file based on planned data.If
parameters to be reconfigured for each base station are the same and numbers of parameter records are the
same, it is convenient to reconfigure them in the MOC-integration view. For detailed operations, see Editing a
Summary Data File for Batch Configuration (MOC-Integration View) .

Import the modified summary data file.


Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Import Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data
(CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Import
Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to import data for batch configuration.
Step 2 Specify the RAT of NEs to be imported, determine whether to import base station controller
data (base station data must be selected), and click Next.
If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be reconfigured
together.
Step 3 Start a wizard based on scenarios.
If...

Then...

You have selected GSM The CME starts the wizard for importing Abis interface data. For detailed operations, see
base station controllers Importing and Exporting Abis Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
and base stations in the
preceding step
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

403

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If...

7 Preparing Data

Then...

You have selected


The CME starts the wizard for importing Iub interface data. For detailed operations, see
UMTS base station
Importing and Exporting Iub Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
controllers and base
stations in the preceding
step
You have selected only
base stations in the
preceding step

The CME starts the wizard for importing base station data for batch configuration. The
procedure is as follows:
1. Select the file you want to import and click Next.
NOTE:
The CME supports the file import even if the RAT contained in the file is different from the selected
RAT. For example, if GSM is selected but the RAT contained in the file is UMTS or LTE, the file can
still be imported.

2. Select the base stations for which you want to import the file and click Next.
NOTE:
If Best effort is selected, the CME skips the error information and continues the import. When
the import is complete, the CME rolls back only incorrect base station data.

If Best effort is not selected, the CME rolls back all the imported data if the import fails.

3. After the import is complete, click Finish.

If the CME displays a message stating that the operation is successful, configuration
data has been successfully imported.

If the CME displays a message stating that the import failed, base station configuration
data failed to be imported. If this occurs, you have to reconfigure the data based on
the error information.

NOTE:
In the error message list, you can:

Click an error message to view the details at the bottom of the wizard.

Double-click an error message to switch to the corresponding location in the imported file. Then,
reconfigure the data based on the error information.

For details about how to adjust RF data using the summary data file, see Importing and
Exporting eNodeB RF Adjustment Data (standalone function).
Importing and Exporting Co-MPT Base Station Data for RF Adjustment

Export the summary data file for RF adjustment.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the CME, choose SRAN Application > MBTS Application >
Export Data > Export Base Station RF Adjustment Data. A dialog box is
displayed.
Step 2 Set parameters displayed in the dialog box and specify the base stations whose data you want
to export.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Select Co-MPT BTS RF Adjustment from the Scenario drop-down list.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

404

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Specify the RATs of the base stations whose data you want to export.

Specify the versions of the base stations and base station controller whose data you want
to export.

Select the base stations whose data you want to export.


You can select base stations in the NE list. You can also click Load to quickly select
base stations defined in the file by importing a file.
NOTE:
When selecting base stations in the NE list, you can select base stations and then click Export to
export the selected base stations as a file for future selections.

If the file is unavailable when you select base stations by importing a file, you can click Export to
obtain a file, edit the file, and then click Load to import the file into the CME.

For details about rules for loading the file, see File Rules.

Step 3 Click Next. Then, specify the export mode, summary data file, and export path.
Table 3 Setting an export mode
Export Mode

Operation

Custom MOC: Select objects you

1. Select Custom MOC.

want to export in the wizard


directly and enable the CME to
export data based on the selected
objects.

2. Select objects to be exported.


NOTE:
The CME adds objects that support adjustment by default. You can adjust the objects as
required.

3. Specify a save path for the exported files in Export path.


RF adjustment template: Export

1. Select RF adjustment template.


data based on the objects contained 2. Select the prepared summary data file for adjustment in RF adjustment
in a prepared file.
data file.
3. Specify a save path for the exported files in Export path.
Step 4 Click Next. The CME starts the export.
Step 5 Click Finish.

Import the summary data file for RF adjustment.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the CME, choose SRAN Application > MBTS Application >
Import Data > Import Base Station RF Adjustment Data. A dialog box is
displayed.
Step 2 Select the file you want to import.
Step 3 Click Next, select the base stations for which you want to import the file.
You can select base stations in the NE list. You can also click Load to quickly select base
stations defined in the file by importing a file.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

405

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

NOTE:
When selecting base stations in the NE list, you can select base stations and then click Export to
export the selected base stations as a file for future selections.

If the file is unavailable when you select base stations by importing a file, you can click Export to
obtain a file, edit the file, and then click Load to import the file into the CME.

For details about rules for loading the file, see File Rules.

Step 4 Optional: To generate configuration scripts in the wizard, select Export scripts and perform
the following operations:
a.

Select the mode of generating scripts.

Scripts on the controller side:

To save scripts of logical base stations in the same file, select Batch.

To save scripts of logical base stations in separate files by base station, select
One by one.

Scripts on the base station side (only base stations in SRAN10.1 and later support
splitting scripts by RRU chain/ring):
To generate RRU incremental scripts in different files by RRU chain/ring, select Split
scripts by RRU chain. The CME automatically generates common incremental
scripts and RRU chain/ring incremental scripts. For base stations whose RRU
chain/ring fails to be separated, the CME generates scripts that are not separated.
NOTE:
If the common incremental script of the base station depends on the incremental RRU chain/ring script
or if two incremental RRU chain/ring scripts are associated, scripts cannot be separated by RRU
chain/ring.

b.

Specify a save path for scripts.

c.

Set an encryption mode for exported scripts.

No: The exported scripts do not have encryption passwords and no encryption passwords

are required when you loading projects.

Yes: The exported scripts have encryption passwords. When loading projects, you have

to enter encryption passwords by performing the following operations:


NOTE:
If an encrypted password has been set for the exproted script, you cannot check the script on the local
PC. Instead, you have to check it using the script executor.
i.

Select Yes.

ii.

Click Set Password. In the displayed dialog box, enter the encryption password as
required.
The password must contain 6 to 32 characters.

iii.

Click OK.
The exported encrypted script files are in .ecf format.

Step 5 Click Next, set the parameters for GSM service.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

406

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Table 4 Setting attributes


Attribute

Description

Cell ID

The CME can automatically allocate IDs to new cells and TRXs.

TRX ID

Automatic allocation rules: After you enter a reference ID in the wizard, the CME
searches for available IDs from the reference ID and allocates them to new cells and
TRXs. For example, after allocating a reference TRX ID to the first TRX, the CME
generates a new ID by automatically adding 1 to the reference TRX ID and allocates the
new ID to the second TRX. If the generated ID has been used, the CME automatically
adds 1 to the ID until it is available and allocates the ID to the second TRX.
NOTE:
The minimum ID available under the NE selected in the wizard functions as the start value by
default on the CME.

FH Attributes

When the imported data file contains different NEs, the CME searches for available IDs from the
preset start value and allocates them.

The CME generates data based on the FH type in the data file for RF adjustment. If the
FH type is not specified in the data file, the CME generates data based on the FH type
selected in the wizard.
NOTE:

FH type has the following values: NO_FH, RF_FH, BaseBand_FH(BCCH HOP), and
BaseBand_FH(BCCH NOT HOP), indicating no FH, RF FH, baseband FH (BCCH TRX
involved), and baseband FH (BCCH TRX not involved), respectively.

Channel Rule

The configuration of the FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency band parameter is as follows:

When FH type is NO_FH, the configuration of FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency


band does not take effect.

When FH type is RF_FH, FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency band can be set to In


Different MAGroup or In One MAGroup.

When FH type is BaseBand_FH(BCCH HOP) or BaseBand_FH(BCCH NOT


HOP), FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency band can be set to In Different
MAGroup, In One MAGroup, or EGSM Frequency Not In Any MAGroup.

Set channel allocation rules based on the RF adjustment scenarios.

New Cells Channel Rule: configured when the data file for RF adjustment contains

new cells or you need to re-allocate channels of existing cells. For details about
channel allocation rules, see Channel Allocation Rules.
NOTE:
In the data file for RF adjustment, if Cell Extension Type is set to Double Timeslot
Extension Cell, the configuration of Channel Rule does not take effect. The CME
automatically allocates timeslots 0 and 2 on the BCCH TRX to the BCCH and SDCCH, respectively,
and allocates all the other timeslots in the cell to TCHs.

Existed Cells Channel Rule: configured when the data file for RF adjustment

contains only new TRXs or you need to add TRXs in an existing cell.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

When Channel Allocation Rule 0 for TRXs is selected, the CME re-allocates
all channels of the imported cells based on the channel allocation rule specified
by New Cells Channel Rule.

When Channel Allocation Rule 1 for TRXs is selected, the CME allocates

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

407

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Table 4 Setting attributes


Attribute

Description
only channels of new TRXs based on the following rules:
1.

Rank TRXs by TRX No. in ascending order.

2.

Allocate PDCCHs: PDCCHs are allocated to channels 6, 5, 7, 4, 3, 2, 1, and 0


of a TRX in sequence.

3.

Allocate SDCCHs: Based on the sequence of TRX numbers, allocate SDCCHs


to channel 0 of all new TRXs in the current cell, channel 1, and so on.

NOTE:
The rules do not take effect when the cell to which a TRX belongs is a double timeslot extension
cell.

The number of available channels is the difference between the sum of Number of PDCH and
Number of SDCCH specified in the data file for RF adjustment and the number of configured
channels of the cell to which new TRXs belong.

Step 6 Click Next, when the import is complete, click Finish.

If the CME displays a message stating that the operation is successful, configuration data
has been successfully imported.

If the CME displays a message stating that the import failed, base station configuration
data failed to be imported. If this occurs, you have to reconfigure the data based on the
error information.
NOTE:
In the error message list, you can:

Click an error message to view the details at the bottom of the wizard.

Double-click an error message to switch to the corresponding location in the imported file. Then,
reconfigure the data based on the error information.

Follow-up Procedure
If you select Split scripts by RRU chain in the wizard of importing RF adjustment data,
you need to activate common incremental scripts of a single base station during script
activation and then activate RRU chain/ring incremental scripts in sequence by task. The
CME does not allow you to activate multiple scripts of a base station simultaneously. After
activating a script, ensure that the script takes effect on the base station side and the
base station is connected before activating the next script.

7.6.1.2 Co-MPT
When the original mode is LTE in co-MPT scenarios, you need to use the summary data file
for batch configuration (SRAN application) on the CME. If only the RF-related equipment
data (RXU board/TRX/cell capacity) needs to be adjusted, you can adjust RF data using the
summary data file.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

408

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
----End
For details about how to use the summary data file for batch configuration (LTE application),
see Importing and Exporting Co-MPT BTS Batch Configuration Data.
Importing and Exporting Co-MPT Base Station Data for Batch Configuration

Export base station data to the summary data file.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Export Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data
(CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Export
Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to configure data in batches, as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Exporting base station bulk configuration data

Step 2 Select a reconfiguration scenario, RAT of NEs, versions of base stations and base station
controllers, and list of base stations. Then, click Next.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

If you select the GSM base station controller and base station data, the implementation
of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Abis interface data of a

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

409

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing and Exporting Abis
Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration.

If you select the UMTS base station controller and base station data, the implementation
of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Iub interface data of a
single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing and Exporting Iub Data
for Batch Reconfiguration.

If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be
reconfigured together.

Step 3 Select Custom MOC, set objects you want to export, and specify a save path for the exported
file.
NOTE:
To export data based on the objects contained in a prepared summary data file, perform the following
steps: For details about the export mechanism, see Introduction to the Export Mechanism for
Exporting Data Based On an Existing File.

e.

Select Bulk configuration template.

f.

In Bulk configuration data file, select the prepared file and export configuration
data from the CME based on the MOs in this file.

g.

In Export path, specify a save path for the file that contains the exported data.

Step 4 Click Next. The CME verifies the configuration data to be exported.
If the verification fails, the CME does not export data.
Step 5 After the export is complete, click Finish.

Open the local summary data file and reconfigure data in the summary data file based on planned data.If
parameters to be reconfigured for each base station are the same and numbers of parameter records are the
same, it is convenient to reconfigure them in the MOC-integration view. For detailed operations, see Editing a
Summary Data File for Batch Configuration (MOC-Integration View) .

Import the modified summary data file.


Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Import Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data
(CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Import
Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to import data for batch configuration.
Step 2 Specify the RAT of NEs to be imported, determine whether to import base station controller
data (base station data must be selected), and click Next.
If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be reconfigured
together.
Step 3 Start a wizard based on scenarios.
If...

Then...

You have selected GSM The CME starts the wizard for importing Abis interface data. For detailed operations, see
base station controllers Importing and Exporting Abis Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
and base stations in the
preceding step
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

410

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If...

7 Preparing Data

Then...

You have selected


The CME starts the wizard for importing Iub interface data. For detailed operations, see
UMTS base station
Importing and Exporting Iub Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
controllers and base
stations in the preceding
step
You have selected only
base stations in the
preceding step

The CME starts the wizard for importing base station data for batch configuration. The
procedure is as follows:
1. Select the file you want to import and click Next.
NOTE:
The CME supports the file import even if the RAT contained in the file is different from the selected
RAT. For example, if GSM is selected but the RAT contained in the file is UMTS or LTE, the file can
still be imported.

2. Select the base stations for which you want to import the file and click Next.
NOTE:
If Best effort is selected, the CME skips the error information and continues the import. When
the import is complete, the CME rolls back only incorrect base station data.

If Best effort is not selected, the CME rolls back all the imported data if the import fails.

3. After the import is complete, click Finish.

If the CME displays a message stating that the operation is successful, configuration
data has been successfully imported.

If the CME displays a message stating that the import failed, base station configuration
data failed to be imported. If this occurs, you have to reconfigure the data based on
the error information.

NOTE:
In the error message list, you can:

Click an error message to view the details at the bottom of the wizard.

Double-click an error message to switch to the corresponding location in the imported file. Then,
reconfigure the data based on the error information.

For details about how to adjust RF data using the summary data file, see Importing and
Exporting Co-MPT BTS RF Adjustment Data (standalone function).
Importing and Exporting Co-MPT Base Station Data for RF Adjustment

Export the summary data file for RF adjustment.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the CME, choose SRAN Application > MBTS Application >
Export Data > Export Base Station RF Adjustment Data. A dialog box is
displayed.
Step 2 Set parameters displayed in the dialog box and specify the base stations whose data you want
to export.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Select Co-MPT BTS RF Adjustment from the Scenario drop-down list.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

411

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Specify the RATs of the base stations whose data you want to export.

Specify the versions of the base stations and base station controller whose data you want
to export.

Select the base stations whose data you want to export.


You can select base stations in the NE list. You can also click Load to quickly select
base stations defined in the file by importing a file.
NOTE:
When selecting base stations in the NE list, you can select base stations and then click Export to
export the selected base stations as a file for future selections.

If the file is unavailable when you select base stations by importing a file, you can click Export to
obtain a file, edit the file, and then click Load to import the file into the CME.

For details about rules for loading the file, see File Rules.

Step 3 Click Next. Then, specify the export mode, summary data file, and export path.
Table 3 Setting an export mode
Export Mode

Operation

Custom MOC: Select objects you

1. Select Custom MOC.

want to export in the wizard


directly and enable the CME to
export data based on the selected
objects.

2. Select objects to be exported.


NOTE:
The CME adds objects that support adjustment by default. You can adjust the objects as
required.

3. Specify a save path for the exported files in Export path.


RF adjustment template: Export

1. Select RF adjustment template.


data based on the objects contained 2. Select the prepared summary data file for adjustment in RF adjustment
in a prepared file.
data file.
3. Specify a save path for the exported files in Export path.
Step 4 Click Next. The CME starts the export.
Step 5 Click Finish.

Import the summary data file for RF adjustment.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the CME, choose SRAN Application > MBTS Application >
Import Data > Import Base Station RF Adjustment Data. A dialog box is
displayed.
Step 2 Select the file you want to import.
Step 3 Click Next, select the base stations for which you want to import the file.
You can select base stations in the NE list. You can also click Load to quickly select base
stations defined in the file by importing a file.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

412

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

NOTE:
When selecting base stations in the NE list, you can select base stations and then click Export to
export the selected base stations as a file for future selections.

If the file is unavailable when you select base stations by importing a file, you can click Export to
obtain a file, edit the file, and then click Load to import the file into the CME.

For details about rules for loading the file, see File Rules.

Step 4 Optional: To generate configuration scripts in the wizard, select Export scripts and perform
the following operations:
a.

Select the mode of generating scripts.

Scripts on the controller side:

To save scripts of logical base stations in the same file, select Batch.

To save scripts of logical base stations in separate files by base station, select
One by one.

Scripts on the base station side (only base stations in SRAN10.1 and later support
splitting scripts by RRU chain/ring):
To generate RRU incremental scripts in different files by RRU chain/ring, select Split
scripts by RRU chain. The CME automatically generates common incremental
scripts and RRU chain/ring incremental scripts. For base stations whose RRU
chain/ring fails to be separated, the CME generates scripts that are not separated.
NOTE:
If the common incremental script of the base station depends on the incremental RRU chain/ring script
or if two incremental RRU chain/ring scripts are associated, scripts cannot be separated by RRU
chain/ring.

b.

Specify a save path for scripts.

c.

Set an encryption mode for exported scripts.

No: The exported scripts do not have encryption passwords and no encryption passwords

are required when you loading projects.

Yes: The exported scripts have encryption passwords. When loading projects, you have

to enter encryption passwords by performing the following operations:


NOTE:
If an encrypted password has been set for the exproted script, you cannot check the script on the local
PC. Instead, you have to check it using the script executor.
i.

Select Yes.

ii.

Click Set Password. In the displayed dialog box, enter the encryption password as
required.
The password must contain 6 to 32 characters.

iii.

Click OK.
The exported encrypted script files are in .ecf format.

Step 5 Click Next, set the parameters for GSM service.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

413

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Table 4 Setting attributes


Attribute

Description

Cell ID

The CME can automatically allocate IDs to new cells and TRXs.

TRX ID

Automatic allocation rules: After you enter a reference ID in the wizard, the CME
searches for available IDs from the reference ID and allocates them to new cells and
TRXs. For example, after allocating a reference TRX ID to the first TRX, the CME
generates a new ID by automatically adding 1 to the reference TRX ID and allocates the
new ID to the second TRX. If the generated ID has been used, the CME automatically
adds 1 to the ID until it is available and allocates the ID to the second TRX.
NOTE:
The minimum ID available under the NE selected in the wizard functions as the start value by
default on the CME.

FH Attributes

When the imported data file contains different NEs, the CME searches for available IDs from the
preset start value and allocates them.

The CME generates data based on the FH type in the data file for RF adjustment. If the
FH type is not specified in the data file, the CME generates data based on the FH type
selected in the wizard.
NOTE:

FH type has the following values: NO_FH, RF_FH, BaseBand_FH(BCCH HOP), and
BaseBand_FH(BCCH NOT HOP), indicating no FH, RF FH, baseband FH (BCCH TRX
involved), and baseband FH (BCCH TRX not involved), respectively.

Channel Rule

The configuration of the FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency band parameter is as follows:

When FH type is NO_FH, the configuration of FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency


band does not take effect.

When FH type is RF_FH, FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency band can be set to In


Different MAGroup or In One MAGroup.

When FH type is BaseBand_FH(BCCH HOP) or BaseBand_FH(BCCH NOT


HOP), FH in PGSM/EGSM frequency band can be set to In Different
MAGroup, In One MAGroup, or EGSM Frequency Not In Any MAGroup.

Set channel allocation rules based on the RF adjustment scenarios.

New Cells Channel Rule: configured when the data file for RF adjustment contains

new cells or you need to re-allocate channels of existing cells. For details about
channel allocation rules, see Channel Allocation Rules.
NOTE:
In the data file for RF adjustment, if Cell Extension Type is set to Double Timeslot
Extension Cell, the configuration of Channel Rule does not take effect. The CME
automatically allocates timeslots 0 and 2 on the BCCH TRX to the BCCH and SDCCH, respectively,
and allocates all the other timeslots in the cell to TCHs.

Existed Cells Channel Rule: configured when the data file for RF adjustment

contains only new TRXs or you need to add TRXs in an existing cell.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

When Channel Allocation Rule 0 for TRXs is selected, the CME re-allocates
all channels of the imported cells based on the channel allocation rule specified
by New Cells Channel Rule.

When Channel Allocation Rule 1 for TRXs is selected, the CME allocates

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

414

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Table 4 Setting attributes


Attribute

Description
only channels of new TRXs based on the following rules:
1.

Rank TRXs by TRX No. in ascending order.

2.

Allocate PDCCHs: PDCCHs are allocated to channels 6, 5, 7, 4, 3, 2, 1, and 0


of a TRX in sequence.

3.

Allocate SDCCHs: Based on the sequence of TRX numbers, allocate SDCCHs


to channel 0 of all new TRXs in the current cell, channel 1, and so on.

NOTE:
The rules do not take effect when the cell to which a TRX belongs is a double timeslot extension
cell.

The number of available channels is the difference between the sum of Number of PDCH and
Number of SDCCH specified in the data file for RF adjustment and the number of configured
channels of the cell to which new TRXs belong.

Step 6 Click Next, when the import is complete, click Finish.

If the CME displays a message stating that the operation is successful, configuration data
has been successfully imported.

If the CME displays a message stating that the import failed, base station configuration
data failed to be imported. If this occurs, you have to reconfigure the data based on the
error information.
NOTE:
In the error message list, you can:

Click an error message to view the details at the bottom of the wizard.

Double-click an error message to switch to the corresponding location in the imported file. Then,
reconfigure the data based on the error information.

Follow-up Procedure
If you select Split scripts by RRU chain in the wizard of importing RF adjustment data,
you need to activate common incremental scripts of a single base station during script
activation and then activate RRU chain/ring incremental scripts in sequence by task. The
CME does not allow you to activate multiple scripts of a base station simultaneously. After
activating a script, ensure that the script takes effect on the base station side and the
base station is connected before activating the next script.

7.6.2 Preparing Transmission Data


This section describes how to adjust radio data in co-MPT and separate-MPT scenarios when
the original mode is LTE. The transmission data to be adjusted includes the following MOs:
IP, IPPATH, SCTPLINK, CPBEAR, and IPRT.

7.6.2.1 Separate-MPT
When the original mode is LTE in separate-MPT scenarios, you need to use the summary data
file for batch configuration (LTE application) on the CME to configure transmission data.
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

415

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

The configuration procedure is as follows:


Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.
Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
----End
For details, see Importing and Exporting eNodeB Batch Configuration Data.
Importing and Exporting Abis Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration

Export the Abis interface data for batch reconfiguration.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose GSM Application > Export Data
> Export Abis Bulk Configuration Data (CME client mode) or CME > GSM
Application > Export Data > Export Abis Bulk Configuration Data (U2000
client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to export the data you want to
reconfigure in batches.
Step 2 Select the base station controller version, base station version, and related base station, and
click Next.
You can select base stations in the NE list. You can also click Load to quickly select base
stations defined in the file by importing a file.
NOTE:

When selecting base stations in the NE list, you can select base stations and then click Export to
export the selected base stations as a file for future selections.
If the file is unavailable when you select base stations by importing a file, you can click Export to
obtain a file, edit the file, and then click Load to import the file into the CME.

For details about rules for loading the file, see File Rules.

Step 3 Perform operations based on application scenarios.


If you need to...

Then...

Select objects you want to export in the wizard directly 1. Select Custom MOC.
and enable the CME to export data based on the selected 2. Select objects you want to export and specify a save
objects.
path for the exported file.
NOTE:
This mode does not apply to GBTSs.

Export data based on the objects contained in a prepared 1. Select Bulk configuration template.
file.
2. In Bulk configuration data file, select the
prepared file and export configuration data from the
CME based on the MOs in this file.
3. In Export path, specify a save path for the file that
contains the exported data.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

416

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Step 4 Click Next. The CME verifies the configuration data to be exported.
If the verification fails, the CME does not export data.
Step 5 After the export is complete, click Finish.

Import the Abis interface data that has been reconfigured in batches.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose GSM Application > Import Data
> Import Abis Bulk Configuration Data (CME client mode) or CME > GSM
Application > Import Data > Import Abis Bulk Configuration Data (U2000
client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to import the Abis data that has been
reconfigured in batches.
Step 2 Perform operations as required.
If you need to...

Then...

Import the file only (without


generating a script immediately
when the export is successful)

Select the file you want to import and click Next. The CME starts to import the
file.

Generate a script file


immediately when the import is
successful

1. Select the file you want to import and select Export script by wizard.
2. Click Next.
3. Set the script generation information.

NOTE:

a.

This mode does not apply to GBTSs.

Select Batch or One by one to generate all logical base station


scripts in one script file or generate scripts by base station,
respectively.

NOTE:
When multiple base stations share MOs at the bottom link layer, such as MOs ETHIP,
PPPLNK, and MPGRP, if the script generation mode is set to One by one, primary
information (information about the subrack and slot numbers of an interface board) about
these MOs cannot be modified if the related IP addresses are not changed. Otherwise, data
may conflict after being imported into the CME.

b.

(Optional) If One by one is selected, click Up or Down to


adjust the sequence for running base station scripts.

c.

Specify a save path for the script file.

d.

(Optional) Set an encryption mode for exported scripts.

No: The exported scripts do not have encryption passwords and no

encryption passwords are required when you loading projects.

Yes: The exported scripts have encryption passwords. When loading projects,

you have to enter encryption passwords by performing the following


operations:
NOTE:

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

If an encrypted password has been set for the exproted script, you cannot check the
script on the local PC. Instead, you have to check it using the script executor.

1.

Select Yes.

2.

Click Set Password. In the displayed dialog box, enter the


encryption password as required.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

417

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If you need to...

7 Preparing Data

Then...
The password must contain 6 to 32 characters.
3.

Click OK.
The exported encrypted script files are in .ecf format.
e.

(Optional) To enable the CME to automatically start the script


executor after a script is generated successfully in the wizard,
select Launch the script executor if the task is successful.

f.

Click Next. The CME starts to import the data.

Step 3 View the import report and click Finish.

7.6.2.2 Co-MPT
When the original mode is LTE in co-MPT scenarios, you need to use the summary data file
for batch configuration (SRAN application) on the CME to configure transmission data.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.
Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
----End
For details, see Importing and Exporting Co-MPT BTS Batch Configuration Data.
Importing and Exporting Co-MPT Base Station Data for Batch Configuration

Export base station data to the summary data file.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Export Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data
(CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Export
Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to configure data in batches, as shown in Figure 1.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

418

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Figure 1 Exporting base station bulk configuration data

Step 2 Select a reconfiguration scenario, RAT of NEs, versions of base stations and base station
controllers, and list of base stations. Then, click Next.

If you select the GSM base station controller and base station data, the implementation
of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Abis interface data of a
single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing and Exporting Abis
Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration.

If you select the UMTS base station controller and base station data, the implementation
of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Iub interface data of a
single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing and Exporting Iub Data
for Batch Reconfiguration.

If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be
reconfigured together.

Step 3 Select Custom MOC, set objects you want to export, and specify a save path for the exported
file.
NOTE:
To export data based on the objects contained in a prepared summary data file, perform the following
steps: For details about the export mechanism, see Introduction to the Export Mechanism for
Exporting Data Based On an Existing File.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

419

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

a.

Select Bulk configuration template.

b.

In Bulk configuration data file, select the prepared file and export configuration data
from the CME based on the MOs in this file.

c.

In Export path, specify a save path for the file that contains the exported data.

Step 4 Click Next. The CME verifies the configuration data to be exported.
If the verification fails, the CME does not export data.
Step 5 After the export is complete, click Finish.

Open the local summary data file and reconfigure data in the summary data file based on planned data.If
parameters to be reconfigured for each base station are the same and numbers of parameter records are the
same, it is convenient to reconfigure them in the MOC-integration view. For detailed operations, see Editing a
Summary Data File for Batch Configuration (MOC-Integration View) .

Import the modified summary data file.


Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Import Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data
(CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Import
Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to import data for batch configuration.
Step 2 Specify the RAT of NEs to be imported, determine whether to import base station controller
data (base station data must be selected), and click Next.
If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be reconfigured
together.
Step 3 Start a wizard based on scenarios.
If...

Then...

You have selected GSM The CME starts the wizard for importing Abis interface data. For detailed operations, see
base station controllers Importing and Exporting Abis Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
and base stations in the
preceding step
You have selected
The CME starts the wizard for importing Iub interface data. For detailed operations, see
UMTS base station
Importing and Exporting Iub Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
controllers and base
stations in the preceding
step
You have selected only
base stations in the
preceding step

The CME starts the wizard for importing base station data for batch configuration. The
procedure is as follows:
1. Select the file you want to import and click Next.
NOTE:
The CME supports the file import even if the RAT contained in the file is different from the selected
RAT. For example, if GSM is selected but the RAT contained in the file is UMTS or LTE, the file can
still be imported.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

420

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If...

7 Preparing Data

Then...
2. Select the base stations for which you want to import the file and click Next.
NOTE:
If Best effort is selected, the CME skips the error information and continues the import. When
the import is complete, the CME rolls back only incorrect base station data.

If Best effort is not selected, the CME rolls back all the imported data if the import fails.

3. After the import is complete, click Finish.

If the CME displays a message stating that the operation is successful, configuration
data has been successfully imported.

If the CME displays a message stating that the import failed, base station configuration
data failed to be imported. If this occurs, you have to reconfigure the data based on
the error information.

NOTE:
In the error message list, you can:

Click an error message to view the details at the bottom of the wizard.

Double-click an error message to switch to the corresponding location in the imported file. Then,
reconfigure the data based on the error information.

7.6.3 Preparing Radio Data


This section describes how to adjust radio data in co-MPT and separate-MPT scenarios when
the original mode is LTE. The radio data to be adjusted includes the MOs related to the cell,
TRX, and sector.

7.6.3.1 Separate-MPT
When the original mode is LTE in separate-MPT scenarios, you need to use the summary data
file for batch configuration (LTE application) on the CME to configure radio data.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.
Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
----End
For details, see Importing and Exporting eNodeB Batch Configuration Data.
Importing and Exporting eNodeB Data for Batch Configuration

Export base station data to the summary data file.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose LTE Application > Export Data
> Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (CME client mode) or CME >
LTE Application > Export Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

421

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Data (U2000 client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to export the data you

want to reconfigure in batches.


Step 2 Select the batch reconfiguration scenario, base station version, and related base stations, and
click Next.
NOTE:
If users need to adjust only global radio parameters, cell parameters, and cell algorithm parameters, set
Adjust Data by to Cell. Then, the CME will automatically displays cell-related parameters, which
helps users filter and select cells.

Step 3 Select Custom MOC, set objects you want to export, and specify a save path for the exported
file.
NOTE:
To export data based on the objects contained in a prepared summary data file, perform the following
steps: For details about the export mechanism, see Introduction to the Export Mechanism for
Exporting Data Based On an Existing File.
a.

Select Bulk configuration template.

b.

In Bulk configuration data file, select the prepared file and export configuration data
from the CME based on the MOs in this file.

c.

In Export path, specify a save path for the file that contains the exported data.

Step 4 Click Next. The CME verifies the configuration data to be exported.
If the verification fails, the CME does not export data.
Step 5 After the export is complete, click Finish.

Open the local summary data file and reconfigure data in the summary data file based on planned data. For
detailed operations, see Editing a Summary Data File for Batch Configuration.
If you want to change the values of multiple parameters to the same value, for example, in scenarios where you
want to change device IP addresses, you can convert the summary data file into the MOC-integration view and
then edit the data. For detailed operations, see Editing a Summary Data File for Batch Configuration
(MOC-Integration View).

Import the modified summary data file.


Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose LTE Application > Import Data >
Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (CME client mode) or CME >
LTE Application > Import Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration
Data (U2000 client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to import the data that
has been reconfigured in batches.
Step 2 Select files to import and data types to adjust, and click Next.
Step 3 Select base stations whose data you want to import, and click Next.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

422

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

NOTE:
If Best effort is selected, the CME skips the error information and continues the import. When

the import is complete, the CME rolls back only incorrect base station data.

If Best effort is not selected, the CME rolls back all the imported data if the import fails.

Step 4 After the import is complete, click Finish.

If the CME displays a message stating that the operation is successful, configuration data
has been successfully imported.

If the CME displays a message stating that the import failed, base station configuration
data failed to be imported. If this occurs, you have to reconfigure the data based on the
error information.
NOTE:
In the error message list, you can:

Click an error message to view the details at the bottom of the wizard.

Double-click an error message to switch to the corresponding location in the imported file. Then,
reconfigure the data based on the error information.

7.6.3.2 Co-MPT
When the original mode is LTE in co-MPT scenarios, you need to use the summary data file
for batch configuration (SRAN application) on the CME to configure radio data.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.
Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
----End
For details, see Importing and Exporting Co-MPT BTS Batch Configuration Data.
Importing and Exporting Co-MPT Base Station Data for Batch Configuration

Export base station data to the summary data file.

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Export Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data
(CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Export
Data > Export Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to configure data in batches, as shown in Figure 1.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

423

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Figure 1 Exporting base station bulk configuration data

Step 2 Select a reconfiguration scenario, RAT of NEs, versions of base stations and base station
controllers, and list of base stations. Then, click Next.

If you select the GSM base station controller and base station data, the implementation
of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Abis interface data of a
single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing and Exporting Abis
Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration.

If you select the UMTS base station controller and base station data, the implementation
of the function is the same as that of importing and exporting Iub interface data of a
single-mode base station. For detailed operations, see Importing and Exporting Iub Data
for Batch Reconfiguration.

If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be
reconfigured together.

Step 3 Select Custom MOC, set objects you want to export, and specify a save path for the exported
file.
NOTE:
To export data based on the objects contained in a prepared summary data file, perform the following
steps: For details about the export mechanism, see Introduction to the Export Mechanism for
Exporting Data Based On an Existing File.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

424

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

a.

Select Bulk configuration template.

b.

In Bulk configuration data file, select the prepared file and export configuration data
from the CME based on the MOs in this file.

c.

In Export path, specify a save path for the file that contains the exported data.

Step 4 Click Next. The CME verifies the configuration data to be exported.
If the verification fails, the CME does not export data.
Step 5 After the export is complete, click Finish.

Open the local summary data file and reconfigure data in the summary data file based on planned data.If
parameters to be reconfigured for each base station are the same and numbers of parameter records are the
same, it is convenient to reconfigure them in the MOC-integration view. For detailed operations, see Editing a
Summary Data File for Batch Configuration (MOC-Integration View) .

Import the modified summary data file.


Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Import Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data
(CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application > Import
Data > Import Base Station Bulk Configuration Data (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to import data for batch configuration.
Step 2 Specify the RAT of NEs to be imported, determine whether to import base station controller
data (base station data must be selected), and click Next.
If two or more RATs are selected, base station data and controller data cannot be reconfigured
together.
Step 3 Start a wizard based on scenarios.
If...

Then...

You have selected GSM The CME starts the wizard for importing Abis interface data. For detailed operations, see
base station controllers Importing and Exporting Abis Interface Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
and base stations in the
preceding step
You have selected
The CME starts the wizard for importing Iub interface data. For detailed operations, see
UMTS base station
Importing and Exporting Iub Data for Batch Reconfiguration .
controllers and base
stations in the preceding
step
You have selected only
base stations in the
preceding step

The CME starts the wizard for importing base station data for batch configuration. The
procedure is as follows:
1. Select the file you want to import and click Next.
NOTE:
The CME supports the file import even if the RAT contained in the file is different from the selected
RAT. For example, if GSM is selected but the RAT contained in the file is UMTS or LTE, the file can
still be imported.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

425

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If...

7 Preparing Data

Then...
2. Select the base stations for which you want to import the file and click Next.
NOTE:
If Best effort is selected, the CME skips the error information and continues the import. When
the import is complete, the CME rolls back only incorrect base station data.

If Best effort is not selected, the CME rolls back all the imported data if the import fails.

3. After the import is complete, click Finish.

If the CME displays a message stating that the operation is successful, configuration
data has been successfully imported.

If the CME displays a message stating that the import failed, base station configuration
data failed to be imported. If this occurs, you have to reconfigure the data based on
the error information.

NOTE:
In the error message list, you can:

Click an error message to view the details at the bottom of the wizard.

Double-click an error message to switch to the corresponding location in the imported file. Then,
reconfigure the data based on the error information.

7.6.4 Adjusting Transmission, Equipment, Radio Data


(LTE Only)
This section describes how to configure data in both separate-MPT and co-MPT scenarios
when LTE works as the new mode. The CME templates for the two scenarios are different.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.
Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
----End
The following table lists the corresponding CME template and reference for each scenario.
Table 1.1 LTE working as the new mode
Scena
rio

Data
Type

CME Template

Reference

Separate
-MPT

Equipment,
transmissio
n, and
radio data

The CME template is used to deploy a


new site using the summary data file.

Adjusting SeparateMPT Data

Co-

Equipment,

The CME template is used to introduce

Adjusting Co-MPT

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

426

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Scena
rio

Data
Type

CME Template

Reference

MPT

transmissio
n, and
radio data

RATs using the summary data file (SRAN


application).

Data

7.6.4.1 Separate-MPT
To add LTE as a new mode using a summary template for new site deployment is similar to
add an eNodeB. For detailed operations, see section "Creating eNodeBs" in "Creating Base
Stations" in 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide.
1

Create a summary data file.

Customize a summary data file (non-security).


Customizing a Summary Data File (Non-Secure Networking)
Expand All
1.

Open the summary data file in the basic scenario by using the function of customizing a summary
data file.

a.

On the menu bar, choose Advanced > Customize Summary Data File (CME client
mode) or CME > Advanced > Customize Summary Data File (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to open the summary data file.

b.

Perform operations.

To adjust the sheets, configuration objects, and parameter names in a user-defined


summary data file, select Custom to select a user-defined summary data file.

To use a default summary data file, select Default, GBTS/NodeB/eNodeB Summary,


eNodeB, eNodeB version, and Scenario Basic Summary Template in sequence.
NOTE:
You are advised to select the default summary data file Scenario Basic Summary Template.
The causes are as follows:

Scenario Basic Summary Template is the minimum set of configuration parameters for
base station creation. After you select information required for creating base stations, such as the
link mode, telecom operator sharing mode, and security information on the customization wizard,
the CME automatically adds related parameters to the summary data file according to your selection.
You can use the customization wizard to combine base station creation scenarios, which reduces
redundant parameters generated in the summary data file.

Other default summary data files are classified by scenario and contain all parameters in the related
scenarios. Therefore, the following problems may occur:

Redundant parameters are generated.

A summary data file fails to be verified due to data collision when the
customization wizard is used.
You can learn the introduction to scenarios by checking the information
displayed on the GUI of the summary data file.

c.

After the configuration is complete, click OK. The main window for customizing a summary data
file is displayed, as shown in Figure 1.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

427

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Figure 1 Window for customizing a summary data file

Tab page, which displays a set of NE configuration parameters. This area can be customized.

NE configuration parameter navigation tree, which consists of NE configuration objects and


parameters. An NE configuration object consists of multiple NE configuration parameters. This area
cannot be modified.

Table, which lists the mappings between the parameter groups and parameters in a summary data file
and the NE configuration objects and parameters, respectively.
NE configuration objects and parameters are not editable. Parameter groups and parameters in a
summary data file can be customized.
: indicates a modified record.

: indicates an added record. Such tags will not be displayed next time after you save the summary
data file.

NOTE:
When the values of NE MOC and NE Attribute are empty in a record, the parameter is a new one in the
summary data file and there is no mapping between the parameter and NE configuration objects.
This parameter is referenced by other configuration parameters. If this parameter is not referenced, the parameter
value does not take effect.

If multiple NE configuration parameters are in the same summary parameter group and share the same name, they
are combined into a column in the generated summary data file.

Editable records are highlighted in white; Records that are not editable are highlighted in
can be deleted but cannot be modified are highlighted in

2.

; Records that

Start the wizard for customizing a summary data file, and customize basic and transport parameters
in a summary data file.
NOTE:
The parameter specifications defined in the basic base station creation wizard must be lower than those
provided by NEs. If the planned data exceeds the defined parameter specifications, you can manually
customize data after completing operations by following the wizard.

a.

Use the customization wizard to customize basic and transport data. Figure 2 shows an
operation example.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

428

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Figure 2 Operations in the wizard for creating eNodeBs

Tip1

The configuration sequence is displayed as "protocol layer + configuration object". Configure


the information from bottom to top based on protocol layers.
After the operations in the wizard are complete, a customization report is generated. The
report displays user-specified information, automatically added MOs and planned parameter
values (excluding default values), and information that needs to be set manually.

Tip2
b.

Configure data based on the planned data in each step on the wizard.
Optional:
Use the customization wizard to customize RAN sharing data. Figure 3 shows an operation
example.
Figure 3 Operations in the RAN sharing wizard

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

429

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

NOTE:
Parameters with * in the wizard are mandatory. Optional parameters are configured based on site
requirements.
After the operations in the wizard are complete, a customization report is generated. The report displays
user-specified information, automatically added MOs and planned parameter values (excluding default
values), and information that needs to be set manually.

3.

(Optional and required when the summary data file customized on the wizard does not contain all
parameters to be configured) Manually customize parameters to be configured in the summary data
file.

If you need
to...

Then...

Add a tab page

Figure 4 shows an operation example.

Add parameters on a Figure 5 shows an operation example.


tab page
Figure 4 Example of adding a tab page

Figure 5 Example of adding parameters on a tab page

Observe the following items during the customization:

The parameter marked in red is the primary key parameter under the configuration
object. When adding a parameter, you must add the primary key parameter under the
configuration object to which the parameter belongs.

Only one configuration object can be customized on the XXXX Pattern orXXXX List tab
page.

A configuration object must not be allocated to different parameter groups on the


Common Data tab page.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

430

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

One configuration object can be customized only on one tab page or on one tab page and
the Common Data tab page.

Parameter names in the same parameter group cannot be duplicate.

Parameter group names and parameter names cannot be empty.


NOTE:
In LampSite scenarios, the default summary data file does not contain the cell sector equipment group
object, and you need to delete the Cell Sector Equipment object from the LTE Cell tab page and
add the Cell Sector equipment Group tab page.
To customize a parameter that is negotiated and planned with a telecom operator, select the LLD
column of the parameter. You can select or clear multiple records by using the Shift key.

Click
to verify validity of the edited summary data file. Then, modify the file based on the
verification result.
If the verification fails, you can double-click the error message. Then, the CME automatically locates
the error. You have to rectify the error until the verification succeeds.
NOTE:
If an alarm is generated indicating that the branch parameter does not exist in the verification result, you
need to determine whether to customize the parameter to the summary data file based on the planned
data. The alarm does not affect the subsequent operation of saving data.

When the verification is successful, click

to save the summary data file (this button applies only to

a user-defined summary data file), or click


to save the file to a local PC. If you perform copy and
paste operations when saving the file, the file will fail to be saved.

Customize a summary data file (security).


Customizing a Summary Data File (Secure)
Expand All
1.

Open the summary data file in the basic scenario by using the function of customizing a summary
data file.

a.

On the menu bar, choose Advanced > Customize Summary Data File (CME client
mode) or CME > Advanced > Customize Summary Data File (U2000 client mode). A
dialog box is displayed for you to open the summary data file.

b.

Perform operations.

To adjust the sheets, configuration objects, and parameter names in a user-defined


summary data file, select Custom to select a user-defined summary data file.

To use a default summary data file, select Default, GBTS/NodeB/eNodeB Summary,


eNodeB, eNodeB version, and Scenario Basic Summary Template in sequence.
NOTE:
You are advised to select the default summary data file Scenario Basic Summary Template.
The causes are as follows:

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

431

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Scenario Basic Summary Template is the minimum set of configuration parameters for
base station creation. After you select information required for creating base stations, such as the
link mode, telecom operator sharing mode, and security information on the customization wizard,
the CME automatically adds related parameters to the summary data file according to your selection.
You can use the customization wizard to combine base station creation scenarios, which reduces
redundant parameters generated in the summary data file.

Other default summary data files are classified by scenario and contain all parameters in the related
scenarios. Therefore, the following problems may occur:

Redundant parameters are generated.

A summary data file fails to be verified due to data collision when the
customization wizard is used.
You can learn the introduction to scenarios by checking the information
displayed on the GUI of the summary data file.

c.

After the configuration is complete, click OK. The main window for customizing a summary data
file is displayed, as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Window for customizing a summary data file

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

432

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Tab page, which displays a set of NE configuration parameters. This area can be customized.

NE configuration parameter navigation tree, which consists of NE configuration objects and


parameters. An NE configuration object consists of multiple NE configuration parameters. This area
cannot be modified.

Table, which lists the mappings between the parameter groups and parameters in a summary data file
and the NE configuration objects and parameters, respectively.
NE configuration objects and parameters are not editable. Parameter groups and parameters in a
summary data file can be customized.

: indicates a modified record.


: indicates an added record. Such tags will not be displayed next time after you save the
summary data file.

NOTE:
When the values of NE MOC and NE Attribute are empty in a record, the parameter is a new one in the
summary data file and there is no mapping between the parameter and NE configuration objects.
This parameter is referenced by other configuration parameters. If this parameter is not referenced, the parameter
value does not take effect.

If multiple NE configuration parameters are in the same summary parameter group and share the same name, they
are combined into a column in the generated summary data file.

Editable records are highlighted in white; Records that are not editable are highlighted in
can be deleted but cannot be modified are highlighted in

2.

; Records that

Start the wizard for customizing a summary data file, and customize basic, transport, and security
data in the file.
NOTE:
The parameter specifications defined in the basic base station creation wizard must be lower than those
provided by NEs. If the planned data exceeds the defined parameter specifications, you can manually
customize data after completing operations by following the wizard.

a.

Use the customization wizard to customize basic and transport data. Figure 2 shows an
operation example.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

433

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Figure 2 Operations in the wizard for creating eNodeBs

Tip1

The configuration sequence is displayed as "protocol layer + configuration object". Configure


the information from bottom to top based on protocol layers.
After the operations in the wizard are complete, a customization report is generated. The
report displays user-specified information, automatically added MOs and planned parameter
values (excluding default values), and information that needs to be set manually.

Tip2
b.

Configure data based on the planned data in each step on the wizard.
Use the security wizard to customize security-related data. Figure 3 shows an operation example.
Figure 3 Operations on the wizard

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

434

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

NOTE:
When configuring data in the wizard, observe the following:

Parameters with * in the wizard are mandatory.


Optional parameters are configured based on site requirements. For example, when configuring the
CRL file, you need to set the user name and password for the CRL server based on site requirements.

Tip 1

Steps in a wizard to be emphasized on are marked with Tip in the preceding figure. You can view
related descriptions based on site requirements.

When multi-level CA certificates in the certificate chain provided by you are stored separately,
configure multiple CA records.

When you provide a certificate chain file, configure a certificate chain record.

Tip 2

Configure security gateway information records based on collected IKE and IPsec algorithms and
combination status of these algorithms provided by you. For example, two IKE algorithms, two IPsec
algorithms, and only three IKE and IPsec algorithm combination methods are provided. You need to
configure only three security gateway information records.

Tip 3

Sequence Number of IPsec tunnel of IPsec tunnels configured for the same port cannot be

duplicate.

Tip 4

c.

Values of Sequence number of SeGW corresponding to this tunnel corresponding to


Sequence number of SeGW configured in the preceding step.

After the operations in the wizard are complete, a customization report is generated. The report
displays user-specified information, automatically added MOs and planned parameter values
(excluding default values), and information that needs to be set manually.
Optional:
Use the customization wizard to customize RAN sharing data. Figure 4 shows an operation
example.
Figure 4 Operations in the RAN sharing wizard

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

435

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

NOTE:
Parameters with * in the wizard are mandatory. Optional parameters are configured based on site
requirements.
After the operations in the wizard are complete, a customization report is generated. The report displays
user-specified information, automatically added MOs and planned parameter values (excluding default
values), and information that needs to be set manually.

3.

(Optional and required when the summary data file customized on the wizard does not contain all
parameters to be configured) Manually customize parameters to be configured in the summary data
file.

If you need
to...

Then...

Add a tab page

Figure 5 shows an operation example.

Add parameters on a Figure 6 shows an operation example.


tab page
Figure 5 Example of adding a tab page

Figure 6 Example of adding parameters on a tab page

Observe the following items during the customization:

The parameter marked in red is the primary key parameter under the configuration
object. When adding a parameter, you must add the primary key parameter under the
configuration object to which the parameter belongs.

Only one configuration object can be customized on the XXXX Pattern orXXXX List tab
page.

A configuration object must not be allocated to different parameter groups on the


Common Data tab page.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

436

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

One configuration object can be customized only on one tab page or on one tab page and
the Common Data tab page.

Parameter names in the same parameter group cannot be duplicate.

Parameter group names and parameter names cannot be empty.


NOTE:
In LampSite scenarios, the default summary data file does not contain the cell sector equipment group
object, and you need to delete the Cell Sector Equipment object from the LTE Cell tab page and
add the Cell Sector equipment Group tab page.
To customize a parameter that is negotiated and planned with a telecom operator, select the LLD
column of the parameter. You can select or clear multiple records by using the Shift key.

Click
to verify validity of the edited summary data file. Then, modify the file based on the
verification result.
If the verification fails, you can double-click the error message. Then, the CME automatically locates
the error. You have to rectify the error until the verification succeeds.
NOTE:
If an alarm is generated indicating that the branch parameter does not exist in the verification result, you
need to determine whether to customize the parameter to the summary data file based on the planned
data. The alarm does not affect the subsequent operation of saving data.

When the verification is successful, click

to save the summary data file (this button applies only to

a user-defined summary data file), or click


to save the file to a local PC. If you perform copy and
paste operations when saving the file, the file will fail to be saved.

Specify a summary data file.


Editing a Summary Data File
Expand All

Step 1 Open a user-defined summary data file.


Step 2 On the menu bar of the Excel file, click Add-Ins.
If the macro function is not displayed under Add-Ins, verify the following settings:

In Microsoft Office Excel 2003, the macro function must be enabled and the macro
security level must be set to Medium.

In Microsoft Office Excel 2007 and Excel 2010, the macro function must be enabled.

For detailed operations, see Setting the Macro Security Level in an Excel File.
Step 3 (Optional) Edit the data that has been negotiated with telecom operators in the LLD data file.
Only eNodeBs support the LLD data file.
You need to convert a summary data file into an LLD data file first. After configuring data in
the LLD data file, convert the LLD data file into a summary data file. For the mapping
between the LLD data file and the summary data file, see Introduction to the LLD Data File
and Summary Data File.
NOTE:
This function is available only after you select the LLD column of related parameters when customizing
a summary data file.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

437

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide
a.

7 Preparing Data

In the summary data file, click


LLD data file.

to convert it into an

The sheet named Common Data maps COMMON. The other sheet names remain
unchanged.
dd.

Edit the prepared data in the LLD data file.

NOTE:
By default, the CME provides the parameter values of Qos based on the network design. You can
manually delete records from or add records to Qos as required. After the LLD data file has been
converted into the summary data file, parameters are automatically edited in the corresponding locations
in the summary data file according to the conversion principles shown in Figure 1. The existing data in
the summary data file is overwritten.

Figure 1 Conversion principles for the parameters under the Qos object

If Service Type has two records IKE and Ping under the Qos object in the LLD data file,
the mapping (1) does not map the two records.
ee.

Click
data file.

to apply the data in the LLD data file to the summary

Step 4 Edit basic data.


a.

Edit global data, which is the same for all base stations, on the Common
Data sheet. Such parameters include the telecom operator information and
OSS IP address.

ff.

Edit basic information, which is different for all base stations, on the Base Station
Transport Data sheet or the MO list sheet (XXXX List). For example:

Edit the basic base station information including the base station name and type on the
Base Station Transport Data sheet.

Edit base station functions and locations on the corresponding MO list sheet ( XXXX
List).

Step 5 Edit device data.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

438

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide
a.

7 Preparing Data

The configuration data of devices uses the values in the base station
template. Therefore, you need to set the name of the prepared base station
template on the Base Station Transport Data sheet.

NOTE:
Only the default template name is displayed in the drop-down list for selecting a template in the
summary data file. Therefore, before selecting a user-defined template, you have to click
to add the user-defined template name to the drop-down
list.
Information about the user-defined template must be consistent with that about the existing template on
the CME.
gg.

Edit clock data and time data on the Common Data sheet.

Step 6 Edit transport data.


a.

Edit the data planned for each base station, such as the IP address, subnet, and port
number, on the Base Station Transport Data sheet.

b.

Edit the parameters for the MOs corresponding to each interface on the corresponding MO sheets
(XXXX List or XXXX Pattern). For example, device IP addresses and SCTP links are MOs.

If the value of a parameter on the XXXX Pattern sheet varies among base stations, you
can click
and select the parameter that needs to be referenced.
Microsoft Excel automatically generates the reference path for the parameter in the
summary data file. Figure 2 provides an example for using the reference function.
Advantage of the reference function: The value of one parameter can be referenced on
multiple XXXX Pattern sheets. Therefore, after a reference relationship is set, you only
need to change the referenced parameter value and do not need to modify the
parameters on the XXXX Pattern sheets even if the referenced parameter value
changes.
Restriction of the reference function:

The parameters to be referenced must be on the Common Data or Base Station


Transport Data sheet.

If a branch parameter has been set to be referenced by another parameters, the summary
data file does not enable or disable the parameters controlled by the branch parameter.
The CME will still check accuracy of all the parameters during the import.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

439

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Figure 2 Example for using the reference function

Under the DevIPPattern object in the preceding figure, to retain the parameter value of
Mask on port 0 in slot 7 of subrack 0 in cabinet 0 the same as the parameter value of
PeerMask under the OMCH object on the Base Station Transport Data sheet, you have
to enter the path of the referenced parameter eNodeB Transport
Data\OMCH\PeerMask as the parameter value of Mask on port 0 in slot 7 of subrack 0
in cabinet 0. The CME assigns a parameter value based on the reference path.

During IP route configuration, if the value obtained after a logic AND operation is
performed on the IP address and subnet mask is not equal to the IP address, you need to
use the macro function
address that meets the rule.

to convert the IP address to an IP

The IP address verification rule is the same as the NE configuration rule. That is, after a
logical AND operation is performed on the IP address and subnet mask, the obtained
value is equal to the IP address.
For detailed operations related to macro functions, see Figure 3.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

440

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Figure 3 Settings

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

441

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Specify the sheet, parameter group, and parameter name that correspond to the IP addresses
and subnet masks to be calculated.

Specify locations in the summary data file for the calculated IP addresses and subnet masks.

To use the calculated IP addresses and subnet masks to overwrite existing data in the
summary data file, perform the following operations:

1. Select Select Filling Column.


2. Specify the names of the parameter group and parameter mapped to the data to be
overwritten.

To add a row next to the parameter specified in step 1 and show the calculated IP
addresses and subnet masks in the added row, perform the following operations:

1. Select Add Filling Column.


2. Enter the names of the parameter group and parameter to be displayed in the row.
3

Click Add and add a conversion rule. You can repeat steps 1 and 2 to add multiple
conversion rules.

This function provides the following calculation methods:

Non-32-bit subnet mask: After you enter IP addresses and subnet masks, a logic AND
operation is performed on them. The obtained network codes replace the IP addresses,
and the subnet masks are replaced with 255.255.255.255.

32-bit subnet mask: The IP addresses remain the same. The entered subnet masks are
replaced with 255.255.255.255.

Click OK. Excel starts the calculation based on the preset information.

Step 7 Add radio data.


Click the cell sheet, set the value of each parameter and the template name based on the
planned data.
NOTE:
Only the default template name is displayed in the drop-down list for selecting a template in the
summary data file. Therefore, before selecting a user-defined template, you have to click
to add the user-defined template name to the drop-down
list.
Information about the user-defined template must be consistent with that about the existing template on
the CME.

Step 8 Configure automatic deployment data about the base stations to be created.
Click the Auto Deployment sheet and set the value of each parameter based on the planned
data.
Step 9 Close the modified summary data file.

Import a summary data file.


Importing a Summary Data File
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

442

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose LTE Application > Import Data >
Import Base Station Summary Data (CME client mode) or CME > LTE
Application > Import Data > Import Base Station Summary Data (U2000 client
mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to create base stations using a summary data
file.
Step 2 Click

and select the file you want to import.

If redundant device objects exist after the data for creating base stations in the summary data
file and data in the template are combined, after Delete redundant RF equipment data is
selected, the CME automatically deletes the device objects and subobjects that have not been
referenced by the cell.
Step 3 Click Next and select base stations you want to create.
Step 4 Click Next. The CME starts the import.
If...

Then...

The import is
successful

Click Finish.

The import fails

1. You can view the error report. You can also double-click an error message in the error list
area. The CME opens the imported file and locates the error data cell in the file.
2. Modify error data based on the error message.
3. After the modification, click Retry to import the file.

Prepare and specify a radio plan data file.


Importing a Summary Data File

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose LTE Application > Import Data >
Import Base Station Summary Data (CME client mode) or CME > LTE
Application > Import Data > Import Base Station Summary Data (U2000 client
mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to create base stations using a summary data
file.
Step 2 Click

and select the file you want to import.

If redundant device objects exist after the data for creating base stations in the summary data
file and data in the template are combined, after Delete redundant RF equipment data is
selected, the CME automatically deletes the device objects and subobjects that have not been
referenced by the cell.
Step 3 Click Next and select base stations you want to create.
Step 4 Click Next. The CME starts the import.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

443

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

If...

Then...

The import is
successful

Click Finish.

The import fails

1. You can view the error report. You can also double-click an error message in the error list
area. The CME opens the imported file and locates the error data cell in the file.
2. Modify error data based on the error message.
3. After the modification, click Retry to import the file.

Import the radio plan data file.


Importing a Radio Data Planning File

Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose CME > LTE Application >
Import Data > Import Radio Network Planning Data (U2000 client mode) or
LTE Application > Import Data > Import Radio Network Planning Data (CME
client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to import planned radio data.
Step 2 Click Add, select the prepared radio data planning file, and click Next. A dialog box is
displayed for you to select eNodeBs.

If you edit the eNodeBs to be imported on the SiteList sheet in the file, the dialog box
displays the eNodeBs that are available in both the file and the current planned data area.
By default, the eNodeBs on the SiteList sheet are selected.

If you do not edit the SiteList sheet in the file, the dialog box displays the eNodeBs that
are available in both the file and the current planned data area. By default, all eNodeBs
are selected.

Step 3 Select the eNodeBs you want to import and click Next.
Step 4 Select cells and neighbor relationships you want to import into the CME, and select an import
mode. Then, click Next.
After you select an import mode, the CME uses the primary key (such as cell ID) to determine
whether the objects exist on the CME and in the file, and then determines how to process the
data. Table 1 describes the import modes and import results.
Table 1 Description of import modes
Import Mode

Whether the
Object Data
Exists on the
CME

Whether the
Object Data
Exists in the
File

Data Result on the CME After File Import

Append

Yes

Yes

The CME overwrites the existing data with the data in the
file.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

444

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Table 1 Description of import modes


Import Mode

Whether the
Object Data
Exists on the
CME

Whether the
Object Data
Exists in the
File

Data Result on the CME After File Import

No

Yes

For the external cell data, the CME adds the data in the
file.

The CME processes neighbor relationships in the


following methods:

If the external cells related to the neighbor


relationships to be imported have been configured
on the CME, the CME adds the neighboring cell
data in the file.

If the external cells related to the neighbor


relationships to be imported have not been
configured on the CME and the source cell
cannot be found, the CME does not process the
data.

If the local cell related to the neighbor


relationships to be imported does not exist on the
CME, the CME does not process the data.

NOTE:

BIDIRECTION in the file takes effect only in the


Append mode.
If BIDIRECTION is set to Yes and inverse neighboring
cells do not exist, the CME processes data in the following
ways:

Parameter values for the inverse neighboring cells come


from the source cell.

If no external cell exists, the CME also automatically


configures external cells and uses the default NE values
for the parameters of the external cells.

If any external cells exist and the parameter


configurations of the external cells are different from
those of the source cell, the CME does not reconfigure
external cell parameters and obtains the parameter
values of neighboring cells from the source cell.

Yes

No

No data in the CME changes.

Yes

Yes

NOTE:
Neighbor
relationships
are No
updated on a cell
basis.

The CME overwrites the existing data with the data in the
file.

Yes

The CME adds the data in the file.

No

The CME deletes the existing data.

Update

External cells are Yes


updated on a base

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

445

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Table 1 Description of import modes


Import Mode

station

Whether the
Object Data
Exists on the
CME

Whether the
Object Data
Exists in the
File

Data Result on the CME After File Import

Yes

Yes

The CME deletes the existing data.

No

Yes

No data in the CME changes.

Yes

No

No data in the CME changes.

controller

Delete

Step 5 The CME starts to import the data. During the import, the CME automatically corrects
external LTE cell data based on the adjusted source cell data to ensure data consistency. After
the data is imported, click Finish.
Step 6
Table 2 Operation description
If...

Then...

The import succeeds

The CME displays a message stating that the import is successful.

The import fails

The dialog box displays errors in the data planning file. You can view the error report, or
double-click an error record in the lower part of the dialog box to open the file. The CME
locates the error data row in the file. Then, you can reconfigure data. If the location
information in the error record is incomplete, the CME cannot automatically locate the
row in the file.

----End

7.6.4.2 Co-MPT
When the new mode is LTE, you need to use the summary data file for introducing RATs
(SRAN application) on the CME to configure data.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
Step 1 Customize and obtain the summary data file based on the mode transition planning results.
Step 2 Based on the customized template, export the data to be adjusted and specify data in the
template file as planned.
Step 3 Import the template file.
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

446

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

----End
For details, see Expanding Mode of a Co-MPT BTS in Batches.
Introducing RATs to Co-MPT Base Stations in Batches

Before exporting data based on a customized summary data file, use the function of customizing a summary
data file to customize a summary data file for RAT introduction. For details about how to customize a
summary data file, see Manually Customizing a Summary Data File.
In RAT introduction scenarios, you need to customize application maintenance mode parameters, including AT
and APPMNTMODE, of each RAT to a summary data file. When setting parameter values, you are advised to
set APPMNTMODE of the RAT to be introduced to TESTING.

Export co-MPT base station data to the summary data file for introducing RATs.
Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Export Data > Export Base Station Multimode Expansion
Data (CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application >
Export Data > Export Base Station Multimode Expansion Data (U2000
client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to export co-MPT base station data.
Step 2 Select a scenario, RAT to be introduced to the co-MPT base station (for example, select LTE
for a co-MPT (GU) base station to be expanded to a co-MPT (GUL) base station), controller
version, base station version, base station to which RATs are to be introduced, and sample
base station, as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1 Export expansion data

NOTE:
If you need to select base stations in batches by using a file, click Export to obtain an Excel file, edit
the file, and click Load to import it.

Step 3 Click Next and perform operations based on application scenarios.


Option

Operation

Summary data file: Select this option when a

1. Select Summary data file.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

447

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Option

Operation

summary data file has been prepared. Then, the


CME exports base station data based on the
configuration objects in the prepared summary
data file.

2. Specify save paths for both the prepared summary data


file and the file where base station data is to be
exported.

Custom MOC: Select this option when no


summary data file is prepared. Then, the CME
exports base station data based on the
configuration objects selected in the wizard.

1. Select Custom MOC.


2. Select configuration objects of the base stations to be
exported and the save path for the file where the base
station data is to be exported.

Step 4 Click Next. The CME starts to export the data.


Step 5 After the export is complete, click Finish.
NOTE:
After the export is complete, you can click the link in the dialog box to open the exported file.

Configure data in the exported file.

Summary data file, see Editing a Summary Data File (Customization Tool-based).

Custom MOC, see Editing a Summary Data File (MOC Export-based) .

Import the summary data file in which data about RATs to be introduced has been edited into the CME.
Step 1 On the menu bar of the planned data area, choose SRAN Application > MBTS
Application > Import Data > Import Base Station Multimode Expansion
Data (CME client mode) or CME > SRAN Application > MBTS Application >
Import Data > Import Base Station Multimode Expansion Data (U2000
client mode). A dialog box is displayed for you to import the summary data file for
introducing RATs.
Step 2 Click

and select the summary data file to be imported.

Step 3 Click Next and select co-MPT base stations for which you want to expand RATs.
If...

Then...

The imported
summary data file
contains only data
about base stations

1. Click Next and select base stations you want to create.

The imported
summary data file
contains data about
both base station
controllers and base
Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

2. (Optional) Select Best Effort.


NOTE:

If Best effort is selected, the CME skips the error information and continues the import.
When the import is complete, the CME rolls back only incorrect base station data.

If Best effort is not selected, the CME rolls back all the imported data if the import fails.

3. Click Next and select base stations you want to create.


4. (Optional) Select Best Effort.
NOTE:

If Best effort is selected, the CME skips the error information and continues the import.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

448

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

If...

7 Preparing Data

Then...
When the import is complete, the CME rolls back only incorrect base station data.

stations

If Best effort is not selected, the CME rolls back all the imported data if the import fails.

5. Optional: To generate configuration scripts in a wizard, select Export scripts


and perform the following operations:
a.

Select a mode for generating scripts.

NOTE:

To generate scripts of logical base stations in the same file, select Batch.

To generate scripts of logical base stations in different files by base station, select One by
one.

b.

Specify a save path for scripts.

6. (Optional) Set an encryption mode for exported scripts.

No: The exported scripts do not have encryption passwords and no encryption
passwords are required when you loading projects.

Yes: The exported scripts have encryption passwords. When loading projects, you
have to enter encryption passwords by performing the following operations:

NOTE:
If an encrypted password has been set for the exproted script, you cannot check the script on the
local PC. Instead, you have to check it using the script executor.

1.

Select Yes.

2.

Click Set Password. In the displayed dialog box, enter the encryption
password as required.
The password must contain 6 to 32 characters.

3.

Click OK.
The exported encrypted script files are in .ecf format.

Step 4 (Optional and required when the new RATs include GSM) Click Next to set import options.
Set the start ID, frequency hopping attributes, and channel rules based on planned data.
Step 5 Click Next. The CME starts the import.
If...

Then...

The import succeeds

Click Finish to exit the wizard.

The import fails

1. View the failure report, or double-click the error message in the error list to
open the summary data file and locate the cell where the error data exists.
2. Modify error data based on the error message.
3. After data is corrected, click Retry to import the summary data file again.

Follow-up Procedure
After introducing RATs to the base station, use the function of exporting auto-deployment
files to export the deployment list and data configuration file in the RAT introduction

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

449

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

scenario. For detailed operations, see Exporting Files Related to Base Station
Creation/RAT Introduction to Co-MPT Base Stations.
NOTE:
You can use either of the following methods to adjust other data after introducing RATs to a base station:

Export the deployment list and data configuration file for RAT introduction, and deliver them to the
live network for them to take effect. Then synchronize the data to the planned data area, adjust other
data, and then export an incremental script.

Do not export the deployment list and data configuration file for RAT introduction. Instead, continue
adjusting other data, and then use the function of exporting the site deployment list and data
configuration files to combine and export data in the RAT introduction and adjustment scenarios.

7.6.5 Adjusting Transmission, Equipment, Radio Data


(FDD+TDD)
1

Obtain and customize the LTE summary data file.

In the CME tool, choose CME > Advanced > Customize Summary Date File.

Select NodeB/eNodeB/USU Bulk Configuration for Scenario and choose


corresponding version.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

450

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Click

1.

To reconstruct an FDD eNodeB into an FDD+TDD eNodeB, select Adjusting eNodeB


Configurations > Reconstructing a FDD eNodeB into an FDD+TDD eNodeB from
Scenario list.

2.

To reconstruct a TDD eNodeB into an FDD+TDD eNodeB, select Adjusting eNodeB


Configurations > Reconstructing a TDD eNodeB into an FDD+TDD eNodeB from
Scenario list.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

in the upper left corner and select corresponding scenario.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

451

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

For details about how to customize a summary data file, see Customizing eNodeB Batch
Configuration Summary Data File.
Customizing a Summary Data File for Batch eNodeB Configuration

Step 1 On the menu bar, choose Advanced > Customize Summary Data File (CME client mode)
or CME > Advanced > Customize Summary Data File (U2000 client mode). A dialog box
is displayed for you to open the summary data file.
Step 2 Perform operations as required.

To adjust the sheets, configuration objects, and parameter names in a user-defined


summary data file, select Custom to select a user-defined summary data file.

To use a default summary data file, select related information in sequence. To select
information for a single-mode base station or co-MPT base station (LO), perform the
following operations:

For a single-mode base station, select Default, NodeB/eNodeB Bulk


Configuration, eNodeB, and base station version.

For the co-MPT base station (LO), select Default, Co-MPT BTS Bulk
Configuration, LTE, and base station version.

Step 3 After the configuration is complete, click OK. The main window for customizing a summary
data file is displayed, as shown in Figure 1.

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.

452

3900 Series Multimode Base Station


Mode Transition Guide

7 Preparing Data

Figure 1 Window for customizing a summary data file

NOTE:
Parameters marked with * in area 3 are mandatory, and parameters in gray cannot be deleted or
modified.

Step 4 In the upper left part of the customization window, click


. The application scenario dialog
box is displayed. Select a scenario-based template as required.
Step 5 Optional: If the scenario-based template does not contain all parameters to be configured,
you need to manually customize the parameters in the summary data file.
If you need
to...

Then...

Add a tab page

Figure 2 shows an operation example.

Add parameters on a Figure 3 shows an operation example.


tab page
Figure 2 Example of adding a tab page

Issue 01 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei